JP2024045667A - gaming machine - Google Patents

Abstract

[Problem] To provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.
[Solution] The ninth passage DRt9 is connected to the middle of the sixth passage DRt6 through an opening D6148. The outlet DOPout, which allows the balls that have reached the end of the sixth passage DRt6 to flow out into the play area, is located vertically above the first winning hole. On the other hand, the outlet DOP6out, which allows the balls that have flowed into the ninth passage DRt9 to flow out into the play area, is located at a different position to one side in the horizontal direction from the first winning hole. Therefore, the balls that have reached the end of the sixth passage DRt6 are likely to win the first winning hole, and the balls that have flowed into the ninth passage DRt9 are unlikely to win the first winning hole. Therefore, the player can expect the balls to reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6 without flowing down to the ninth passage DRt9 on the way, which can improve the interest of the game.
[Selection] Figure 130

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

A gaming machine is known that includes a passage into which a ball can enter, and a displacement member that is displaceable and changes the ease with which a ball enters the passage (Patent Document 1).

JP 2017-124169 A

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines had a problem in that the gameplay was not very entertaining.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

To achieve this objective, the gaming machine described in claim 1 comprises a passageway through which a ball can enter, and a displaceable displacement member that changes the ease with which the ball can enter the passageway, and a rolling member that is formed so that a ball that has entered the passageway can roll, and the displacement member is displaced to a side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passageway or a side that makes it harder for the ball to enter the passageway by utilizing the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member, and the rolling member is formed so that the ball can fall midway along its rolling path.

The gaming machine described in claim 2 is the gaming machine described in claim 1, in which the displacement member is displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage by utilizing the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, in which when a predetermined number or more of balls roll on the rolling member, the rolling balls fall from the rolling member. Equipped with a means of dropping to make it easier to drop.

The gaming machine described in claim 1 can increase the interest of the game.

The gaming machine described in claim 2 can increase the interest of the game in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in claim 1.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a variable prize winning device and a distribution device. 13A and 13B are front oblique views of the variable winning device. FIG. It is a rear perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a base board, a variable winning device, a collection gutter, and a distribution device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a base board, a variable winning device, a collection gutter, and a distribution device. An exploded front oblique view of the variable winning device. An exploded rear oblique view of the variable winning device. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting device. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the sorting device. It is a front view of a receiving member and a sorting device. A cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device along line XVI-XVI in Figure 15. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. 15. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the distribution device taken along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the distribution device along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15. A front view of the variable prize-winning device and the allocation device. An oblique view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in Figure 16. An oblique view of the variable winning device and the distribution device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in Figure 16. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol. , and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter and the winning in the normal symbol. This is a diagram showing the changes over time in the operation pattern of the opening and closing plate of the variable winning device and the operation pattern of the sliding displacement member of the distribution device in the first round for each jackpot type. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. 11 is a front view of the operation unit, showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front view of the operating unit showing an example of the operation of the operating unit. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit. A front view of the first operating unit in a performance standby state. It is a back view of the 1st operation unit in a performance standby state. 41 is a side view of the first operating unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in FIG. 40 . A front view of the first operating unit in an intermediate performance state. It is a back view of the 1st operation unit in an intermediate performance state. It is a front view of the 1st operation unit in an extended state. FIG. 6 is a rear view of the first operating unit in an extended state. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a displacement amount and a displacement angle of a supported member due to rotational displacement of a rotational member. (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount on the driven side of the supported member when the rotating member rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing a change in angle due to rotation of a rotating member. FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case and the second operating unit. FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case and the second operating unit. (a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the LIIa-LIIa line in FIG. 28, and (b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along the LIIb-LIIb line in FIG. 28. be. 33A is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 33B is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 30A is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 30, and FIG. 30B is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit and the center frame taken along line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the up/down reversal performance device. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the up/down reversal performance device. 4A and 4B are front views of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inversion member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotation member. 57(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inverted member, the intermediate arm member, the linear plate member and the axial rotation member taken along line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in Figure 57(a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the up-down inverted member, the intermediate arm member, the linear plate member and the axial rotation member taken along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in Figure 57(b). (a) to (c) are front views of the production device. FIG. 7 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. FIG. 13 is an exploded front perspective view of a portion of the configuration of a third operating unit. FIG. 13 is an exploded rear perspective view of a portion of the configuration of the third operating unit. 13A and 13B are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 13A and 13B are rear views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 13A and 13B are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are front views of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. 2 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member, the drive mode of the drive motor, and the output of the detection sensor in chronological order. A cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line LXIX-LXIX in Figure 28. 11A to 11D are schematic front views of the operational units for explaining examples of combined operations of the operational units in chronological order. (a) to (d) are front schematic diagrams of operation units schematically illustrating examples of combined operations of each operation unit in chronological order. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. FIG. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame. FIG. FIG. FIG. (a) is a side view of the lower frame as seen in the direction of arrow LXXXa in FIG. 78, and (b) is a side view of the lower frame as seen in the direction of arrow LXXXb in FIG. 78. 78 is a sectional view of the lower frame taken along the line LXXXI-LXXXI in FIG. 77. FIG. 78 is a sectional view of the lower frame taken along the line LXXXI-LXXXI in FIG. 77. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line LXXXIII-LXXXIII in Figure 78. (a) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame at the LXXXIVa section in FIG. 81, and (b) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame along the line LXXXIVb-LXXXIVb in FIG. 77. A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member, corresponding to the cross section taken along line LXXXI-LXXXI in Figure 77. A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member, corresponding to the cross section taken along line LXXXI-LXXXI in Figure 77. 78 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball distribution operation by the distribution member, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line LXXXI-LXXXI in FIG. 77. FIG. FIG. 13 is a front perspective view of a lower frame according to a third embodiment. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame. FIG. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame. FIG. FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the lower frame. (a) is a side view of the lower frame as seen in the direction of arrow XCVa in FIG. 93, and (b) is a side view of the lower frame as seen in the direction of arrow XCVb in FIG. 93. 93 is a sectional view of the lower frame taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 92. FIG. A cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line XCVI-XCVI in Figure 92. A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line XCVIII-XCVIII in Figure 94. 99 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line XCIX-XCIX in FIG. 94. 93 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball distribution operation by the distribution member, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 92. FIG. A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member, corresponding to the cross section taken along line XCVI-XCVI in Figure 92. A partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member, corresponding to the cross section taken along line XCVI-XCVI in Figure 92. 102(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame taken along the line CIII-CIII. FIG. FIG. 7 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the lower frame. FIG. 7 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame in the fourth embodiment. FIG. (a) is a top view of the dish member in the fifth embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the dish member taken along the line CVIIIb-CVIIIb in FIG. 108(a), and (c) is a top view of the dish member in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a sectional view of the dish member taken along the CVIIIc-CVIIIc line in a). (a) is a sectional view of the lower frame in the sixth embodiment, and corresponds to the cross section taken along the XCIX-XCIX line in FIG. 94, and (b) is a sectional view of the lower frame in the seventh embodiment. , corresponds to the cross section taken along the line XCIX-XCIX in FIG. A front view of the game board in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the lower frame. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame. FIG. FIG. 3 is a top view of the lower frame. FIG. 3 is a front view of the lower frame. FIG. 116A is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIIIa in FIG. 116, and FIG. 116B is a side view of the lower frame as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIIIb in FIG. 4A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame, and FIG. 4B is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame. 4A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame, and FIG. 4B is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame. (a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame. (a) is a partial enlarged sectional view of the lower frame taken along the CXXIIa-CXXIIa line in FIG. 115, (b) is a partial enlarged sectional view of the lower frame taken along the CXXIIb-CXXIIb line in FIG. ) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame taken along line CXXIIc-CXXIIc in FIG. 119. (a) and (b) are sectional views of the lower frame in the ninth embodiment. 13A and 13B are enlarged cross-sectional views of a portion of a lower frame according to a tenth embodiment. 23A and 23B are enlarged partial rear views of a lower frame in an eleventh embodiment. FIG. 23 is a partial enlarged rear view of the lower frame in the twelfth embodiment. FIG. 23 is an exploded front oblique view of the lower frame in the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame. FIG. 13A and 13B are enlarged cross-sectional views of a portion of the lower frame. 23A to 23C are partial enlarged rear views of a lower frame in a fourteenth embodiment. (a) and (b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the lower frame in the fifteenth embodiment. 132(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line CXXXIIIa-CXXXIIIa in FIG. 132(a), and (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb in FIG. 132(b). 120 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame, corresponding to the cross section taken along line CXXIIc-CXXIIc in FIG. 119.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 71, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the front side of the page is referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is referred to as the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1. In addition, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side will be explained respectively. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (for example, see FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is played by a ball (game ball) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper front side, and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front side, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is fitted with decorative resin parts and electrical parts, and has a window 14c formed in a roughly elliptical shape at its approximate center. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is disposed on the rear side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side illumination section 32 by attaching transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and a small window 35 is formed in the pasting space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (Fig. 2)) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin and plated with chrome is attached to the area around the illumination parts 29 to 33 in order to create a more dazzling appearance.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface on its left side for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13.

The operating handle 51 contains a touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation of the ball launching unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of balls while the switch is being pressed, and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the operating handle 51 by changes in electrical resistance. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the ball is launched with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, thereby hitting the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. When the operating handle 51 is not being operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the launch stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided on the lower front part of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against this bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 opens, and the balls fall naturally from the bottom opening and are discharged. This ball removal lever 52 is usually operated with a box (commonly called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls discharged from the lower tray 50. As mentioned above, the operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, and a number of nails for guiding balls (shown below the center frame 86, and in the upper half of the game area). (not shown) and a windmill (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning hole 63, first winning hole 64, second winning hole 140, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80 etc., and its peripheral portion is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and allows the player to see various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 140, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are accessed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws, etc. Fixed by

The base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, it is possible to shield various structures arranged on the outside of the center frame 86 from its front side to the rear side of the base plate 60 so that they cannot be seen by the player.

The central front portion of the game board 13 can be seen from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see Figure 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to Figure 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is partitioned in front of the game board 13 and formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in Figure 2), which prevents a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning back into the ball guide passage. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in Figure 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back toward the center while its force is reduced.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used depending on whether the ball has won into the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 140. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode, whether it is fluctuating, whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special mode jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a miss, and the number of reserved balls, while the seven-segment display device displays the number of rounds during a jackpot and any errors. The multiple LEDs are configured to emit different colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of these colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in the first winning slot 64 and the second winning slot 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it determines that there is a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be determined here include a 15R special jackpot, a 4R special jackpot, and a 4R regular jackpot. The first pattern display devices 37A, 37B not only show whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not as the stopping pattern after the fluctuation has ended, but also show a pattern according to the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot.

Here, the "15R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 and then shifts to a high probability state, and the "4R surefire jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4. It is a variable jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after . In addition, "4R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which after the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds, the state shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot increases after the jackpot has ended as an added value, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (during a probability fluctuation), in other words, a state of play in which it is easy to transition to a special game state. In this embodiment, the high probability state (during a probability fluctuation) includes a game state in which the probability of a jackpot increases for a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 fluctuations in this embodiment), and the probability of a hit of the second pattern described below increases, making it easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140. The "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of a jackpot is not in a probability fluctuation, and refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state, that is, a state in which the probability of a jackpot is lower than during a probability fluctuation. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low probability state" refers to a game state in which the probability of a jackpot is in a normal state, and the probability of a jackpot remains the same, but only the probability of a hit of the second pattern increases, making it easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 140. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state when it is not in a special mode or time-saving mode (neither the probability of a jackpot nor the probability of hitting the second symbol has increased).

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300, which will be described later, in the first round of the jackpot game, the game state after the end of the jackpot game changes by 100. During the number of times, it will be in a high probability state. In addition, if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, the game state after the end of the jackpot game will be in the time saving state for a period of 100 fluctuations.

During the special rate or time-saving period, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but the time that the electric device 140a (electric device) associated with the second winning port 140 is opened is also changed and set to a longer time than during normal times. When the electric device 140a is in an open state (open state), it is easier for the ball to win the second winning port 140 than when the electric device 140a is in a closed state (closed state). Therefore, during the special rate or time-saving period, it is easier for the ball to win the second winning port 140, and the number of times the jackpot lottery is held can be increased.

In addition, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, instead of changing the opening time of the electric role 140a associated with the second winning slot 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times the electric role 140a opens with one win may be increased compared to normal. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the winning probability of the second symbol may not be changed, and at least one of the time when the electric role 140a associated with the second winning slot 140 is opened and the number of times the electric role 140a opens with one win may be changed. Also, during the probability bonus or time-saving period, the time when the electric role 140a associated with the second winning slot 140 is opened and the number of times the electric role 140a opens with one win may not be changed, and only the winning probability of the second symbol may be changed to be increased compared to normal.

In the play area, there are arranged a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning hole. In addition, a variable display unit 80 is arranged in the center of the play area. The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable display of a third pattern while synchronizing with the variable display in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, triggered by the winning (initial winning) in the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140, and a second pattern display device (not shown) consisting of an LED that displays a variable display of a second pattern, triggered by the passage of a ball through the through gate 67. In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81.

In this embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is fastened and fixed to the back case 510 so as to fill an opening 511a of the back case 510, which will be described later, and the center frame 86 is arranged so as to frame the window 60a of the base plate 60. It is arranged. That is, when viewed from the front, it appears that the center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, but in reality, the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86 are arranged apart from each other in the front and back. has been done.

The third symbol display device 81 is configured with a large liquid crystal display of, for example, 9 inches, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4) to display, for example, three symbol rows, top, middle, and bottom. Each symbol row is configured with a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled horizontally for each symbol row, so that the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, while the display of the game state associated with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed by the first symbol display device 37A, 37B. Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of a display device.

The second symbol display device alternately lights up an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display in the second pattern display device stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the electric device 140a attached to the second winning port 140 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change display is set to be shorter during a special probability or time-saving mode than during normal game mode. As a result, during special probability and time-saving mode, the second symbol changes display in a short time, so more winning lotteries can be held than during normal game mode. This increases the chances of winning in the winning lottery, giving the player more opportunities to have the electric device 140a of the second winning slot 140 open. Therefore, during special probability and time-saving mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to win the second winning slot 140.

In addition, during the probability change or time reduction, you can also enter the second prize opening 140 during the probability change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or number of openings of the electric accessory 140a per win, etc. If the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if you set the time required for the variable display of the second symbol to be shorter during the probability change or time saving period than during the normal period, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, or the winning probability may be set to be constant regardless of the gaming state. The opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 140a may be made constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured to allow a portion of the balls fired at the game board 13 to pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, an "○" symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display, and even if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "○" is displayed. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a stop symbol in the variable display.

The number of times that a ball passes through the through gate 67 can be reserved up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first pattern display devices 37A, 37B, and is also displayed by lighting the second pattern reserved lamp (not shown). There are four second pattern reserved lamps, the maximum number of reserved balls, and they are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, the variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device. This may be done using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the maximum number of balls that can be held for passing through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, but may be set to three or less, or five or more times (for example, eight). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be located below the variable display unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol retention lamp.

A first winning hole 64 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on. When the first winning hole switch turns on, a lottery for a jackpot is held by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 140 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 140, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning port switch. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

The first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 are also each one of the winning ports through which five balls are paid out when a ball enters the winning port. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 is the same as the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140 may be different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning port 64 may be three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning port 140 may be five.

An electric device 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. This electric device 140a is configured to be able to open and close, and is normally in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the second pattern display device displays a "○" pattern as a result of the variable display of the second pattern, which is triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, the electric device 140a opens (expands), making it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 140.

As mentioned above, during probability change and time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the second symbol to fluctuate is also shorter, so in the second symbol fluctuate display, "○" ” becomes easier to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, during the probability change and time saving, the time during which the electric accessory 140a is opened is also longer than during normal times. Therefore, during the probability change and time saving period, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second prize opening 140 compared to the normal time.

The probability of a jackpot occurring when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 is the same as when a ball enters the second winning slot 140, regardless of whether the probability is low or high. However, the probability of a 15R special jackpot being selected as the type of jackpot occurring when a jackpot occurs is set to be higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 140 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64. On the other hand, the first winning slot 64 does not have an electric device like the second winning slot 140, and the ball is always capable of winning.

Therefore, during normal play, the electric device associated with the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, making it difficult to win at the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for the first winning opening 64, which does not have an electric device, by shooting the ball so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left shot"), and by having the ball win at the first winning opening 64, gaining more opportunities to win the jackpot lottery and aiming to win the jackpot.

On the other hand, during probability change or time saving, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is likely to be in the open state, and the second winning hole 140 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 140 so that it passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed hitting"), and the ball is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability jackpot by winning a prize in the second winning hole 140.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, since the game board 13 is configured symmetrically, it is possible to aim for the first winning slot 64 with a "right hit" and for the second winning slot 140 with a "left hit". Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment does not require the player to change the way the ball is shot between "left hit" and "right hit" depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special mode, a time-saving mode, or a normal mode). This eliminates the hassle of having to change the way the ball is shot.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is provided below the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided in the approximate center of the device. In the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot lottery performed due to winning in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first pattern display device 37A or the first pattern display device 37B is turned on to show the jackpot stop pattern, and the stop pattern corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which balls are more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning port 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls have won).

This specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after this closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of this specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual as an addition of game value (game value).

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the gaming area, and when an LED corresponding to a jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined period of time when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the number of specific winning holes 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the placement position may also be the lower right side of the first winning hole 64 or the first The location is not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, but may be located to the left of the variable display unit 80, for example.

The right corner of the lower side of the game board 13 is provided with an attachment space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 65a, 140 are guided through the out port 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out openings 71 are arranged as a pair on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a.

On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various parts (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged (not shown). ).

As shown in FIG. 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113) and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115) and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

The board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) are connected to the box base and box cover by a sealing unit (not shown) so that they cannot be opened (connected by a crimping structure). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connection between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing seal to open the board box 100, 102 or forcefully open the board box 100, 102, it will be cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or sealing seal, you can know whether the board box 100, 102 has been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 4). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built-in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, display settings on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device. Execute.

In addition, in order to instruct sub-control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices by the data transmission/reception circuit. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

In addition to various areas, counters, and flags, the RAM 203 has a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, I/O, etc. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on when the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by main processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to RAM 203 is performed during start-up processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage processing.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the second pattern display device, the second pattern reservation lamp, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a to the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate 65b (see Figure 11) as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role-playing device, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from the audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off the lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as variable performance (variable display) and advance notice performance. The MPU 221, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 222 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory, etc.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio/lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, and the like. The other devices 228 include the drive motors 631, 731, 782, and 861.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The audio lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the audio lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the audio output device 226, and The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 is controlled in accordance with the displayed content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on commands received from the sound lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the sound lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81. The sound lamp control device 113 can match the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the sound output from the sound output device 226 by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands.

The power supply unit 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM clear switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM clear signal SG2 to the main control device 110 to clear the backup data when the RAM clear switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the main control device 110 inputs the RAM clear signal SG2 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, it clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data in the payout control device 111.

Next, the structure around the variable winning device 65 will be explained. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300, and FIGS. 6(a) and 6(b) are front perspective views of the variable winning device 65. In FIG. 6(a), the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b is illustrated in which the opening/closing plate 65b is closed so as to restrict the ball from flowing down to the specific winning opening 65a, and in FIG. The opening/closing plate 65b is shown in an open state in which the opening/closing plate 65b is opened to allow the ball to flow down. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

The variable winning device 65 changes the opening/closing plate 65b in the open state so that when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6(b)), the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b can be received and guided to the specific winning opening 65a. The upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is formed to be inclined downward toward the back side.

Since the electric accessory 140a is arranged above the left and right center of the opening/closing plate 65b (see FIG. 2), the balls that land on the opening/closing plate 65b are limited to those that deviate from the electric accessory 140a and drift down. . That is, the landing of the ball on the opening/closing plate 65b does not occur in the left and right center portions, but mainly occurs in the left and right outer portions of the electric accessory 140a. In other words, the arrangement of the balls that land on the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to positions closer to the left and right outer sides of the opening/closing plate 65b.

However, this does not apply to the placement of the ball after it lands on the opening and closing plate 65b. In other words, depending on how the ball flows after it lands on the opening and closing plate 65b, it may end up being placed closer to the center of the opening and closing plate 65b.

In particular, in this embodiment, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 2) that covers the electric prop 140a from the front side is curved to ensure space on the opening and closing plate 65b side (it is curved so that it juts out downward from the lower front end that faces the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) toward the rear side), so that the degree to which a ball that bounces near the left-right center of the opening and closing plate 65b collides with the front design member 141 and loses momentum can be reduced. This increases the likelihood that the ball will be positioned near the left-right center of the opening and closing plate 65b.

The center of the radius of curvature of the curved shape of the lower part of the front design member 141 may be located either forward or backward. In this embodiment, the radius of curvature in a side view is formed to be located at the lower front, making it possible to secure a larger space on the opening and closing plate 65b side. In addition, the front design member 141 is shaped so that the left and right width becomes smaller as it moves downward at the left and right ends, making it easier to secure space between the opening and closing plate 65b on the left and right sides.

In the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b, the balls that have landed on the opening/closing plate 65b are guided to the specific winning hole 65a almost without leakage. On the near side of the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, an inclined flow lower surface 163a1 that slopes downward toward the rear is arranged at a vertical position that can guide the ball to the ball passage hole 163b.

The inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is formed one step lower than the left and right ends of the lower surface 163a so that a ball rolling to the left and right outside by the lower surface 163a can move over with less resistance. In order to reduce the flow resistance of a ball that lands on the opening and closing plate 65b outside the left and right of this inclined flow lower surface 163a1, a guide plate portion 163a2 is formed on the left and right outside of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1.

The guide plate portion 163a2 is a plate-shaped portion that extends forward and inward from the rear wall portion and the left and right inner wall portions of the receiving member 163, and the front end surface is formed as an inclined surface that is shifted rearward as it moves inward to the left and right.

As a result, when a ball rolling on the opening/closing plate 65b comes into contact with the front end surface of the guide plate portion 163a2, the ball can be guided downward along the slope of the slope, so that the ball can be guided down the slope. 163a1 with little resistance. Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b starts its closing operation with a ball riding on the opening/closing plate 65b, even if the ball is located on the right and left sides of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b will not continue. The degree of inhibition can be reduced.

In other words, it is possible to reduce the possibility of malfunctions such as, for example, poor ball flow causing delays in closing the opening/closing plate 65b, or balls being swept backwards by the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b bouncing off the rear wall of the receiving member 163 and striking the opening/closing plate 65b again, applying a load in the direction (forward) that causes the opening/closing plate 65b to open, causing the opening/closing plate 65b to open unintentionally.

When the opening and closing plate 65b moves from an open state to a closed state, the opening and closing plate 65b closes by rising up. In other words, a ball that lands on the opening and closing plate 65b is guided (swallowed) to the specific winning opening 65a by the movement of the opening and closing plate 65b, so that the ball does not move to the left or right of the ball resting on the opening and closing plate 65b, and almost all of the balls resting on the opening and closing plate 65b are guided to the specific winning opening 65a.

At this time, if the balls on the opening/closing plate 65b are arranged closer to the left and right outer sides or there are a large number of balls, there is a possibility that the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b will be delayed. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the shapes of the lower surface part 163a, the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, and the guide plate part 163a2 of the receiving member 163 are devised, so that the flow of balls guided to the specific prize opening 65a can be retained. Therefore, the speed of the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be maintained.

In addition, instead of modifying the shape of the receiving member 163, the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b on which the ball rests in the open state is formed in a flat surface (see FIG. 6(b)). Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b first flows backward, and then flows left and right due to the effect of the shape of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, making it easier to avoid ball collisions on the opening/closing plate 65b.

In other words, even if multiple balls land on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time, the balls will first move backward in parallel, preventing the balls from colliding with each other on the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, compared to when the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is shaped with a left-right inclined surface like the lower surface 163a, which creates a left-right flow in the rolling balls, the possibility of the balls moving irregularly on the opening/closing plate 65b can be reduced, making it possible to prevent unintended malfunctions.

The receiving member 163 is formed with abutment surfaces 163a3 that abut against the pivot tips at both left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, thereby improving the reproducibility of the positioning of the opening/closing plate 65b. The abutment surfaces 163a3 are formed in a pair on the left and right, and are designed to match the shape of the opening/closing plate 65b so that they can make surface contact rather than point contact. This makes it easier to stabilize the positioning of the opening/closing plate 65b, and by receiving the load at the time of abutment on the surface, stress concentration can be avoided, improving durability.

Further, an auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is formed on the lower side of the contact surface portion 163a3 and has a surface shape that is substantially parallel to the opening/closing plate 65b disposed opposite to the opening/closing plate 65b with a slight gap therebetween. The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is provided as a fail-safe in case the contact between the contact surface portion 163a3 and the opening/closing plate 65b becomes defective for some reason.

In this embodiment, a fixed member 161 that restricts the flow of the ball is disposed in front of the contact surface 163a3, and is configured so that the ball does not collide with the contact surface 163a3. However, for example, if the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate 65b that contacts the contact surface 163a3 is chipped, it may become impossible to maintain the repeatability of the position of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state.

In contrast, in this embodiment, if normal contact between the opening/closing plate 65b and the contact surface 163a3 cannot be maintained, the front-to-rear width portions at the left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b come into surface contact with the auxiliary contact surface 163a4, thereby maintaining the stability of the position of the opening/closing plate 65b. This improves the reproducibility of the position of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state.

Note that the auxiliary contact surface 163a4 may be configured to contact the opening/closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal. In this case, since contact with the opening/closing plate 65b occurs when the contact surface portion 163a3 has a normal shape, there may be a disadvantage that load is likely to be accumulated. It is possible to reduce the magnitude of the local load that the contact surface portion 163a3 receives due to the contact with the contact surface portion 163a3.

When the opening and closing plate 65b moves from an open state to a closed state, the game ball that is in the process of being received by the opening and closing plate 65b can be configured to be received in a manner that pushes it into the opening and closing plate 65b due to the shape of the front design member 141 described above.

That is, in the state in which the ball is being accepted (for example, in a state in which it is sandwiched between the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate 65b and the opening frame of the specific winning hole 65a and sliding sideways), the ball matches the lower shape of the front design member 141. When it touches, it can be made to flow down inside the specific winning a prize opening 65a by being guided by its curved shape. This makes it easier to avoid a situation where the ball that has deviated from the opening/closing plate 65b falls on the front side of the third flow path component 336, making it easier to ensure visibility to the third flow path component 336. can do.

When the opening and closing plate 65b is in the closed state, balls do not land on the opening and closing plate 65b, so the placement of balls flowing down the front side of the opening and closing plate 65b when the opening and closing plate 65b is in the closed state is limited to the outside on the left and right of the electric prop 140a.

Therefore, according to the configuration of this embodiment, when the opening and closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the placement of the balls that flow down without being guided to the specific winning opening 65a can be limited to positions on the left and right outer side of the electric role device 140a. This ensures visibility below the electric role device 140a at positions on the left and right inner side of the left and right ends of the electric role device 140a.

Next, the configuration downstream of the specific winning port 65a (the side where the balls flow after passing through the specific winning port 65a) will be described. Figure 7 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and Figure 8 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. Note that Figures 7 and 8 show the configuration arranged on the base plate 60 with all components removed except for the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the variable winning device 65.

As shown in FIG. 8, a collecting gutter 150 is provided at the rear of the variable winning device 65 on the rear side of the base plate 60, forming a path for directing balls that enter the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the general winning opening 63 (see FIG. 2) to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The collecting gutter 150 includes a groove-shaped portion that forms a flow path, and the front side of the groove-shaped portion facing the base plate 60 is open. By closing this open portion with the base plate 60, a path for flowing the balls to the ball discharge path is completed.

The collecting gutter 150 includes a first flow path section 151 that forms a flow path for balls that enter the first winning opening 64, a second flow path section 152 that forms a path for balls that enter the second winning opening 140, and a plurality of third flow path sections 153 that form flow paths on the left and right for balls that enter the general winning openings 63 located on both the left and right sides.

The first flow path section 151 is configured as a flow path that slopes from the rear position of the first winning opening 64 to the lower left, and the second flow path section 152 is configured as a flow path that slopes from the rear position of the second winning opening 140 to the lower right. The third flow path section 153 is configured as a flow path that extends below the general winning opening 63.

Therefore, when viewed from the front, although the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 are arranged at the left and right center positions of the gaming area, the flow of the balls that enter the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140 is , are moved from the center position to the left and right sides by the collecting gutter 150. Thereby, a space can be provided below the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 140, and this space can be used to arrange the variable winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 described later.

Figure 9 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the sorting device 300, and Figure 10 is an exploded rear perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150, and the sorting device 300. Note that in Figures 9 and 10, only the lower half of the base plate 60 is shown, and other parts are omitted, and other components assembled to the base plate 60 are omitted, so that the base of the base plate 60 can be seen. Also, for ease of explanation, Figure 9 shows the center frame 86 assembled to the base plate 60.

Fixing of the variable winning device 65, collection gutter 150, and distribution device 300 will be explained. The variable winning device 65 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like. The collecting gutter 150 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the back side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

The sorting device 300 has an insertion hole 311 at the top that is fastened to the variable winning device 65, and an insertion hole 331 at the left and right that is fastened to the collecting gutter 150. In other words, unlike the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 that are directly fixed to the base plate 60, the presence or absence of the sorting device 300 does not affect the completion of the game board 13.

In other words, the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 in this embodiment can be used as is whether the sorting device 300 is installed or not. This allows the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 to be used in common regardless of whether the sorting device 300 is installed or not.

Next, the details of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to receive balls from the game area through the specific winning port 65a, and the sorting device 300 constitutes a flow path along which the balls received by the variable winning device 65 flow. In this embodiment, the profits obtained by the player are controlled to change based on the detection results of the balls flowing through the flow path of the sorting device 300, and details will be described later.

11 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the variable winning device 65 includes a fixed member 161 fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like, a front design member 162 arranged on the front side of the fixed member 161 and fastened to the fixed member 161, a receiving member 163 arranged on the back side of the fixed member 161, fastened to the fixed member 161, and configured to be able to receive balls that have passed through the specific winning opening 65a, an intervening member 164 arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, fastened to the receiving member 163, and intervening as a connecting part with the sorting device 300, and a state switching device 165 arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, fastened to the receiving member 163, and configured to be able to switch the open/closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b depending on whether or not electricity is applied.

The fixed member 161 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and its front side is flat except for the through holes for screw insertion, the fastening position with the front design member 162, and the specific winning hole 65a. On the other hand, the rear side of the fixed member 161 is three-dimensional, projecting toward the rear side inside the thin-walled portion that abuts the base plate 60 on the outer periphery.

In particular, the boundary portion 161a with the thin portion is formed in a horizontally elongated, approximately elliptical frame shape, and a through hole large enough to accommodate this boundary portion 161a is formed through the base plate 60. In other words, the boundary portion 161a is the portion that is inserted into the through hole of the base plate 60.

Inside the boundary 161a, a specific winning opening 65a and an extended support plate 161b are formed, which are configured as a pair of roughly T-shaped supports on the left and right, and include a horizontally elongated plate-like portion that extends rearward slightly below the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a and is parallel to the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a, and a vertically elongated plate-like portion that extends downward midway through the horizontally elongated plate-like portion.

The extended support plate 161b functions to support both the rear range of the specific winning opening 65a and the downstream path of the distribution device 300, which will be described later. The protruding support part 161c protrudes from the horizontally long plate-like part of the extended support plate 161b, the protruding support part 161d protrudes from the vertically long plate-like part of the extended support plate 161b, and the lower edge of the boundary part 161a. The protruding support portion 161e that protrudes from the top surface of the portion has a function of supporting the sorting device 300, and the details will be described later.

The symmetrical protrusion 161f, which is protruded symmetrically below the center of the specific winning opening 65a inside the boundary 161a, has the function of contacting the balls flowing down the sorting device 300 and guiding the balls as they flow down.

Multiple through holes 161g for inserting the fastening screws that are screwed into the front design member 162 are arranged on the inside and outside of the boundary portion 161a. Multiple fastened portions 161h having female threads for inserting the fastening screws that are inserted into the receiving member 163 are arranged on the inside of the boundary portion 161a.

The fastened portion 161i, which has a female thread portion for screwing the fastening screw inserted into the intervening member 164, is arranged outside the border portion 161a at the cut (left and right center position) of the border portion 161a. That is, among the through holes formed in the base plate 60, there is a connecting portion between the through hole for passing through the boundary portion 161a and the through hole for passing through the second prize opening 140 and the electric accessory 140a (see FIG. 9). ), the fastened portion 161i is disposed.

The front design component 162 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the front side is formed in a flat shape to ensure a uniform distance from the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1). The balls are allowed to flow down within the area between the rear side of the front design component 162 and the front side of the fixed component 161.

The rear side of the front design member 162 is provided with a number of fastening portions 162a that are arranged in positions that match the through holes 161g of the fixed member 161 and have female threads that allow the fastening screws inserted into the through holes 161g to be screwed in, and a number of extension portions 162b, 162c that extend to the rear side in a shape that covers the fastening portions 162a from above.

The extending parts 162b and 162c can prevent the ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 from directly colliding with the fastened part 162a, thereby improving the durability of the fastened part 162a. can be improved.

Furthermore, by forming the upper surfaces of the extensions 162b and 162c as inclined surfaces, it is possible to restrict the path of the balls flowing down. That is, by forming the upper surfaces of the extensions 162b (two locations on the left and right central sides) that are extended near the left and right edges of the specific winning opening 65a as inclined surfaces that slope downward toward the left and right outside, it is possible to prevent balls on the extensions 162b from flowing toward the specific winning opening 65a. That is, after the balls on the extensions 162b fall downward on the left and right outsides of the extensions 162b, they flow down along the inner rail 61 (see Figure 2) toward the outlet 71.

In addition, the upper surfaces of the extending portions 162c (two locations on both the left and right ends) extending to the left and right ends are formed as inclined surfaces that slope downward toward the left and right inwards, so that the ball flowing on the extending portions 162c is The downstream path can be summarized as the downstream path of the ball riding on the extension portion 162b. This makes it possible to narrow the range in which the falling balls are placed (increasing the density of ball placement) compared to the number of falling balls, and to reduce the area where visibility is not obstructed by the balls (where the falling path is (a space that is not constructed) can be secured.

Although the front design member 162 illustrated in FIG. 11 is shown in a plain color and has good visibility on the back side, the front design member 162 does not need to be in a plain color. For example, the front side of the front design member 162 may be decorated by pasting a sticker with a pattern or character on it, or a groove may be dug in the front design member 162 in a geometric pattern, and the groove may be illuminated with light. By doing so, the geometric pattern may emerge and be visually recognized. Further, the front design member 162 may be configured to be non-transparent with a plain color or with the above-described decoration added.

The receiving member 163 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material in a horizontally elongated frame (or box) shape with the front side open, and includes the above-mentioned guide plate portion 163a2, the contact surface portion 163a3, the auxiliary contact surface 163a4, the lower surface portion 163a forming a flow-down surface inside the frame, the ball passing hole 163b arranged as a through hole through which the ball flowing down the lower surface portion 163a can pass, a plurality of insertion holes 163c arranged at a position matching the fastening portion 161h of the fixed member 161 and through which fastening screws fastened to the fastening portion 161h are inserted from the back side, a pair of fastening portions 163d arranged on the left and right central sides as female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted into the intervening member 164 are screwed, and a plurality of fastening portions 163e having female threaded portions into which fastening screws inserted into the state switching device 165 are screwed.

The lower surface portion 163a is formed as a left-right inclined surface that slopes downward toward the left and right outer ends with the left-right center portion as the apex, and an inclined flow that slopes downward toward the rear at a position one step lower from the left and right outer ends of the left-right inclined surface. By providing the lower surface 163a1, the ball flowing down the rear end of the inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is arranged so that it can pass through the ball passage hole 163b with low resistance.

The ball passage hole 163b is a detection hole formed in the detection sensor SE1 that engages with the back side of the receiving member 163. In other words, the passage of the ball through the ball passage hole 163b is detected by the detection sensor SE1.

The intermediate member 164 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and includes a main body 164a having a light refracting surface that slopes downward toward the rear, a pair of insertion holes 164b formed through the upper side of the main body 164a and capable of receiving fastening screws screwed into the fastening portion 163d of the receiving member 163, a light emitting board 164c arranged above the insertion holes 164b and on which an LED is disposed, a pair of fastening portions 164d formed at both left and right ends of the lower end of the main body 164a with female threaded portions capable of receiving fastening screws inserted into the sorting device 300, and an insertion hole 164e formed through the upper side of the main body 164a and capable of receiving fastening screws screwed into the fastening portion 161i of the fixed member 161.

The light-emitting board 164c is disposed so that the surface on which the LEDs are arranged faces diagonally upward and forward, and in the assembled state, is positioned directly above the specific winning hole 65a when viewed from the front (see FIG. 6) and directly below the second winning hole 140. With this arrangement, the light from the light-emitting board 164c easily enters the field of vision of a player who is hoping for the ball to land in the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a and is gazing diagonally downward and backward at these locations.

Therefore, by controlling the LED of the light emitting board 164c to light up when the ball entering the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a is detected, the ball entering the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a The player can easily understand whether or not a problem has occurred.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the intervening member 164 is fastened to both the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163. This allows the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 to be more firmly fixed than when the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 are only fastened to each other. In addition, the arrangement of the sorting device 300, which is connected and fixed to the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 via the intervening member 164, can be stabilized, so that the relative positional deviation between the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300 can be suppressed.

The state switching device 165 has a plurality of insertion parts 165a through which fastening screws screwed into the fastened part 163e of the receiving member 163 are inserted, and has a plurality of openings for passing wires and for heat radiation. A lower case part 165b formed in the shape of a deep box with an open upper side, an electromagnetic solenoid 165c housed in the lower case part 165b, and an electromagnetic solenoid 165c that is engaged with the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c. A sliding portion 165d that slides and a rotating portion that is rotatably supported by the lower case portion 165b in an arrangement such that the rotating tip protrudes from the front end of the lower case portion 165b and rotates as the sliding portion 165d slides. It includes a moving part 165e and an upper lid part 165g that is fastened and fixed to the lower case part 165b by fastening screws inserted through a plurality of insertion holes 165f.

The tip of the rotating part 165e is recessed so that the rod-shaped part can engage with it, and the transmission protrusion 65c that protrudes rightward from the right end of the opening/closing plate 65b fits into this recess and engages with it. The transmission protrusion 65c is positioned eccentrically from the metal shaft rod part 65d that forms the rotation axis for the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b. By configuring it in this way, the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be caused to occur in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating part 165e.

Figures 13 and 14 are exploded front perspective views of the sorting device 300. Figure 13 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 from above, and Figure 14 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 from below.

As shown in Figures 13 and 14, the sorting device 300 includes an upper member 310 having a pair of insertion holes 311 formed therethrough so that a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastened portion 164d of the intervening member 164 can be inserted therethrough, a middle member 330 that is fastened and fixed to the upper member 310 in the vertical direction and has a pair of insertion holes 331 formed therethrough so that a fastening screw that is screwed into the female threaded portion of the collecting gutter 150 can be inserted therethrough, a substrate 350 that is housed between the middle member 330 and the upper member 310 and has a light emitting means 351 such as an LED disposed on the front side, and a substrate 350 that is connected to the middle member 330 and the upper member 310. It is equipped with a state switching device 360 that is housed in a position between the member 310 and is configured to be able to switch states depending on whether or not electricity is applied, a sliding displacement member 370 that is arranged below the middle member 330 and slides back and forth between a front position and a rear position as the state switching device 360 switches states, and a lower member 380 that is arranged below the middle member 330 so as to sandwich the sliding displacement member 370 between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 and has an insertion hole 381 formed therethrough that can insert a fastening screw that is screwed into the female threaded portion of the collecting gutter 150.

Before explaining the details of the configuration of each part, an overview of the functions of the sorting device 300 will be explained. The sorting device 300 is a device that configures a flow path along which the balls that have passed through the ball passage hole 163b (see FIG. 12) of the detection sensor SE1 flow down.

The balls that pass through the ball passage hole 163b flow down through the interior of the upper member 310, the flow path configurations 334, 335, and 336 formed between the upper member 310 and the middle member 330, and the interior of the lower member 380, and the balls that flow down from the lower member 380 are discharged into the ball discharge path (not shown).

The balls flowing down inside the distribution device 300 are configured to be visible to the player, and depending on the way they flow down, it is not just a dramatic effect that pleases the player's eyes, but also has an effect related to the gaming profits, such as bringing about changes in the profits that the player can obtain.

Differences in the manner in which the balls flow down inside the sorting device 300 are mainly caused by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, when the ball flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380, the position of the slide displacement member 370 makes a difference in which part of the lower member 380 the ball passes through.

Therefore, the player's line of sight naturally tends to focus on the location where the ball flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380 (the location where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged, as will be described later). It has been devised with the premise of concentration.

Next, the configuration of each part of the sorting device 300 will be described in detail. The upper member 310 is a thin-walled member that is U-shaped when viewed from above and is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes the above-mentioned insertion hole 311, a pair of openings 312 formed therethrough to be able to receive balls, a pair of colored (red in this embodiment) transparent seal members 313 that are attached as markers, a pair of upper surface parts 314 that extend from the lower edge of the openings 312 along the outer periphery to the front side, a plurality of insertion tube parts 315 in which through holes are formed through which fastening screws that are screwed into the middle member 330 can be inserted, a fastening part 316 having a female thread through which the fastening screw inserted into the middle member 330 can be screwed, and the upper member 310. 10 from the underside, a pair of long front-rear projections 317 arranged side by side, a pair of inner left-right projections 318 arranged between the pair of long front-rear projections 317, a pair of outer left-right projections 319 arranged on the outer left-right sides of the pair of long front-rear projections 317, a pair of outer left-right projections 319 arranged on the outer left-right sides of the pair of long front-rear projections 317, and a storage recess 320 formed as a recess large enough to accommodate the upper part of the substrate 350.

The opening 312 is a passage-like portion (tunnel-like portion) that receives balls that have passed through the ball passage hole 163b of the variable winning device 65 and allows them to flow downward, and its upper front edge is shaped as if it had been cut with an inclined surface so that it is flush with the back surface of the plate of the inclined detection sensor SE1 (see Figure 12). This allows the upper front edge of the opening 312 to come into contact with the back surface of the plate of the detection sensor SE1.

Further, the opening 312 is formed with an opening degree that does not enter the inside of the opening of the ball passing hole 163b when viewed from the opening direction of the ball passing hole 163b. Thereby, the flow resistance when guiding the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b to the opening 312 can be reduced.

The sealing member 313 functions as a member that attracts the attention of the player by receiving the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 of the board 350 and being visually recognized brilliantly, but the details will be described later.

The upper surface portion 314 is a thin plate portion that is sloped to match the path that the ball takes below the upper member 310. The first upper surface portion 314a, which is located on the front side of the opening 312, is formed to slope downward as it approaches the front side, and the second upper surface portion 314b, which is connected to the front end of the first upper surface portion 314a and is located on the left and right inside, is formed to slope downward as it approaches the left and right inside. The left and right second upper surface portions 314b are configured so that the left and right distance between them is longer toward the front, thereby ensuring the player's visibility when viewing the ball through the second upper surface portions 314b.

The insertion cylinder portion 315 has a counterbore formed on the upper surface side to receive the screw head of the fastening screw. Therefore, although the fastening screw is inserted from above, it is possible to easily prevent the screw head of the fastening screw from being visible to the player.

The insertion tube portion 315 is positioned to match the fastening portion 332d having a female thread formed in the inner member 330. In particular, the fastening portion 332d corresponding to the left insertion tube portion 315 also serves as a support portion that supports the rotating portion 363, as will be described in detail later.

The fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 316 is positioned with the screw portion facing upward and the screw head facing downward. Therefore, while the fastening portion 316 is positioned at the front, the screw head is not easily noticeable to a player viewing from diagonally above. This makes it possible to securely fasten the upper member 310 and the middle member 330 together while avoiding the fastening screw spoiling the appearance of the sorting device 300.

The reason why the fastening portion 316 is only formed on the right side is that since the insertion tube portion 315 is already arranged in two places on the rear side, one fastening position on the front side is sufficient, and although the screw head is facing downward and is not very noticeable, omitting it if unnecessary will improve the appearance of the sorting device 300. Note that the arrangement of the fastening portion 316 is not limited to this. For example, it may be arranged on the left side, or it may be arranged in a pair on the left and right.

The fastening portion 316 is positioned to avoid the path of the balls flowing down and to minimize any loss in appearance of the sorting device 300, as will be described in more detail below.

The undersides of the long front-rear projections 317, the inner left-right projections 318, and the outer left-right projections 319, which form each pair, are formed as curved surfaces that use the same point as a reference point and become lower the further away from that point. The curved surfaces of the long front-rear projections 317, the inner left-right projections 318, and the outer left-right projections 319 have different shapes, and the difference in shape is intended to control the way the ball flows down.

The middle member 330 includes the pair of insertion holes 331 described above, a rear frame portion 332 formed in a frame shape (approximately box-shaped) with a lower bottom at the rear side, a pair of front frame portions 333 formed in a frame shape (approximately box-shaped) with a lower bottom at the front side, a pair of first flow path components 334 recessed on the left and right outer sides of the front frame portion 333 to form a flow path for the balls, a pair of second flow path components 335 connected to the front end of the first flow path components 334 to form a flow path for the balls and recessed in front of the front frame portion 333, and a pair of third flow path components 336 connected to the left and right inner ends of the second flow path components 335 to form a flow path for the balls and recessed on the left and right inner sides of the front frame portion 333.

The middle member 330 also includes a discharge hole 337 that is elongated from side to side and penetrates the lower base at the rear side of the rear end of the third flow path component 336, and functions as a discharge path for the balls; a partition plate portion 338 that is elongated in the front-rear direction and divides the discharge hole 337 and the third flow path component 336 into left and right parts; and a pair of alignment protrusions 339 that protrude from the lower surface at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 as elongated rectangular protrusions.

The rear frame portion 332 does not constitute a downward flow path for the ball, unlike the front side portion that configures a downward flow path for the ball, and is mainly configured as a portion that supports the substrate 350 and the state switching device 360. The rear frame-shaped portion 332 has an arrangement through hole 332a that is formed vertically through the front end of the left and right center portions and is configured to allow the slide displacement member 370 to be placed therein, and a through hole that is elongated in the left and right direction. A plurality of guide holes 332b are formed through the lower bottom portion and guide the sliding displacement of the guided portion 362c of the state switching device 360, and a female screw portion is formed into which a fastening screw inserted into the lower member 380 can be screwed. It includes a fastened part 332c and a cylindrical fastened part 332d having a female screw part at its upper end into which a fastening screw inserted into the insertion tube part 315 of the upper member 310 can be screwed.

Since the front frame portion 333 is subjected to light diffusion processing on the inner side of the frame and the front and back surfaces of the lower bottom portion, visibility of the back side of the front frame portion 333 is reduced. The front frame portion 333 is formed into a frame shape that is approximately square in top view, and has an insertion hole 333a formed as a counterbore hole into which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 of the upper member 310 can be inserted. Equipped with.

The first flow path component 334, the second flow path component 335, and the third flow path component 336 are each parts that form the flow path of the balls, and are designed to have different flow directions and inclination angles of the balls, etc., but details will be given later.

In addition, the open part 335a whose front side is opened at the connection position of the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336 allows the symmetrical protruding part 161f (see FIG. 12) of the variable prize winning device 65 to enter. This is a gap for the purpose of That is, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is arranged so as to enter into the inside of the flow path through the open portion 335a so as to be able to come into contact with the balls flowing down the sorting device 300.

The discharge hole 337 is partitioned by a partition plate portion 338, and is configured in a pair on the left and right, and is formed in a size that allows the ball to be discharged through at least two paths. That is, it is configured to have a horizontal length that is at least twice the diameter of the sphere. In this embodiment, since the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged side by side in the lower member 380 arranged below the discharge hole 337, the discharge hole 337 is arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the ball through hole of the detection sensor SE1. All you have to do is design the shape.

The partition plate portion 338 not only separates the third flow path component 336 as described above, but also functions as a guide portion that guides the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, as will be described in detail later. The alignment protrusion portion 339 is fitted into the protrusion portion 383a of the lower member 380 to prevent misalignment between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, as will be described in detail later.

The substrate 350 is formed in an inverted T-shape in which the lower side part 353 is longer than the upper side part 352 from side to side, and a recess for positioning is provided at the lower end on the left end side of the lower side part 353. 354.

The recessed portion 354 engages with a corresponding portion of the internal shape of the middle member 330 for positioning in the left and right direction, and the left and right elongated lower portion 353 is attached to the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330 back and forth. The upper part 352 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310 to prevent it from falling off upward, thereby fixing the arrangement. However, the details will be described later together with the intention of the arrangement of the light emitting means 351.

The state switching device 360 is a device housed in the rear frame portion 332 of the inner member 330, and includes an electromagnetic solenoid 361, a sliding portion 362 that engages with the tip of a plunger supported by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 for linear displacement in the left-right direction and slides together with the plunger, and a rotating portion 363 that is supported rotatably by being inserted through the fastened portion 332d on the left side and rotates in accordance with the sliding displacement of the sliding portion 362.

The slide portion 362 includes a recessed portion 362a that is recessed so as to be able to receive the disk portion 361a at the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 from above, a protruding portion 362b that protrudes from the right side to the right, and a lower side. A guided portion 362c is provided that protrudes downward from the front and rear central portions of and is formed with an elongated oval cross section in the left-right direction.

The disk portion 361a supports the slide portion 362 from above due to the direction in which the recessed portion 362a is formed, so that the slide portion 362 can be prevented from falling off upward. Therefore, the position of the slide portion 362 can be maintained between the disk portion 361a and the lower bottom portion of the inner member 330 without fixing the slide portion 362 to the disk portion 361a with adhesive or the like.

The guided portion 362c is a portion that is inserted into the guide hole 332b of the middle member 330 to prevent the displacement direction of the slide portion 362 from being deviated from the left-right direction. In particular, in this embodiment, since it is formed to be elongated in the left-right direction, the posture of the slide portion 362 can be maintained by engagement between the guided portion 362c and the guide hole 332b. Note that the cross-sectional shape of the guided portion 362c is not necessarily limited to this, and may be circular or rectangular, for example.

The rotating part 363 is formed into a substantially L-shape when viewed from above, and is formed into a vertically elongated cylindrical shape at the L-shaped connection part, and has a penetrating portion large enough to allow the fastened part 332d of the middle member 330 to be inserted therethrough. A supporting cylinder part 363a having a hole, an upper cylinder part 363b which projects upward from the short end of the L-shape in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into a through-hole of the overhang part 362b, and a longitudinal part of the L-shape A lower cylindrical portion 363c is provided that protrudes downward from the side tip portion in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the recessed portion 378 of the slide displacement member 370.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the rotating part 363 is configured to be rotatable around the support cylinder part 363a as a central axis. The displacement of this rotating part 363 occurs due to a change in the state of the electromagnetic solenoid 361. That is, when the plunger slides and the slide part 362 is displaced in the left-right direction by passing electricity through the electromagnetic solenoid 361, the upper cylindrical part 363b inserted into the through hole of the protruding part 362b is displaced, and the lower cylindrical part 363c is displaced accordingly, resulting in the displacement of the slide displacement member 370.

The sliding displacement member 370 is a member supported so as to be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction at a position between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, and includes a thin plate portion 371 supported by being sandwiched from above and below between the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, upper protrusions 376 protruding upward from the thin plate portion 371 in a pair on the left and right, and a recessed portion 378 recessed at the protruding end of the protrusion protruding upward in the left-right center rearward of the upper protrusions 376 and formed to be able to receive the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363.

The thin plate portion 371 is provided with a pair of supported holes 371a formed on the left and right sides in the rear half, a recessed portion 372 recessed from the front end in the left and right center portion to a long length in the front-to-rear direction with a left-to-right width shorter than the spacing of the upper protrusions 376, a pair of lower protrusions 373 protruding downward in a protruding shape along the edge of the recessed portion 372, a plurality of upper and lower protrusions 374 protruding in both the up and down directions in a protruding shape along the left and right edges of the rear half, and a cylindrical protrusion 375 protruding downward from the rear end in a cylindrical shape and inserted into the long guide hole 386 of the lower member 380.

The lower protrusion portion 373 and the upper and lower protrusion portions 374 are portions that are intended to face and slide against the middle member 330 or the lower member 380 disposed on the upper and lower sides, and compared to contact on a plane, the middle member 373 and the upper and lower protrusions 374 are This is a protrusion for reducing the contact area between the member 330 and the lower member 380. Since the displacement resistance of the slide displacement member 370 can be reduced by reducing the contact area, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the slide displacement member 370 from becoming slow.

The upper protrusion 376 is a columnar portion that is generally trapezoidal in front view, and is positioned so as to pass through the placement through-hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332. The width length of the gap on the left and right inner sides of the upper protrusion 376 is designed to be slightly longer than the left and right thickness of the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330. With this configuration, the partition plate portion 338 can guide the displacement of the upper protrusion 376.

In other words, the upper protruding portion 376 is arranged to sandwich the partition plate portion 338 between the left and right inner gaps, and is configured to suppress displacement in the left-right direction by contacting the partition plate portion 338. Thereby, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be well guided, and the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 can be maintained in the front-rear direction.

The recessed portion 378 is formed as a long hole that is long in the left-right direction so that it can accommodate the displacement of the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 that is required to cause the sliding displacement member 370 to displace in the front-rear direction.

The protruding part in which the recessed part 378 is formed is configured to pass through the placement through hole 332a and enter above the lower bottom part of the rear frame part 332, so that the lower cylindrical part of the rotating part 363 The portion 363c can be easily inserted into the recessed portion 378.

In this way, the shape of the placement through hole 332a is such that the entire area where the upper protruding part 376 through which the insertion is planned and the protruding part in which the recessed part 378 is formed is located inside. Designed as a through hole.

The lower member 380 has the above-mentioned insertion hole 381, a plate-like part 382 formed in a thin plate shape elongated from side to side, and a plurality of (four in this embodiment) detection sensors on the lower side of the plate-like part 382. It includes a sensor holding frame portion 389 formed in a frame shape that allows SE1 to be arranged side by side.

The sensor holding frame portion 389 has a frame shape in which the rear side surface into which the detection sensor SE1 is inserted and the upper and lower side surfaces through which the ball passes through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1 are open, and the other portions are closed. is formed.

The plate-shaped portion 382 has a through hole formed at a position that matches the through hole of the detection sensor SE1, just as the sensor holding frame portion 389 has a through hole formed in the up-down direction. The plate-shaped portion 382 has a protrusion portion 383 that protrudes upward in the front-rear direction at the intermediate position between the two detection sensors SE1 on the left and right inside, a pair of protrusion portions 383a that protrude from the front end of the protrusion portion 383 at positions spaced apart on the left and right, and a pair of protrusion portions 383a that protrude from the front end of the protrusion portion 383 at positions spaced apart on the left and right sides, and a pair of protrusion portions 383a that protrude from the front end of the protrusion portion 383 at positions rearward of the protrusion portion 383 and are fitted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370. It is equipped with a pair of guide protrusions 384 that protrude in an insertable position, a pair of guide protrusions 385 that are formed as long protrusions in the front-rear direction at both left and right positions outside the guide protrusions 384, a long guide hole 386 that extends in the same straight line as the protrusions 383 when viewed from above, a curved surface portion 387 that is formed in a curved surface shape that protrudes rearward on the front side surface, and an insertion hole 388 that is formed through so that a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastened portion 332c of the inner member 330 can be inserted.

The protrusion 383 is formed as a protrusion with a left and right thickness slightly shorter than the left and right gap width of the recessed part 372 of the slide displacement member 370, and the slide displacement member 370 is configured such that the protrusion 383 is sandwiched between the recessed part 372. Placed. That is, the protruding portion 383 functions as a guide portion that guides the longitudinal displacement of the slide displacement member 370.

The protrusions 383a are designed so that their left and right inner ends are in the same position as the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusions 339 of the middle member 330. That is, the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusions 339 are fitted into the left and right inner ends of the pair of protrusions 383a in abutting engagement, so that the left and right position of the middle member 330 can be appropriately determined with respect to the lower member 380. At the same time, the back side of the front frame part of the lower member 380 (the part connecting the protrusions 383 and the protrusions 383a at the front end side) is abutted against the front side of the alignment protrusions 339, so that the front and rear position of the middle member 330 can be appropriately determined with respect to the lower member 380.

This makes it easier to avoid misalignment between the third flow path configuration portion 336, which is a component of the middle member 330, and the detection sensor SE1, which is a component of the lower member 380.

The guide protrusion 384 is formed in a horizontally elongated oval shape, is inserted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370, and limits the displacement of the slide displacement member 370. That is, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to a range in which the guide protrusion 384 is disposed inside the supported hole 371a.

As a result, it is possible to prevent a collision between the slide displacement member 370 and the protrusion 383, so that, for example, the end of the displacement in the forward direction is determined at the position where the slide displacement member 370 and the protrusion 383 collide. The durability of the protruding portion 383 can be improved compared to the structure. Therefore, the guiding effect of the protruding portion 383 can be continued for a long time.

Note that even if the guide protrusion 384 is damaged, it is not a part that would immediately affect the operation of the slide displacement member 370, but functions as a part to prevent collision with the protrusion 383. Therefore, although the guide protrusion 384 is normally designed with a strength that allows it to be used for a set period of time (for example, 3 years) without damage, after the guide protrusion 384 is damaged, the protrusion 383 The strength of the guide protrusion 384 and the protrusion 383 may be designed taking into consideration that they will be used in a state where they collide with the slide displacement member 370. That is, the lifespan of the guide protrusion 384 may be set to less than a set period (for example, two years), and the design may be such that the strength of the protrusion 383 can withstand the remaining period. In this case, the degree of freedom in setting the resin material used for the lower member 380 and the degree of freedom in its shape can be improved.

The guide protrusion 385 is arranged with a gap width slightly longer than the left-right width of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, and is formed so that the thin plate portion 371 can be placed in the gap. The displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to displacement on the left and right inner sides of the guide protrusion 385. Thereby, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the front-rear direction can be caused by a small displacement in the left-right direction.

The guide elongated hole 386 is an elongated hole formed with a left-right width that allows the cylindrical protrusion 375 of the slide displacement member 370 to be inserted therethrough. The direction of displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the front-rear direction by the cylindrical protrusion 375 being guided by the guide elongated hole 386.

The curved surface portion 387 is a contact surface for guiding the ball flowing down below the middle member 330. In this embodiment, the ball that has entered the out port 71 is guided to flow down, and the details will be described later.

A fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 388 with the screw head facing downward. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the fastening screw from being conspicuously visible. Further, the insertion hole 388 is arranged on the left and right outer sides and on the back side of the range where the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged. This can reduce the possibility that the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 388 will block the view of the ball passing near the detection sensor SE1 or through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1.

As described above, the slide displacement member 370 has a plurality of parts, namely, the guide protrusion 385 for the thin plate part 371, the guide protrusion 384 for the supported hole 371a, the recessed part 372, and the lower protrusion 373. It is guided by the protrusion 383, the guide hole 386 for the cylindrical protrusion 375, the partition plate 338 for the upper protrusion 376, etc., and is displaced in the front-back direction. As a result, the load during guidance can be shared among multiple positions, so it is possible to avoid applying the load locally, and avoid damage to the slide displacement member 370 and the guide portion that guides the slide displacement member 370. Can be done.

As can be seen from this, the sliding displacement member 370 is not guided by a single member, but is guided by at least a plurality of members, the middle member 330 and the lower member 380. That is, the sliding displacement member 370 has at least a pair of upper protrusions 376 guided by the partition plate portion 338 of the middle member 330, and the recessed portion 372 guided by the protrusion portion 383 of the lower member 380.

Therefore, if the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are poorly assembled and there is a large misalignment, the movement of the sliding displacement member 370 will be hindered. Here, since the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 are parts that continuously configure the ball's flow path, it is preferable to keep the misalignment small, and by making the displacement of the sliding displacement member 370 good, it is possible to ensure that the misalignment is small.

In other words, if the positional deviation of the lower member 380 with respect to the middle member 330 becomes too large, the slide displacement member 370 will not be displaced properly. , control can be performed to issue an error notification based on the possibility that the relative arrangement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is incorrect.

This prevents the player from continuing to play with the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 in a poor relative positioning, reducing the possibility of the player suffering an unexpected disadvantage.

Next, details of the internal structure of the sorting device 300 will be explained. Note that, here, a configuration related to the falling of the ball inside the sorting device 300 and a configuration that enters the downstream path of the ball will be mainly described.

15 is a front view of the receiving member 163 and the distribution device 300, FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 taken along the line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15, and FIG. FIG. 18 is a sectional view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the distribution device 300 taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG.

In the figures from Fig. 15 to Fig. 18, the opening and closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a state in which it is disposed in the front position. First, the details of the flow path of the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 will be described.

A ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6(b)) rolls on the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b. The ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b passes through the opening 312 of the upper member 310 and is guided to the first flow path forming portion 334 of the middle member 330. The first flow path configuration section 334, the second flow path configuration section 335 that follows, and the third flow path configuration section 336 that follows are all configured as inclined flow paths that slope downward, and the connected flow paths is formed in a spiral shape forming an angle of 90 degrees when viewed from above.

That is, the first flow path component 334 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down to the front side in the front-to-rear direction, the second flow path component 335 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down in a left-to-right direction rotated 90 degrees based on the flow direction of the ball flowing down the first flow path component 334, and the third flow path component 336 is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down to the back side in the front-to-rear direction rotated 90 degrees in the same direction as the previous rotation direction based on the flow direction of the ball flowing down the second flow path component 335.

In this way, by forming the flow path in a spiral shape with a right-angled bending angle, it is possible to reduce the extent to which the flow speed of the ball increases toward the downstream side. To be more specific, the ball flowing down the first flow path forming part 334 accelerates toward the front side, and the subsequent flow direction at the second flow path forming part 335 does not have a front-rear component. It is possible to realize a flow mode in which the influence of acceleration in the component 334 is suppressed. Furthermore, in the third flow path forming part 336 following the second flow path forming part 335, the flow is directed backward, which is opposite to the acceleration direction in the first flow path forming part 334, so that the flow is received from the acceleration in the front and rear direction. It is possible to realize a flow pattern with less influence.

Therefore, unlike a flow pattern in which the ball flows consistently in the same direction (e.g., to the left), it is easier to prevent the ball's flow speed from becoming excessively fast downstream. In other words, it is easier to make the ball's flow speed uniform throughout the entire flow path, which has the effect of keeping the player's attention on the ball high and making it easier to prevent the player from losing sight of the ball.

For example, it is also possible not to form the second flow path component 335, but forming the second flow path component 335 makes it easier to prevent clogging and backflow of the balls. If the second flow path component 335 is not formed (if the left-right length of the second flow path component 335 is 0), that is, if the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336 are connected, it becomes necessary to reverse the flow direction of the balls by 180 degrees from the flow toward the front to the flow toward the rear at the connection point. In this case, the switching angle of the flow direction of the balls is large, and in particular the speed direction needs to be reversed back and forth, making it difficult to make the balls flow smoothly, and the balls are likely to become stuck, clogged, or backflow, which may cause malfunctions.

In contrast, as in this embodiment, if the flow direction switching angle is 90 degrees or less (90 degrees in this embodiment), the ball's speed direction does not reverse, so the ball can flow smoothly, making it easier to avoid the ball becoming stuck, clogging, or flowing back.

The flow path shape at the connection end of each flow path component 334 to 336 will be described. At the connection end of the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, the above-mentioned symmetrical protrusion 161f is arranged as a part that guides the flow of the ball in a manner that bends the flow direction of the ball.

The symmetrical protrusions 161f are formed so that the portion located downstream of the ball is further back from the path of the ball than the portion located upstream of the ball. For example, the width of the opposing symmetrical protrusions 161f is longer than the width of the adjacent partition plate portions 338. In addition, the rear ends of the left and right ends of the opposing symmetrical protrusions 161f are positioned closer to the front than the flow path side of the second flow path configuration portion 335 near the open portion 335a (see FIG. 17).

Thereby, when the ball collides with the symmetrical protrusion 161f, it is possible to prevent the ball from being excessively decelerated or from causing a backflow of the ball.

Further, at the connecting end between the second flow path forming part 335 and the first flow path forming part 334, the side wall part 334a formed in a curve at the front left and right ends of the middle member 330 bends the flow direction of the ball. It is formed as a part that guides the flow of the ball.

In addition, at the upstream end of the first flow path forming part 334, a curved protrusion 334b is formed that protrudes upward from the downstream surface of the first flow path forming part 334 with a curved surface shape (see Figure 16) that descends toward the front side, and is formed as a part that guides the downstream flow of the ball in a manner that bends the downstream direction of the ball.

That is, the ball that has passed through the opening 312 rolls on the curved protrusion 334b, flows down the first channel forming section 334, and contacts the side wall section 334a while flowing down, thereby switching the direction of flow, and passing through the second channel forming section 334. The liquid flows down the flow path forming part 335, contacts the symmetrical protrusion 161f while flowing down, switches the flow direction, flows down the third flow path forming part 336, and reaches the discharge hole 337.

The side wall portion 334a is formed in a shape that can be engaged with the protruding support portion 161d of the fixed member 161 and aligned. In other words, the side wall portion 334a is supported by being sandwiched between the left and right protruding support portions 161d, and misalignment in the left-right direction is restricted, so that the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 can be aligned in the left-right direction.

The longitudinal inclination angle and length ratio of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 will be described below. With regard to the longitudinal inclination angle, the first flow path component 334 has an inclination angle of approximately 7 degrees relative to the horizontal, the second flow path component 335 has an inclination angle of approximately 5 degrees relative to the horizontal, and the third flow path component 336 has an inclination angle of approximately 5 degrees relative to the horizontal. That is, the inclination angle is set to the maximum in the first flow path component 334, and a slightly gentler common inclination angle is set in the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336.

Regarding the length, each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 has a front frame part 333 formed in a square shape in top view as an inner side surface, and the same center as the center of the square formed by the front frame part 333. It is formed so that the outer side surface is a large square. Here, in this embodiment, the length of one side of the front frame portion 333 is 21 mm, and the length of one side of the above-mentioned large square is 45 mm, so that a flow path with a width of 12 mm is created around the periphery. It is formed.

Therefore, for a normally used 11 mm diameter sphere, the clearance with the flow path is set to 1 mm total on both sides of the sphere, so the sphere flows down with almost no misalignment in the width direction. Considering that the distance between the base plate 60 (see Figure 2) and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) is set at approximately 19 mm, this is a small clearance, and misalignment of the sphere as it flows down can be suppressed.

Of the portions constituting the ends of each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 arranged on a square surrounding the square-shaped front frame part 333, the upstream end of the first flow path configuration part 334 is Since only the constituting curved protrusion 334b is arranged inside (on the front side) of the apex of the square, the first flow path forming section 334 is connected to the second flow path forming section 335 and the third flow path forming section 336. It's relatively short.

In terms of actual measurements when viewed from above, the channels formed by the second channel forming section 335 and the third channel forming section 336 have approximately the same length (33 mm between sphere centers), and the length is as follows. The length is approximately 1.5 times the length of the flow path formed by the first flow path forming member 334 (22 mm between sphere centers).

The longitudinal inclination angle and length ratio of each of the flow path components 334-336 described above explain that the time required for a ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334-336 is not constant. In other words, the time it takes for a ball to pass through the first flow path component 334, which has the maximum inclination angle and the shortest flow path length, is shorter than the time it takes for a ball to pass through the second flow path component 335 and the third flow path component 336, which have a gentler inclination angle and a path length 1.5 times longer.

In this embodiment, by configuring it in this manner, the ball can be displaced to the front side early on when passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, and the ball's visibility can be reduced by being partially hidden by the non-transparent resin part of the detection sensor SE1, switching the state to one where the ball is closer to the player and has high visibility. This makes it easier to avoid situations where the player loses sight of the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

Furthermore, when the visibility of the ball is high, by slowing down the speed of the ball, the player does not need to quickly move his/her line of sight towards the ball, reducing the burden on the player who focuses on the ball (eyeball movement). eye strain) can be reduced.

When focusing on the balls flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336, which have high visibility in this way, the balls flow down in the left and right direction along the second flow path forming part 335. Compared to the case where the ball flows down in the front-rear direction along the third flow path forming part 336, the amount of displacement of the ball when viewed from the front is smaller, which reduces the gaming burden on the player who focuses on the ball. , can be minimized when focusing on the ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336.

In other words, since the lengths and inclination angles are equivalent, the time required for the ball to pass through the second flow path component 335 and the time required for the ball to pass through the third flow path component 336 are equivalent, but since the amount of displacement of the ball when viewed from the front is different, the apparent flow speed of the ball (the displacement speed of the ball when viewed from the front) is slower for the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336 than for the ball flowing down the second flow path component 335.

The only place where the ball's flow path changes is at the rear end of the third flow path component 336, where the player's burden is minimized and the player's attention is easily drawn to the ball, and in other areas the ball's flow path is the same for each of the flow path components 334 to 336. Therefore, the player's line of sight is naturally likely to be focused on the rear end of the third flow path component 336, and the game burden on the player who focuses their gaze in this way can be effectively reduced.

In addition, in order to ensure the player's field of vision when focusing on the rear end of the third flow path component 336, in this embodiment, an opening 335a is formed on the front side of the second flow path component 335 (see Figure 17), which makes it possible to prevent the flesh of the second flow path component 335 from obstructing the line of sight toward the third flow path component 336.

Furthermore, the symmetrical protrusion 161f disposed inside the open portion 335a is formed only with the portion necessary for contacting and guiding the flowing ball, and the formation of shaped portions is omitted above and below it. In other words, the symmetrical protrusion 161f is formed as a thin plate-like portion on the top and bottom, and space is secured above and below it (see FIG. 18). Therefore, compared to when the symmetrical protrusion 161f is formed with thickness on the top and bottom, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the line of sight toward the rear end of the third flow path configuration portion 336 will be obstructed by the symmetrical protrusion 161f, and visibility can be improved.

Further, the configuration is such that the balls deviating from the opening/closing plate 65b and heading toward the outlet 71 gather toward the viewing side centering on the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 5). In particular, in this embodiment, the ball entering the out port 71 flows down below the third flow path forming part 336, contacts the curved surface part 387 of the lower member 380, and is discharged downward.

Therefore, assuming that the ball flowing down the third flow path structure 336 is viewed obliquely from the upper front side, the ball entering the out port 71 flows down the back side of the third flow path structure 336 . Therefore, the ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 and the ball entering the out port 71 are visually recognized as being overlapped from front to back, so pay attention to the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336. The total number of balls that enter the field of view increases.

In other words, regardless of whether the ball enters the specific winning port 65a and flows down the third flow path component 336, or whether the ball does not enter the specific winning port 65a and enters the out port 71, the ball will enter a field of view that draws attention to the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

Therefore, regardless of the ease with which the balls are directed toward the specific winning port 65a, i.e., the configuration of the nails set into the base plate 60 (the so-called quality of the gauge), the rear end of the third flow path component 336 (the part that attracts the player's attention) is positioned at a position that overlaps in the front-to-rear direction with the position where most of the shot balls (excluding balls that enter the other winning ports 63, 64, 140) gather. This allows the balls flowing down to efficiently guide the player's gaze to the rear end of the third flow path component 336.

As described above, the visibility at the position closer to the front side is improved, but in addition, in this embodiment, the visibility at the position closer to the back side is improved except for the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336. It is configured to reduce the

For example, on the inner surface of the front frame portion 333 of the middle member 330, a light diffusion processed surface 333b is formed in a shape similar to a prism to produce a light diffusion effect. In FIG. 17, the portion visually recognized as having a sawtooth shape is the light diffusion processed surface 333b, which is formed over almost the entire inner periphery of the inner surface and above and below.

When light diffusion occurs, the light is diffused in multiple directions, making the entire surface appear to be shining, and while it is possible to make the surface appear to be shining brilliantly, the light blocks the view, making the visibility of the area behind it poor. According to this embodiment, visibility is poor when light is irradiated from the light-emitting means 351 of the substrate 350, and conversely, when light is not irradiated, visibility can be improved at least compared to when light is irradiated.

On the other hand, if there is an object blocking the light, the shadow of the object will be seen as a black dot, making its position easier to determine.

Processed surfaces similar to the light diffusion processed surface 333b are also formed in other parts. For example, there is a light diffusion processed surface 319a formed on the back side of the left and right external protrusions 319, a light diffusion processed surface 332e formed on the back side of the front frame of the rear frame portion 332, etc. (Fig. 17 reference).

Further, a processed surface formed in a similar shape is a plate-shaped part extending to the back side of the second upper surface part 314b of the upper member 310, and which is attached to the front frame-shaped part 333 of the middle member 330 in the assembled state. Examples include a light diffusion processed surface 314c formed on the upper surface side of the portion to be covered, and a light diffusion processed surface 340 formed over the entire lower surface of the portion on the front side of the rear frame portion 332 of the middle member 330. be done.

In this embodiment, due to these configurations, the flow paths formed in a spiral shape from each of the flow path components 334 to 336 have light diffusing surfaces formed on the back side, bottom side, inner surface of the spiral, and upper surface of the spiral, achieving the effect of changing visibility due to light irradiation.

When no light is irradiated onto the light diffusion surface, from the player's perspective looking at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 from the front side, the ball that has changed direction left or right from the third flow path component 336 is hidden by the front frame portion 333, making it immediately difficult to see.

Furthermore, let's look at the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 held by the sensor holding frame 389 and fallen, from the perspective of the player who visually recognizes the ball flowing down the third flow path configuration section 336 when viewed diagonally from above. However, since the line of sight passes through the light diffusion processed surface 340, the light is irradiated onto the light diffusion processed surface 340, making it difficult to identify the ball after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 and fallen. .

In this embodiment, as will be described later, control is performed so that the profit obtained by the player changes depending on how the ball flows down the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336.

Therefore, in order to understand how the ball has flowed down from the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336, it is necessary to check the behavior of the ball at the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336. , it is possible to further improve attention to the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336.

On the other hand, if light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, it is possible to create a state in which the shadow of the ball is easily visible as a black spot. In this way, by switching between the presence and absence of light irradiation depending on the situation, it is possible to switch between good and bad visibility of the ball. Also, depending on whether or not a ball is placed in front of the black spot, it is possible to create a situation in which the black spot is hidden by the ball, and a situation in which the black spot is visible and not hidden by the ball.

As described above, the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 are formed in the vicinity of each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, but the flow formed by each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 consistently It is formed on the side surface that does not come into contact with the ball flowing down the channel.

This prevents the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 from being scraped off by contact with the sphere, so the shape of the light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 can be maintained for a long period of time, and the light diffusion effect can be maintained.

Further, it is possible to prevent the balls from coming into contact with the light-diffusing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340, thereby preventing the balls from flowing down or being subjected to deceleration effects. In addition, by ensuring the visibility inside the channel, the visibility of the ball is reduced even while the ball is flowing down the channel formed by the channel components 334 to 336. This can be avoided.

The light diffusion surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 may be formed on the flow path side. In this case, depending on the size of the prism, it is possible to create both the effect of light diffusion and the effect of decelerating the ball by colliding with it.

In the front frame portion 333 of the middle member 330, the formation of the light-diffusion processed surface 333b is omitted at the fastening position with the fastened portion 316 due to the difficulty of processing, and the visibility remains high without countermeasures. there is a possibility. Therefore, in this embodiment, the visibility of the fastening screws is reduced.

That is, by utilizing the fact that the fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 316 is made of metal and is non-transparent, it can be used to hide a portion where it is difficult to form the light diffusion processed surface 333b. When the front frame portion 333 is irradiated with light, the light diffusion processed surface 333b shines brilliantly, and in the portion where the formation of the light diffusion processed surface 333b is omitted, the fastening screws reflect the light and shine, so that the light is diffused. The visibility of the rear side of the front frame portion 333 when viewed from the front side can be reduced, including the portion where the formation of the processed surface 333b is omitted.

The light-diffusion processed surface 332e of the middle member 330 is formed on the back side of each of the flow path components 334 to 336, and its purpose is not only to make it shine brilliantly, but also to protect the substrate 350 disposed on the back side. and causing the state switching device 360 to function as a blindfold. In particular, since the state switching device 360 is arranged on the back side of the board 350 (see FIG. 17), the board 350 acts as a blindfold, making it easy to prevent the state switching device 360 from being seen by the player.

The board 350 is accommodated in a supported manner in the rear frame-shaped part 332 of the middle member 330, and is arranged with a gap between the bottom and the bottom of the rear frame-shaped part 332 at the left and right center parts, and can slide into the gap. A displacement member 370 is arranged (see FIG. 18). That is, the substrate 350 is arranged at a position where the slide displacement member 370 is sandwiched between the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 and the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 .

To be more specific, the substrate 350 is supported such that the lower part 353 is sandwiched between the rear frame part 332 from the front and back at the left and right ends (see FIG. 17). At this support location, the lower bottom of the rear frame portion 332 is provided with a thick wall portion 332f (see FIG. 16), and near the left and right center position, there is a gap due to the lack of this wall thickness. The slide displacement member 370 can be placed in the gap (see FIG. 18).

As shown in FIG. 18, the upper part 352 of the substrate 350 enters the inside of the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310, and is arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 164f formed on the intervening member 164 in the front and rear directions.

Therefore, by irradiating light from the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper portion 352, the light diffusing surface 164f of the intervening member 164 can have a brilliantly shining effect, and further, the visibility of the area on the back side of the intervening member 164 can be reduced.

Here, the light emitting means 351 disposed on the upper part 352 irradiates light near the lower end of the light diffusion processed surface 164f. Since it is formed in the entire vertical direction, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized as light having a wide vertical width. Therefore, from the player's perspective, it can appear as if light is emitting from above and below the specific winning hole 65a.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the light diffusion surface 164f is positioned at the center of the left and right of the receiving member 163. However, even if it is positioned behind the detection sensor SE1, the detection sensor SE1 will obstruct the view and will not be clearly visible. Therefore, if it is formed within the gap between at least one pair of detection sensors SE1, a sufficient effect can be achieved.

The lower portion 353 of the substrate 350 is positioned so that light is directed toward the sealing member 313 and the portion below it through which the balls flow, as will be described in more detail below.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, switching of the flow path of the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 and its significance will be described. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 19 and 20, FIGS. 15 to 18 will be referred to as appropriate.

Figure 19 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15, and Figure 20 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15. In Figures 19 and 20, when shown, the opening and closing plate 65b is shown in a closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in a state disposed in a rear position.

Here, the four left and right detection sensors SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame 389, the flow of the ball to each detection sensor SE1, and the functions of each detection sensor SE1 will be described.

The four detection sensors SE1 are arranged symmetrically in two sets, and include a special chance detection sensor SE11 and a normal detection sensor SE12, which share the same function. The special chance detection sensor SE11 is arranged on the inside in the left-right direction, and the normal detection sensor SE12 is arranged on the outside in the left-right direction.

The function of these four detection sensors SE1 is different from that of the detection sensor SE1 located behind the opening and closing plate 65b. The detection sensor SE1 located behind the opening and closing plate 65b is a ball entry sensor that causes the payout of prize balls. In other words, when a ball that has entered a specific winning opening 65a is detected as having entered the detection sensor SE1 behind it, a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 10 for each detection) are paid out to the player by the payout control device 111 (see Figure 4).

On the other hand, the detection sensor SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame 389 does not function as a detection sensor that pays out prize balls, but rather as a detection sensor that detects balls entering the machine and changes the game state after the big win game ends.

As described later, in this embodiment, the detection sensor SE1 disposed in the sensor holding frame 389 is used to switch whether or not to transition to a high probability state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection sensor SE1 may function as a ball entry sensor to switch whether or not the next jackpot will be won.

When the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front position (see FIGS. 17 and 18), the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so that the thin plate part 371 covers the upper side of the definite displacement detection sensor SE11, and the through hole of the definite displacement detection sensor SE11 is The ball is prevented from passing through. Therefore, the ball passing through the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is guided by the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member, and is guided to the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

The front surface 376a of the upper protrusion 376 that faces the ball is formed in an arc shape with a concave flow path side, so that the ball can flow smoothly toward the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), the slide displacement member 370 is retracted backward from above the definite displacement detection sensor SE11, and is inserted into the through hole of the definite displacement detection sensor SE11. Passage of the ball is allowed.

That is, which detection sensor SE1 the ball passes through corresponds to the arrangement (front position or rear position) of the slide displacement member 370. Then, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 during the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game is controlled to be the probability variation state. In other words, if the ball is not detected to have passed through the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, but has passed only through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to the normal state (or time saving state). ).

Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the types of jackpots are variable jackpot and normal jackpot. In order to realize this, in this embodiment, different operation patterns of the slide displacement member 370 are prepared for each type of jackpot.

In other words, in the case of a guaranteed jackpot, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operating pattern that allows the ball to easily pass through the through-hole of the guaranteed jackpot detection sensor SE11, and in the case of a normal jackpot, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operating pattern that makes it difficult for the ball to pass through the through-hole of the guaranteed jackpot detection sensor SE11 and makes it easy for the ball to pass through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12; details of this control will be described later.

In this way, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is directly connected to the profit that the player can obtain, and the arrangement naturally attracts the attention of the player. On the other hand, many fraudulent acts in which the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is illegally changed have been discovered, and countermeasures against such acts are important.

As a premise, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is switched depending on whether or not the electromagnetic solenoid 361 of the state switching device 360 is energized. That is, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is not energized, the plunger and sliding portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are placed on the right side by a biasing spring (not shown), and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is placed on the front side. By being placed on the side, the slide displacement member 370 is maintained in the front position.

On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger and slide portion 362 of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 are moved to the left by electromagnetic force, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 (see FIG. 13, the portion inserted into the recessed portion 378 of the slide displacement member 370) is displaced toward the rear side, thereby maintaining the slide displacement member 370 in the rear position. This is the normal operating mode, and there is a one-to-one correspondence between the energization of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370.

A person who commits the above-mentioned fraud may, for example, insert a thin metal wire such as a piano wire into the sorting device 300 through the ball dispensing opening or the gap between the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). There is a possibility that the thin metal wire is pressed against the slide displacement member 370 and the slide displacement member 370 is pushed to the back side, thereby attempting to fraudulently create a state in which the ball can enter the accurate change detection sensor SE11. be.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the sliding displacement member 370 is arranged such that the thin plate portion 371 is disposed below the lower bottom portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 18), so when a thin metal wire is passed through the third flow path forming portion 336 and pressed against the sliding displacement member 370, it is difficult to press the thin plate portion 371 against the front end portion, and the thin plate portion 371 is pressed against the upper protrusion portion 376. The front side surface 376a of the upper protrusion portion 376 is curved to release the load to the left and right sides as described above, so that even if the thin metal wire is pressed against it, the load can be released to the left and right sides, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the sliding displacement member 370 is improperly displaced to the rear position.

In addition, the path taken to reach the sliding displacement member 370 is not a straight line but a spiral, and the sliding displacement member 370 itself is located far away (approximately 10 cm) from the front side to the rear side of the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1), making it difficult for the thin metal wire to reach the sliding displacement member 370 in the first place.

These configurations also have the effect of improving the design freedom of the configuration of the state switching device 360. That is, in the past, in order to deal with the above-mentioned fraudulent acts, the position of the sliding displacement member 370 was often maintained by mechanically devising (displacement regulation) the mechanism that transmits the driving force, and in such cases the configuration of the state switching device 360 was limited. In contrast, in this embodiment, by configuring the sliding displacement member 370 so that it is difficult to apply load to it in the first place, it is possible to partially omit the conditions required for the state switching device 360, and the design freedom of the state switching device 360 can be increased.

In addition, when applying a pressing load to the slide displacement member 370 with a thin metal wire passed through the third flow path forming section 336, the thin metal wire itself will cause the ball to flow down the third flow path forming section 336. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to reach the probability change detection sensor SE11.

As mentioned above, the profit a player can obtain varies greatly depending on whether the ball passes through the through-hole of the special bonus detection sensor SE11 or the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, so it is desirable to avoid erroneous balls as much as possible.

In conventional models, it was common to configure the system to restrict balls from entering the normal detection sensor SE12 when balls are permitted to enter the special rate detection sensor SE11. However, in this embodiment, no movable parts are provided to restrict balls from entering the normal detection sensor SE12 when balls are permitted to enter the special rate detection sensor SE11 (see Figures 19 and 20), and the system is configured to allow balls to enter the normal detection sensor SE12 as well.

Even with this configuration, if at least one of the 10 balls flowing down passes through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the probability variation state after the jackpot game is ensured. In this embodiment, based on this idea, by omitting the arrangement of the movable member that normally opens and closes the detection sensor SE12, it is possible to reduce the material cost and the product cost. Further, since no movable members are disposed, there is a good effect that maintenance due to failure or malfunction of the movable members is not required, and the usage life of the pachinko machine can be extended beyond the lifespan of the movable members.

On the other hand, as a device other than the movable member, in order to guide the ball to the appropriate detection sensor SE1, the shape of the flow path and the arrangement of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 were improved. The shape and shape have been devised. That is, a mechanism that prevents more balls than expected from flowing to the normal detection sensor SE12 when the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position is provided in a portion fixedly disposed inside the flow path (i.e., a protrusion). This is achieved by the shape of the mounting portions 317, 318, 319). This will be explained below.

First, we will explain how to improve the shape of the flow path. The lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming part 336 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal as it goes toward the center in the left-right direction (the partition plate part 338 side) in the transverse direction. (See Figure 15).

This inclination angle is set to be the same angle and direction as the longitudinal inclination of the second flow path component 335, so that it is possible to reduce the bouncing of the ball (bouncing away from the partition plate portion 338) when the ball flows from the second flow path component 335 to the third flow path component 336.

This inclination in the short direction allows the positioning of the balls flowing down the third flow path component 336 to be closer to the partition plate portion 338. Therefore, as the balls flow from the rear end of the third flow path component 336 to the detection sensor SE1 side, they can be positioned closer to the partition plate portion 338, reducing the possibility of the balls accidentally passing through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (detection sensor SE1 positioned away from the partition plate portion 338) when the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the rear position.

In addition, regardless of the inclination of the lower bottom surface 336a in the lateral direction, the left-right direction path of the flow path constituted by each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 is formed only by the second flow path forming part 335. Since the inclination direction is on the left-right center side (partition plate portion 338 side), the speed in the left-right direction is generated inward in the left-right direction. This can also reduce the possibility that the ball will accidentally pass through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 located apart from the partition plate section 338).

Next, the arrangement and shape of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 will be described. The left and right inner protrusions 318 are the first to be positioned adjacent to the ball that has flowed down the third flow path component 336. The left and right inner protrusions 318 are the smallest of the protrusions 317, 318, 319, but are positioned closer to the front than the center of the detection sensor SE1 and closer to the front than the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370, so that they come into contact without fail with the ball that passes the rear end of the third flow path component 336 while sliding against the partition plate 338.

The protruding end surfaces of the left and right inner protrusions 318 are configured as curved surfaces that are concave downward when viewed from the front (see FIG. 15), and the rear end side of the protrusion is formed to extend outward and downward to the left and right than the front end side of the protrusion, so that the front and rear ends are connected by a concave curved surface (see FIG. 17). Therefore, a ball that passes through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and abuts against the left and right inner protrusions 318 receives a load in a direction that is a mixture of a left and right outward component and a downward component, and flows downward.

On the other hand, since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are small, the load received from the left and right inner protrusions 318 alone does not determine whether the ball flows downward or outward, but rather functions solely as a momentum imparting force. Furthermore, since the left and right inner protrusions 318 are positioned upstream of the slide displacement member 370, the momentum imparted to the ball occurs regardless of the position of the slide displacement member 370.

The flow of the ball after it comes into contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318 will be explained in different cases. When the slide displacement member 370 is positioned in the front position, the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 while coming into contact with the upper protrusion 376 and the front-rear long protrusion 317 (see Figure 18), and flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12.

The protruding end of the long front-rear protrusion 317 has the same purpose as the upper protrusion 376. That is, since it is formed as a curved surface for switching the flow direction of the ball, the radius of curvature of the curved surface is approximately the same as the radius of curvature of the front side 376a of the upper protrusion 376. As a guideline, the upper protrusion 376 forms a curved surface that starts on the inner left and right sides and ends at a position rear of the center position of the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11 when viewed from above (see FIG. 17), while the long front-rear protrusion 317 forms a curved surface that starts on the ceiling surface of the flow path and ends at a position close to the end position (rear end position) of the front side 376a at the front position of the slide displacement member 370 when viewed from the left and right (see FIG. 18).

Here, the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes downward to the left and right outer sides, and the ball, which is given momentum to the left and right outer sides by contacting with the left and right inner protrusions 318, utilizes the momentum. Since the ball flows outward to the left and right, the ball can flow down smoothly.

Furthermore, the left and right outer protrusions 319 are formed above the ball flowing down in the left and right outward direction, and by suppressing the ball bouncing, the ball can flow down smoothly. Since the purpose of the left and right outer protrusions 319 is not to switch the downward direction of the ball but to suppress the ball's bounce, its shape is significantly different from the front and rear elongated protrusions 317, and the protruding ends are connected to the probability change detection sensor. It is formed as a curved surface with a large radius of curvature that extends from above SE11 to above normal detection sensor SE12.

In particular, in this embodiment, the left and right external protrusions 319 are disposed closer to the front than the center of the opening of the detection sensor SE1 (i.e., the center of the flow path) (see FIG. 19), so when the left and right external protrusions 319 and the ball come into contact in the vertical direction, the center of the ball is likely to be disposed rearward of the center of the thickness of the left and right external protrusions 319. Therefore, when the left and right external protrusions 319 and the ball come into contact in the vertical direction, a load having a rearward component is likely to be applied to the ball, which makes it possible to prevent the ball from flowing back toward the front.

With these configurations, it is possible to easily prevent ball clogging and backflow of balls when a plurality of balls flow down.

When the slide displacement member 370 is disposed at the rear position, the thin plate portion 371 and the upper protrusion 376 are retracted to the rear of the longitudinally elongated protruding portion 317, so that the ball is moved closer to the longitudinally elongated protruding portion 317. flows in contact with.

The surface shape of the protruding end (curved surface) of the long front-rear protrusion 317 is shaped so that the normal passes through the center of the third flow path component 336, and the center of the thickness is located directly behind the center position of the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, so it is easy to apply a load to the ball that it comes into contact with that has a suppressed left-right component. This load functions as a load that flows the ball diagonally downward and forward, because the protruding tip of the long front-rear protrusion 317 is shaped like a concave curved surface (see Figure 20).

Therefore, if the ball does not go all the way to the right due to the momentum from the left and right inner protrusions 318, it will be subjected to a load from the front and rear long protrusions 317 diagonally downward and flow toward the probability change detection sensor SE11.

Depending on the location of impact with the front-rear long protrusions 317, there is a concern that the ball may bounce back to the front side (causing a backflow). However, in this embodiment, as described above, the ball is given momentum diagonally downward to the left and right by contact with the left and right inner protrusions 318. Therefore, even if the ball bounces back to the front side, it will only collide with the rear end of the lower base of the third flow path component 336 (see Figure 20) or the rear side surface of the front frame portion 333 (see Figure 19), making it easier to avoid the ball flowing back through the third flow path component 336.

What is unique about this embodiment is that even when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned at the rear and the ball flows toward the special rate detection sensor SE11, the ball is displaced outward to the left and right due to the load from the left and right inner protrusions 318, just as it is when the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned at the front and the ball flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12. The use of this will be described later.

The slide displacement member 370 is configured to be able to slide between a front position and a rear position. If the slide displacement member 370 performs a closing operation (movement from the rear position to the front position) while the ball is flowing down the third flow path component 336 toward the slide displacement member 370, a forward load may be applied to the ball, and a load may be applied in a direction (forward) that causes the ball to flow backward through the third flow path component 336.

In order to prevent this, it is preferable to control the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370. For example, if the closing operation is controlled to be completed before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370, the possibility of the ball colliding with the slide displacement member 370 that is in operation can be eliminated, so there is a possibility that the ball will flow backwards. can be made less sensitive.

In addition, the front surface of the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 is formed as a curved surface facing outward to the left and right, and the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are arranged so as to collide with the ball without exception. The effect of guiding the ball that has reached the rear end of the flow path forming portion 336 to the left and right sides can be produced. This makes it difficult for the balls to flow backwards.

In addition, the opening movement of the sliding displacement member 370 (movement from the front position to the rear position) is not a movement in a direction opposite to the ball, but rather a movement away from the ball, so even if the movement is performed when the ball is resting on the thin plate portion 371 of the sliding displacement member 370, a load that pushes the ball back toward the front is unlikely to be generated. Therefore, even if the opening movement is controlled to be performed at any timing without taking into account the position of the ball, it is not thought to make it easier for the ball to flow back.

When the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 while rotating forward on the upper surface of the slide displacement member 370 (still in the preliminary stage of flowing outward to the left and right), the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 suppresses the rotation with respect to the ball. Since a load is applied in the direction (direction of backward rotation), the rotation of the ball can be stopped, and the flow of the ball can be stopped and it is easy to shift it to free fall.

As a result, when the sliding displacement member 370 opens while the ball is rolling on the thin plate portion 371, it is easier to prevent the ball from being guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by the momentum of its previous rolling, and it is easier to guide the ball to the special chance detection sensor SE11.

In the present embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 equipped with the above-mentioned sorting device 300, we will explain how the sorting device 300 looks from the player's point of view. Below, as an example, we will explain cases where the angle of the line of sight relative to the horizontal direction is different.

Figure 21 is a front view of the variable prize-winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, Figure 22 is a perspective view of the variable prize-winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXII in Figure 16, and Figure 23 is a perspective view of the variable prize-winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIII in Figure 16.

As a premise, the player who operates the pachinko machine 10 can play the game in any posture he or she likes, except for gripping and rotating the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 1). For example, play the game by keeping your head sufficiently away from the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) with a horizontal line of sight or in a direction that is inclined downward by about 5 degrees from the horizontal (see FIG. 22). Alternatively, the player may play the game by bringing his or her head close to the pachinko machine 10 and looking at the inside of the glass unit 16 with a line of sight that is tilted downward by about 30 degrees from the horizontal (see FIG. 23). In general, the former provides a wider field of view, but makes it difficult to notice small details, while the latter provides a narrower field of view, but makes it easier to notice small details.

Figure 21 is shown as a reference, and the following explanation will be mainly made by comparing Figures 22 and 23. For convenience, Figures 21 to 23 show the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In FIG. 21, the light emitting means 351 is shown by imaginary lines. Note that the light emitting means 351 are arranged symmetrically (see FIG. 13), but only the left half is shown to facilitate understanding. The function of the light emitting means 351 located at the top has been described above, so here we will explain the three light emitting means 351 in the left half located in the lower portion 353.

First, the upper light emitting means 351 irradiates light towards the seal member 313. As described above, the seal member 313 is formed in a red transparent color, so when light is irradiated from the light emitting means 351, the periphery of the seal member 313 is illuminated in red. This can increase the player's attention to the seal member 313 and its surroundings. As the seal member 313 is disposed directly above the third flow path forming portion 336 (see Figure 18), it can draw attention to the third flow path forming portion 336.

Note that on the front side of the upper light emitting means 351, the formation of the light diffusion processed surface 332e is omitted (see FIG. 18). Thereby, the light from the light emitting means 351 can be prevented from being visually recognized as being stretched in the vertical direction by the light diffusion processed surface 332e, and the area around the seal member 313 can be illuminated intensively.

Although there are no limitations to the light emission control, for example, during a jackpot game, in a situation where it is desired to draw attention to the ball flowing down the third flow path component 336, it is possible to control the light to be irradiated onto the sealing member 313, thereby drawing attention to the sealing member 313 and naturally guiding the gaze to the rear end of the third flow path component 336 located below it.

Next, the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side correspond to positions directly above the probability change detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, respectively. That is, the control of the light emitting means 351 is such that when the ball enters the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the light emission means 351 disposed directly above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 emits light, while when the ball enters the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the light emission means 351 is caused to emit light. When the ball enters the ball, by controlling the light emitting means 351, which is usually placed directly above the detection sensor SE12, to emit light, the player can be informed of the location where the ball has passed.

Light emitted from these light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side is directed toward the light diffusion processed surface. That is, the light emitting means 351 on the left and right sides are arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 332e (see FIG. 18), and the light emitting means 351 on the left and right outer sides are arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 319a (see FIG. 17). ing. The light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 332e are formed above and below each part.

Therefore, the position where the light from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized is not limited to the height position of the LED of the light emitting means 351, but is formed as a vertically spread range (as a band-shaped light extending vertically). visible). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, even if the angle of the player's line of sight changes, the visibility of the light from the light emitting means 351 can be improved.

The angle of the downward inclination from the horizontal in FIG. 22 (5 degrees) is the same as the inclination angle of the third flow path component 336. Therefore, in FIG. 22, the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 arranged at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 can be seen. However, because the slide displacement member 370 displaces in the front-to-rear direction, it is difficult to grasp the changes caused by the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 from this field of view.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 23, when viewed from a direction at an angle of 30 degrees from the horizontal, the vertical width of the field of view at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is narrower, making it more difficult to confirm the change in the flow pattern of the balls at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 compared to the view in Figure 22. However, in this field of view, it is easier to grasp the displacement of the upper protrusion 376 when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

The through hole 332a for placement of the inner member 330 is formed as an opening of a minimum size sufficient to pass the upper protrusion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370 through, so that the state switching device 360 (see FIG. 17) placed inside the rear frame portion 332 can be hidden so as to be difficult to see.

During the actual jackpot game, a plurality of balls are guided to the specific prize opening 65a during the round game and flow down each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 in order. When a plurality of balls are arranged in each of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 at the same time, there is a possibility that the line of sight toward the balls on the back side is obstructed by the balls on the front side.

For example, when multiple spheres are placed in the third flow path configuration portion 336, the spheres are placed in the same position in FIG. 22. Therefore, the sphere in the front hides the sphere in the back.

Further, when the ball flows toward the normal detection sensor SE12 side, it flows outward from the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 to the left and right. After the ball comes off from the third flow path forming part 336 in the left and right direction, visibility is reduced due to the light diffusion processed surface 333b of the front frame part 333, so the movement of the ball during the process of coming off from the third flow path forming part 336 in the left and right direction It is preferable to grasp the flow from the downstream end position (ball P1 position) of the second flow path forming part 335 to the upstream end position (ball P2 position) of the third flow path forming part 336. If there is a ball (a ball that is slightly displaced from the third flow path forming part 336 in the left-right direction), the ball that is in the process of coming off from the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 in the left-right direction is hidden by that ball.

In other words, whether the ball has flowed to the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 can be grasped by visually checking whether the flow direction of the ball has switched to the left or right outside at the rear end of the third flow path configuration part 336, and it is sufficient to pay attention to the inside and right edge periphery of the third flow path configuration part 336. In contrast, in this embodiment, at the connection position between the third flow path configuration part 336 and the second flow path configuration part 335 on the upstream side in the line of sight, it is configured so that the ball can flow down a path that includes the inside and right edge periphery of the third flow path configuration part 336 (movement from the position of ball P1 to the position of ball P2). Therefore, depending on the arrangement of the ball flowing down the upstream side, it may be impossible to grasp whether the ball has flowed to the probability change detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In addition, in the line of sight of FIG. 23, the spheres flowing through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 and the spheres flowing through the second flow path component 335 are clearly separated in terms of their vertical arrangement, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the upstream spheres are obscured. On the other hand, because the vertical width of the flow path visible at the rear end of the third flow path component 336 is narrow, the area of the spheres visible in the direction is smaller.

In particular, as described above, the ball that passes through the rear end of the third flow path component 336 flows diagonally downward to the right regardless of the position of the slide displacement member 370, and then the flow path switches between the direction toward the special bonus detection sensor SE11 and the direction toward the normal detection sensor SE12. Therefore, the area of the ball visible at the switching position is smaller than when the ball flows straight down or the flow direction of the ball switches to the right.

Another possible mode of switching is a case where the switching position is located further upstream, such as when the ball's flow path is switched either directly down or to the right. For example, if the left and right inward protrusions 318 are not formed and the ball heading toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 flows directly downward from the rear end of the third flow path forming section 336, the switching position is at least the third flow path. This is the position behind the center line of the component 336.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the switching position is displaced to the right of the rear of the center line of the third flow path component 336, the ball falls below the lower bottom of the third flow path component 336 (falls by the vertical difference between the upper surface of the lower bottom of the third flow path component 336 and the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, see FIG. 18), and in addition to the effect of part of the ball being hidden by the third flow path component 336 itself, the ball is displaced to the left and right outward from the range visible through the third flow path component 336, so that part of the ball is hidden by the front frame portion 333.

Therefore, the visible area of the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 from the player's perspective becomes smaller, making it difficult to determine which flow path the ball has flowed down. Become. Thereby, it is possible to further improve attention to the ball flowing down near the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336.

In this way, according to this embodiment, advantages and disadvantages are set for each of the multiple directional views (see Figures 22 and 23) described as directional views for identifying the flow direction of the balls flowing down the rear end of the third flow path configuration 336. As a result, even when it comes to the way the sorting device 300 is viewed, the player is not required to play in a one-sided manner, but can be allowed to adjust and select the viewing method he or she prefers, and a variety of play styles can be provided, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the game.

Ensuring the player's field of view can be achieved by various methods, but in this embodiment, in particular, by forming a gap between the second upper surface portions 314b of the upper member 310, the third flow path forming portion Since the roof portion 336 can be in a state as if removed, the third flow path forming portion 336 can be easily recognized.

The following describes the visibility in the direction of view in Figures 22 and 23 on the front side of the sorting device 300. Although not shown in Figures 22 and 23, the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 (see Figure 5) are arranged on the front side of the sorting device 300, and the light transmitted through them is reduced due to the thickness of the members, so the view is obstructed.

Because the area obstructed by the front design member 162 is narrower, it may be easier to see the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 when viewed in the direction of Figure 23 than when viewed in the direction of Figure 22.

The fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 basically have a flat shape as described above, and are configured so that refraction of light is difficult to occur (see FIG. 12). Thereby, it is possible to avoid poor visibility of the sorting device 300.

Even the parts that cannot be made flat due to functionality are formed so as to minimize the impact on visibility. For example, the protruding support parts 161c to 161e for positioning and engaging the sorting device 300 are designed to prevent players looking at the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 from obstructing the line of sight of the player facing diagonally downward. It is located outside the line of sight (upper rear, left and right outer, left and right lower).

Further, for example, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed at the center height of the sphere, and is formed thinly with the minimum thickness necessary for strength (see FIG. 18). As a result, even if the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is placed between the ball and the player's eyes, it is possible to prevent the entire ball from being hidden. visibility can be ensured.

Balls that miss the specific winning hole 65a flow down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162, and flow down toward the outlet 71. The effect on visibility of balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 will be explained below.

Figures 22 and 23 show an example of the arrangement of balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 when the opening and closing plate 65b is open. When the opening and closing plate 65b is open, balls flowing down from above the opening and closing plate 65b land on the opening and closing plate 65b and are guided toward the specific winning port 65a, so balls flowing down toward the outlet 71 are balls that deviate to the left or right of the opening and closing plate 65b. These balls flow down between the extension parts 162b and 162c, and are guided by the inner rail 61 to flow down toward the outlet 71.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, from the player's perspective, the balls flowing through the inner rail 61 are located below the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, so the balls flowing through the inner rail 61 cause each flow path to be It is possible to easily avoid a decrease in the visibility of the balls flowing down the constituent parts 334 to 336.

On the other hand, the ball flowing down the inner rail 61 flows at a gentle angle toward the center in the left-right direction of the gaming area, similar to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335. , similar to the ball flowing down the second channel forming part 335, has the effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the left and right center position of the gaming area. This effect guides the player's line of sight to the out port 71 and also to the third flow path forming section 336. That is, since the left and right positions of the out port 71 and the third flow path forming part 336 are the same (left and right center position), by moving the player's line of sight up and down, the out port 71 and the third flow path The line of sight is guided to a state where both of the constituent parts 336 are visible.

Therefore, regardless of whether the balls shot toward the play area tend to enter the specific winning port 65a efficiently (meaning fewer wasted balls during a jackpot game) or whether balls frequently stray and flow down between the extensions 162b and 162c (meaning frequent wasted balls during a jackpot game), the flowing balls can have the effect of guiding the player's gaze to the third flow path configuration portion 336.

In other words, if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the player's gaze can be guided to the third flow path component 336 as the ball flows down the second flow path component 335, and if the ball misses the specific winning opening 65a, the player's gaze can be guided to the third flow path component 336 as the ball flows down the inner rail 61.

Balls heading toward the outlet 71 are usually wasted balls and have no effect on the game, but in this embodiment, by configuring it as described above, balls heading toward the outlet 71 can have the role of guiding the player's gaze toward the third flow path configuration section 336.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the ball may flow along the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b and pass through the front side of the second flow path component 335, potentially reducing the visibility of the second flow path component 335.

On the other hand, according to the configuration of this embodiment in which the second winning opening 140 and the electric device 140a are arranged above the center position of the specific winning opening 65a, and the third flow path component 336 is arranged below the center position of the specific winning opening 65a, the second winning opening 140 and the electric device 140a can prevent the balls from flowing down, so that it is possible to prevent the balls from flowing down the front side of the third flow path component 336. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the visibility of the third flow path component 336 and the surrounding area at its rear end is reduced due to balls flowing down the front side of the opening and closing plate 65b.

In this embodiment, the time required for the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be secured by the shape growth of the channel forming parts 334 to 336, but this arrangement is likely to cause this problem. Efforts are being made to avoid an increase in space. That is, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, from the player's perspective, the arrangement interval between the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 as a guide for the arrangement of the third flow path forming part 336. is formed short.

Moreover, since the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned below and behind the specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 18), when the player's line of sight is directed diagonally downward and rearward, which is a frequent line of sight as shown in FIG. 23, it appears as if the sliding displacement member 370 is positioned so close that its outline is embedded into the outline of the specific winning opening 65a.

In addition, the flow path of the ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a, which is configured to be long from left to right, and passes through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1 located at both left and right ends is collected below the center of the specific winning opening 65a via each of the symmetrical flow path components 334-336. This makes it possible to shorten the time it takes for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 compared to when the ball flows left and right down the left and right width of the specific winning opening 65a. In addition, the structure required for the ball's flow path can be made to have a shorter left and right length the further down it is, making it easier to place it near the lower edge of the curved inner rail 61.

In particular, in this embodiment, the design idea is to arrange the specific winning a prize opening 65a close to the out opening 71, but instead of having a structure in which the ball flows directly downward from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path forming part 335, the second flow path forming part 335 By adopting a structure in which the balls flow backward from the left and right inner ends of the flow path structure section 335 by the third flow path structure section 336, the out port 71 (disposed on the front side (upstream side) of the curved surface section 387) An opening) can be formed at a position directly below the second flow path forming portion 335. Thereby, the vertical distance between the specific winning a prize opening 65a and the out opening 71 is shortened.

In this way, by being able to shorten the vertical arrangement width and horizontal width of the specific prize opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 from the player's perspective, it is possible to shorten the vertical arrangement width and horizontal width of the specific prize opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370, so that it is possible to Since the vertical width of the range occupied by the prize opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 can be shortened, the degree of freedom in designing the gaming area can be improved.

For example, as in this embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a can be positioned near the bottom end of the play area, so that the variable winning device 65 can be effectively used in a left-right symmetrical play area.

Next, we will explain the flow of the balls after they enter the distribution device 300, and an example of the operation pattern of the movable parts (variable winning device 65, slide displacement member 370) that takes this flow into account.

First, as a premise, the sphere that has passed through the opening 312 flows down in order through the first flow path configuration section 334, the second flow path configuration section 335, and the third flow path configuration section 336 (see FIGS. 16 and 17). The time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 can be set arbitrarily, but in this embodiment, the time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336 is approximately 0.3 seconds. Designed.

That is, it takes 0.3 seconds for the ball to pass through the first flow path forming part 334 after entering the specific winning hole 65a, it takes 0.3 seconds for it to pass through the second flow path forming part 335, and it takes 0.3 seconds for the ball to pass through the second flow path forming part 335. It is configured so that it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the configuration section 336.

Therefore, even if a ball enters the specific winning port 65a immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened, the ball is configured not to reach the detection sensor SE1 located at the rear end of the third flow path configuration part 336 for 0.9 seconds. As a result, for 0.9 seconds after the opening/closing plate 65b is opened, the ball does not approach the position of the slide displacement member 370 and cannot pass through either the special detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, so the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 can be designed without worrying about the ball entering the prize by mistake.

Therefore, for example, in order to prevent erroneous winnings to the V winning sensor, which is commonly found in pachinko machines equipped with a V-probability variable attacker, there is a control to release the opening/closing board for a short time at the start of the round game R. control with naturalness) can be made unnecessary. As a result, the operation mode of the opening/closing board that opens and closes the specific winning hole becomes a natural operation, and it is possible to provide the player with an environment where he or she can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the pachinko machine equipped with the V-probability variable attacker in the above example, a ball that enters immediately after the V-probability variable attacker is released tends to cause an erroneous winning, but in the variable winning device 65 of this case, as will be described later, the ball that enters the ball immediately after the release of the V-probability variable attacker On the contrary, the entering ball produces a favorable effect (for example, the effect of hiding the movement of the slide displacement member 370 by the ball), so it is not necessary to take measures to prevent the ball from entering immediately after release. .

The time required for the ball to pass through can be set arbitrarily depending on the length and inclination of each flow path component 334-336, the shape of the inner wall of the flow path (whether it is smooth or uneven, etc.), etc.

The contents of ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of ROM 202 in main control device 110, FIG. 24(b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 and the big winning type in the special pattern, and FIG. 24(c) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal pattern.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 stores at least a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d as part of the fixed value data described above.

The first win random number table 202a is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first win random number counter, which is updated periodically (e.g., every 2 msec). If the value of the first win random number counter obtained based on the start winning matches any of the determination values specified in the first win random number table 202a, it is determined to be a jackpot with a special symbol.

The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 24(b)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is for each jackpot type. , and the type of winning hole that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that a special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the starting prize is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the win type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of special pattern 1 (drawing based on the ball entering first winning slot 64), the value of first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 9" is associated with jackpot A1 (see 202b1 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of jackpot A1, a four-round jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated with the operation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "10 to 19" is associated with the big winning type A2 (see 202b2 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of jackpot A2, a four-round jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated with the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "20 to 39" is associated with the big winning B1 (see 202b3 in Figure 24 (b)).

When a jackpot B1 is obtained, four rounds of jackpot play are executed in the second operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern X (details of which will be described later).

A jackpot B2 is defined in association with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "40 to 49" (see 202b4 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of jackpot B2, a four-round jackpot game is executed in the second operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). controlled to be displaced.

The value range of the first winning type counter C2 from "50 to 79" is associated with the big winning type C1 (see 202b5 in Figure 24 (b)).

When a jackpot C1 is obtained, four rounds of jackpot play are executed in the third operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in the operating pattern X (details of which will be described later).

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "80 to 99" is associated with a big winning type C2 (see 202b6 in FIG. 24(b)).

When a jackpot C2 is reached, four rounds of jackpot play are played in the third operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern Y (details of which will be described later).

As described above, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 drawing (drawing based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64), a four-round jackpot game is selected in any case. Therefore, it is not possible to expect a large amount of prize balls compared to the case where a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 2 lottery, which will be described later. On the other hand, since a 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time than a 15-round jackpot game, it is possible to start hitting the ball earlier in order to obtain a subsequent jackpot.

On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the ball entering the second prize opening 140) results in a jackpot, if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99", the jackpot a is defined in correspondence (see 202b7 in FIG. 24(b)).

When jackpot a is reached, 15 rounds of jackpot play are played in the third operating pattern of the variable winning device 65 (details of which will be described later), and the sliding displacement member 370 is controlled to displace in operating pattern X (details of which will be described later).

As described above, if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing for special pattern 2 (a drawing based on a ball entering second winning port 140), 15 rounds of jackpot play are selected in either case. Therefore, if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing for special pattern 2, a larger number of prize balls can be paid out compared to if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing for special pattern 1, and this can increase the motivation of the player to play the game to draw for special pattern 2 (a game in which a ball is fired to enter second winning port 140).

In addition, since the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is fixed to operation pattern X, there is little possibility that the player will be disadvantaged significantly even if the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is not ensured. Therefore, when there is a third operation pattern that has the disadvantage of slightly worsening the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 but the advantage of making it easier for the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a, by setting the operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 for the jackpot in the lottery for special pattern 2 to the third operation pattern, the impact of the disadvantage can be reduced and only the advantage of being able to shorten the time required for the jackpot game can be highlighted.

In other words, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the jackpot game in the lottery for special pattern 2 will be drawn out, making it possible to realize a jackpot game that is pleasant for the player (good time efficiency in paying out prize balls).

Note that the setting of the jackpot type of the special symbol 2 is not limited to this. For example, as the jackpot type of the special symbol 2, a jackpot type in which the slide displacement member 370 is displacement-controlled according to the operation pattern Y may be provided. Further, this jackpot type may be provided at a small percentage (for example, about 20%).

Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the slide displacement member 370, and it is possible to prevent the player from playing the jackpot game aimlessly. That is, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370, make the player happy and sad at the timing of the displacement operation, and increase the player's interest.

As mentioned above, while the special symbol is changing, the probability of winning the regular symbol increases, the fluctuation time of the regular symbol becomes shorter (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 140a when the regular symbol becomes a hit decreases. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second winning hole 140, it becomes easier to draw the special symbol 2. Therefore, once you can transition to the variable probability state of the special symbol, the variable probability state of the special symbol that is likely to result in a jackpot of the special symbol, and that is likely to result in a jackpot a (jackpot with good profit balance) when it becomes a jackpot, will be repeated. This makes it easier for the player to win a large amount of prize balls. As a result, the player can play the game while having a strong expectation that the special symbol will change to the probability state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 24(c)) is a data table in which winning judgment values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of normal symbols, "5 to 28" are stipulated as the judgment value for winning a normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 24(c)). Also, in the high probability state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" are stipulated as the judgment value for winning a normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 24(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the ball passing through the normal winning hole 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referenced to determine whether or not a normal symbol is a winning symbol. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the judgment value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is stipulated for each display mode.

Figure 25 shows the time-based changes in the operation pattern of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the operation pattern of the sliding displacement member 370 of the sorting device 300 in the first round for each jackpot type.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines that a jackpot has been awarded in the special winning determination process, it starts controlling the jackpot game (of the determined type) after the special winning display (pattern changing presentation) has ended. Below, we will explain the operation control of the opening and closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the sliding displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300 that is performed when a jackpot game is awarded. Note that in the explanation of FIG. 25, FIG. 24 will be referred to as appropriate.

In this control example, the driving mode differs depending on the type of jackpot only in the first round, and the driving mode is the same from the second round onwards. Therefore, the driving mode in the first round for each type of jackpot will be explained below.

In the case of a jackpot A1 or A2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening and closing plate 65b operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) ends, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that a timer means (not shown) keeps the opening and closing plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round of round play R begins.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state that allows balls to enter the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. In the first operating pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that this 0.2 second opening operation is performed at 1.0 second intervals, causing the opening and closing plate 65b to operate for a long period of time.

The initial opening time is set to a period longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning port 65a if game balls are continuously shot, and shorter than the period required for a specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) to enter the specific winning port 65a.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has been won) ) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round round game R ends.

The opening time of 0.2 seconds in the first operation pattern is set in order to limit the number of balls that enter the left and right sides of the specific winning a prize opening 65a to one while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This is an opening time setting to prevent multiple balls from entering the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a (hereinafter also referred to as "balls entering consecutively"). It is not our intention to limit the number of balls to one. That is, even if the opening time is 0.2 seconds, it is possible for one ball to arrive at each of the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a and enter the specific winning hole 65a at once.

In the case of a big win A1, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening and closing plate 65b, and in this embodiment, the drive control is performed so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the front position to the rear position at the same time that the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state.

Therefore, the ball that enters the specific winning port 65a passes through each flow path component 334-336 (see Figure 19), passes in front of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11 (see Figure 20).

At this time, the number of balls placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side is limited to one, so visibility is not reduced by other balls. Therefore, the player can easily see the situation in which the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In the case of a big win A2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set based on the drive control of the opening and closing plate 65b, and in this embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced from the front position to the rear position at the same time that the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced to the open state, and after 0.8 seconds has elapsed, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to be displaced from the rear position to the front position.

As described above, the time required for the ball to pass through each flow path component 334-336 (see FIG. 17) is set to approximately 0.9 seconds, so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the front position before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370.

Therefore, a ball that enters the specific winning port 65a passes through each flow path component 334-336 (see Figure 17), passes above the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see Figure 17).

At this time, since the number of balls disposed in each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 on one side of the left and right sides is limited to one, the visibility of the other balls will not be reduced. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the situation in which the ball passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

The displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370, 0.8 seconds, is set based on the idea that this is a time shorter than the time it takes for the ball to pass through each of the flow path components 334 to 336, and a time longer than the time it takes for the ball to reach the third flow path component 336.

That is, according to the present embodiment, since the ball passes through the second flow path forming part 335 and reaches the third flow path forming part 336 in about 0.6 seconds after entering the specific winning hole 65a, Even if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a just before the end of 0.2 seconds as the opening time of the opening/closing plate 65b, the slide displacement member 370 can be displaced.

Therefore, as long as a ball enters the specific winning port 65a, the movement of the sliding displacement member 370 can be hidden by the ball placed in the third flow path configuration part 336 regardless of the timing of the ball's entry (see FIG. 22). This makes it possible to prevent the displacement movement of the sliding displacement member 370 from being conspicuous, and increases the attention to the ball flowing down each flow path configuration part 334-336 as a ball entering the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

Note that the displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is not limited to 0.8 seconds. For example, it may be set to 0.4 seconds. In this case, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be caused before the ball reaches the third flow path forming part 336, so there is a low possibility that the line of sight will be obstructed by the ball, and the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be caused. can be visually recognized by the player.

However, even in this case, since the second flow path forming part 335 is arranged close to the front plate part of the fixed member 161 and closer to the front side than the slide displacement member 370, the player's line of sight is tends to collect in the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming part 335. That is, by drawing attention to the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 (for example, by displaying a message such as "Pay attention to the flowing ball!" on the third symbol display device 81), the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is This makes it easier to avoid being visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, each of the channel forming parts 334 to 336 is configured to be divided at the left and right centers, so if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a on one side of the left and right, the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a. By paying attention to the rear of the third flow path constituting section 336 on the side that is not being moved, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually recognized without being obstructed by the falling balls (see FIG. 22).

In this way, in the case of a jackpot A1 or A2, the number of balls placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side is limited to one, which increases the attention to that ball and allows the player to easily see whether the ball passes through the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of jackpot B1 or jackpot B2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the second operation pattern. The MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that when the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, a timer means (not shown) holds the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed. After the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to be in the open state in which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 1.0 seconds. In the second operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that this 1.0 second opening operation is performed at 1.0 second intervals, thereby causing the opening/closing plate 65b to operate for a long time.

The initial opening time is set to a period longer than the period during which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning port 65a if game balls are continuously shot, and shorter than the period required for a specified number of game balls (10 in this embodiment) to enter the specific winning port 65a.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has been won) ) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round round game R ends.

The 1.0 second opening time in the second operation pattern is set as the time during which multiple balls can enter the specific winning opening 65a on either the left or right side while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This opening time is set to allow multiple balls to enter the specific winning opening 65a in succession on either the left or right side (hereinafter also referred to as "successive balls entering").

In this control example, the firing interval of the balls is set at 0.6 second intervals, so even if the falling interval of the balls has not changed from the time of firing, the opening/closing plate 65b opens once every 1.0 seconds. During this time, two balls can enter the specific winning hole 65a. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to every 1.0 seconds, the next ball passes through each channel forming section 334 before two balls pass through each channel forming section 334 to 336. - 336 can be regulated.

In the case of a jackpot B1, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the above-mentioned operation pattern X. In the case of a jackpot B2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot B1, the ball that passes through each of the flow path configuration parts 334-336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of a jackpot B2, the ball that passes through each of the flow path configuration parts 334-336 passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

At this time, the appearance of each of the flow path components 334 to 336 differs depending on whether there is one ball or two (or more) balls arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on either side. When there is only one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, the visibility is not reduced by other balls, as in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, so the game A person can easily visually confirm the situation in which the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, if there are two (or more) balls arranged in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 on either side, the ball on the upstream side is placed in the line of sight of the player looking at the ball on the downstream side. This may reduce the visibility of the ball downstream. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 with respect to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334 to 336. .

In the case of a jackpot C1, jackpot C2, or jackpot a, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening and closing plate 65b operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) ends, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that a timer means (not shown) keeps the opening and closing plate 65b in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round of round play R begins.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to an open state that allows the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a, and the opening and closing plate 65b is made to operate for a long period of time up to the first operating time T1.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has been won) ) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning opening 65a, and the first round round game R ends.

In this control example, the opening and closing plate 65b remains open during the first round of play R, so a situation may arise where multiple balls enter the specific winning hole 65a in succession on either the left or right side. On the other hand, the opening interval of the opening and closing plate 65b is not limited, so unlike the second operating pattern, it is possible that the next ball will enter each of the flow path components 334-336 before two balls have passed through each of the flow path components 334-336. Therefore, compared to the second operating pattern, the third operating pattern is more likely to cause a situation in which the visibility of a ball placed downstream of each of the flow path components 334-336 is reduced by a ball placed upstream.

In the case of a jackpot C1 or a, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the above-mentioned operation pattern X. In addition, in the case of a jackpot C2, the MPU 201 controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot C1 or a, the ball that passes through each flow path configuration unit 334-336 passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11, and in the case of a jackpot C2, the ball that passes through each flow path configuration unit 334-336 passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

In this way, the control mode is set to keep the opening and closing plate 65b in the open state regardless of whether the ball is passed through the special detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, but because the time it takes for the ball to reach the sliding displacement member 370 is managed structurally, the possibility of the sliding displacement member 370 malfunctioning due to the ball getting caught can be eliminated.

At this time, the appearance of each flow path component 334-336 differs depending on whether there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side or whether there are two balls. When there is one ball placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on the left or right side, as in the case of jackpots A1 and A2, the visibility is not reduced by the other balls, so the player can easily see the situation where the ball passes through the probability change detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when two balls are placed in each of the flow path components 334-336 on either the left or right side, the upstream ball may be placed in the line of sight of the player looking at the downstream ball, which may reduce the visibility of the downstream ball. This can improve the attention of players who want to know whether the ball will pass through the special chance detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down each of the flow path components 334-336.

In the third operation pattern, there is no limit to the timing at which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a in the first round of the round game R, so compared to the second operation pattern, each of the flow path components 334 to 336 The arrangement of the balls tends to become chaotic. Therefore, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 tends to decrease.

On the other hand, the fact that there is no restriction on the timing at which balls can enter the specific winning port 65a has the effect of allowing the progress of the round game R to be carried out early. In other words, it is easier to quickly meet the round end condition (the passage of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the entry of a specified number of balls (10 in this embodiment) pachinko balls) and it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being drawn out.

In particular, when a jackpot of special symbol 2 is hit, the sliding displacement member 370 is driven and controlled in operation pattern X with a 100% probability, so if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, it is guaranteed that the ball will pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11. In this case, the player's attention to the detection sensor SE and the sliding displacement member 370 is low to begin with.

Therefore, even if the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, the disadvantage felt by the player is small. In the third operation pattern, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed to deteriorate, but priority is given to avoiding the jackpot game from being prolonged, thereby realizing the progress of the jackpot game in a short period of time and increasing the player's interest in the jackpot game.

Regardless of the type of jackpot, when the first round of round play R ends, the timer means controls the operation of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c to keep the opening and closing plate 65b closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and the second round of round play R begins after the first interval time Int1 has elapsed.

In the second round, as in the start of the first round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b from a closed state to an open state to open the specific winning opening 65a, causing the opening/closing plate 65b to operate for a long period of time. From the second round onwards, the sliding displacement member 370 is constantly maintained in the front position, so that the ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 and is discharged (see Figure 17).

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls have won) is met in the second round of the round game R, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state and close the specific winning hole 65a, and the second round of the round game R ends.

After that, just like the second round, the round games R from the third round to the final round (fourth round) are repeated with a first interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that the opening and closing plate 65b moves between the closed state and the open state to open and close the specific winning hole 65a.

Then, when the final round game R ends, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven so that the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) have elapsed. The jackpot game is controlled and the jackpot game ends as the time elapses.

Note that in this control example, a case has been described in which the short opening displacement operation of the opening/closing plate 65b and the drive control of the slide displacement member 370 are executed only in the first round, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be executed in all rounds, or it may be executed in rounds other than the first round (for example, the third round, the eighth round, the 12th round, etc.).

In this way, according to this control example, the manner in which the ball enters the opening and closing plate 65b can be changed by changing the opening pattern (first to third operating patterns) of the opening and closing plate 65b, and the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 located downstream of each of the flow path configurations 334 to 336 and the third flow path configuration 336 can be changed. This can motivate a player who pays attention to the ball passing through the detection sensor SE1 located downstream of the third flow path configuration 336 to devise a way to launch the ball.

For example, a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 may occur due to a plurality of balls being placed in each of the flow path components 334 to 336 at the same time. By intentionally widening the firing interval of the balls (in the jackpot type of the third operation pattern), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1. In addition, in the 1st operation pattern, since the entry of the ball into the specific winning a prize opening 65a is restricted, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 regardless of the firing mode.

On the other hand, if the firing interval of the balls is widened, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a will be extended, so the round game R may be extended. That is, the player can choose how to play the round game R between a game mode that prioritizes the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 and a game mode that prioritizes avoiding the delay of the round game R.

For example, in order to visually confirm the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, a short period (e.g., 1.0 second) may be allowed to pass after the start of the round game R, allowing the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a ball is placed in the third flow path component 336 at the timing when the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 occurs (0.8 seconds after the start of the round game R in the case of operation pattern Y), and therefore it is possible to avoid the displacement action of the slide displacement member 370 being blocked by the ball.

On the other hand, if the period until the ball is ejected is set aside, the period until the prescribed number of balls enters the specific winning hole 65a is extended, so the round game R may be extended. That is, the player can choose how to play the round game R between a game mode that prioritizes the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 and a game mode that prioritizes avoiding the delay of the round game R.

For example, according to the present embodiment, each of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 and the slide displacement member 370 are configured symmetrically, and a ball can be entered from either the left or right side through the specific winning opening 65a.

That is, for example, the above-mentioned firing mode that widens the pitch interval between balls and the firing mode that increases the period until the ball is launched is maintained when the ball enters on the left side, and the ball is maintained in any firing mode when the ball enters on the right side. Even if you play the game by firing, the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Specifically, at least the first ball is fired to the right side, and some (for example, the second) ball is fired as a firing mode in which the ball aimed at the specific winning hole 65a is shot to the left and right. All you have to do is shoot the ball to the left and the remaining balls to the right.

In this case, by focusing on the balls flowing down the left flow path rather than on the balls flowing down the right flow path of each flow path component 334-336, it is possible to visually confirm whether or not the balls flowing down the left flow path pass through the probability change detection sensor SE11 while avoiding having your line of sight blocked by other balls. In addition, in this case, since balls are constantly being shot toward the right side of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to avoid an extension of the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a, and it is possible to avoid the round game R becoming protracted.

Note that the purpose of this separation of firing balls to the left and right is not to ensure that only one ball enters the left channel. In particular, it is only necessary to limit the number of balls placed in each of the left channel components 334 to 336 to one during approximately 0.9 seconds until the number of balls passing through the left channel, and for other periods. In this case, it is sufficient to hit the ball separately so that it enters the left and right channels arbitrarily.

As a result, when the opening width above the specific winning hole 65a is not long as in this embodiment (for example, due to the arrangement of the electric accessory 140a and the arrangement of nails (see FIG. 2), the ball enters the path through a small number of paths. Even in the case where the balls heading towards the specific winning opening 65a collide with each other and one of them spills to the right and left outside of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation. In FIG. 2, the nails are arranged asymmetrically, but the nails may be arranged symmetrically.

Next, the structure of the operating unit 500 fastened and fixed to the back side of the game board 13 will be explained. The operation unit 500 is a unit that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 from the back side.

Figure 26 is a front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and Figure 27 is a rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. Note that in Figure 27, the liquid crystal display device (variable display unit 80) disposed in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the rear side is shown as being visible through the opening 511a. Also, Figure 2 will be referred to as appropriate in the explanation of Figures 26 and 27.

The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape with an open front side from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511 . The back case 510 is formed into a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, capable of dividing the display region of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view).

The rear case 510 is provided as a flat plate extending from the front end of the outer wall 512 along the rear surface of the game board 13 (e.g., arranged parallel to the rear surface), and includes a support plate portion 513 that provides surface support for the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2).

The support plate portion 513 has a positioning protrusion 513a that protrudes toward the front side and has a shape that can fit into a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and a number of insertion holes 513b that are drilled so that fastening screws that are fastened to the base plate 60 can be inserted through them.

The rear case 510 is positioned relative to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning protrusion 513a into the fitting recess of the base plate 60, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b and screwed into the base plate 60, thereby fixing the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 together, thereby improving the overall rigidity of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500.

Note that the shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, the convex part may have a slightly smaller outer shape than the inner shape (in this embodiment, circular or oval) of the fitting recess of the base plate 60, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability during assembly. It is also possible to use a protrusion having a shape (even smaller external shape). Moreover, when the internal shape of the fitting recess is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex part 513a is also made into a rectangular shape correspondingly.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the operating unit 500 includes a back case 510, a first operating unit 600 disposed on the inner right side of the back case 510, and a second operating unit 700 disposed on the inner lower part of the back case 510. and a third operation unit 800 disposed on the inner upper part of the back case 510. In addition, on the inside left side of the rear case 510, there is a substrate having a light emitting means such as an LED, and a substrate is disposed so as to cover the substrate from the front side, and is made of a light-transmitting material and has a light diffusion process applied to the entire surface. A diffuser decorative plate LB1 to be formed is provided.

Specifically, the first operating unit 600 is disposed to the right of the opening 511a, the second operating unit 700 is disposed below the opening 511a, and the third operating unit 800 is disposed above the opening 511a, all of which are disposed on the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510. First, an overview of the operation control of the operating unit 500 will be described.

Figures 28 to 35 are front views of the operating unit 500, showing an example of the operation of the operating unit 500. Figure 28 illustrates each operating unit 600-800 in a performance standby state, Figure 29 illustrates the state in which the first operating unit 600 has changed from the performance standby state of each operating unit 600-800 to the extended state, and Figure 30 illustrates the state in which the second operating unit 700 has changed from the performance standby state of each operating unit 600-800 to the extended state.

Note that in FIG. 30, the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in a state in which the surface facing the front of the covering member 787 is different from the second operating unit 700 illustrated in FIG. 29.

In Figures 28 to 35, the inner shape of the center frame 86 is shown in phantom lines. Inside, the third pattern display device 81 arranged on the rear side can be clearly seen, but outside the center frame 86, even though the base plate 60 is made of a transparent resin material, the view is likely to be obstructed by the nails arranged on the base plate 60, the various winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140, etc., and the through gate 67 (see Figure 2). Therefore, for example, when arranged outside the center frame 86 as shown in Figure 28, the visibility of each operating unit 600 to 800 when viewed from the front is likely to be reduced.

Although the frame shape of the center frame 86 is different from that of the center frame 86 shown in FIG. 2 in order to match the configuration of the operating unit 500, its role is the same. Furthermore, although the inner frame shape of the center frame 86 has a curved shape projecting downward on the near side of the third operation unit 800, the inner frame shape of the center frame 86 is not curved downward to the outer frame of the center frame 86; A circular transparent decorative thin plate is formed to protrude from the inner frame side of 86 so as to cover the third operating unit 800 from the front side. Therefore, the role of rolling the ball riding on the upper side of the center frame 86 to the left and right sides is also the same as that shown in FIG. It is arranged so as to straddle the upper side of the unit 800 from left to right.

In FIGS. 31 and 32, a state in which the third operating unit 800 changes from the performance standby state of each of the operating units 600 to 800 to the extended state is illustrated. In FIG. 31, the first decorative member 870 faces the front side and the third operating unit 800 is individually combined, and in FIG. 32, the second decorative member 880 faces the front side and a series of the third operating units 800 A combined state is illustrated.

The displacement that switches between the state of FIG. 31 and the state of FIG. 32 occurs in a displacement mode that combines linear displacement and rotational displacement, so if it is executed when the third operating unit 800 is in a performance standby state, the surrounding decorative members will collide with the decorative members 870 and 880, causing a malfunction, so it is executed when the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state.

In other words, in this embodiment, the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state (or in a state in which it has been displaced downward from the performance standby state to an extent sufficient to avoid a collision between the decorative members 870, 880) and is in a state in which the displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 is permitted in the virtual circle 800F (see FIG. 32), and is then controlled by the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) to perform a reverse displacement (switching rotation operation), as will be described in more detail below.

Figure 33 shows the third operating unit 800 in an extended state and the second operating unit 700 in an intermediate performance state displaced slightly lower than the extended state, Figure 34 shows the state in which the first operating unit 600 has displaced from the state in Figure 33 to the intermediate performance state, and Figure 35 shows the state in which the third operating unit 800 has displaced from the state in Figure 33 to a performance standby state and the first operating unit 600 has displaced to the extended state.

28 to 35, the displacement trajectory of the third operating unit 800 partially overlaps with the displacement trajectory of the first operating unit 600 or the displacement trajectory of the second operating unit 700 in a front view. Therefore, for example, when the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state (see FIG. 31), if the first operating unit 600 or the second operating unit 700 changes state from the performance standby state, there is a possibility of a collision.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the state change from the performance standby state of the first operation unit 600 is controlled to be executable on the condition that the third operation unit 800 is in the performance standby state, and the third operation By controlling the state change of the unit 800 from the performance standby state to be executable on the condition that the first operation unit 600 is in the performance standby state, the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 can It is possible to avoid overlapping when viewed from the front. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 can be improved (overlapping of the front and rear positions can be allowed).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the state change of the second operating unit 700 to the extended state is controlled so as to be executable on the condition that the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 are in a performance standby state, and the position of the second operating unit 700 when the third operating unit 800 is in the extended state is set to an intermediate performance state (see FIG. 33), thereby preventing the second operating unit 700 from overlapping with the other operating units 600, 800 in a front view. Therefore, the degree of freedom in the positioning of each operating unit 600 to 800 can be improved (overlapping of the front and rear positions can be tolerated).

In particular, the second operating unit 700 can be seen in a state where it is visible in an extended state closer to the opening 511a, and when it is visible in a state where it is slightly retracted from the opening 511a but close to the third operating unit 800. By configuring the state, the function of the second operation unit 700 as a presentation device is improved.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the first operation unit 600 performs a displacement operation on the right side of the third symbol display device 81. The second decorative rotating member 660 of the first operation unit 600 includes a box-like member 661 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. It includes a second performance surface 661b formed on the back side of the surface 661a, and a third performance surface 661c as a surface adjacent to the first performance surface 661a and the second performance surface 661b. Each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c is optionally decorated with figures, patterns, characters, and the like.

When the first operating unit 600 is in a standby state for presentation, the second decorative rotating member 660 is positioned to the right of the third pattern display device 81, in a location where visibility from the front side is likely to be reduced due to the positioning of the center frame 86. However, the first presentation surface 661a is oriented diagonally toward the player (the surface on the near side is tilted 45 degrees toward the arrow L side with arrow F-B as the reference), so that visibility of the first presentation surface 661a at the player's line of sight when viewing the second decorative rotating member 660 from inside the frame of the opening between the third pattern display device 81 and the center frame 86, in a diagonal direction through the gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81, can be improved.

On the other hand, in the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the second decorative rotating member 660 is extended to the front of the third symbol display device 81, so that the player viewing the inside of the center frame 86 can see the second decorative rotating member 660. Face directly. In this case, since the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture with the second presentation surface 661b facing straight ahead, the visibility of the second presentation surface 661b from the perspective of the player who visually recognizes the second decorative rotation member 660 is improved. can be improved.

In this way, the second decorative rotating member 660 is configured to be able to switch between the presentation surfaces 661a-661c that are visible to the player depending on its position, and is also configured to be able to switch its posture depending on its position in order to improve the visibility of each presentation surface 661a-661c that is visible to the player.

In other words, it is designed not only to change the posture in a plane parallel to the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), but also to change the angle in relation to the player's line of sight. That is, the closer the center frame 86 is placed to the center of the frame, the more the player's line of sight will be in the front and back direction, making it easier for the player to face the player directly, so visibility can be improved if the performance surface faces forward (in the direction of arrow F). Since the player's line of sight is more likely to be oblique as the player is placed closer to the center frame 86, visibility can be improved by slanting the performance surface to face the line of sight.

As the second decorative rotating member 660 is displaced, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is also displaced. The overhanging decorative portion 652b is decorated with figures, patterns, etc. on the front surface of the board, and when the first operation unit 600 is in the performance standby state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 34), the back case 510 is By being placed in the upper right corner, it is hidden from the player's view.

On the other hand, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state (see FIG. 28), the projecting decorative portion 652b is formed on the center frame 86 so as to overlap the right edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 from front to back when viewed from the front. It is configured so that it can be visually recognized by the player by being placed inside the frame.

In this state, the outer right end of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is located on the right side of the right edge of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by using the decoration on the front side of the board of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, it is possible to perform a display effect that gives the player an illusion as if the display area of the third symbol display device 81 has been expanded.

To be more specific, the right edge of the area where the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized is defined by the first operating unit 600, and when the first operating unit 600 is in the production standby state, the second decorative rotating member The left edge of the first production surface 661a of 660 and the right edge RE1 of the area where the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized generally coincide.

On the other hand, in the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the extended decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to exceed the right end RE1 of the region to the right. Therefore, by associating or matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the decoration on the front side of the plate of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, it appears as if the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is the area right end RE1. The player can visually recognize the image as if it had been enlarged beyond that point. This makes it possible to realize a surprising performance.

Examples of matching the above-mentioned display and decoration include, for example, displaying polka dots on the third pattern display device 81 and decorating the front of the plate of the protruding decorative section 652b with a similar polka dot pattern, or writing a certain number on the front of the plate of the protruding decorative section 652b in the same font as the number displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 (for example, the number to notify the winner of a lottery).

Examples of associating the above-mentioned display with decoration include, for example, a case in which six of the seven colors that make up the rainbow are displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the front plate of the protruding decorative portion 652b is colored with the remaining color, or a case in which a wooden stick is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 with its right end aligned with the right edge of the area RE1 and the front plate of the protruding decorative portion 652b is decorated with a flame-like decoration, thereby evoking the image of a fire when the first operating unit 600 is in the protruding state.

Note that the presentation mode of the overhanging decoration section 652b is not limited to one type, and multiple types of presentation modes can be configured by controlling the brightness of the overhanging decoration section 652b. The light emitting means for changing the brightness of the portion 652b will be described later.

In addition, by disposing a small liquid crystal device having a display surface on the front side instead of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, the display of the liquid crystal device can be changed in multiple types, so It is possible to avoid restrictions on the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when expanding the display area.

The object associated with the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b is not limited to a display, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (first decoration, second decoration) formed on a member of the second operating unit 700 (e.g., covering member 787), or the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (decoration of the first covering portion 875, decoration of the second covering portion 885) formed on a member of the third operating unit 800 (e.g., first decorative member 870, second decorative member 880).

Figure 36 is a front perspective view of the first action unit 600, and Figure 37 is a rear perspective view of the first action unit 600. The first action unit 600 is configured in a complex displacement manner in which the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates while changing its posture, and the protruding decorative portion 652b of the first decorative rotating member 650 is displaced relative to the second decorative rotating member 660, allowing the player to visually see the different appearances before and after the displacement.

Figure 38 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operating unit 600, and Figure 39 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operating unit 600.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the first operating unit 600 includes a fixed means 610 fastened and fixed to the back case 510, a rotating member 620 rotatably supported by the fixed means 610, A drive transmission device 630 that transmits a driving force for rotating the rotating member 620; and a supported member 640 whose one end is rotatably supported by the rotating tip of the rotating member 620. , a first decorative rotating member 650 rotatably disposed at the other end of the supported member 640, and a second decorative rotating member 660 rotatably supported by the first decorative rotating member 650. A decorative fixing member 670 is fixed to the front side of the lower half of the fixing means 610.

The fixing means 610 fixes the base member 611 while creating a space between the base member 611 disposed opposite to the bottom wall 511 of the back case 510 and the base member 611 disposed on the front side of the base member 611. A front lid member 612 is fastened and fixed to the front lid member 612.

The front lid member 612 includes a transmission arrangement part 613 for arranging the drive transmission device 630, a fixing part 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670 on the front side of the transmission arrangement part 613, and a fixing part 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670. A support fastening portion 615 for rotatably supporting the rotating member 620 inside the portion 614, and a guide elongated hole 616 formed as an elongated hole for guiding the other end of the supported member 640. Be prepared.

The guide slot 616 is formed from a unique shape that includes a mixture of straight parts and curved parts, and its details and operation will be described later.

The rotating member 620 includes a main body 621 formed in a long plate shape, a cylindrical portion 622 disposed at one end (lower end) of the main body 621 and fitted and supported by the support fastening portion 615 of the fixed means 610, a transmission long hole 623 formed in the middle of the main body 621 as a long hole extending in a linear direction, a circular through hole 624 drilled as a circular hole in the drilling direction parallel to the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 622 at the other end (upper end) of the main body 621, and a gear tooth portion 625 formed in a gear tooth shape along a part of a circle centered on the circular through hole 624.

A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the cylindrical portion 622. The torsion spring SP1 is configured such that one arm portion is brought into contact with the side wall of the main body portion 621 and the other arm portion is brought into contact with the protruding piece of the front cover member 612. The structure is such that a biasing force is generated in a clockwise direction (as viewed).

When the cylindrical portion 622 is supported, the support fastening portion 615 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 622, and a fastening screw is screwed into the female thread portion formed at the tip of the support fastening portion 615. This allows the rotating member 620 to be supported by the support fastening portion 615 so that it cannot fall off.

The transmission long hole 623 functions as a guide hole through which the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is inserted, and the circular through hole 624 functions as an insertion hole through which the tubular portion 642 of the supported member 640 is rotatably inserted and fixed, as will be described in detail later.

The drive transmission device 630 includes a drive motor 631 fastened to the front side of the front cover member 612, a drive gear 632 fixed to a drive shaft protruding to the rear side through a through hole 613a of the front cover member 612, a transmission gear 633 journaled on the cylindrical portion 613b of the front cover member 612 while meshing with the drive gear 632, and a transmission gear cam 634 journaled on the cylindrical portion 613c of the front cover member 612 while meshing with the transmission gear 633.

In addition, with the cylindrical parts 613b and 613c inserted into the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634, a fastening screw is screwed into the female threaded part formed at the tip of the cylindrical parts 613b and 613c. Thereby, the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are pivotally supported by the front lid member 612 so as not to fall off.

The front cover member 612 is formed with an arc-shaped hole 613d that penetrates along an arc centered on the tubular portion 613c, and a cylindrical portion 634a that protrudes cylindrically from the front side at an eccentric position of the transmission gear cam 634 is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 613d.

The transmission gear cam 634 is a rotating member having a gear portion that meshes with the transmission gear 633, and has the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 634a and an extension portion 634b that extends in a plate shape in the outer diameter direction from an angular position that includes the cylindrical portion 634a.

The cylindrical portion 634a is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 613d, and its front side is inserted into the transmission slot 623 of the rotating member 620. Here, the width length of the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission slot 623 is designed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 634a. This makes it possible to reduce the sliding resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a slides through the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission slot 623.

The extending portion 634b is configured to be able to enter a detection groove of a photocoupler type detection sensor KS1 fastened and fixed to the front lid member 612. Thereby, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is configured to be able to grasp the attitude of the transmission gear cam 634 by reading changes in the output of the detection sensor KS1.

The supported member 640 includes a long main body 641, a tubular portion 642 protruding from the rear side of the main body 641 with a cylindrical cross section that can be inserted into the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, a tubular portion 643 protruding parallel to the tubular portion 642, an intermediate gear 644 formed so as to be able to mesh with the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 while being supported by the tubular portion 643, a bottomed tubular portion 645 formed in a large-diameter tube with a perforated bottom on the rear side of the intermediate gear 644, and an extended support portion 646 extended toward the front side at the end opposite the end where the bottomed tubular portion 645 is located.

With the above-described configuration, driving force can be transmitted between the gear tooth portion 625 and the intermediate gear 644 by meshing with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

Note that with the cylindrical portions 642 and 643 inserted through the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644, a fastening screw is screwed into the female thread portion formed at the tip of the cylindrical portions 642 and 643. As a result, the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 are pivotally supported by the main body portion 641 of the supported member 640 so that they cannot fall off.

In the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the back side of the bottom portion is arranged close to the front side edge of the front lid member 612, and the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 can mesh with each other on the front side of the bottom portion. It has an opening 645a formed in the peripheral surface so as to have the following shape, and an insertion hole 645b formed in a circular shape centered on the center of the cylinder and through which the cylindrical support part 651a can be inserted. Note that the details of the shape will be described later.

The extended support portion 646 functions as a support portion for rotatably supporting the second decorative rotating member 660, and will be described in detail later.

The first decorative rotating member 650 includes a main body member 651 that forms an orthogonal rotation axis, a front rotating member 652 that is supported between the main body member 651 and the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, an electric decoration board 653 that is fixed to the back side of the decorative portion 652b of the front rotating member 652 and has a light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front side, a rear rotating member 654 that is coaxial with the front rotating member 652 and fastened to the rear side, a wiring receiving member 655 that is fastened to the main body member 651 from the front side and forms a cylindrical space for wiring, a front decorative portion 656 that is arranged on the front side of the wiring receiving member 655 and fastened by screwing in a fastening screw that is inserted into the main body member 651 from the back side, and an axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 that is supported on the outside of the cylindrical portion formed by the wiring receiving member 655 and the main body member 651.

The main body member 651 has a cylindrical support portion 651a that extends cylindrically from the back side, and the cylindrical support portion 651a has a pair of female threads 651b formed at the diameter position of the tip, and has a notch portion 651c that is cut out so as to reduce the wall portion on one side of a plane that passes through the female threads 651b.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is formed with a thickness that allows electrical wiring to be inserted therein, and the cutout portion 651c functions as an opening for securing an entrance for the electrical wiring.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is inserted, in order from the base end, through the center hole of the front rotating member 652, the center hole of the rear rotating member 654, the insertion hole 645b of the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the stepped ring-shaped collar C1, and the guide elongated hole 616 of the front cover member 612, and is fastened and fixed by threading a fastening screw inserted into the dish-shaped cover portion C2 into the female threaded portion 651b at the tip.

That is, the cylindrical support portion 651a, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the collar C1, and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 described above are coaxially supported on the axis O1 extending in the front-rear direction, and are guided. It is configured to be movable along the elongated hole 616.

The dish-shaped lid part C2 has an opening C2a formed in a part of its circumferential part, and in the assembled state, this opening C2a is arranged to face the notch part 651c of the main body member 651, thereby providing a path for electrical wiring. form.

Some of this electrical wiring passes through the inside of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 and is guided into the inside of the second decorative rotating member 660, where the terminals are connected to a connector arranged on the illumination board 662. The remaining wiring passes through the gap formed between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 (the gap formed on the upper side, i.e., the side that faces the main body member 651 on the upper and lower opposite sides of the semi-cylindrical portion 655a), and is guided to the back of the protruding decorative portion 652b, where the terminals are connected to the connector on the illumination board 653.

The rear rotating member 654 has gear teeth 654a formed along the circumference of the rear end thereof, and the gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 are formed to mesh with each other. Note that the gear teeth 654a are formed not over the entire circumference but along a part of the circumference so as to be sufficiently arranged for the operation described later.

The front rotating member 652 has gear teeth 652a formed as a bevel gear and a protruding decorative part 652b that protrudes radially outward. An illumination board 653 is fastened and fixed to the back side of the protruding decorative part 652b, and light from a light-emitting means arranged on the illumination board 653 can be used to light up or flash the protruding decorative part 652b.

Since the front rotating member 652 is fastened and fixed to the rear rotating member 654, the rear rotating member 654 and the front rotating member 652 rotate integrally.

The axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is rotatably supported on a circular cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portion 651d of the main body member 651 and the semi-cylindrical portion 655a of the wiring receiving member 655, and has gear teeth 657a formed as a bevel gear that can mesh with the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652.

With this configuration, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the front rotating member 652. That is, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are interlocked, and the details of their operation will be described later. In addition, the gear teeth 652a and 657a are formed not over the entire circumference but along a part of the circumference so as to be sufficiently arranged for the operation described later.

The second decorative rotating member 660 comprises a box-shaped member 661 fastened to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, an electric decoration board 662 fastened to the box-shaped member 661 inside the box-shaped member 661, and a wiring retaining plate 663 disposed between the box-shaped member 661 and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 and fastened to the tip of the semi-cylindrical portion 651d, 655a.

In this embodiment, as the box-shaped member 661 (described later) rotates, the illumination board 662 is also rotated. Where there is a possibility that the electrical wiring passing through the space may be twisted or disorganized, the function of the wiring retaining board 663, which has through holes for temporarily fixing the wiring, prevents the wiring from becoming twisted or disorganized. The aim is to avoid being placed in

Note that in this embodiment, since the electrical wiring is fixed to the illumination board 662, it is inevitable that the electrical wiring will be twisted. On the other hand, the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not caused by one or more rotations, but is a rotational displacement that is reversed at a rotation angle of 135 degrees, so it may place an excessive burden on electrical wiring or It is possible to avoid the situation where the wiring gets twisted.

The second decorative rotating member 660 is formed in a roughly rectangular parallelepiped shape and is configured to be rotatable about a rotation axis (the rotation axis formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d, 655a) that is parallel to the longest side of the rectangular side having the longest side.

The axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is supported by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a so that it cannot fall off, with the wiring retaining plate 663 functioning as a retainer. The second decorative rotating member 660 is fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, so that the second decorative rotating member 660 can be prevented from coming off the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The illumination board 662 is arranged so that the thickness direction of the plate and the thickness direction of the box-shaped member 661 match. On the side surface in the thickness direction of the illumination board 662, the first presentation surface 661a is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED, which is arranged on the front side and has its optical axis directed in the thickness direction, and is arranged on the back side and has its optical axis directed in the thickness direction. The second effect surface 661b is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED, and the third effect surface 661c is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED, which is arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second effect surface 661b) and whose optical axis faces in the width direction. It can be done.

In this way, the light emitting means disposed on the illumination board 662 functions to illuminate each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c individually, but the LED that illuminates the third performance surface 661c is located on the back side (the second performance surface 661b). By being arranged on the illuminating side), the third effect surface 661c (the surface facing upward) is illuminated when the second effect surface 661b is placed on the front side (the extended state of the first operation unit 600). When the LED emits light, the second performance surface 661b can be illuminated by light traveling at an angle from the optical axis of the LED.

That is, unlike the case where LEDs are arranged behind the illumination board 662, it is possible to avoid the light from being hidden by the illumination board 662, so that the second performance surface 661b is illuminated by the light that illuminates the third performance surface 661c. can also be illuminated. Thereby, it is possible to increase the types of presentation modes that illuminate the second presentation surface 661b, and to improve the brightness of the second presentation surface 661b during a light emission presentation.

The decorative fixing member 670 includes an illuminated board 671 on which decorative characters and figures are formed from a light-transmissive resin material so that they can be seen by the player, and which irradiates light diagonally forward to the left from the back side. . The arrangement of the decoration fixing member 670 is fixed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81, and the player's line of sight with respect to the decoration fixing member 670 is always diagonally to the right. That is, by tilting the direction of the light emitted from the illumination board 671 to the left, the light can be emitted to the side where the player's eyes are likely to be placed.

The decorative fixing member 670 has a lower edge and a right edge that are raised toward the rear side, and a front-to-rear gap is formed between the upper edge and the left edge and the front cover member 612. This front-to-rear gap functions as a gap through which the rotating member 620 passes when tilting and displacing.

FIG. 40 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the standby state, FIG. 41 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the standby state, and FIG. 42 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the standby state. 6 is a side view of the first operating unit 600. FIG. Note that to facilitate understanding of the shape, the base member 611 (see FIG. 38) and the fastening screws are not shown.

In the standby state for performance, the displacement start direction SD1 of the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is configured to be along (e.g. parallel to) the longitudinal direction of the transmission long hole 623. This makes it possible to reduce the displacement resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a starts to displace while sliding along the transmission long hole 623. In other words, when the displacement starts, there is no assistance from inertia compared to during the displacement, and the driving force that needs to be generated by the drive motor 631 tends to be large, but by configuring to reduce the displacement resistance as in this embodiment, it is possible to reduce the burden on the drive motor 631 when the displacement starts.

Further, the same is configured to hold true for the displacement start direction SD2 of the cylindrical portion 634a in the extended state (see FIG. 45). That is, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction of the cylindrical portion 634a disposed in the transmission elongated hole 623 at both end positions (acting standby state position, extended state position) of the rotating member 620 is the same as that of the transmission elongated hole 623. The displacement of the cylindrical portion 634a (that is, the shape of the transmission gear cam 634) is designed to be along the longitudinal direction (for example, parallel). Thereby, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive motor 631 when the rotation member 620 starts to be displaced from both end positions.

As shown in FIG. 41, the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decorative rotating member 650 mesh with the intermediate gear 644 from both sides. In this embodiment, since the radius R1 of the gear tooth 625 and the radius R2 of the gear tooth 654a are designed to have the same length, the rotation angle of the gear tooth 625 with respect to the intermediate gear 644 and the rearward angle with respect to the intermediate gear 644 are The rotation angle of the side rotating member 654 is the same angle.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the rear rotating member 654 can be configured to be variable depending on the design of the rotation angle (angle θ) generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

As shown in FIG. 42, the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 mesh with the gear teeth 657a of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, and the rotational driving force transmitted to the front rotating member 652 is transmitted to the second decorative rotating member 660, which is perpendicular to the rotation axis.

The rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is similar to the rotation angle of the gear tooth 657a, and the rotation angle of the gear tooth 657a is proportional to the rotation angle of the gear tooth 652a of the front rotating member 652. That is, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is proportional to the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 (see FIG. 41).

In this embodiment, the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a are configured to be the same (gear ratio is 1), so the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is the same as the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625.

Next, the displacement of the first operating unit 600 from the performance standby state will be explained in chronological order. FIG. 43 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the intermediate presentation state, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the intermediate presentation state. Further, FIG. 45 is a front view of the first operating unit 600 in the extended state, and FIG. 46 is a rear view of the first operating unit 600 in the extended state. It should be noted that illustration of the base member 611 and fastening screws is omitted to facilitate understanding of the shape.

Between the performance standby state and the intermediate performance state, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 19 degrees, and between the intermediate performance state and the extended state, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 26 degrees.

In the intermediate presentation state of the first operation unit 600, the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture with the narrow third presentation surface 661c facing the front side. In the extended state of the first operation unit 600, the second performance surface 661b is configured to face the front side (see FIG. 45).

As shown in FIG. 44, the guide slot 616 has a straight portion 616a formed on a straight line extending vertically from the upper end, and a curved portion 616b connected to the lower end of the straight portion 616a and formed on a curve (approximately an arc shape).

When the first operating unit 600 is in the intermediate performance state, the axis O1 is located at the lower end of the straight section 616a, i.e., at the connection between the straight section 616a and the curved section 616b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the axis O1 is located at the lower end of the curved section 616b.

Therefore, the displacement of axis O1 between the performance standby state and the intermediate performance state is a linear displacement along the straight line portion 616a, and the displacement of axis O1 between the intermediate performance state and the extended state is a curved displacement along the curved line portion 616b.

The first operating unit 600 is configured to be able to change state as described above, and the rotating member 620 is arranged on the base end side of the state change. That is, the rotating member 620 is displaced by receiving a driving force from the drive transmission device 630, and the supported member 640, the first decorative rotating member 650, and the second decorative rotating member 660 are driven by the displacement of the rotating member 620.

Therefore, without countermeasures, the displacement resistance generated between the rotating member 620 and the guide slot 616 may increase due to the sliding displacement of the portion guided by the guide slot 616. However, in this embodiment, the rotation member 620 This is suppressed by configuring the longitudinal direction of the guide elongated hole 616 to be along the displacement direction.

For example, the displacement of the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state (Figure 41) is a displacement that tilts downward, and the guide long hole 616 is also formed to extend downward. Also, for example, the displacement of the gear teeth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the extended state (see Figure 46) is a displacement that rises diagonally upward to the right, and the guide long hole 616 is also formed to extend diagonally upward to the right.

In this way, by aligning the displacement direction of the rotating member 620 with the longitudinal direction of the guide elongated hole 616, displacement resistance of the portion (and axis O1) that is displaced inside the guide elongated hole 616 can be reduced. Can be suppressed.

Next, referring to FIG. 47, the effect of the shape of the guide slot 616 will be described, including other effects. FIG. 47 is a schematic diagram showing the displacement amount and displacement angle of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, and FIG. 48(a) and FIG. 48(b) are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the displacement amount of the driven side of the supported member 640 when the rotating member 620 rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. Note that the positive and negative values are shown as positive downward displacement amounts and negative upward displacement amounts, and in FIG. 48(b), the values in FIG. 48(a) are shown as bar graphs.

In FIG. 47, the arrangement of the support positions of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotation of the rotation member 620 is illustrated at intervals of 10 degrees as the rotation angle of the rotation member 620, and the tension of the first operating unit 600 is The rotating member 620 in the extended position is illustrated by a solid line.

In FIG. 47, the angle θ is illustrated as the angle between the line segment connecting the axis O1 and the center of the circular through hole 624 and the line segment connecting the center of the circular through hole 624 and the center of the cylindrical portion 622.

The guide elongated hole 616 functions as a long hole that guides the end of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is disposed. The displacement in the guide elongated hole 616 is caused by the displacement of the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640, which is connected to the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620. Therefore, hereinafter, the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is also referred to as the driving side of the supported member 640, and the end of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is disposed is also referred to as the driven side of the supported member 640.

The outline of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 is explained below. The vertical displacement of the supported member 640 supported by the rotating member 620 occurs as a result of the sum of the vertical displacement of the rotating tip (the driving side of the supported member 640) caused by the rotation of the rotating member 620 and the vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 caused by the posture change of the supported member 640.

In the performance standby state, in addition to the supported member 640 being in a vertical position, the velocity component of the displacement of the rotating member 620 is larger in the left and right direction than in the vertical direction (the rotation arm is arranged at 45 degrees left and right from the vertical). range). That is, there are two conditions for reducing the displacement in the vertical direction.

Both of these conditions are reversed in the extended state, and the conditions for increasing the displacement in the vertical direction are doubled. Therefore, the configuration is such that a situation where the speed is low at the start of the downward displacement and high at the end of the downward displacement tends to occur.

Next, the details of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 will be described. The displacement (tilting displacement) of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the extended state will be described. When the rotating member 620 is tilted, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced mainly by its own weight.

Therefore, when the guide slot 616 is formed in the vertical direction, there is a possibility that the driven side of the supported member 640 will fall with force. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it is preferable to stop the first operation unit 600 in an intermediate effect state (midway position of tilting displacement, see FIG. 44).

In this embodiment, the guide slot 616 is shaped so that a curved section 616b is combined below a straight section 616a. This increases the displacement resistance on the driven side of the supported member 640 when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced down the straight section 616a due to its own weight and enters the curved section 616b. This makes it easier to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from falling too fast beyond the position in the intermediate performance state.

The displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side in the linear portion 616a will be explained. When the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a, the active side of the supported member 640 straddles the extension line of the linear portion 616a. That is, in the performance standby state, the active side of the supported member 640 is placed on the right side of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 41), and in the intermediate performance state, the active side of the supported member 640 is placed on the left side of the linear portion 616a. (See FIG. 44). Therefore, while the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced without changing direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 is reciprocated in the vertical direction.

As a result, the vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 can be kept small compared to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, so that the driven side of the supported member 640 can be kept in a linear portion. 616a, the supported member 640 can be shown to the player in a displacement manner as if it were being rotated around the driven side of the supported member 640.

According to this displacement mode, sliding displacement in the left and right direction can be caused by utilizing the run-up by rotational displacement of the supported member 640 around the driven side, so that the entire supported member 640 can be moved from the start of displacement. The load required for displacement can be kept low compared to the case of sliding displacement in the left-right direction. Therefore, the load required when the supported member 640 starts operating can be reduced, and the level of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be reduced. Thereby, the cost of the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

On the other hand, while the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is kept small, the displacement of the driving part of the supported member 640 is sufficiently ensured in association with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, and the rotation direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 based on the driving part of the supported member 640 is maintained counterclockwise when viewed from the rear (the direction is not switched). As a result, as described above, the direction of the change in posture of the supported member 640 and the rotation direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 are maintained without being switched (reversed).

As a result, it is possible to avoid giving the impression to the player that the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are reciprocating (returning motion), and the second decorative rotating member 660 The displacement mode can be a forceful displacement mode.

Even in a situation where the displacement of the driving part of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 is sufficiently ensured, the displacement direction of the driving part of the supported member 640 has a large horizontal component and is a displacement in the direction along the direction of gravity (downward), so the load required to start displacing the rotating member 620 can be reduced, and the level of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be lowered. This allows the cost of the drive motor 631 to be reduced.

The action caused by the curved portion 616b will now be described. The state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned at the connection between the straight portion 616a and the curved portion 616b is defined as the intermediate performance state of the first operating unit 600. As described above, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state is 19 degrees. Therefore, the state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned at the curved portion 616b roughly corresponds to the angle width range of 20 degrees to 45 degrees in FIG. 48.

First, as a premise, there is no need to use curved portions in the guide slot 616. In other words, the guide slot 616 may be configured with only straight portions, regardless of whether or not it uses any bending portions to increase the displacement resistance in the intermediate performance state as described above.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, by deliberately adopting the curved portion 616b, it is intended to prevent the speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the displacement. This will be explained below.

Whether guided by the straight portion 616a or curved portion 616b, when the driving side of the supported member 640 connected to the rotating member 620 is displaced downward, the driven side of the supported member 640 is The same is true for downward displacement.

The difference is that when guided by the curved portion 616b, in the upper half of the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced in a direction opposite to the displacement direction (leftward) of the main driving side of the supported member 640 (rightward). ), and in the lower half of the curved portion 616b, a direction ( The curved portion 616b is formed so as to be guided for displacement (leftward).

As a result, even before the amount of downward displacement on the driving side of the supported member 640 becomes large (tilting start side), the displacement on the driven side of the supported member 640 is swung left and right, so that the supported member A large displacement speed on the driven side of 640 can be ensured.

This can prevent the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. That is, when vertically displacing the driven side of the supported member 640 from a specific initial position to a terminal position along an arbitrary path, if the time required for the displacement is the same, the results of integrating the vertical velocities will be equal. If the displacement is slow at the beginning, the displacement speed increases at the end.

When the driven side of the supported member 640 is positioned on the virtual axis OE1 guided on a straight line extending in the vertical direction as shown in FIG. 47 for comparison, the displacement speed gradually increases from the start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, and reaches a maximum at the displacement end (displacement bottom end) of the supported member 640. In other words, compared to the vertical displacement amount UX1 of the axis O1 guided by the guide long hole 616 during the period when the rotating member 620 rotates 10 degrees and reaches the displacement bottom end, the vertical displacement amount UE1 of the virtual axis OE1 during the same period is larger.

Therefore, in the displacement mode of the virtual axis OE1, there is a possibility that the driven side of the supported member 640 will bounce back, and when performing an effect to stop the supported member 640 at the lower end of displacement, the first movement unit 600 This will have a negative impact on the performance.

In contrast, in this embodiment, by adopting a curved portion 616b in the guide slot 616, the range in which the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 increases is also allocated to the displacement start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, thereby making the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 uniform.

In this case, the term "uniformity" does not only mean making the speed uniform over the entire range of displacement, but also includes suppressing the magnitude of the speed. In particular, in this embodiment, when the rotating member 620 is tilted, the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 gradually increases at the start side of entering the curved portion 616b, and the displacement speed of the driven member 640 gradually increases as the rotation member 620 enters the lower half of the curved portion 616b. The displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 is configured to gradually decrease after the start.

In other words, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided by the curved portion 616b, by providing a speed difference in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the supported member 640 from becoming monotonous.

Furthermore, by reducing the speed required for the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end side of the curved section 616b, i.e., the amount of displacement required per unit time, the amount of displacement required to lift the driven side of the supported member 640 per unit time at the start of driving when the rotating member 620 is moved upward (raised up), can be reduced, thereby reducing the burden on the drive motor 631.

Next, the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 will be described with reference to Figure 49. Figure 49 is a schematic diagram showing the change in angle θ [degrees] accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620.

The angle θ can be regarded as the relative rotation angle between the rotating member 620 and the supported member 640 around the circular through hole 624, and is directly linked to the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660. In other words, the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is determined according to the magnitude of the angle θ.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rotation transmission ratio between the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a (see FIG. 39) of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the gear teeth 652a and the gear of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 The rotation transmission ratio with the tooth 657a (see FIG. 38) is both set to 1. Therefore, since the angle θ and the rotation angle of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are the same, a change in the angle θ can be understood as a change in the attitude of the second decorative rotating member 660.

The change in angle θ is 45 degrees from the performance standby state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 41) to the intermediate performance state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 44); The angle from this state to the extended state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 46) is 90 degrees.

When in the standby state, the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a position where the first performance surface 661a is tilted 45 degrees to the left (the third performance surface 661c is tilted 45 degrees to the right), so that as the angle θ changes and the state is switched between the intermediate performance state and the extended state in sequence, the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates 45 degrees so that the third performance surface 661c faces the front (see Figure 43), and then the second performance surface 661b faces the front (see Figure 45).

The setting of the angle θ is realized by designing the guide elongated hole 616 for regulating the attitude of the supported member 640. That is, in this embodiment, the guide elongated hole 616 is designed to satisfy both the arrangement of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the attitude of the second decorative rotating member 660 depending on the angle θ.

As a result, even if the detection sensor KS1 is only a sensor that detects the position of the rotating member 620, as in this embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) can determine the position and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 based on the output of the detection sensor KS1.

In other words, if the extension portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, it can be determined that the first operating unit 600 is in a performance standby state (see Figure 41), and the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 and the position and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be determined from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631 from that state.

Here, the amount of change in angle θ is not proportional to the amount of rotation angle of the rotating member 620. Therefore, when determining the position and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631, it is not sufficient to obtain a numerical value by proportional calculation from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631. This also makes it possible to avoid the rotation speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 being constant even when the rotating member 620 is rotated at a constant speed. This will be explained below.

The change in the angle θ is approximately the same as the change in the amount of change in the displacement speed of the driven member 640. That is, compared to the angle change from the production standby state to the intermediate production state (approximately 13 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees), the angle change from the intermediate production state to the extended state is generally larger. It is large (approximately 20 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees while the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed in the upper half of the curved portion 616b).

On the other hand, the angle change from the intermediate presentation state to the extended state gradually decreases from the position where the driven side of the supported member 640 enters the lower half of the curved portion 616b, and finally changes from the presentation standby state to the intermediate presentation state. The angle change is below the level of the previous state (down to about 7 degrees).

In this way, by being configured so that the numerical value of the angle θ with respect to the rotation per unit angle of the rotation member 620 changes in size, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotation member 660 similarly changes in size. It can be configured as follows. That is, in a range where the numerical value of the angle θ is small, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 tends to be small, making it easy to maintain that posture, while in a range where the numerical value of the angle θ is large, the second decorative rotating member 660 The rotation angle of the member 660 can be easily increased, and the surface facing the player (performance surfaces 661a to 661c) can be easily changed quickly.

With the above-mentioned configuration, the displacement operation of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be controlled to be slow or slow. As described above, in the displacement operation of the second decorative rotating member 660, the arrangement and posture are changed due to the displacement of the supported member 640, and the position is changed at the center of the cylindrical part formed by the half-cylindrical parts 651d and 655a. Rotational displacement about the rotation axis is performed simultaneously.

The rotation angle (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement about the cylindrical part formed by the half-cylindrical parts 651d and 655a is such that the driven side of the supported member 640 moves from the straight part 616a of the guide slot 616 to the curved part 616b. It becomes noticeably larger when it enters.

In other words, during tilting displacement, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is suppressed until the intermediate performance state is reached, and even if the second decorative rotating member 660 moves up and down (bounces back) slightly from the position on the driven side of the supported member 640 in the intermediate performance state, the second decorative rotating member 660 can be maintained in a state in which the third performance surface 661c faces the front side (see Figure 43).

On the other hand, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward from the intermediate presentation state, the rotation speed of the second decorative rotation member 660 increases when the rotation member 620 rotates at a constant speed, and the posture change in the rotation direction increases. It is conspicuously visible. That is, the player can visually perceive that the second decorative rotating member 660 is instantaneously being rotated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second presentation surface 661b of the second decorative rotating member 660 is directed to the front side at the rotation end (lower end of displacement) of the rotating member 620, and is placed close to the decorative fixing member 670. In view of integral visual recognition (see FIG. 28), it is desirable to be able to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from springing back upward from the state in which the rotating member 620 is disposed at the lower end of displacement.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the curved portion 616bb of the guide slot 616 is configured as described above to equalize the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640, so that the rotating member 620 is It is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640 from becoming excessive when the supported member 640 is disposed at the lower end of displacement, and it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

In addition to the uniform displacement speed, the arrangement of the center portions of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 at the end of the downward displacement of the rotating member 620 (for example, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 643) is configured to be closest to the support fastening portion 615 serving as the rotation axis of the rotating member 620. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating tip of the rotating member 620 from becoming unstable due to the weight of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 supported on the rotating tip side of the rotating member 620. Rotational displacement can be stabilized.

In addition, the lower half of the curved section 616b is configured to suitably impede displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower displacement end of the rotating member 620 in the direction of bouncing back (upper left direction) around the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620. That is, the lower half of the curved section 616b has a short side direction that slopes upward and left, and since it is possible to suppress displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in this direction, it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

In other words, in this embodiment, the displacement direction when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced following the displacement of the active side of the supported member 640, and the case where the active side of the supported member 640 stops at the end of displacement The displacement direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 in is different from that in FIG.

If there was no guide, the former would be expected to displace downward and left along the displacement direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 (the rotation direction of the rotating member 620); however, in this embodiment, by being guided by the long guide hole 616, it is slightly deflected left and right in the direction along the long guide hole 616 and displaces downward.

On the other hand, since the latter is a circular trajectory centered on the driving side of the supported member 640, the displacement direction is not along the guide slot 616 but along the short direction of the guide slot 616. Thereby, displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from bouncing back.

The following describes the characteristics of the displacement of the pivoting member 620 in the rising direction. When the first operating unit 600 changes state from the extended state to the performance standby state, the pivoting member 620 is displaced in the rising direction.

The load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620 (that is, the driving force generated by the drive motor 631) is mainly applied to the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, and the first decoration disposed on the supported member 640. It is used to upwardly displace the rotating member 650 and the second decorative rotating member 660, and to rotate the second decorative rotating member 660.

In other words, the smaller the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660, the less load is required to raise and displace the rotating member 620.

As shown in FIG. 49, in this embodiment, the angle θ proportional to the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is designed to be at a minimum value when the rotating member 620 starts to rotate from the extended state of the first operating unit 600. This makes it possible to reduce the load required to raise and displace the rotating member 620.

At the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660, which is centered on the extended support portion 646 of the supported member 640, is positioned in a position that is aligned with the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 (facing in the vertical direction).

Therefore, when the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is stopped at the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620, the load applied to the rotating member 620 as the inertial force in the rotational direction of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be generated as a load in which the rotating member 620 is twisted around the longitudinal axis, and the rotating member 620 can withstand this load with only slight localized elastic displacement by distributing it in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, compared to when the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 in a front view, it is easier to avoid a situation in which the rotating member 620 breaks. In addition, excessive elastic deformation of the rotating member 620 is suppressed by contact with the front cover member 612, and the front cover member 612 can be configured to withstand loads that the rotating member 620 cannot withstand by elastically deforming, thereby preventing damage to the rotating member 620.

The displacement of the overhanging decorative part 652b will be explained. The overhanging decorative part 652b is a member that rotates and displaces around the axis O1, and its rotation angle corresponds to the angle θ described above. Therefore, even if the change in position of the driven side of the supported member 640 is small, such as when changing from a performance standby state to an overhanging state, the overhanging decorative part 652b will rotate if the angle θ changes.

The change in angle θ from the performance standby state to the protruding state is approximately 135 degrees, and the protruding decorative part 652b rotates approximately 45 degrees. Here, when the protruding decorative part 652b rotates 45 degrees counterclockwise from the performance standby state, it feels like it will collide with the other operating units 800 (the left and right fixed decorative members) in the assembled state (see Figure 28). However, in this embodiment, the supported member 640, which is the basis for the rotation of the protruding decorative part 652b, itself changes its posture in a manner that rotates clockwise, so it is possible to avoid collision with the other operating units 800 (the left and right fixed decorative members).

In other words, by configuring the overhanging decorative portion 652b to be movable with respect to the supported member 640, the space required for displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be reduced.

For example, if the overhanging decorative portion 652b is a part that is fixedly arranged with respect to the supported member 640 when the first operating unit 600 is in the extended state, the supported member 640 is changed from the extended state to the effect standby state. , the overhanging decorative portion 652b overhangs to the upper left side of the supported member 640, colliding with other movement units 800, or partially hiding the overhanging display on the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. This may have a negative impact on the performance.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the protruding decorative part 652b rotates and displaces in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the driving side of the supported member 640, based on the driven side of the supported member 640, so that when the supported member 640 protrudes toward the third pattern display device 81, it protrudes in tandem, and when the supported member 640 displaces to the side retreating from the third pattern display device 81, it retracts in tandem. Therefore, the position of the protruding decorative part 652b in the retracted state can be formed on the side away from the third pattern display device 81.

The rotation angle of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 from the player's perspective can be determined from the difference between the change in angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640. That is, it is 45 degrees, which is the difference between about 135 degrees, which is the change width of the angle θ, and about 90 degrees, which is the attitude change angle of the supported member 640.

Here, in this embodiment, the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640 is configured to be the same regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 620. That is, as shown in FIG. 47, when the angle θ is divided into angles a1 and a2 below the horizontal line and angles b1 and b2 above the horizontal line, the angle θ and the attitude of the supported member 640 are The difference between the change and the rotation angle is determined as ((a1+b1)-(a2+b2))-(b1-b2)=(a1-a2), which is equal to the rotation angle of the rotation member 620.

Therefore, since the rotation angle of the overhanging decorative portion 652b based on the attitude of the supported member 640 is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, when the rotating member 620 is rotationally displaced at a constant angular velocity, the Although the displacement speed of the support member 640 is not constant, the angular speed of rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b based on the attitude of the supported member 640 is constant.

Therefore, it appears to the player that the overhanging decorative portion 652b disposed on the supported member 640 is being driven at a constant angular velocity by a drive means different from the drive motor 631 that drives the rotating member 620. can be visually recognized.

With this configuration, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 can be such that, from the player's perspective, there is a section in which it is a sliding movement, and there is a section in which it is a rotational movement. The displacement mode of the overhanging decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as a soft displacement mode as if it were not a machine.

This effect can be achieved by designing the displacement of the supported member 640 into separate sections where the posture change is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, and sections where the posture change is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction. In other words, the protruding decorative portion 652b rotates relative to the supported member 640 according to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and from the player's point of view, the displacement of the protruding decorative portion 652b is influenced by the side that is dominant as the displacement of the supported member 640.

Therefore, in a section where the change in posture is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, it can be visually recognized that the overhanging decorative portion 652b is being rotated, and in a section where the change in posture is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is It can be visually recognized that the decorative portion 652b is slidingly displaced.

As described above, the rotating member 620 can be rotated to form a performance standby state, an intermediate performance state, and an extended state, and although a case has been described in which it is displaced from one displacement end point to the other displacement end point, the drive direction may be switched so that it is displaced in the opposite direction at a midpoint in the displacement range.

For example, after rotating the rotating member 620 from the performance standby state to the intermediate performance state, the drive direction of the drive motor 631 may be reversed to control the rotation to return to the performance standby state. In this case, since the rotating member 620 needs to be stopped midway down, it may be necessary to set the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 low in order to ensure an accurate stopping position.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the numerical value of the angle θ (see FIG. 49) tends to increase near the intermediate performance state compared to the performance standby state. The magnitude of the angle θ corresponds to the magnitude of the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660, as described above.

Therefore, near the intermediate performance state where the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, a larger portion of the driving force is allocated to the second decorative rotating member 660, and therefore the portion allocated to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 can be relatively reduced, automatically suppressing the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620.

In other words, as the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, making it easier to stop the rotating member 620 near the intermediate performance state without having to set the rotation speed of the rotating member 620 low in advance.

Next, the second operation unit 700 will be explained. The second operating unit 700 is an operating unit that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 below the opening 511a of the back case 510, and is a player's field of view when viewing the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 28). The standby state (see FIG. 28) in which the display is evacuated below the opening 511a to ensure that The state is mainly switched between the intermediate presentation state (see FIG. 35).

50 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700, and FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operating unit 700. In FIGS. 50 and 51, the peripheral parts of the up/down reversal performance device 770 are mainly shown in an exploded state, and the up/down reversal performance device 770 is shown in a non-disassembled state.

As shown in Figures 50 and 51, the second operating unit 700 includes a right front plate member 710 fastened to the lower right corner of the rear case 510, a pivoting arm member 720 disposed between the right front plate member 710 and the rear case 510 and pivotable about the cylindrical protrusion 511b of the rear case 510, a drive transmission device 730 configured to transmit a driving force to the pivoting arm member 720, and a lifting plate member 740 to which the tip of the pivoting arm member 720 is guidably connected and which is configured to be capable of being lifted and lowered. The lifting/lowering plate member 740 is provided with a left rear plate member 750 fastened to the lower left corner of the rear case 510 on the rear side thereof, a set of front support members 760 that are configured as a left-right pair and fastened to the front sides of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750, a blind decorative member 768 that is fastened to the rear case 510 on the front side of the metal bar 702, and a lifting/lowering reversal performance device 770 that is configured to be displaceable in a manner that combines lifting/lowering displacement and forward/rearward displacement on the lifting/lowering plate member 740 and the front support member 760.

The right front plate member 710 includes a transmission support part 711 that supports each component of the drive transmission device 730, a gap forming part 712 that is recessed from the rear side at the left edge and forms a gap between the rear case 510, a plurality of detection sensors 713 (three in this embodiment) that are arranged to detect the position of the detection part 735 of the drive transmission device 730, a front upper inclined part 714 that is inclined in a manner that the further it goes upward at the front side of the left side and is formed so as to be able to guide the rotating cylinder part 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770, and a plurality of fastening parts 718 that form female threaded parts into which fastening screws inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 are screwed.

The detection sensors 713 are multiple photocoupler type sensors that are spaced apart so that the detection grooves are positioned at positions where the detectable parts 735 can enter. Each detection sensor 713 is arranged to match the position of the detectable parts 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in the standby state for performance, the position of the detectable parts 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in the intermediate performance state, and the position of the detectable parts 735 when the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state.

That is, the detection sensor 713 is configured to be able to switch its output depending on whether the second operation unit 700 is in a performance standby state, an intermediate performance state, or an extended state, and from the output result, the output is changed to the sound lamp control device 113 (Fig. 4) is configured to be able to grasp the state of the second operating unit 700.

The pivot arm member 720 is supported by a cylindrical protrusion 511b that protrudes cylindrically from the bottom wall 511 of the rear case 510 to the front side, and is formed as a long plate in a L-shape when viewed from the front. The support tube 722 protrudes cylindrically backward from the bent part of the main body 721, and has an inner peripheral shape formed to a size that allows the cylindrical protrusion 511b to be inserted therethrough. The long hole 723 is formed in the long hole shape at the right end of the main body 721, and the left end of the main body 721 is formed in the long hole shape. It is provided with a cylindrical fastening portion 724 that protrudes cylindrically toward the front (in a direction parallel to the protruding direction of the cylindrical protrusion 711a) and has a female thread formed on its inner circumference, a cylindrical fastening portion 725 that protrudes cylindrically toward the rear at an intermediate position between the cylindrical fastening portion 724 and the support tube portion 722 and has a female thread formed on its inner circumference, and a torsion spring SP2 that is wrapped around the support tube portion 722 and applies a biasing force to the main body portion 721 in an upward direction (a direction lifting the left side) between the rear case 510.

A step is formed on the left side of the main body portion 721 so that the arrangement is shifted toward the front side compared to the proximal side portion of the support cylinder portion 722, and a support plate is placed in the gap formed on the back side by the step. 701 is arranged.

The support plate 701 is a plate-shaped part that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall part 511 of the back case 510, and includes an arc-shaped long hole part 701a formed so as to be able to guide the cylindrical fastened part 725. A fastening screw inserted into the elongated hole portion 701a with the ring-shaped collar C3 in between is screwed into the cylindrical fastened portion 725, so that the rotating arm member 720 is connected to the support plate via the cylindrical fastened portion 725. 701 so that it cannot fall off.

Since the support plate 701 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510, the left side of the rotating arm member 720 is restricted from moving away from the back case 510 toward the front side. This can prevent the rotation arm member 720 from being displaced to the front side due to the load applied to the left side of the rotation arm member 720, so that the displacement of the rotation arm member 720 can be stably supported. be able to.

The right side of the main body 721 is disposed in the gap between the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712. In other words, the forward/rearward displacement of the right side of the main body 721 is restricted by the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712.

The elongated hole portion 723 is formed in such a shape that a straight line passing through the width center and extending in the longitudinal direction passes through the center of the support cylinder portion 722 . Therefore, when the load applied to the elongated hole portion 723 is directed in the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole portion 723, the rotational direction component of the rotating arm member 720 of the load is zero.

The drive transmission device 730 is a device that transmits a driving force through the long hole portion 723 of the pivot arm member 720, and includes a drive motor 731 fastened and fixed from the front side to the right front plate member 710, a drive gear 732 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 731, a transmission gear 733 meshed with the drive gear 732, and a gear cam member 734 meshed with the transmission gear 733.

The transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are each supported by a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 711a that protrude cylindrically from the back side of the right front plate member 710 at corresponding positions. A female thread is formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical protrusions 711a, and fastening screws that are inserted into the shaft holes of the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 can be screwed in. By screwing and fixing these fastening screws, the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are supported by the cylindrical protrusions 711a so that they cannot fall off.

The transmission support portion 711 includes the above-described cylindrical protrusion 711a and an arcuate hole 711b formed in an arc shape centered on the cylindrical protrusion 711a that pivotally supports the gear cam member 734.

The gear cam member 734 includes a detectable portion 735 that protrudes toward the front side in an arc shape centered on the rotating shaft portion and is formed so as to be insertable into the arc hole 711b, an extension portion 736 that extends to have a longer diameter than the gear portion, and a cylindrical protrusion portion 736a that protrudes cylindrically from the tip of the extension portion 736 toward the rear side.

The detected portion 735 is formed so that it can be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 of the right front plate member 710, and is configured as a part that enables the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) to detect the position of the gear cam member 734 based on the output from the detection sensor 713.

The cylindrical protrusion 736a is formed so that it can be inserted into the long hole 723 of the pivot arm member 720, and the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 736a is transmitted to the pivot arm member 720 via the long hole 723.

A female thread is formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical protrusion 736a, and a fastening screw that is inserted into the center hole of the ring-shaped collar C3 can be screwed in. When this fastening screw is screwed in and fixed, the pivot arm member 720 is connected to the cylindrical protrusion 736a in an undetachable manner.

The lift plate member 740 is a member that moves up and down in response to the rotation of the pivot arm member 720, and is equipped with a guided member 741 that is arranged on the left end side and guided in the up and down direction, and a horizontally elongated member 742 that is fastened and fixed to the lower end side of the guided member 741 and is long in the left and right directions.

The guided member 741 is formed so that a metal rod 702 fixed to the back case 510 with its longitudinal direction aligned in the vertical direction can be inserted therethrough, and can be displaced in the vertical direction along the metal rod 702. The tips of the protrusions protruding from both left and right sides of the guided member 741 toward the back side come into contact with the bottom wall 511 of the back case 510, thereby restricting the axial rotation of the guided member 741. The posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized.

As the posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized, the posture of the horizontally elongated member 742 fastened and fixed to the guided member 741 is also stabilized.

The horizontally elongated member 742 includes an elongated hole 743 that is formed in an elongated oval shape from side to side with a vertical width that allows the cylindrical fastened portion 724 of the rotating arm member 720 to be inserted therethrough, and an elongated hole 743 on the upper side of the elongated hole 743. A cylindrical part 744 protruding from the front side in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide parts 745 disposed below the bottom at positions equidistant left and right from the cylindrical part 744 as a reference. Be prepared.

A fastening screw inserted into the elongated hole portion 743 with the ring-shaped collar C3 in between is screwed into the cylindrical fastened portion 724, so that the elevating plate member 740 becomes a rotating arm via the cylindrical fastened portion 724. It is supported by member 720 so that it cannot fall off.

The cylindrical portion 744 is a portion into which the insertion cylindrical portion 773 of the up/down reversal performance device 770 is inserted, and supports the up/down reversal performance device 770 in a state that it can be moved back and forth. That is, the elevating and reversing effect device 770 is not fixed to the elevating plate member 740, but is disposed on the front side of the elevating plate member 740 in such a manner that it can be displaced back and forth with reference to the elevating plate member 740.

A coil spring CS2 is arranged so as to wrap around the cylindrical portion 744 and the insertion cylindrical portion 773. The biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in a direction to separate the elevating plate member 740 and the elevating/descending reversing effect device 770.

The guide section 745 is composed of a pair of left and right parts, and includes a long plate part 745a in the front and rear, and a rotary cylinder rotatably supported by a pair of front and rear shaft parts protruding from the plate part 745a to the left and right outside. 745b.

The rotary cylinder part 745b rotates when the above-mentioned vertical reversal effect device 770 is displaced back and forth, and functions as a part that guides the displacement in the front and back direction, but the details will be described later.

The left rear plate member 750 is sloped in such a manner that the front side of the right side is tilted toward the front side as it goes upward, similar to the front upper slope part 714 of the right front plate member 710. and a plurality of fastened parts 752 formed with internally threaded parts into which fastening screws inserted from the back side of the back case 510 are screwed.

The blindfold decorative member 768 includes a three-dimensional decorative part 768a formed in a three-dimensional shape from a light-transmitting resin material, and a substrate to which an LED is fixed to the front side is arranged on the back side of the three-dimensional decorative part 768a. , is configured so that the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a can be illuminated with light emitted from the LED.

Each of the front support members 760 includes a fixing plate portion 761 having an insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted, and a fixing plate portion 761 that is arranged adjacent to the left and right inner sides of the fixing plate portion 761, with the back surface of the plate facing upward. A receiving inclined portion 762 is formed so as to be inclined toward the front side.

The fixing plate 761 is a plate that is fastened to the front side of the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750 by inserting a fastening screw that is inserted from the front side into the insertion hole and threaded into the corresponding female thread portion.

In this fixed position, the receiving inclination portion 762 is positioned in front of the front upper inclination portions 714, 751. That is, a guide path is formed by the receiving inclination portion 762 and the front upper inclination portions 714, 751, and the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is guided along this guide path, so that the lifting and reversing performance device 770 is configured to lift and lower while displacing in the front-to-rear direction. This lifting and lowering displacement is explained below.

52(a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along the LIIa-LIIa line in FIG. 28, and FIG. 52(b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along the LIIb-LIIb line in FIG. and a sectional view of the center frame 86. 52(a) and 52(b), the performance standby state of the second operation unit 700 is illustrated.

53(a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along the line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 53(b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 taken along the line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. 33. and a sectional view of the center frame 86. 53(a) and 53(b), an intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700 is illustrated.

54(a) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 and the center frame 86 along the line LIVa-LIVa in FIG. 30, and FIG. 54(b) is a sectional view of the second operating unit 700 along the line LIVb-LIVb in FIG. and a sectional view of the center frame 86. 54(a) and 54(b), the extended state of the second operating unit 700 is illustrated.

The lifting and lowering displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 of the second operating unit 700 shown in Figures 52 to 54 occurs when the driving force of the drive transmission device 730 is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720. The transmission of driving force during the lifting and lowering displacement of the lifting and reversing performance device 770 will be described. In this description, Figures 28, 30, and 33 will be referred to as appropriate.

At the start of driving force transmission from the production standby state (see FIG. 28), the displacement direction of the cylindrical protruding portion 736a (see FIG. 51) of the gear cam member 734 is the elongated direction of the elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720. Since it is designed to be parallel to the direction, displacement resistance that occurs when the gear cam member 734 starts rotating can be suppressed. The same thing also holds true in the extended state.

On the other hand, in the intermediate presentation state (see FIG. 30), since the displacement direction of the cylindrical protruding portion 736a is orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole portion 723, the gear cam member 734 receives rotational direction from the rotating arm member 720. By maximizing the displacement resistance, it is possible to easily stop the rotational displacement of the gear cam member 734.

As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the lifting/lowering reversing device 770 of the second operating unit 700 is disposed on the back side of the lower side of the center frame 86, and is upwardly displaced toward the inside of the center frame 86. Accordingly, it is configured to be displaced toward the front side in the front-rear direction.

The displacement resistance of this displacement is due to the configuration in which the rotary cylinder part 774e of the up/down reversal effect device 770 is guided by the receiving slope part 762 and the front upper slope parts 714, 751, and the first horizontal plate 774b and the first horizontal plate 774b of the up/down reversal effect device 770. This is reduced by the configuration in which the two horizontal plates 774c are guided by the rotary cylinder portion 745b of the elevating plate member 740.

In other words, the pair of rotating cylinder sections 774e are designed to be aligned parallel to the inclination angles of the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 (the front upper inclined portion 751 is located on the left side not shown in FIG. 52, see FIG. 56), which are arranged symmetrically. By the rotating cylinder section 774e rolling around the center of the cylindrical section 774d, the displacement resistance of the main body member 771, which displaces along the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, can be reduced.

Furthermore, by arranging the rotary cylinder parts 745b that are arranged in the front and back, the front rotary cylinder part 745b is arranged slightly upwardly, so that the tilting displacement of the main body member 771 can be suppressed. The cylindrical portion 774e prevents excessive load from being applied to the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714, 751.

In other words, in this embodiment, the performance device 780 is designed so that its center of gravity (position of the axis of rotation) is located slightly forward of the front-to-rear center of the main body member 771, and the main body member 771 is constantly biased in a forward tilt direction by gravity. Due to the influence of this biasing force, the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c are prone to displacement such that the front side drops and the rear side rises.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front rotary cylinder part 745b is arranged in close proximity when the front side of the first horizontal plate 774b is lowered, and is arranged slightly upward, and is arranged in close proximity when the rear side of the second horizontal plate 774c is raised. The rotating cylinder portion 745b on the rear side is arranged slightly below. Therefore, forward tilting displacement of the main body member 771 can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, with this configuration, the front rotating cylinder portion 745b can stably roll between the first horizontal plate 774b because there is a gap between the front rotating cylinder portion 745b and the second horizontal plate 774c, and the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b can stably roll between the first horizontal plate 774b and the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b because there is a gap between the rear rotating cylinder portion 745b and the first horizontal plate 774b. This allows the rotating cylinder portion 745b to roll normally, and reduces the displacement resistance when the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

The displacement of the lift-up/down reversing device 770 toward the front side is caused by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 in addition to the geometrical guidance described above. Therefore, the displacement resistance of the forward/backward displacement can be reduced during the upward displacement in which the lift-up/down reversing device 770 is displaced toward the front side compared to the downward displacement.

The vertical displacement of the vertical reversal effect device 770 is performed by the driving force of the drive motor 731, and the driving force is divided into vertical displacement and longitudinal displacement. In vertical displacement, the burden of upward displacement becomes relatively large due to the need to counter gravity, but the longitudinal displacement in this case can be assisted by the biasing force of coil spring CS2. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an excessive driving force required for upwardly displacing the vertically reversing effect device 770.

The length of the coil spring CS2 is set so that it is its natural length in the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 53) of the second operating unit 700. In other words, when the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770 is positioned lower than the position in the intermediate performance state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in a direction that assists the forward/backward displacement of the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770 caused by the driving force of the drive motor 731, whereas when the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770 is positioned higher than the position in the intermediate performance state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 does not act on the forward/backward displacement of the lifting/lowering reversing performance device 770.

Thereby, it is possible to easily maintain the arrangement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 in the intermediate effect state. For example, when the drive motor 731 is controlled to drive from the performance standby state of the second operation unit 700 and the drive motor 731 is controlled to stop so as to stop the second operation unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, the stop timing may be slightly less than ideal. Even if it becomes faster, the second operation unit 700 can be displaced toward the intermediate presentation state by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2.

For example, when the stop control is performed in a similar manner, even if the stop timing is slightly later than ideal, the second operating unit 700 will descend under its own weight, and this descent due to its own weight will be suppressed by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2, so that the second operating unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate performance state and maintained in its position.

In addition, for example, when the drive motor 731 is driven and controlled from the extended state of the second operating unit 700, and the drive motor 731 is stopped and controlled to stop the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, if the lifting and reversing performance device 770 passes the intermediate performance state downward, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts as a displacement resistance, making it easier to prevent a large downward displacement beyond the intermediate performance state. And even after the drive motor 731 is stopped and controlled, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 is applied, so that the second operating unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate performance state.

Here, the operation of the vertically reversing effect device 770 by displacing it in the front and back direction along with the vertical movement will be explained. As a premise, a movable accessory is known that can be switched between a state in which it moves in and out of a frame bordered by the center frame 86 to attract the player's attention and a state in which it retreats from the player's field of view.

Most of these movable gadgets are designed with an emphasis on how they look when placed inside the center frame 86, and when they are retracted to the outside of the center frame 86, appearance is often not taken into consideration, under the assumption that they will not attract the player's attention.

However, recently, the distance from the third symbol display device 81 to the center frame 86 is long, and at the edge of the field of view when viewing the display area of the third symbol display device 81 through the inside of the center frame 86, , the line of sight reaches to the rear outer position of the center frame 86 (the rear position of the gaming area), so if the movable accessory retracted to the rear outer position of the center frame 86 looks bad, the player's It may reduce interest.

In contrast, in this embodiment, not only the front side (first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 52) of the covering member 787, but also the back side (second main decorative surface 787b1 in FIG. 52) and the upper and lower surfaces (FIG. 52) After forming a decorative surface on the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2), the direction of displacement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 is changed from the player side (front side) as the base end toward the back side. By making the direction of displacement follow a line that spreads out (sloping downward toward the rear), that is, the direction of the line of sight at the edge of the player's field of vision, each decorative surface can be easily placed in the player's field of vision. It consists of

This allows each decorative surface of the covering member 787 to be brought into the player's field of vision without any difficulty. The details of each decorative surface of the covering member 787 will be described later, but the front surface (first main decorative surface 787a1 or second main decorative surface 787b1, 54, the first main decorative surface 787a1) and the upper surface (first sub-decorative surface 787a2 or second sub-decorative surface 787b2, in FIG. The decorations (figures, patterns, characters, pictures, etc.) formed on the decorative surface 787a2) are formed as decorations related to each other.

In other words, the first main decorative surface 787a1 and the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 are formed as a first decoration that is related to each other, and the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 are formed as a second decoration that is related to each other. The first decoration and the second decoration are formed as mutually different decorations.

The decoration formed on the upper surface is positioned in the gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 26) located behind it when the second operating unit 700 is in the standby state for a performance, so it is easily visible when the player moves their gaze to switch between paying attention to the ball flowing down the play area formed outside the center frame 86 (see Figure 2) and paying attention to the display performance unfolding on the third pattern display device 81.

Therefore, the content of the decoration (notification content, for example, "chance", "jackpot", etc.) that is visible to the player through the covering member 787 in the overhanging state is displayed on the covering member 787 even in the performance standby state. It can be made visible to the player through the side.

This allows the third pattern display device 81 to be displaced to a standby state for easier viewing, while the covering member 787, which is positioned so as not to be conspicuous, can continue to attract the player's attention.

In addition, as described below, the covering member 787 is configured to be rotatable so as to switch the decorative surface facing the player, so that the content of the decorative surface visible to the player in the extended state can be different.

For example, if the up/down reversal performance device 770 is placed in the performance standby state before the player confirms the appearance of the covering member 787 in the extended state (if missed or the operating speed is excessively fast), If the content of the decorative surface can only be seen from the side, most of the front side of the decorative surface will be hidden by the game board 13 in the performance standby state, so the player cannot see the contents of the decorative surface displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. The user is forced to pay attention to the liquid crystal display, and the attention paid to the covering member 787 is reduced.

On the other hand, in the case of adopting a configuration in which the contents of the decorative surface can be seen from the top side, as in this embodiment, the player can visually check the lifting and reversing performance device 770 in the performance standby state and understand the contents of the decoration (notification contents, for example, "chance" or "jackpot") that were visible to the player through the covering member 787 in the extended state.

As a result, for players who have missed the appearance of the covering member 787 in the overhanging state, the contents notified based on the state of the covering member 787 can be displayed on the decorative surface of the covering member 787 that is visible even in the performance standby state. Continuous notification is possible. Thereby, the attention of the covering member 787 can be maintained at a high level regardless of whether it is in the performance standby state, the extended state, or the like.

In the present embodiment, the vertical displacement of the vertical reversal effect device 770 of the second operating unit 700 is such that it moves from being disposed on the back side of the rear end surface of the gaming area to moving forward beyond the rear end surface of the gaming area. The configuration as a displacement will be explained below.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the performance standby state of the second operation unit 700, the front of the covering member 787 and the back surface of the center frame 86 are arranged to face each other, and the center frame 86 is placed on the covering member 787 side. A channel forming portion 86a is provided in a protruding manner.

The flow path forming portion 86a is formed so that the ball that jumps into the warp flow path (rolling path) formed inside the center frame 86 from the left and right entrances of the center frame 86 reaches the lower edge of the center frame 86, and then the ball enters the center frame 86. The rear side part of the guide channel for guiding the balls that have flowed down the lower rolling surface of the frame 86 once backward, then flowed forward again, and toward the first winning opening 64 provided in the gaming area. (See Figure 9). That is, due to the flow path forming portion 86a, the rear end surface BE1 of the gaming area is arranged on the rear side of the front surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2).

The ball flowing down the channel forming part 86a has a high probability of entering the first prize opening 64, so the channel forming part 86a attracts a lot of attention, especially when the ball flies into the inside of the center frame 86. , the player's line of sight is likely to be focused on the channel forming portion 86a. In the performance standby state (see FIG. 52), since the performance device 780 is disposed directly behind the channel forming part 86a, it is easy to create a state in which the performance device 780 enters the player's field of vision in the performance standby state. Can be done.

When the second operating unit 700 is in a standby state, the covering member 787 is positioned on the rear side of the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 52(a)), when the second operating unit 700 is in an intermediate state, the front portion of the covering member 787 is positioned on the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 53(a)), and when the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state, the front portion of the covering member 787 is positioned on the front side of the rear end surface BE1.

That is, the covering member 787 is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86, and at the same time, is displaced toward the front side so as to enter the same front-back position as the front-back position of the gaming area. Therefore, it can appear to the player that the covering member 787 is riding on the center frame 86 and moving toward the front (approaching the player).

In addition, when the second operating unit 700 is raised and lowered, the performance device 780 is displaced in the front-to-rear direction, and the front-to-rear position of its front end face is configured to match (coincide) with the front-to-rear position of the second performance surface 661b of the second decorative rotating member 660 in the extended state of the first operating unit 600.

As a result, the front-to-back positions of the second performance surface 661b (see Figure 29) of the first operating unit 600 and the performance device 780 (Figure 30) of the second operating unit 700, which are positioned close to each other when viewed from the front in the extended state, are aligned, making it easier to visually recognize them as a single unit.

On the other hand, since the arrangement of the production device 780 in the front-rear direction is lower in the intermediate production state or production standby state than the arrangement in the extended state, the box-shaped member of the first operating unit 600 is lower than the arrangement in the extended state. 661 and the production device 780 can be separated (independently) to facilitate visual recognition.

The elevating and reversing effect device 770 includes a main body member 771 connected and supported by the elevating plate member 740, and an effect device 780 configured to be displaceable with respect to the main body member 771. Next, details of the up/down reversal effect device 770 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.

FIG. 55 is an exploded front perspective view of the up/down reversal performance device 770, and FIG. 56 is an exploded rear perspective view of the up/down reversal performance device 770. In addition, in the description of FIGS. 55 and 56, FIGS. 50 and 51 will be referred to as appropriate.

The main body member 771 includes a lower elongated portion 772 that is elongated in the left-right direction, and an insertion cylindrical portion 773 that is cylindrical and protrudes from the left-right center position of the lower elongated portion 772 toward the back side. , is integrally formed with the left and right center position of the lower elongated portion 772 by a pair of guide extension portions 774 extending from both left and right ends of the lower elongated portion 772 to the back side, and a connecting portion extending up and down. An upper elongated portion 775 is formed to be elongated in the left-right direction, and is arranged from both left and right sides of the upper elongated portion 775 to the back side, and is configured to be able to guide the linear motion plate member 784 of the production device 780 in the left-right direction. a transmission device holding plate 777 which is fastened and fixed to the left and right centers of the upper elongated portion 775 from the back side and is capable of supporting the drive transmission device; a lower elongated portion 772 and an upper elongated portion A light emitting producing means 778 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the portion 775.

The insertion tube portion 773 is a portion that is inserted into the inner circumference of the cylindrical portion 744 of the lifting plate member 740, and is formed with a dimensional relationship that allows it to slide on the inner circumference of the cylindrical portion 744, and the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-to-rear direction by the sliding. In other words, by inserting the insertion tube portion 773 into the cylindrical portion 744, it is possible to suppress the tilting displacement of the main body member 771 in the front-to-rear direction with respect to the lifting plate member 740.

The guide extension part 774 includes a vertical plate 774a whose width is oriented in the vertical direction, a first horizontal plate 774b connected to the upper end of the vertical plate 774a and whose width direction is oriented in the horizontal direction, and a width larger than the first horizontal plate 774b. A second horizontal plate 774c is connected to the vertical plate 774a on the lower side and whose width direction is oriented in the left-right direction (parallel to the width of the first horizontal plate 774b), and a second horizontal plate 774c is connected to the vertical plate 774a on the lower side, and a second horizontal plate 774c is connected to the vertical plate 774a. A pair of upper and lower cylindrical portions 774d are provided, and a rotary cylindrical portion 774e rotatably supported by the cylindrical portions 774d.

The second horizontal plate 774c has a longer width so as to extend inwardly from the width direction end portions of the first horizontal plate 774b. In the assembled state, the widthwise expanding portion is arranged to face the lower bottom portion of the elevating plate member 740 in the vertical direction, and by abutting against each other, tilting displacement in which the guide extension portion 774 falls forward is suppressed. That is, by securing the width and length to such an extent that the second horizontal plate 774c is disposed vertically opposite to the lower bottom portion of the elevating plate member 740, the tilting displacement in which the main body member 771 falls forward with respect to the elevating plate member 740 can be achieved. can be suppressed.

The pair of cylindrical portions 774d are not aligned vertically, but the upper cylindrical portion 774d is shifted forward compared to the lower cylindrical portion 774d. This shift is set so that the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 and the direction of the straight line connecting the centers of the pair of cylindrical portions 774d are parallel (see FIG. 52(a)). In other words, by arranging the pair of cylindrical portions 774d parallel to the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, the pair of upper and lower rotating cylindrical portions 774e can be simultaneously abutted against the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 or the receiving inclined portion 762. This allows the pair of upper and lower rotating cylindrical portions 774e to roll stably, making it easier to avoid localized loads.

The guide portion 776 is fastened and fixed so as to connect the plurality of cylindrical portions 776a arranged on both the left and right sides in such a manner that the left and right pairs are arranged vertically and have internal threads formed on the inner circumferential side, and the left and right cylindrical portions 776a. A plurality of drop-off prevention plate portions 776b are provided.

The fall-off prevention plate portion 776b includes insertion holes drilled at positions corresponding to the plurality of cylindrical portions 776a, and fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes from the back side are screwed into the cylindrical portions 776a. This is a part that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical part 776a, and functions as a part to prevent the linear motion plate member 784 from falling off, but the details will be described later.

The transmission device holding plate 777 includes a motor support plate portion 777a for supporting the drive motor 782, an insertion hole 777b formed in the motor support plate portion 777a at a position through which the drive shaft of the drive motor 782 can be inserted, and A cylindrical protruding portion 777c is provided on the lower side of the insertion hole 777b to protrude in a cylindrical shape toward the front side, and a pair of insertion holes 777d are formed at both upper and lower end positions so that fastening screws can be inserted therethrough, and fastened to the back side. A wiring fastening member 777e to be fixed.

The cylindrical protrusion 777c has a female thread formed on the inner circumferential side, and when a fastening screw is screwed into the cylindrical protrusion 777c while being inserted into the transmission gear 781b, the cylindrical protrusion 777c pivotally supports the vertically inverting member 781 so that it cannot fall off. It is a part.

The through hole 777d is designed to allow the insertion of a fastening screw that is screwed into the female threaded portion 775a formed in the corresponding portion of the upper long portion 775, and the transmission device holding plate 777 is fastened and fixed to the upper long portion 775 by the fastening screw.

The wiring fastening member 777e is a part for holding and fastening the electrical wiring connected to the drive motor 782 in the gap between the transmission device holding plate 777, and has a shape that follows the outer frame of the transmission device holding plate 777. By forming the transmission device holding plate 777, the overall rigidity of the transmission device holding plate 777 can also be improved.

The light emitting device 778 includes two left and right elongated plate-shaped illumination boards 778a, upper and lower, on which light-emitting members such as LEDs are arranged on the front side, and a light-transmitting board 778a arranged on the front side of the illumination boards 778a. A light diffusion member 778b, which is a plate member formed from a plastic resin material and has a light diffusion process formed thereon.

The upper illumination board 778a is equipped with a pair of detection sensors 778d arranged on the back side, one above the other. The detection sensors 778d are photocoupler type detection devices, and are configured to be able to detect the position of the up-down inversion member 781 of the performance device 780 by arranging an arc-shaped protrusion 781d in the detection groove, as described in detail below.

The lower light diffusing member 778b has a plurality of fastened parts formed on the back side, and the fastened parts are inserted from the back side into insertion holes formed in the lower elongated part 772 at corresponding positions. The fastening screws are screwed in and fastened and fixed, making the fastening screws inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the upper light diffusion member 778b has through holes 778c on both the left and right sides for inserting fastening screws, and the fastening screws are inserted into the through holes 778c from the front side and screwed into the female threaded portion 775b of the upper long portion 775, thereby fastening and fixing the upper light diffusion member 778b.

In this case, the head of the fastening screw faces the front side, and there is a possibility that it will be noticeable without countermeasures, but in this embodiment, as will be described later, the covering member 787 is always facing the front side of the insertion hole 778c. Since the head of the fastening screw fixed to the insertion hole 778c can be hidden by the covering member 787.

Therefore, even if the head of the fastening screw is designed to face the front side, it is possible to avoid a situation where the head of the fastening screw stands out and adversely affects the performance. In other words, by arranging the covering member 787 so as to hide the fastening screw, the degree of freedom in designing the direction in which the fastening screw is inserted can be increased.

The production device 780 is a device that has an outer shape disposed around the upper elongated portion 775 and is configured to be displaceable, and includes an up-and-down reversing member 781 that is pivotally supported by the cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777. , a drive motor 782 to which a drive gear 782a that transmits a driving force to a transmission gear 781b of the up-and-down reversing member 781 is fixed to a drive shaft, and one end at each of both longitudinal ends of the up-down reversing member 781 a pair of intermediate arm members 783 that are pivotally supported; a pair of translational plate members 784 that have the other end of the intermediate arm members 783 pivotally supported and whose displacement is guided in the left-right direction by a guide portion 776; A pair of shaft rotating members 785 are arranged between the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 and configured to be rotatable (reversible) about a rotation shaft extending in the left-right direction, and the shaft rotation member 785 is a linear motion plate. A pair of shaft support members 786 jointly supported with the member 784, a pair of end plate members 785d that are fitted and fixed in a fixed phase to the left and right outer end portions of the shaft rotation member 785 in a manner that cannot be removed; Covering members 787 are disposed before and after the end plate member 785d and have a left-right length that covers the left and right sides of the upper elongated portion 775.

The upside-down member 781 includes a main body plate portion 781a formed in a long plate shape, a transmission gear 781b that protrudes in a gear-like shape from the rear side of the center of the main body plate portion 781a, a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c that protrude cylindrically from both ends of the main body plate portion 781a in the long direction toward the rear side, and an arc-shaped protrusion 781d that protrudes in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the transmission gear 781b and protrudes from the front side of the main body plate portion 781a.

The transmission gear 781b has a circular hole extending in the front-rear direction at the center, and the cylindrical protrusion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777 is inserted into this circular hole, and a fastening screw is screwed in from the tip side. The vertically inverting member 781 is pivotally supported by the transmission device holding plate 777 via the transmission gear 781b so as not to fall off.

The transmission gear 781b meshes with the drive gear 782a, and when the drive motor 782 is energized and the drive gear 782a rotates, the transmission gear 781b also rotates in conjunction with it, thereby rotating the up-down inversion member 781. In other words, the up-down inversion member 781 can be rotated by energizing the drive motor 782.

The cylindrical protrusion 781c pivotally supports the intermediate arm member 783. That is, the end portion of the intermediate arm member 783 where the one side support hole 783a is formed is displaced following the cylindrical protrusion portion 781c that is displaced as the up-and-down reversing member 781 is rotated.

The arc-shaped protruding portion 781d is formed so as to be able to be placed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d of the light emission producing means 778. That is, the arcuate protrusion 781d can be placed on either of the pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d.

Therefore, by reading the output of the detection sensor 778d, the position of the upside-down member 781 can be determined between two positions in which the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d, and a position in between (a position in which the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is not positioned in either of the detection grooves of the pair of detection sensors 778d).

The intermediate arm member 783 is formed in a long rod shape (narrow plate shape) and includes a one-side support hole 783a drilled at one end and supported by a cylindrical protrusion 781c, a cylindrical other-side cylindrical portion 783b formed with its inner periphery penetrating at the other end opposite the one-side support hole 783a, and a bevel tooth portion 783c formed as an umbrella-shaped gear tooth (bevel gear) centered on the other-side cylindrical portion 783b.

A female thread is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical protrusion 781c, and a fastening screw inserted into the one-side support hole 783a from the back side is screwed into the female thread. Thereby, the intermediate arm member 783 is pivotally supported by the up-and-down reversing member 781 so that it cannot fall off.

The linear motion plate member 784 is formed in a rectangular plate shape that is long in the left-right direction, and includes a cylindrical protrusion portion 784a that protrudes in a cylindrical shape inserted into the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, an arc-shaped plate portion 784b that protrudes in an arc shape centered on the central axis of the cylindrical protrusion portion 784a, a pair of long hole portions 784c that are drilled in an elliptical shape extending parallel to the left-right direction on both the upper and lower sides of the cylindrical protrusion portion 784a, a pair of support plate portions 784d that are arranged in parallel in a pair above and below at a position between the long hole portions 784c and protrude on the back side, and a pair of support plate portions 784d that are arranged in parallel to each other in a pair above and below at a position between the long hole portions 784c and protrude on the back side, and a pair of support plate portions 784d that are arranged ... It is equipped with a pair of protruding portions 784e formed as protruding portions extending in the front-rear direction on the opposing sides, a pair of fastening portions 784f arranged in a cylindrical shape that opens on the rear side at the end of the support plate portion 784d and has a female thread formed on the inner circumference side, a placement hole 784g formed between the cylindrical protruding portion 784a and the support plate portion 784d, a ring holding half portion 784h having a semicircular surface capable of holding a ring-shaped metal member 785e between the pivot member 786, and a magnet holding half portion 784i formed in a square box shape so as to be able to hold a magnet Mg between the pivot member 786.

The cylindrical protruding portion 784a is formed with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner circumferential diameter of the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, and has a protruding length slightly longer than the axial length of the other cylindrical portion 783b. A female thread is formed on the inner circumferential side. That is, the fastening screw inserted into the other side cylindrical portion 783b from the back side is screwed into the female thread of the cylindrical protrusion 784a, so that the intermediate arm member 783 cannot be detached from the cylindrical protrusion 784a. It is pivoted on.

The arcuate plate portion 784b is formed in an arcuate shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the other cylindrical portion 783b. As a result, the arcuate plate portion 784b is arranged in close proximity to the other cylindrical portion 783b so as to face it in the radial direction in the assembled state, thereby limiting the tilt displacement of the other cylindrical portion 783b with respect to the rotation axis. Thereby, the rotational displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 about the other side cylindrical portion 783b can be stabilized.

The long hole portion 784c is an opening through which the cylindrical portion 776a of the main body member 771 is inserted, and a fastening screw is inserted from the back side into the insertion hole of the fall prevention plate portion 776b and screwed into the female thread formed in the cylindrical portion 776a, so that the linear plate member 784 is supported on the main body member 771 so that it cannot fall off.

In its supported state (assembled state), the linear motion plate member 784 can be slid along the direction in which the elongated hole portion 784c is formed. That is, the linear motion plate member 784 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction.

The support plate portion 784d is a plate-shaped portion for holding the metal rod 785a of the shaft rotating member 785 so as to suppress vertical displacement, and the protrusion portion 784e is for regulating the arrangement of the metal rod 785a in the left-right direction. The details will be described later.

The arrangement hole 784g is an opening for avoiding interference with the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785, and the details will be described later.

The shaft rotating member 785 is a member arranged as a left and right pair and pivotally supported by the linear motion plate member 784, and includes a metal rod 785a formed from a metal material into a substantially cylindrical shape, and a length of the metal rod 785a. A concave groove 785b formed in the circumferential direction at the center position of the direction, and a bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783, which is a member disposed at the left and right inner ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a. A bevel tooth member 785c in which meshing bevel teeth (bevel gears) are formed; an end plate member 785d disposed on the left and right outer ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a; A ring-shaped metal member 785e is arranged around the metal rod 785a in such a manner as to be raised from the end plate member 785d, and a female thread is formed inside the ring-shaped metal member 785e, which is a portion protruding from the left and right inner sides of the end plate member 785d. A rotational position stabilizing part 785f into which a metal screw is screwed and fixed.

The metal rod 785a is disposed between a pair of support plate portions 784d of the linear plate member 784, and the protrusion portion 784e is disposed to enter the recessed groove portion 785b. Here, the recessed groove portion 785b is configured with a dimensional relationship that allows it to slide with the protrusion portion 784e, and is configured with a dimensional relationship that restricts left-right displacement with respect to the protrusion portion 784e.

That is, the groove width of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be slightly longer than the left-right width of the protrusion portion 784e, the diameter of the deep part of the groove of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be shorter than the gap length between the protrusion portions 784e, and the diameter of the part where the recessed groove portion 785b is not formed is set to be longer than the gap length between the protrusion portions 784e.

Thereby, the metal rod 785a can be supported on the back side of the linear motion plate member 784 in a manner that allows the metal rod to rotate about its axis and to suppress displacement in the left and right direction.

The bevel tooth member 785c is positioned so that it enters the placement hole 784g of the linear motion plate member 784. When the bevel tooth member 785c is partially inserted into the placement hole 784g, the intermediate arm member 783 is assembled from the opposite side (back side) of the linear motion plate member 784 so that the bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c.

In this assembled state, the bevel tooth member 785c is inserted into the placement hole 784g, but since the metal rod 785a is supported by the linear plate member 784, it cannot fall off toward the front side, and its displacement toward the rear side is restricted by the intermediate arm member 783. Therefore, the bevel tooth member 785c is supported by the linear plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 so that it cannot fall off.

The cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d is formed with an inner circumferential shape that corresponds to the non-circular shape (e.g., D-shaped cross section) of the tip of the metal rod 785a, and the inner circumferential shape and the tip of the metal rod 785a are formed with a dimensional relationship that allows for an interference fit, thereby being fixed in place.

The method of fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a is not limited to this. For example, it may be a method of fastening using an adhesive or the like, or a method of fastening the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a by forming a female thread at the tip of the metal rod 785a and screwing a fastening screw inserted into the end plate member 785d into the female thread, or other methods may be used.

The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held so as to be fitted inside the ring holding half portion 784h of the linear motion plate member 784. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held and the cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d that supports the metal rod 785a is in sliding contact with the inner peripheral side of the ring-shaped metal member 785e, so that the rotation center of the end plate member 785d is can be made to easily coincide with the axis passing through the center of rotation of the bevel tooth member 785c, and the load generated in the axial radial direction of the metal rod 785a can be reduced.

The rotational position stabilization portion 785f functions as a part that attracts the metal screw to the magnet Mg.

The shaft support member 786 is a member formed in a rectangular plate shape, and has an insertion hole 786a formed through which a fastening screw screwed into the fastened portion 784f can be inserted, and a ring holding member of the linear motion plate member 784. A ring holding half 786b having a semicircular surface capable of holding a ring-shaped metal member 785e between the ring holding half 786b and the magnet holding half 784i of the linear motion plate member 784 is capable of holding a magnet Mg. A magnet holding half part 786c formed in a rectangular box shape is provided.

When the fastening screw inserted from the back side into the insertion hole 786a is screwed into the fastened portion 784f to assemble the linear plate member 784 and the pivot member 786, the metal rod 785a is prevented from falling off the plate portion of the pivot member 786 to the back side, the ring-shaped metal member 785e is held by the ring holding halves 784h and 786b, and the magnet Mg is held by the magnet holding halves 784i and 786c.

The covering members 787 are a pair of left and right members formed in a box shape with openings on the left and right inner sides, and are fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d of the shaft rotation member 785, and have different sides on the opposite side. A decoration consisting of figures, patterns, letters, or pictures that can be interpreted with meaning is formed.

That is, the covering member 787 has a first main decorative surface 787a1 formed as a decorative surface visible to the player in the overhanging state (see FIG. 54), and a second main decorative surface 787b1 formed on the back surface of the first main decorative surface 787a1. When the first main decorative surface 787a1 is placed on the front side and enters the performance standby state (see FIG. 52), the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is formed on the side that is visible to the player, and the back surface thereof is A second sub-decorative surface 787b2 is formed. Note that the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 is formed on a side that is visible to the player when the second main decorative surface 787b1 is placed on the front side and enters the performance standby state (see FIG. 52).

The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members that are formed from two front and rear members that are fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d, and are formed in a substantially box shape with left and right inner sides open in the assembled state (see FIG. 26). It includes a plurality of extending portions 787c that extend toward the left and right members, and a recessed portion 787d that is recessed in a portion between the extending portions 787c so as to retreat to the left and right outer sides. .

The extending portions 787c are formed such that their ends abut or are placed close to each other when the covering member 787 is placed close to each other (see FIG. 26). Thereby, the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be visually recognized as one unit.

The recessed portion 787d is a portion for visibly opening up the circular portion located at the center of the light diffusion member 778b of the light-emitting performance means 778 and the arc plate portion at the upper center of the left and right of the upper long portion 775 when the covering member 787 is in a close arrangement state (see Figure 26), and is recessed in a shape that at least avoids interference with these portions.

With the operation of the presentation device 780, the covering member 787 has two states: a state in which the first main decorative surface 787a1 faces the front side and a state in which the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 faces upward (see FIGS. 29 and 52); The state can be switched between the decorative surface 787b1 facing the front side and the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 facing upward (see FIG. 30). First, the mechanism that constitutes the displacement that changes the state of the covering member 787 will be explained.

57(a) and 57(b) are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-and-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotation member 785. FIG. 57(a) shows a vertical arrangement state (also referred to as an erect vertical arrangement state) of the up-and-down reversible member 781 in which a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c are arranged on the same vertical line, and FIG. 57(b) ) shows a state in which the up-down reversing member 781 has been rotated approximately 24 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front about the cylindrical protrusion 777c from the state shown in FIG. 57(a). Note that in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b), illustration of the end plate member 785d of the left shaft rotating member 785 and the right shaft rotating member 785 is omitted for easy understanding.

In the erect vertical arrangement state, the arc-shaped protrusion 781d is arranged in a state in which it enters the detection groove of the upper detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56). In addition, in an inverted vertical arrangement state in which the up-down reversing member 781 is rotated 180 degrees from an upright vertical arrangement state, the arcuate protrusion 781d is arranged in a state in which it enters the detection groove of the lower detection sensor 778d. Ru.

That is, the output of the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56) is configured to switch depending on whether the up-down reversing member 781 is in an upright vertical arrangement state or an inverted vertical arrangement state, and the audio lamp control is performed from the output of the detection sensor 778d. Device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the state of presentation device 780.

As shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b), when the vertical reversing member 781 is rotationally displaced, the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced in the left-right direction while changing its posture. The angle of this attitude change corresponds to (is proportional to) the rotation angle of the shaft rotating member 785, and the amount of left-right displacement of the other side cylindrical portion 783b is the amount of left-right displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft rotating member 785. corresponds to

Here, we will explain the order in which rotational displacement and left-right displacement (linear displacement) occur. These displacements do not occur simultaneously and to the same extent, and there are arrangements in which the degree of rotational displacement is greater and arrangements in which the degree of linear displacement is greater.

First, an overview will be given. The configuration of the vertically inverting member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the linear motion plate member 784 is a well-known slider crank mechanism. That is, when the up-down reversing member 781 rotates around the cylindrical projection 777c, the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, which is pivotally supported by the cylindrical projection 781c of the up-down reversing member 781, rotates from the front. The displacement direction of the linear motion plate member 784 connected to the other side cylindrical portion 783b is regulated so that it moves in parallel along the movement axis HL1 passing through the center of the cylindrical protrusion 777c when viewed. The pair of left and right translational plate members 784 are simultaneously displaced in left and right opposite directions along the movement axis HL1.

As shown in FIG. 57(b), the other side cylindrical portion 783b has been displaced by a length L1 in the left-right direction by the time it is rotated approximately 24 degrees from the vertically arranged state shown in FIG. 57(a). The length L1 is half the width of the connecting portion between the lower elongated portion 772 and the upper elongated portion 775 (see FIG. 55) (the length between the left and right center and the left and right width ends) Illustrated as

In addition, due to the change in state from FIG. 57(a) to FIG. 57(b), the change in posture around the other cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 is 5 degrees clockwise when viewed from the front, which is less than half the 15 degrees that is the angle between adjacent teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

Since the bevel tooth member 785c is disposed on the front side of the intermediate arm member 783, the load transmission (meshing transmission) between the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c is performed at opposing positions in the front-rear direction, i.e. , occurs on the movement axis HL1 when viewed from the front.

FIG. 58(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the up-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotation member 785 taken along the line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in FIG. 57(a), FIG. 58(b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the vertically inverting member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785 taken along the line LVIIIb-LVIIIb in FIG. 57(b).

As shown in FIG. 58(b), the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced so as to press against the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 (displaced upward in FIG. 58(b)). Note that in FIG. 58(b), for ease of understanding, the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are shown as overlapping, and this overlap width is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c.

The bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c, and the driving force is transmitted, whereby the shaft rotating member 785 is rotationally displaced. While the up-and-down reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. rotate in the direction of rotation.

Note that while the up-down reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees, the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 rotates 90 degrees around the other side cylindrical portion 783b, and accordingly, the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 rotates. Rotate 180 degrees. That is, the angle at which the bevel tooth member 785c rotates around the metal rod 785a is twice the angle of rotation around the other cylindrical portion 783b of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

The amount of displacement of the bevel tooth member 785c that may occur due to pressure caused by displacement from the state of FIG. 58(a) to the state of FIG. 58(b) is less than the circumferential thickness of the gear teeth, and is not enough to reliably rotate the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c. In other words, it is less than the amount of displacement until the abutting representative tooth rotates to the arrangement of the adjacent teeth (the amount of displacement required for a 30 degree rotation, since the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c are arranged in 12 equal parts).

The gear teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c are displaced so as to press against the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c, but in this embodiment, since the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c are formed from a resin material, the displacement accompanied by the pressure is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, and the orientation of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 in the rotational direction is maintained from the state shown in FIG. 57(a) to the state shown in FIG. 57(b).

The elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c causes the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f ( (See FIG. 54) is caused by opposing adsorption forces.

That is, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the lower rotational position stabilization portion 785f so as to restrict the right-side shaft rotating member 785 from rotating backward, and the right-side shaft rotating member 785 receives a biasing force from the magnet Mg in the forward rotation direction. Therefore, the attractive force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction that increases the displacement resistance of the right-side shaft rotating member 785 to the rotational displacement.

Furthermore, for the left-hand shaft rotating member 785, the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is placed on the front side of the end plate member 785d, similar to the right side, while the magnet Mg is placed on the upper side opposite to the right side. (See Figure 55). Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the upper rotational position stabilizing portion 785f, so that the left shaft rotation member 785 receives an urging force in the backward rotation direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attraction force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction that increases the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the left shaft rotating member 785.

In this embodiment, the attractive force of the magnet Mg is designed to generate a load that exceeds the driving force applied to the bevel tooth member 785c until the other cylindrical portion 783b is displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 from the state shown in FIG. 57(a).

This causes elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c so as to absorb the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth portion 783c shown in FIG. 58(b). Then, when the displacement continues beyond the state shown in FIG. 57(b), the bevel tooth member 785c rotates beyond the attraction force of the magnet Mg, and the relationship between the magnet Mg and the metal screw of the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f increases. As the arrangement is separated, the magnetic force is extremely reduced, and the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, which are released from the attraction force of the magnet Mg, are rotationally displaced while elastically recovering.

Therefore, at the start of rotation, the elastic recovery increases the momentum in the rotational direction of the shaft rotating member 785, so that the rotational speed at the start of rotation can be instantaneously increased. This improvement in rotational speed occurs not only in the shaft rotating member 785 but also in the covering member 787 (see FIG. 55) that is fastened and fixed to the shaft rotating member 785.

This allows the movement of the covering member 787 to be adjusted without changing the drive speed of the drive motor 782, improving the performance effect of the covering member 787 while reducing the burden on the control design of the drive motor 782.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the timing at which the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 occurs due to the attractive force of the magnet Mg can be delayed from the timing at which the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 starts to rotate.

The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f that receives the attraction force of the magnet Mg is composed of a pair of upper and lower parts, and when the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, one rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is placed close to the magnet Mg and receives an attractive force (see FIG. 52(b)), and when the direction is reversed and the second main decorative surface 787b1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, the other (see FIG. 52(b) ), the upper) rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is disposed close to the magnet Mg and receives an attractive force.

In other words, regardless of whether the surface facing the front side is the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, at least in the close arrangement state (see Figures 29 and 30), the magnetic force of the magnet Mg effectively acts to limit the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785. Therefore, when displacing from the close arrangement state, the magnetic force can cause the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 to be delayed regardless of the direction of the rotational displacement (in both directions).

That is, from the state shown in FIG. 58(a) to the state shown in FIG. 58(b), the degree of linear displacement in the left-right direction is larger than the degree of rotational displacement. Then, when the vertical reversing member 781 continues to rotate counterclockwise in the front view beyond the position shown in FIG.

According to this embodiment, since the slider crank mechanism is employed as described above, similar effects occur. That is, in the vicinity of the vertical arrangement state, the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c is large in the left-right direction and small in the up-down direction, so the displacement in the left-right direction of the intermediate arm member 783 is large and the amount of rotation is small. Therefore, the horizontal displacement of the translational plate member 784 is large, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is small.

On the other hand, as the longitudinal direction of the up-down reversing member 781 approaches the left-right direction, the displacement of the cylindrical protrusion 781c becomes smaller in the left-right direction and larger in the up-down direction, so that the left-right displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 is The amount of rotation increases. Therefore, the horizontal displacement of the translational plate member 784 is small, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is large.

Therefore, in the rotation operation of the up-and-down reversing member 781 that starts from the vertically arranged state and ends in the vertically arranged state, the degree of horizontal displacement of the linear plate member 784 increases first, and then the degree of rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 increases. As a result, the degree of horizontal displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 increases again.

Due to the linear displacement and rotational displacement occurring in this order, the extending portion 787c of the covering member 787 is formed at the connecting portion between the upper elongated portion 775 and the lower elongated portion 772 (see FIG. 55). Collisions can be avoided. Next, changes in the appearance of the covering member 787 will be explained.

Figures 59(a) to 59(c) are front views of the performance device 780. Figures 59(a) to 59(c) show the inversion operation of the lift-and-lower inversion performance device 770 in chronological order. Figure 59(a) shows the performance device 780 in an upright vertical position with the upside-down member 781 in an upright position, Figure 59(b) shows the performance device 780 when the upside-down member 781 has been rotated 90 degrees from the vertical position, and Figure 59(c) shows the performance device 780 in an inverted vertical position with the upside-down member 781 in an inverted position.

The upside-down member 781 changes its state from the upright vertical position (see FIG. 57(a)) to the inverted vertical position by rotating 180 degrees counterclockwise as viewed from the front. In the inverted vertical position, the orientation of the covering member 787 is inverted 180 degrees based on the upright vertical position (see FIG. 59(a)). This switches the decorative surface visible to the player (see FIG. 59(c)).

The vertical inversion member 781 is rotated 180 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front from the inverted vertical arrangement state to return to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57(a)). Therefore, the reversing operation changes between the state shown in FIG. 59(a) and the state shown in FIG. ) The state can be repeatedly switched between the states shown in ).

As described above, while the up-down reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front from the state shown in FIG. do. Here, from the direction of rotation of the bevel tooth portion 783c, the right shaft rotation member 785 rotates in the backward rotation direction, and the left shaft rotation member 785 rotates in the forward rotation direction. That is, the covering member 787 fastened and fixed to the pair of shaft rotating members 785 and the end plate member 785d arranged on the left and right rotates in opposite directions.

Therefore, in the middle position, the right covering member 787 has the second sub-decorative surface 787b2 facing the front side, and the left covering member 787 has the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 facing the front side (see FIG. 59(b)). ).

This makes it possible to prevent the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) of the left covering member 787 and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) of the right covering member 787 from being viewed in unison during rotational displacement of the covering member 787.

Therefore, the decorative surface of the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be intentionally made to have misaligned content on the left and right, and the content of the decorative surface can be configured to be difficult for the player to recognize, so the amount of information provided to the player by the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be reduced.

This can reduce the player's attention to the covering member 787 during rotational displacement. Furthermore, since the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or second main decorative surface 787b1) when the rotational displacement stops, the game can be played until the rotation of the covering member 787 stops. This also has the effect of making it easier to maintain the person's line of sight on the covering member 787.

The rotational displacement is performed with the second operating unit 700 in the extended state (see FIG. 54), but this rotational displacement stops and the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 change to the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the first main decorative surface 787a1). When the two main decorative surfaces 787b1) are aligned, the production device 780 has risen to near the vertical center of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 30), and in this state, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decorative surface 787b2) is unlikely to attract attention.

In particular, when the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be displaced close to the second operation unit 700, the visibility to the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or the second sub-decoration surface 787b2) is It will be blocked by unit 800.

On the other hand, when the second operation unit 700 enters the performance standby state (see FIG. 52) and the performance device 780 is arranged below the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the first sub-decorative surface 787a2 (or The second sub-decorative surface 787b2) becomes easier to enter the player's field of view.

In this way, in the second operating unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) is prevented from being seen together during rotational displacement in the extended state, and prevented from facing the player, so that it does not draw attention to itself, but is formed as a side that can be noticed by the player in the performance standby state.

This allows the appearance of the second operation unit 700 to change depending on the placement, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the performance is excessively poor compared to the cost of placing the second operation unit 700 (occupying space, the burden of hiding it well).

After the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787, the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is attracted to the magnet Mg (see FIG. 54(b)), thereby stabilizing the posture of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787. It is possible to aim for

In this embodiment, the metal member that attracts the Mg magnet is composed of a metal screw, so compared to designing a dedicated metal member, it is possible to reduce member costs and improve maintainability. .

As described above, the rotational displacement of the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 is accompanied by linear displacement in the left-right direction, so the arrangement of the performance device 780 capable of performing the rotational displacement is limited. That is, when the second operating unit 700 is in the performance standby state (see FIG. 28) or the intermediate performance state (see FIG. 33), performing the rotational displacement causes the decorative members such as the right front plate member 710, the left rear plate member 750, and the front support member 760 arranged on the left and right, and the three-dimensional decorative part 768a fixedly arranged on the front side thereof, to collide with the covering member 787.

On the other hand, in the extended state of the second operating unit 700 (see FIG. 30), a space is secured in the left-right direction, thereby making it possible to rotationally displace the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787.

Therefore, the drive control of the drive motor 731 that causes rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 is performed only when it is determined that the second operating unit 700 is in the extended state based on the output of the detection sensor 713. Executable control is based on the premise that Thereby, rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 can be caused normally.

The extensions 787c are arranged close to each other when the upside-down member 781 is in the vertical position, and in this position, are arranged facing the front and rear of the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772. Therefore, when the covering member 787 is rotated from this position about a rotation axis extending in the left-right direction, the extensions 787c collide with the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772, causing a malfunction.

On the other hand, the configuration in which the extension portions 787c are arranged close together produces the effect that the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be seen as one, and is a necessary configuration for production. It is preferable that it can be maintained.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is configured to be linearly displaced by a length L1 in the left-right direction before rotationally displaced (see FIG. 57). Due to the linear displacement of the length L1, the extension part 787c can be retracted from the front and rear positions of the connecting part between the upper elongate part 775 and the lower elongate part 772, and the extension part 787c and the upper elongate part 775 It is possible to avoid a problem in which the connecting portion between the lower elongated portion 772 and the lower elongated portion 772 collide with each other.

Further, by configuring the rotational displacement in this way, while the covering member 787 is displaced in the left-right direction, rotational displacement does not occur (or is limited) in the length L1, and rotational displacement occurs in the remaining length L2. Therefore, the amount of displacement in the left-right direction during rotation of the covering member 787 can be suppressed to a small value.

This makes it possible to keep the attention of the covering member 787 low and to make the rotational displacement less noticeable compared to when the position of the covering member 787 changes significantly during rotation, and therefore allows the decorative surfaces 787a1-787b2 to be designed without regard for appearance during rotational displacement, thereby improving design freedom.

The timing at which the covering member 787 starts to rotate can be set arbitrarily by designing the attractive force of the magnet Mg. Therefore, even if a design change occurs to increase the left-right width of the connecting portion between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 of the main body member 771, the configuration of the performance device 780 can be kept the same, but by changing the magnet Mg to a magnet with a stronger attractive force, it is possible to avoid collision between the connecting portion and the extension portion 787c, as in this embodiment.

As shown in phantom lines in FIG. 59, the insertion hole 778c is arranged so as to be always hidden by the covering member 787. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 778c from being visible to the player, and it is possible to avoid the fastening screw from lowering the performance effect.

In this embodiment, the decorations (figures, patterns, designs, etc.) of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 formed on the pair of left and right covering members 787 are not the same on the left and right covering members 787. The insertion holes 778c are arranged asymmetrically to match the left and right decorations.

That is, since the insertion hole 778c is a portion through which a fastening screw is inserted, it is no longer possible to arrange an LED on the illumination board 787a at that position (see FIG. 55). In addition, since the fastening screws are made of metal and do not transmit light, they are easily visible in the dark during light-emitting effects.

Therefore, it is desirable to position the insertion holes 778c in the decorations on the left and right, avoiding areas that need to be brightly lit and conspicuous, and as a result, the placement of the insertion holes 778c is asymmetrical.

It is of course permissible to arrange the insertion holes 778c symmetrically. In particular, if the decorations of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 of the left and right covering members 787 are identical, there is no disadvantage to arranging the insertion holes 778c symmetrically, and the design of the illumination board 778a can be made easier.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is displaced linearly left and right during the inversion operation of the lift-down inversion performance device 770, and even when the vicinity of the center of the light diffusion member 778b is not surrounded by the extension portion 787c, the mechanical parts such as the up-down inversion member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, and the linear plate member 784 are hidden so as not to be visible.

In other words, when viewed from the front, the outer shape of the upper long portion 775 of the main body member 771 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the light diffusion member 778b located at the front, and the vertical width of the linear plate member 784 is designed to fit within the vertical width of the left and right long portions of the upper long portion 775 located at the front. In addition, the up-down inversion member 781 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the disk portion of the upper long portion 775 located at the front, and the intermediate arm member 783 is designed so that its displacement trajectory fits within the outer shape of the light diffusion member 778b.

As a result, the mechanism for realizing the displacement of the presentation device 780 can be hidden behind the light diffusion member 778b and made invisible, so that the presentation effect of the appearance of the presentation device 780 during the reversing operation is reduced. can be avoided.

Returning to FIG. 26 for further explanation, the third operating unit 800 is a unit that is positioned above the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in the performance standby state, is supported at the tip of a pair of left and right lifting arm members 801 (see FIG. 31) supported by the rear case 510, and is configured to be capable of being lifted and lowered as the lifting arm members 801 are driven in the vertical direction.

FIG. 60 is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800, and FIG. 61 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800. Note that in FIGS. 60 and 61, the portions that make up the displacement of the third operation unit 800 are illustrated, and the decorative members 870 and 880 as decorative portions disposed on the outside are not illustrated.

60 and 61, the third operating unit 800 includes a held member 810 held by a lifting arm member 801, a fixed cylindrical member 820 having a cylindrical portion 821 fastened to the center of the held member 810, an inner rotating member 830 journaled on the cylindrical portion 821 with the cylindrical portion 821 inserted into the inner periphery, an outer rotating member 840 journaled on the main body portion 831 with the inner rotating member 830 inserted into the inner periphery, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 rotatably connected to the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and a drive transmission device 860 having a plurality of gear members housed in the held member 810 and for transmitting a drive force for displacing the inner rotating member 830, the outer rotating member 840, and the intermediate arm member 850.

The held member 810 comprises a disk-shaped main body member 811 and a perforated cover member 817 that covers the main body member 811 from the front side.

The main body member 811 includes a tube fixing portion 812 recessed in the center to hold the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, with insertion holes for inserting fastening screws for fixing and through holes for inserting electrical wiring, a detection sensor 813 which is a photocoupler type sensor and is fixed with its detection groove facing the side capable of receiving the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840, a motor holding portion 814 which holds the drive motor 861, a number of cylindrical protrusions 815 protruding from the front side as a cylindrical portion which axially supports the transmission gear 863 so that it cannot fall off, and a number of double cylindrical protrusions 816 protruding from the front side as a double cylindrical portion which axially supports the load response gear 865 so that it cannot fall off.

The perforated cover member 817 has a circular hole 818 drilled in the front-rear direction in the center. The circular hole 818 is designed with dimensions such that the transmission gear 863 and the load response gear 865 protrude inward from its inner peripheral edge when viewed from the opening direction.

The fixed cylindrical member 820 comprises the above-mentioned cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate portion 822 formed on the front end of the cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate-shaped illumination board 823 fastened to the circular plate portion 822 and having light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front side, a light-transmitting decorative member 824 made of a light-transmitting resin material and shaped like an umbrella (or bowl) so as to be able to cover the illumination board 823 from the front side, and a sliding member 825 formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 821 on the circular plate portion 822 side and configured to be able to slide with the cylindrical portion 821.

The cylindrical part 821 has a female thread formed at the tip on the back side, and a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole of the cylinder fixing part 812 of the held member 810 is screwed into the female thread, thereby fixing the fixed cylinder. The member 820 is fastened and fixed to the held member 810 in a non-rotatable manner.

The cylindrical portion 821 is formed with an axial through hole on the inner circumference side, and the electrical wiring inserted into the through hole of the tube fixing portion 812 is routed through this through hole to the front side and connected to a connector arranged behind the illumination board 823.

The illumination board 823 is equipped with LEDs consisting of inner light-emitting parts 823a that are placed at the vertices of a pentagon and at a central position equidistant from those vertices, and outer light-emitting parts 823b that are placed at 15 equally spaced locations on the circumference. The inner light-emitting parts 823a are composed of LEDs whose optical axis faces the front (forward), and the outer light-emitting parts 823b are composed of LEDs whose optical axis faces radially outward (diameter direction).

The outer light-emitting unit 823b is composed of 15 LEDs arranged at equal intervals on the circumference. As described below, the light emitted from the outer light-emitting unit 823b is irradiated onto the plated parts 871a of the first decorative members 870, which are arranged in close proximity to each other at equal intervals on the circumference, so that each first decorative member 870 is irradiated with light from three LEDs.

The outer light emitting part 823b is fixedly arranged on the illumination board 823, and the first decorative member 870 is configured to rotate around the center of the circle, but the outer light emitting part 823b and the first decorative member 870 are coaxial. Since they are arranged at equal intervals on the circle, the light from the same number (in this embodiment, three) of LEDs is always directed to each first decorative member 870 regardless of the rotational orientation of the first decorative member 870. can be irradiated.

This makes it possible to suppress changes in the amount of light LD1 irradiated to the first decorative member 870 during the rotation operation.

The sliding member 825 is configured so that its inner diameter side can slide on the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820, while its outer diameter side can slide on the circular flange-shaped portion 831a of the inner rotating member 830.

The sliding member 825 has a flange-shaped part formed on the front side, and has a cylindrical part that projects rearward from the inner diameter end of the flange-shaped part. Since the diameter is formed to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the circular flange-shaped portion 831a, it is slidably fitted into the inner rotating member 830.

By interposing the sliding member 825 between them, direct contact between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 that is configured to be rotatable around it is prevented. In addition, by disposing the sliding member 825 on the side that has the advantage in terms of strength, that is, the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and the circular flange portion 831a side of the main body portion 831, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fixed cylindrical member 820 or the inner rotating member 830 will be damaged or deformed due to the load generated during sliding or when sliding is poor (when the displacement resistance becomes unintentionally excessive).

The inner rotating member 830 comprises a cylindrical main body 831 having a circular flange-shaped portion 831a at the front end, a plurality of metal rods 832 fastened to the circular flange-shaped portion 831a at five equal circumferential positions around the main body 831 with their long lengths aligned radially, a plurality of linear motion members 833 formed so that the metal rods 832 can be inserted therethrough and configured to be linearly displaceable while being guided by the metal rods 832, and a plurality of rotating members 834 rotatably supported at the radially outer portions of the linear motion members 833.

The main body 831 comprises the circular flange portion 831a described above, a number of sliding ridges 831b extending rearward in a ridge-like manner from the circular flange portion 831a as a base end at intermediate angular positions (five locations) between adjacent metal bars 832, and a number of recesses 831c formed at intervals in the circumferential direction at the end opposite the circular flange portion 831a.

The sliding protrusion 831b is a portion configured to be able to slide on the inner curved surface of the main body portion 841 of the outer rotating member 840, and is designed to reduce the contact area with the outer rotating member 840 and reduce contact friction. The protruding tip is formed to have a semicircular cross section.

The sliding protrusion 831b is arranged at an angular position between the adjacent metal rods 832 as described above, but in other words, the sliding protrusion 831b is placed at the angular position on the opposite side of the metal rod 832 with respect to the central axis of the outer rotating member 840. position (position shifted by 180 degrees).

As a result, even if the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 during the switching rotation operation described below and the outer rotating member 840 on which the intermediate arm member 850 is journaled is subjected to a load that displaces it radially outward, the displacement of the outer rotating member 840 can be received by the sliding protrusion portion 831b, so the contact area between the inner circumferential surface of the outer rotating member 840 and the outer circumferential surface of the inner rotating member 830 can be maintained low.

The recessed portion 831c is a portion into which the transmission protrusion 864a of the central ring gear 864 is inserted. By arranging the transmission protrusion 864a in the recessed portion 831c, the relative rotation between them is disabled, and the rotation angle of the central ring gear 864 and the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 can be made to match.

The translational member 833 includes a pair of cylindrical protrusions 833a and 833b arranged at intervals in the translational displacement direction and protruding rearward in a cylindrical shape, and the cylindrical protrusion 833a. , 833b as a reference, a cylindrical shaft portion 833c formed on the side away from the central axis of the main body portion 831 and inserted into the rotating member 834, and a cylindrical shaft portion 833c extending along the circumferential direction at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 833c. A recessed groove 833d is provided.

The recessed groove 833d is arranged on the side protruding from the rotating member 834 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), and allows the overhanging parts 873, 883 of the decorative members 870, 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 to slide. By being fitted externally, the groove functions as a displacement regulating groove that prevents the rotating member 834 from falling off in the radial direction, but the details will be described later.

The rotating member 834 has a bevel gear-shaped bevel tooth portion 834a and a plurality of cylindrical protrusions 834b that protrude cylindrically parallel to the linear motion direction. The bevel tooth portion 834a is not formed around the entire circumference, but is formed over the 3/4 circumference (approximately 270 degrees) required for operation.

The cylindrical protrusion 834b has a female thread formed on the inner circumference, and functions to fasten the decorative members 870, 880 to the rotating member 834 by screwing in the fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 874, 884 of the decorative members 870, 880, as will be described in detail below.

The outer rotating member 840 includes a cylindrical main body 841 and a plurality of (in this embodiment, five) extending outward in the radial direction at positions where the circumference of the main body 841 is divided into five equal parts in the circumferential direction. The extended arm portion 842 of the main body portion 841, the gear teeth 843 formed on the outer circumferential side along the circumference of the rear end of the main body portion 841, and the diameter of the main body portion 841 are arranged such that they can enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. A detected portion 844 extending outward is provided.

The extension arm 842 has a cylindrical portion 842a that extends parallel to the central axis of the main body 841, and a female thread is formed on the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 842a. When a fastening screw is screwed into the female thread while the cylindrical portion 842a is inserted into the base end rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported on the extension arm 842 so that it cannot fall off.

The gear teeth 843 are disposed so as to mesh with the load response gear 865 of the drive transmission device 860, and thus function as a portion that switches between the presence and absence of rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840, which will be described in detail later.

The intermediate arm member 850 is a long member, and includes a proximal rod portion 851 whose one end is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and the other portions of the proximal rod portion 851. A thickened part 852 whose thickness is increased toward the front side at the end side, and a distal end rod part 853 which extends from the front end of the thickened part 852 in parallel to the longitudinal direction of the proximal rod part 851. , and a rotation transmitting part 854 formed by having gear teeth at the end of the tip side rod part 853.

The rotation transmission part 854 is a part that interlocks with the linear motion member 833 and the rotation member 834, and includes a supported hole 854a formed in a dimensional relationship that allows them to rotate with each other when the cylindrical protrusion 833a is inserted therethrough. A guide hole 854b, which is an elongated hole drilled in an arc shape centered on the supported hole 854a, through which the cylindrical protrusion 833b is inserted and guided, and a bevel gear whose central axis is the supported hole 854a. A bevel tooth portion 854c is formed in a shape and forms a bevel gear by meshing with the bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834.

The drive transmission device 860 includes a drive motor 861 fastened to the motor holding portion 814, a drive gear 862 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 861, a plurality of transmission gears 863 supported on the cylindrical protrusion portion 815 so as not to fall off and meshed to be able to transmit a driving force via the drive gear 862, a central ring gear 864 meshed with the transmission gear 863, a pair of load response gears 865 positioned forward of the central ring gear 864 and supported on the double cylindrical protrusion portion 816 so as not to fall off, and a torque limiter 866 supported on the double cylinder of the double cylindrical protrusion portion 816 on the back side of the load response gear 865 and whose resistance is variable according to the load in the rotational direction applied to the load response gear 865.

The central annular gear 864 is formed into an annular shape, and is designed to allow the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 to be inserted into the inner peripheral side thereof, and has a recess so that it can be inserted into the recessed portion 831c of the inner rotating member 830. A transmission protrusion 864a protrudes from the bottom plate toward the front side with an arrangement and shape corresponding to the installation part 831c, and a coaxial double ring-shaped bottom plate disposed on the inner and outer diameter sides of the transmission protrusion 864a. and a supporting annular portion 864b protruding from the front side.

In the assembled state, when the transmission protrusion 864a is inserted into the recessed part 831c, the rear end of the main body part 831 of the inner rotary member 830 is placed in the gap between the support annular parts 864b in a dimensional relationship such that it is an intermediate fit. Or they are fitted with an interference fit dimension. Thereby, the central ring gear 864 and the inner rotating member 830 can be rotated integrally.

Note that the arrangement of the recessed portion 831c and the transmission protrusion 864a is not limited at all. For example, they may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, or may be arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

If they are spaced equally, they can be assembled by matching the arrangement of the transmission projections 864a and the recesses 831c without having to consider the posture of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864, making it possible to assemble them quickly. In the present embodiment, where the shapes of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are symmetrical in the rotational direction (the same at 72 degree intervals), it is considered that there is little impact from the posture of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 shifting during assembly, so it is effective to have them spaced equally.

If the intervals are unequal, the assembly process requires an additional step of aligning the central annular gear 864 with the inner rotating member 830 before assembly; however, the positioning of the transmission protrusion 864a in the recessed portion 831c can be used to align the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864.

The load response gear 865 is arranged so that it can mesh with the gear teeth 843 of the outer rotating member 840. A torque limiter 866 is engaged with the load response gear 865, so that the load response gear 865 can be switched between a state in which rotation is permitted and a state in which rotation is restricted (limited) depending on the magnitude of the rotational resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864, and the outer rotating member 840.

In other words, the torque limiter 866 functions as a so-called safety clutch, and is configured to disconnect and release the transmission of the driving force when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied. In this embodiment, a device that transmits driving force in one direction (one-way torque limiter) is configured as a pair with the transmission direction reversed, and the torque limiter 866 is configured to switch the driving force transmission in both directions with good responsiveness.

FIG. 62 is an exploded front perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of a part of the configuration of the third operating unit 800. Note that in FIGS. 62 and 63, a decorative portion of the third operation unit 800 is illustrated, and illustration of a portion for configuring displacement is omitted.

As shown in Figures 62 and 63, the third operating unit 800 comprises the inner rotating member 830 described above, a first decorative member 870 that is fastened to the cylindrical protrusion 834b of the inner rotating member 830 and covers one side of the cylindrical protrusion 834b, and a second decorative member 880 that is fastened to the cylindrical protrusion 834b and covers the cylindrical protrusion 834b from the opposite side of the first decorative member 870.

The first decorative member 870 includes a first skeleton part 871 formed to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protruding part 834b, and a first covering part 875 formed to cover one side of the first skeleton part 871. , is provided.

The first skeletal portion 871 is entirely plated and is configured to easily reflect light.

The inside of the frame of the first covered portion 875 is made of a colorless, light-transmitting resin material, and its surface is decorated with figures, patterns, and character designs (hereinafter also referred to as "designs, etc."), and when the surface is facing forward, the designs, etc. are visible to the player.

In this embodiment, each of the multiple (five) first covered portions 875 has an independent pattern or the like drawn on it. Therefore, by changing the first covered portion 875 that emits strong light through the light emission control of the illumination board 823, or by changing the arrangement of the first covered portions 875, it is possible to vary the pattern or the like that attracts the player's attention.

For example, at the same time when the third symbol display device 81 executes a display effect that draws attention to which first covered portion 875 is stopped on the third symbol display device 81 side from the player's perspective, the inner rotating member 830 If it is controlled to rotate, the first covering part 875 on the third symbol display device 81 side can be continuously changed as the rotation stops, so that the player can The line of sight can be focused on the first covered portion 875.

The second decorative member 880 includes a second skeleton part 881 formed to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical protruding part 834b, and a second covering part 885 formed to cover the other side of the second skeleton part 881. , is provided.

The second skeleton part 881 includes a holding piece 881a for holding the magnet Mg2 housed in the second covering part 885 so that it cannot fall off.

The second covered part 885 has a metal screw screwed and fixed at a position (adjacent position) where the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 accommodated in the adjacent second covered part 885 acts. By attracting the magnet Mg2 to the screw, it is possible to ensure the integrity of the second covered portion 885 in the combined state (particularly in the continuous combined state, see FIG. 32).

The second covered portion 885 has a figure, pattern, or character design (hereinafter also referred to as "design, etc.") drawn on its surface, and when the surface is facing forward, the design, etc. is visible to the player.

In this embodiment, the patterns etc. drawn on the plurality (in this embodiment, five) of the second covering parts 885 are grouped by the plurality of (at least two, maximum of five) second covering parts 885. The pattern etc. is configured so that when the five second covering parts 885 form a combined state, each second covering part 885 is shaped like a circle so that it is visually recognized as a "circular body" when viewed from the front. It is decorated so that it forms part of the body.

The pattern drawn on the second covering portion 885 is not particularly limited, but in this embodiment, the pattern is designed so that the content that can be grasped from the second covering portion 885 in a united state does not change significantly even if the arrangement of the second decorative member 880 in the rotation direction is different. In other words, the pattern does not have clear top, bottom, left, or right, and is designed to have an inconspicuous change in external shape even when rotated (in this embodiment, a circular shape).

Therefore, the more firmly the plurality of second covering parts 885 can be integrated, the better the production performance when making the second covering parts 885 visible to the player can be improved. In this respect, in this embodiment, the second covered part 885 side is firmly integrated by the adsorption force of the magnet Mg2 in the combined state, so that when the second covered part 885 is disposed on the front side, the combined state It is possible to improve the presentation performance in this situation.

In addition, in each second covering part 885, a magnet Mg2 is arranged on one side in the width direction, and a metal screw is screwed and fixed on the opposite side. When the direction of the second covering portion 885 is reversed from front to back by the switching rotation operation described later, the arrangement of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw in a front view is also reversed accordingly.

Even in this case, the metal screws that each magnet Mg2 attracts are simply replaced with metal screws that are screwed into and fixed to the second covering portion 885 adjacently provided on the opposite side, and the five second covering portions 885 are Since the portion 885 is arranged in an annular shape, there is no change in the degree of adsorption when integrated.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the first covering portion 875 does not contain a magnet. This makes the strength of the integration on the first covering portion 875 side slightly weaker, but this is done to avoid any deterioration in the presentation performance.

In other words, since each of the first covered parts 875 has an independent picture drawn on it, even if the degree of integration in the combined state is weak and the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 is slightly shifted, the game There is no possibility that the person will not be able to recognize the pattern etc. that is visible to the user. Therefore, it is possible to avoid deterioration in performance of the performance using the picture drawn on the first covering part 875.

Furthermore, since the strength of the integration on the first covered part 875 side is weak, vibrations that occur due to vertical displacement (stopping from) and rotational displacement (stopping from) as integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation. ), the arrangement of the combined first covered portions 875 can be shifted. As a result, the first covering part 875 can be displaced in a displacement mode that cannot be achieved with a conventional machine in which the first covering part 875 is not a divided body but a single circular member. It is possible to improve the effect of the production by the covering part 875.

Due to the above-mentioned circumstances, in the combined state in which the plurality of decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged close to each other, the state in which the first decorative member 870 faces the front side is also referred to as the individual combined state (see FIG. 31), and the second decorative member 880 faces the front side. The state in which it faces is also referred to as the serially combined state (see FIG. 32). Next, an operation for switching between the individual combined state and the series combined state will be described.

Figures 64(a), 64(b), 65(a) and 65(b) are rear views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and Figures 66(a), 66(b), 67(a) and 67(b) are front views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850.

Figures 64 to 67 show in chronological order the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 caused by the driving force of the drive motor 861 (see Figure 60) being transmitted and the inner rotating member 830 rotating relative to the outer rotating member 840.

That is, the diagrams are illustrated in chronological order from rear and front views, showing how the inner rotating member 830 rotates 45 degrees at a time from the individual combined state (Figures 64(a) and 66(a)).

Note that in FIGS. 64 to 67 , the axis of the metal rod 832 is shown as a virtual position line 832F, and the angular change in the arrangement of this virtual position line 832F corresponds to the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830. Note that the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 from the individual combined state (FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a)) is illustrated by angle θ31.

As shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, when the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front (see FIG. 66) from the individually combined state (this rotational operation is also referred to as a "switching rotational operation" hereinafter), the intermediate Since the arm member 850 is allowed to rotate, the inner rotation member 830 is allowed to rotate relative to the outer rotation member 840. In this embodiment, the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in position by the resistance of the torque limiter 866 (see FIG. 60), and only the inner rotating member 830 rotates.

Therefore, in Figures 64 to 67, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 842a is maintained, and the intermediate arm member 850 rotates and displaces around the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840.

From the above-mentioned configuration between the members, the virtual position line 832F is a straight line passing through the center of the supported hole 854a, and since the cylindrical protrusion 833a of the translational member 833 is fastened and fixed to the supported hole 854a, The change in the arrangement of the supported hole 854a corresponds to the change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 833.

As shown in Figures 64 and 65, the rotation transmission part 854 is displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and is displaced in the circumferential direction at the same time, so the rotating member 834 supported by the rotation transmission part 854 is also displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and is displaced in the circumferential direction at the same time. That is, in the switching rotation operation, the linear moving member 833 is displaced 180 degrees in the circumferential direction while being displaced in the radial direction.

Since the switching rotation operation includes circumferential displacement, the arrangement of the linear member 833, the rotating member 834, and the decorative members 870, 880 fastened thereto are not fixed even at the radial end position, and the circumferential displacement can be maintained. Therefore, compared to a case where the displacement is completed only by radial linear displacement (for example, the reversal operation described above with the second operating unit 700), the presentation effect during the switching rotation operation can be maintained at a high level.

In contrast, in the above-mentioned reversal operation of the second operating unit 700, a rotational operation with high acceleration is generated by utilizing the elastic recovery force of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 58), thereby weakening the impression that the position of the covering member 787 at the outer displacement end in the linear direction (see FIG. 59(b)) is fixed.

That is, by delaying the start of rotation of the covering member 787 and not delaying the end of rotation, the rotational speed of the covering member 787 is improved, and a period ( Even in a situation where the period near the dead center of the slider crank continues, the rotational speed of the covering member 787 is increased to maintain a high production effect due to the operation of the covering member 787.

Since the switching rotation operation includes radial displacement, it is possible that radial loads will be generated from the intermediate arm member 850 to the outer rotating member 840, causing the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840 to shift. However, in this embodiment, the radial loads on the intermediate arm member 850 are generated equally at equal intervals (72 degree intervals) around the rotation axis, so that the loads cancel each other out. This makes it possible to suppress deviations in the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840, making it easier to perform the switching rotation operation normally.

In this way, the radial displacement (expansion/contraction displacement) in the rotational movement of the third operating unit 800 occurs while being accompanied by a circumferential rotation. Therefore, in order to avoid collisions with surrounding decorative members, the switching rotational movement of the third operating unit 800 is controlled so that it can be executed when the output of the detection sensor that determines the posture of the lifting arm member 801 indicates that the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state.

Furthermore, as the rotation transmitting portion 854 is displaced as described above, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 that are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 also move in the radial direction around the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830. Displaced and at the same time displaced in the circumferential direction.

As the intermediate arm member 850 rotates, the bevel tooth portion 854c (see FIGS. 66 and 67) meshes with the bevel tooth portion 834a (see FIG. 60) of the rotating member 834, and the rotating member 834 and the rotating member Decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to member 834 are rotated about metal rod 832 as an axis.

The angle of this rotational displacement is proportional to the angle θ32, which is the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 based on the imaginary position line 832F. In addition, the direction of rotation is set to the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the radially outer side of the imaginary position line 832F, since the angle θ32 increases as it moves away from the imaginary position line 832F in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front, and the rotating member 834 is positioned on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850 (see FIG. 60).

Since the rotating member 834 is in a posture in which either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 faces the front side in the integral rotation state, the maximum angle θ31E as the maximum value of the angle θ31 (in this embodiment, 180 When the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 reaches the maximum angle θ32E (in this embodiment, 90 degrees) due to the rotation of ).

In other words, the angle at which the rotating member 834 rotates around the metal rod 832 is configured to be twice the angle of rotation around the supported hole 854a of the bevel tooth portion 854c.

Here, unlike the action of the magnet Mg of the second operating unit 700 described above, the attractive force of the magnet Mg2 (see FIG. 62) does not produce an action that retards the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 around the metal rod 832.

That is, the magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force with the adjacent second decorative member 880, and as the intermediate arm member 850 rotates, the decorative member 880 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832. As a result, a gap may be created between the adjacent second decorative members 880, and the suction force may be lost.

Therefore, before the rotational displacement about the metal rod 832 starts, the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 is lost, and the rotation with respect to the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 about the metal rod 832 is lost. No delaying effects occur.

This makes it possible to reduce the driving force required to rotate and displace the decorative members 870 and 880. In other words, the driving force required of the drive motor 861 can be reduced, making it possible to miniaturize the drive motor 861.

Furthermore, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 can be started quickly and finished early, the degree of attention of the player to the rotational displacement about the metal rod 832 can be reduced.

The rapidity at the start of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 is also maintained by configuring the rotational angle of the decorative members 870, 880 relative to the rotational angle of the inner rotating member 830 so that it is not constant.

For example, in the process of rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, the rotation angle of the virtual position line 832F (rotation angle of the inner rotation member 830) from the state in which the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged with a reduced diameter and can rotate integrally is 45 degrees. In this case, the angle θ32 is 18 degrees (see FIG. 66(b)), and when the virtual position line 832F is further rotated by an angle of 45 degrees, the angle θ32 is 27 degrees (see FIG. 67(a)). reference).

That is, the angle θ32 is designed to be smaller on the rotation start side of the inner rotating member 830 from a state in which integral rotation is possible than during rotation. This makes it possible to suppress the degree of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 when the inner rotating member 830 starts rotating.

The driving force of the drive motor 861 will be used to rotate the inner rotating member 830, the intermediate arm member 850, and the decorative members 870 and 880, but due to the above-mentioned configuration, the integral rotation operation is not possible. Since it is possible to reduce the driving force required to rotate the decorative members 870 and 880 when the inner rotating member 830 starts rotating from the possible state, the load on the drive motor 861 is not excessive when the inner rotating member 830 starts rotating. You can avoid it from getting too big.

In addition, the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870, 880 around the metal rod 832 occurs while shifting in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front, so the visibility of the decorative members 870, 880 during the rotational displacement can be kept low. This reduces the possibility that the side portions of the decorative members 870, 880 (for example, the connecting surface between the first covering portion 875 and the second covering portion 885) are visible, and improves the design freedom of the side portions of the decorative members 870, 880.

During the switching rotation operation, the intermediate arm member 850 overlaps the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 when viewed from the front. Further, the arrangement also overlaps with the extending arm portion 842 that is adjacent to the extending arm portion 842 in which the cylindrical portion 842a that is rotatably supported is disposed. Therefore, without countermeasures, there is a possibility that the intermediate arm member 850 will collide with the surrounding parts.

In contrast, in this embodiment, collisions are avoided by shifting the configuration of the intermediate arm member 850 back and forth for each part. That is, by arranging the distal end rod portion 853 and the rotation transmitting portion 854 on the rear side of the proximal end rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, the proximal end rod portion 851 and the distal end side rod portion 851 are arranged on the rear side. The rod portion 853 and the rotation transmitting portion 854 can be made to overlap in the front and rear, and it is possible to avoid collision during the switching rotation operation.

In addition, by arranging the base end rod portion 851 in front of the extended arm portion 842 and the tip end rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 in rear of the extended arm portion 842, the intermediate arm member 850 can be arranged in front of and behind the extended arm portion 842 during the switching rotation operation, and collision between the intermediate arm member 850 and the extended arm portion 842 can be avoided.

64 to 67 show a case where the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 relative to the outer rotating member 840 is a direction that allows the intermediate arm member 850 to rotate (counterclockwise as viewed from the front in the individual combined state, see FIG. 66). In this case, the gear teeth 843 engage with the load response gear 865, which generates resistance via the torque limiter 866, and resistance is received, limiting the rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840.

On the other hand, if the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 is the opposite direction described above (clockwise direction in front view in the individual combined state), or in a direction that allows rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (in the front view counterclockwise direction in the individual combined state), If the intermediate arm member 850 continues to rotate in the same direction after reaching a state in which rotation is restricted (for example, from the individual combined state to the serial combined state) due to rotation in the same direction, the outer A load that exceeds the allowable value of the torque limiter 866 that regulates the rotation of the rotating member 840 is applied to the load response gear 865, and the posture maintenance of the load response gear 865 by the torque limiter 866 is released, and the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 and rotate synchronously.

In other words, regardless of the direction of rotation, when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted, if the inner rotating member 830 is driven to rotate in a direction that continues to restrict the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850, the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously, and the intermediate arm member 850, the first decorative member 870, and the second decorative member 880 rotate together while maintaining their combined state (this rotational movement is also referred to below as the "integral rotational movement").

The integral rotational movement occurs when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted, and in this embodiment, the integral rotational movement occurs when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are disposed close to each other in a combined state.

Therefore, unlike the switching rotation operation in which the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced in the diametrically expanding direction, there is no need to consider collisions with surrounding decorative members, so the third operation unit 800 is on standby. An integral rotation operation can be performed in the state. Therefore, in this embodiment, the integral rotation operation is executable and controlled regardless of the arrangement of the third operation unit 800.

In this embodiment, as described above, the driving force of the single drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60) allows the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to perform the switching rotation operation accompanied by the displacement in the radial direction, and the expanding operation. The first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be integrally rotated without radial displacement, and any operation can be performed in both drive directions, but there is a priority order of operation. However, it is not possible to immediately perform any operation in any direction of rotation.

For example, from the state shown in FIG. 64(a) and FIG. 66(a), the switching rotation operation can be executed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and if the rotation continues as it is, the switching rotation operation can be performed. It is possible to perform a rotation operation, and it is possible to perform an integral rotation operation by rotating the inner rotating member 830 clockwise in a front view, but immediately, an integral rotation operation can be performed by rotating the inner rotation member 830 clockwise in a front view. cannot be executed.

For example, after the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a) and the intermediate arm member 850 reaches a state in which rotation is restricted, If the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front, the switching rotation operation will be executed again, and it will not be possible to immediately perform the integrated rotation operation clockwise when viewed from the front. Can not.

In this manner, the operating mode of the third operating unit 800 in this embodiment changes the relative displacement of the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 depending on whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or permitted in the rotation direction of the drive motor 861.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is controlled so as to be able to determine whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or permitted for each rotation direction of the drive motor 861, and based on the determination result, it is possible to drive and control the drive motor 861 in an appropriate drive direction. An example of drive control of the drive motor 861 is described below.

FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing an example of the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801, the driving mode of the drive motor 861, and the output of the detection sensor 813 in chronological order. As shown in FIG. 68, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is controlled to alternately repeat the normal performance and the reverse performance as the performance control of the third operation unit 800.

During a reversal presentation, an operation including a switching rotational operation is executed, and during a normal presentation, an operation not including a switching rotational operation is executed. This is to avoid collision between the decorative members 870 and 880 and surrounding decorative members during the switching rotation operation.

For the same purpose, when the power is turned on again after a sudden power outage or when the power is turned on first thing in the morning, the third operating unit 800 is extended and then the rotation control of the drive motor 861 is executed, and after the state of the moving parts is determined from the output of the detection sensor 813, the control for normal performance is executed. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the decorative members 870, 880 collide with surrounding decorative members, even if the state of the moving parts cannot be determined from the output of the detection sensor 813 when the power is turned on.

The drive directions of the drive motor 861 are shown as forward rotation and reverse rotation. Forward rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which a united rotation operation is immediately performed in the individual combined state (see FIG. 66(a))), and reverse rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which a switching rotation operation is immediately performed in the individual combined state).

First, we will explain the drive control during normal performance before the reversal performance. During this normal performance, the third operating unit 800 is in an individual combined state, and the drive motor 861 is stopped or only forward rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotational motion of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is always a united rotational motion.

Since no switching rotation operation occurs, no collision with surrounding decorative members can occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the production standby state or the extended state at any timing. For example, by driving the drive motor 861 while the held member 810 is being moved up and down by the up and down movement of the up and down arm member 801, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are integrally rotated simultaneously with the up and down movement. It is controlled so that it can also cause movement.

Naturally, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may rotate together when the position of the lifting arm member 801 is fixed, or the lifting arm member 801 may be raised and lowered when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 stop rotating together.

Since the drive motor 861 has a forward rotation direction only, the output of the detection sensor 813 switches each time the detectable portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. By determining this output switch, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the position of the outer rotating member 840 as the initial position, and by setting multiple types of drive time from this initial position, the outer rotating member 840 can be controlled to stop in any position.

Next, the drive control during the reversal performance will be described. First, during the reversal performance, the lifting arm member 801 is displaced downward, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue rotating forward until the detected part 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in reverse rotation. Due to the reverse rotation drive, the third operation unit 800 performs a switching rotation operation, but during this time, the rotation of the outer rotation member 840 is regulated by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. Ru.

If the driving motor 861 continues to be driven in the same rotational direction, a series of combined states will be reached, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 will rotate together. After the integral rotation operation starts, the outer rotating member 840 also starts rotating in conjunction with the inner rotating member 830, so the detected portion 844 retreats from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 has started based on the switching of the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation operation is started, the drive motor 861 is stopped or only reverse rotation drive control is performed. Therefore, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 always rotate integrally. Since no switching rotation operation occurs, no collision with surrounding decorative members can occur, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be switched to the production standby state or the extended state at any timing.

Since the drive motor 861 can only drive in reverse, the output of the detection sensor 813 switches each time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the voice lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4) can determine the position of the outer rotating member 840.

When switching from a reverse performance to a normal performance, the lifting arm member 801 is displaced downward in advance, and the third operating unit 800 is put into an extended state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue rotating in the reverse direction until the detected part 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813.

When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in normal rotation. The forward rotation drive causes the third operation unit 800 to perform a switching rotation operation, but during this time the rotation of the outer rotation member 840 is regulated by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. Ru.

Next, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 rotate together. After the start of the rotational movement, the outer rotating member 840 starts to rotate, causing the detected portion 844 to move away from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 to be switched. In other words, the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 have started to rotate together due to the switching of the output of the detection sensor 813.

After the integral rotation operation has started, the process returns to the normal production mode. The restrictions on the drive control during this normal performance are similar to the restrictions on the drive control explained during the normal performance that was arranged before the above-mentioned reverse performance.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the single detection sensor 813 is used to determine whether to switch the rotation mode of the third operation unit 800 (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) and to determine the rotation angle of the outer rotation member 840. It can also be used for standard judgment. Therefore, the required number of detection sensors 813 can be reduced compared to the case where individual detection sensors are used for each determination.

As described above, the switching rotation operation can be performed by switching the drive direction of the drive motor 861 from the state where the integral rotation operation continues or from the state where the rotation is stopped to the opposite direction. That is, irrespective of the attitude of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state, the switching rotation operation can be performed to switch to the serial combined state.

Therefore, when controlling the action presentation to switch to a united state at the timing of a jackpot announcement, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting whether or not a jackpot has been announced based on the position of the first decorative member 870.

Furthermore, as described above, the decoration in the united state is designed so that what is perceived by the player does not vary significantly depending on the arrangement of the rotational direction of the second decorative member 880. In other words, even if the arrangement of the rotational direction of the decorative members 870, 880 is different at the start of the switching rotation operation, the content that is perceived by the player as the united state at the end of the switching rotation operation can be the same.

Therefore, unlike when the patterns in the united state differ depending on the arrangement in the rotation direction, the integral rotation action for adjusting the position after reaching the united state can be omitted, so the drive control until the jackpot announcement can be the same regardless of the position of the first decorative member 870 in the individual combined state.

In this manner, in this embodiment, both the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation can be realized in both forward rotation and reverse rotation as the drive direction of the drive motor 861. Therefore, compared to a case where the operation mode is fixed between forward rotation and reverse rotation, a wide variety of performance modes can be realized with a single drive motor 861.

Figure 69 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along line LXIX-LXIX in Figure 28. As shown in Figure 69, the opening of the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 penetrates from the rear end, where the tube fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is located, to the front end, where the illumination board 823 is located, and electrical wiring is guided through this opening from the rear end to the front end, with terminals connected to a connector disposed on the illumination board 823. Electricity is conducted through this electrical wiring, allowing the LEDs disposed on the illumination board 823 to be controlled to emit light.

The light LH1 emitted from the inner light-emitting portion 823a of the illumination board 823 acts to illuminate the bulging portion 824a that bulges out toward the front side at the center side of the translucent decorative member 824. The bulging portion 824a functions as a part that is visible to the player at the center of the circle on which the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 is arranged when the decorative members 870, 880 are combined.

The light LD1 emitted from the outer light emitting part 823b of the illumination board 823 is emitted into the interior of the decorative members 870, 880 (first decorative member 870 in FIG. 69) arranged on the front side, and the decorative members 870, 880 are illuminated. It works to illuminate from within.

In this embodiment, it is possible to switch between an individual combined state (see FIG. 69) in which the decorative member 870 is placed on the front side and a series combined state (see FIG. 32) in which the decorative member 880 is placed in the front side. Therefore, the light LD1 can be used to switch between illuminating the decorative member 870 and illuminating the decorative member 880.

In the individual combined state (see FIG. 69), the light LD1 is reflected toward the front side by the plated portion 871a of the first skeleton portion 871, and the direction of the light LD1 is switched to the front side. This allows most of the light LD1 to be emitted toward the first covering portion 875, and the brightness of the first covering portion 875 when the light LD1 is emitted can be improved.

Here, in this embodiment, the illumination board 823 is fixedly arranged, and the decorative members 870 and 880 are configured to rotate around it, so that the illumination direction of the light LD1 and the decorative members 870 and 880 are different. The relationship with the arrangement can be changed by rotating the decorative members 870, 880. For example, during rotation, the light LD1 may be irradiated to the center of the plated portion 871a, or the light LD1 emitted from the same LED may be irradiated to a position shifted from the center of the plated portion 871a. obtain. Therefore, without countermeasures, the degree of brightness of the first covering part 875 caused by the light LD1 will easily change due to the rotation of the decorative members 870, 880, and the decorative members 870, 880 will be rotated integrally while emitting light at a constant brightness. There is a possibility that it will be difficult to carry out the effect that the user wants.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the plating portion 871a configured to be able to reflect the light LD1 has a concave shape, and the radius of curvature of this concave shape is formed to be smaller than the radius of the illumination board 823. and is designed so that its center is located near the center of the first covered portion 875 when viewed from the front.

Since the light LD1 is arranged so that its optical axis is directed in the direction of the outer diameter of the circle in which the outer light emitting part 823b is arranged, the light LD1 is reflected by the concave shape of the plating part 871a, so that the center of the radius of curvature of the light LD1 is It advances toward the side, and illuminates the vicinity of the center of each first covered portion 875 of the first decorative member 870.

Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of the plating portion 871a based on the outer light emitting portion 823b, the multiple lights LD1 can be reflected to illuminate the vicinity of the center of the first covering portion 875. This allows light to be irradiated stably near the center of the front plate portion of the first covering portion 875, so that the first covering portion 875 can be viewed with uniform brightness even during integral rotation.

Furthermore, the first skeleton part 871 is a part to which a plating process is performed in the same way as the plating process to the plating part 871a, and has an outer plating part 871b disposed outside the first covering part 875 when viewed from the front. Be prepared. The light LD1 is reflected by the outer plating part 871b as well as the plating part 871a, but since the outer plating part 871b is arranged at the rear compared to the arrangement of the plating part 871a, the light LD1 is reflected by the outer plating part 871b. The degree of illumination can be weakened.

This avoids a situation where the intensity of the light visible outside the first covering part 875 is too strong, causing the player to feel dazzled and reducing the visibility inside the frame of the first covering part 875. be able to.

The illumination board 823 is sandwiched between the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the front and back, but the joints are not completely closed, so all of the light from the outer light emitting part 823b is directed inside. It is not intended to be irradiated.

First, in FIG. 69, the internal structure is visible between the member edge 875a of the first covering part 875 and the member edge 885a of the second covering part 885, which is arranged opposite to the member edge 875a. A gap VA1 of a certain size is formed. Since the outer plating portion 871b protrudes outward from the frame of the first covering portion 875 through the gap VA1, the light LD1 passing through the gap VA1 can be reflected by the outer plating portion 871b.

In addition, a large gap VA2 is formed between the outer end 875b of the first covering portion 875, which is arranged opposite the metal rod 832, and the outer end 885b of the second covering portion 885, the gap exceeding the area required to avoid interference with the metal rod 832.

Firstly, the gap VA2 is designed to ensure a sufficient length of the metal rod 832 by avoiding collision between the metal rod 832 and the decorative members 870 and 880, and to prevent the metal rod 832 from colliding with the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 833. It is formed for the purpose of ensuring the function of guiding the linear displacement of the member 834.

Second, the gap VA2 is a fastening screw that is inserted into the skeleton parts 871 and 881, and is screwed into the cylindrical protruding part 834b of the rotating member 834, thereby attaching the decorative members 870 and 880 to the rotating member 834. It is formed for the purpose of securing an assembly path for fastening screws for fastening and fixing.

Thirdly, the gap VA2 is formed for the purpose of ensuring a light path for the light that passes through the transparent parts of the framework 871, 881. Because the decorative members 870, 880 are arranged at equal intervals on the circumference, the light that passes through the gap VA and travels outward is visually recognized as light that passes through equal intervals on the circumference and travels radially from the center of the circle.

Therefore, by performing the integral rotation operation of the decorative members 870 and 880, the light passing through the gap VA2 can also be rotated in the same way. This makes it unnecessary to control the lighting mode of the light from the outer light emitting part 823b (for example, keeping all lights on), and the light emitted radially from the rotation center of the third operating unit 800. It is possible to perform a light emission effect that is visually recognized in a rotating light emission mode.

In the combined state (see FIG. 32), the entire second skeletal portion 881 is made of a translucent resin material, which suppresses the reflection of light LD1 by the second skeletal portion 881.

As a result, the light that is irradiated within the frame of the second covering part 885 can be the light (weak light) that is far from the optical axis of the light LD1, so that the second covering part 885 can be illuminated. It is possible to weaken the degree of On the other hand, since the light in the optical axis direction of the light LD1 passes through the gap VA2, the intensity of the light radially exiting from the rotation center of the third operating unit 800 in the radial direction can be improved.

A light diffusion decorative portion 885c is formed from a colored (in this embodiment, the color of the circular body is set to an arbitrary color) light-transmitting resin material and is arranged around the circumference of the frame of the second covering portion 885, with light diffusion processing formed on the inside. Therefore, of the light LD1, the light that is incident on the light diffusion decorative portion 885c is refracted, and acts to cause the entire light diffusion decorative portion 885c to emit surface light.

This surface emitting makes it possible to make the light visible through the light-diffusing decorative portions 885c disposed in the circumferential direction uniform, and each of the light-diffusing decorative portions of the five second decorative members 880 885c can be visually recognized as an integral part by the player.

Here, as described above, if the plurality of second covering parts 885 can be firmly integrated, the presentation performance when making the second covering parts 885 visible to the player can be improved. This integration can be achieved by visually recognizing that the light diffusing decorative portions 885c are continuously connected in the circumferential direction. Therefore, it is possible to improve performance performance in the combined state when the second covered portion 885 is disposed on the front side.

The member outer end 885b of the second covering part 885 is formed in a concave shape to face the metal rod 832, and the end surface 885b1 that is close to (in contact with) the member outer end 875b of the first covering part 875 is , protrudes toward the first decorative member 870 with reference to the plane on which the metal rod 832 is disposed.

As a result, when the third operating unit 800 is viewed from an oblique direction in the united state (see FIG. 32), the degree to which the first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 located on the rear side comes into the player's field of vision can be reduced, thereby reducing the impact on the presentation.

As a result, when the frame portion of the first covering portion 875 and the frame portion of the second covering portion 885 are colored in different colors, the second covering portion 885 is disposed on the front side. At times, it is possible to easily prevent the color of the first covered portion 875 from entering the field of vision.

In particular, when the third operating unit 800 is placed in the extended state by itself in the combined state (see FIG. 32), compared to the case where the other operating units 600 and 700 are both extended (see FIG. 32). 33, F9), there are many gaps around the third operating unit 800, and it is easy for the line of sight to view the third operating unit 800 from an oblique direction to pass through. Therefore, without countermeasures, the side surface of the third operating unit 800 is easily recognized, which tends to reduce the performance effect.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in the serially combined state, the end surface 885b1 of the second covered portion 885 is disposed closer to the rear than the center of the front-rear width of the side surface, so that the third operation can be performed when viewed from an oblique direction. Even if the side surface of the unit 800 is visible, most of the side surface can be seen as a part of the second covering part 885, and the extent to which the first covering part 875 is visible can be reduced. Thereby, in the serially combined state, the second covered part 885 can be made more visible than the first covered part 875, and the presentation effect can be improved.

In the switching rotation operation for switching between the individual combined state and the combined state, the driving force of the drive motor 861 is transmitted to the inner rotating member 830, causing the inner rotating member 830 to rotate, while the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is stopped by the load from the torque limiter 866.

Although the sliding ridge 831b is used to reduce the contact area, if the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830 itself is large, the load transmitted to the outer rotating member 840 will be large, and the allowable load transmission value of the torque limiter 866 will have to be increased, which tends to hinder miniaturization of the torque limiter 866.

For this reason, it is preferable to suppress the rotational resistance of the inner rotating member 830. To this end, the present embodiment has the following features. For example, the only support points between the inner rotating member 830 and the fixed cylindrical member 820 related to the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 are the front end that contacts the sliding member 825 and the rear end that is supported by the central ring gear 864, and a gap is provided in other areas. This makes it possible to reduce the contact area between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830, making it easier to reduce the displacement resistance.

For example, since the inner rotating member 830 is not fastened and fixed to the central annular gear 864, a stopper is considered necessary to suppress displacement toward the front with respect to the central annular gear 864. The sliding member 825 functions as this stopper. That is, although the sliding member 825 can receive a load from the inner rotating member 830 in a direction that pushes it forward, the sliding member 825 has a plate front surface that contacts the short diameter annular portion 822a of the circular plate portion 822 at the front and back. come into contact with

The short diameter annular portion 822a is disposed on the back side of the circular plate portion 822 as a circular protrusion whose outer diameter is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the sliding member 825, and the protrusion portion 822b is formed in a circular shape at its outermost diameter portion, protruding from the back side with a semicircular cross section.

This protrusion 822b abuts against the front surface of the sliding member 825 in the front-rear direction, so the contact area can be reduced compared to when the entire back surface of the short-diameter annular portion 822a contacts the sliding member 825. This reduces the displacement resistance in the rotational direction of the inner rotating member 830.

Note that since no fastening screws are used between the inner rotating member 830 and the central ring gear 864, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 that would be expected to occur when the weight of the fastening screws increases is reduced accordingly. Can be done.

The following describes how the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are fixed to the rotating member 834. When explaining this fixing, refer to Figures 62 and 63 as appropriate.

The first decorative member 870 can be fixed to the rotating member 834 by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 872 of the first skeletal member 871 into the female thread of the fastened portion 876 formed at the rear of the frame of the first covering portion 875 to fasten and fix the first covering portion 875 to the first skeletal member 871, and then inserting the protruding portion 873 protruding from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the first skeletal member 871 into the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted outside), and screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 874 into the cylindrical protruding portion 834b.

The second decorative member 880 can be fixed to the rotating member 834 by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 882 of the second skeletal member 881 into the female thread of the fastened portion 886 formed at the rear of the frame of the second covering portion 885 to fasten the second covering portion 885 to the second skeletal member 881, and then inserting the protruding portion 883 protruding from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the second skeletal member 881 into the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted outside), and screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 884 into the cylindrical protruding portion 834b.

In this way, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, and as the rotating member 834 is linearly displaced or rotated, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member Member 880 can be configured for linear or rotational displacement.

In the process of fixing, the overhanging parts 873, 883 enter the recessed grooves 833d of the translational member 833, thereby changing the arrangement of the skeleton parts 871, 881 on the translational member 833 (the arrangement in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832). ) is defined, and it is possible to prevent the skeleton parts 871 and 881 from falling off from the translational member 833.

Since the skeleton parts 871 and 881 are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linear motion member 833 (the arrangement in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832) is similarly defined, and the rotation The member 834 can be prevented from falling off from the translational member 833.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when assembling the rotating member 834 to the linear moving member 833, the portion that determines the position of the rotating member 834 on the linear moving member 833 is formed on the skeletal portions 871, 881 that are fixed to the rotating member 834, and therefore, unlike when the portion that determines the position on the linear moving member 833 is formed on the rotating member 834 itself, the labor hours for assembly and disassembly can be reduced.

In other words, for example, when disassembling, by removing the fastening screws fastening the skeletal parts 871 and 881 to the rotating member 834, not only can the restrictions on the arrangement of the skeletal parts 871 and 881 on the linear moving member 833 be released, but also the restrictions on the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linear moving member 833 can be released. This can improve work efficiency.

The combined operations of the operational units 600 to 800 will be described with reference to Figs. 70 and 71. Figs. 70(a) to 70(d) and Figs. 71(a) to 71(d) are schematic front views of the operational unit 500 that chronologically explain examples of combined operations of the operational units 600 to 800. In the explanation of Figs. 70 and 71, Figs. 33 to 35 will be referred to as appropriate.

In Figures 70 and 71, the decorations on each of the performance surfaces 661a to 661c of the first operating unit 600, each of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 of the second operating unit 700, and each of the covering portions 875, 885 of the third operating unit 800 are illustrated in a schematic manner so as to be identifiable using letters or the like.

That is, the word "Normal" is displayed vertically on the first presentation surface 661a, the word "Activate" is displayed horizontally on the second presentation surface 661b, and the symbol "!" is displayed along the longitudinal direction on the third presentation surface 661c.

The first main decorative surface 787a1 is illustrated with the words "Start of war," the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 with the words "A crisis is an opportunity," the second main decorative surface 787b1 with the words "Attack," and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 with the words "Patience!?".

Furthermore, different alphanumeric characters ("I" to "V") corresponding to different characters are illustrated inside the frame of the first covering part 875, and five "○" numbers are shown in the second covering part 885. ” symbol is shown.

In FIG. 70(a), each of the operation units 600 to 800 is placed in a performance standby state (see FIG. 28). Note that above the second operation unit 700, a first sub-decorative surface 787a2 is illustrated in imaginary lines as a surface that is not visible when viewed from the front but is visible from the player's perspective.

In addition, in FIG. 70(b), the first operating unit 600 is in an intermediate performance state, the second operating unit 700 is in an intermediate performance state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state.

By performing the integral rotation operation of the third operating unit 800, the first covered portions 875 of the first decorative member 870 disposed close to the second operating unit 700 can be replaced one after another. In addition, by placing the first operating unit 600 in an intermediate effect state during the continuation of the integral rotation operation or after stopping, the third effect surface 661c is extended inside the frame of the center frame 86, and the operation units 600 to 800 are It can make your movements lively.

For example, when the third performance surface 661c is visible, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who visually recognizes the operation of the first operation unit 600 by controlling the performance so that the expectation level of jackpot in the lottery increases. can.

When the integral rotational movement is stopped, the decoration formed on the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the second operating unit 700 and the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 arranged in close proximity to the second operating unit 700 can be viewed as an integrated unit.

This can increase the attention to the first decorative member 870 that is placed close to the second operation unit 700, and by starting a display effect related to the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 on the third pattern display device 81 while returning the third operation unit 800 to a standby state for effect, the player's gaze can be smoothly guided to the third pattern display device 81.

The first decorative member 870 that draws attention is not limited to the first decorative member 870 disposed close to the second operating unit 700. For example, by controlling the lighting pattern of the outer light emitting section 823b (see FIG. 60) that is arranged to be able to irradiate light to the first decorative member 870, an LED that irradiates light LD1 to the first decorative member 870 side that attracts attention can be used. By lighting up the LED and turning off the other LEDs, it is possible to draw attention to any first decorative member 870.

At this time, the LED lighting pattern may be switched while the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870 is stopped, or the LED lighting pattern may be switched in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870.

When switching the LED lighting pattern in accordance with the integral rotational movement of the first decorative member 870, the LEDs to be lit may be switched sequentially in the rotational direction, allowing the player to visually recognize that the light and the first decorative member 870 are rotating and displacing along a coaxial circle. Alternatively, the LEDs to be lit may be fixed, and the first decorative member 870 to be irradiated with light may be switched by utilizing the fact that each first decorative member 870 reaches the position where the light is irradiated from that LED in sequence by the integral rotational movement of the first decorative member 870.

In the state shown in FIG. 70(a), the second decorative rotating member 660 and the decorative fixing member 670 of the first operating unit 600 are both provided with vertically elongated decorations and can be visually recognized as one unit. In particular, the front side surface of the decoration fixing member 670 is formed as a surface facing in an oblique direction, similar to the first performance surface 661a in the performance standby state, thereby enhancing the ability to be seen as an integral part.

On the other hand, when the state shown in FIG. 71(a) is reached, in addition to the lower end of the second decorative rotating member 660 being displaced away from the decorative fixing member 670 in the middle of the process shown in FIG. 70(b), the first operation Since the second decorative rotating member 660 of the unit 600 is a horizontally long decoration, the sense of unity with the decorative fixing member 670 is reduced, and this time, the second operating unit 700 also has a horizontally long decoration. can be visually recognized integrally with the covering member 787.

Figure 35 shows the intermediate performance state of the second operating unit 700, but if the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state as shown in Figure 71 (a), the vertical distance between the covering member 787 and the second decorative rotating member 660 can be further reduced, enhancing the effect of them being visually perceived as a single unit.

At this time, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is overhanging to a visible position, and the above-mentioned effect of making it appear as if the right edge of the third symbol display device 81 is expanding to the right from the right edge RE1 of the area Even if the second performance surface 661b is arranged closer to the right edge, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling cramped.

This also allows the player to see that the second performance surface 661b is positioned toward the center of the third pattern display device 81, similar to the second main decorative surface 787b1, thereby enhancing the effect of the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second performance surface 661b being viewed as a single unit.

In this case, by forming the decoration of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with content related to the decoration of the second presentation surface 661b and the decoration of the second main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second It is possible to enhance the effect that the main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second presentation surface 661b, and the overhanging decorative portion 652b are visually recognized as one.

In FIGS. 70(c) and 70(d), the first operating unit 600 and the third operating unit 800 are in an effect standby state, and the second operating unit 700 is in an extended state. The reversing operation of the second operating unit 700 is illustrated in FIG. 70(d). In the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the second decorative rotation member 660 Therefore, even if the first operating unit 600 is kept in the extended state, the reversing operation of the covering member 787 (see FIG. 59) can be performed.

As mentioned above, when the covering member 787 is flipped over, the different secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 on the left and right are faced forward, making them non-distinguishable. However, as shown in Figure 70(d), the different secondary decorative surfaces 787a2, 787b2 may be combined to make the content discernible to the player.

As shown in FIG. 70(d), the player can discern the meaning of "Pinch!?", and by stopping the driving of the second action unit 700 in this state, the player can focus his/her attention on the subsequent movement of the second action unit 700, thereby focusing the player's gaze on the second action unit 700.

For example, when notifying that the lottery is a loss, the state shown in FIG. 70(d) is controlled to return to the state shown in FIG. In this case, the player's line of sight can be focused on the second operating unit 700 by continuing the reversal from the state shown in FIG. 70(d) to the state shown in FIG. 71(a).

In FIG. 71(a), the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700 are in an extended state, and the third operating unit 800 is in a standby state for performance. Note that above the second operating unit 700, the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 is shown in imaginary lines as a surface that is not visible when viewed from the front but is visible from the player's line of sight.

In the state shown in FIG. 71(a), the second effect surface 661b and the second main decorative surface 787b1 are arranged close to each other, and the characters written on each are written horizontally, so that the player can see them as one unit. Easy to do. In addition, since the content is a series of meanings with "attack activation", it is even easier to visually recognize them as a whole.

In the first operation unit 600, in the production standby state (see FIG. 70(a)), the first production surface 661a and the decoration fixing member 670 are arranged close to each other, and the characters written on each are vertically written. Therefore, it is easy for the player to visually recognize them as a whole. Furthermore, since the content is a series of meanings with "Normal Time", it is even easier to visually recognize them as a whole.

In this manner, in this embodiment, each of the presentation surfaces 661a and 661b of the first operation unit 600 is made to be seen as one with the side surface of a different member (for example, the second main decorative surface 787b1 or the front surface of the decorative fixing member 670). It consists of Thereby, the performance effect can be improved.

In FIGS. 71(b) to 71(d), the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700 are in an effect standby state, and the third operating unit 800 is in an extended state. The state shown in FIG. 71(b) and the state shown in FIG. 71(c) differ in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 because the third operation unit 800 performs an integral rotation operation. On the other hand, no matter which state the switching rotation operation is executed from, it can be visually recognized by the player as the same unified state (see FIG. 71(d)).

In other words, when the second decorative member 880 faces the front, the player cannot recognize the difference in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870. As a result, when the operation control of the third operation unit 800 is set to notify the player of a jackpot by executing a switching rotation operation at the end of the display performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while the patterns are changing, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting whether or not a jackpot will be notified from the arrangement of the first decorative member 870.

In other words, regardless of the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 at the final stage of the display performance (whether in the state shown in FIG. 71(b) or in the state shown in FIG. 71(c)), the game is a jackpot hit or not. It is possible to maintain the same level of expectations among people. Therefore, the player's attention to the third operating unit 800 can be maintained at a high level.

As described above, each of the operation units 600 to 800 can form decorations that can be viewed individually or in combination. Therefore, the decoration formed on each of the operation units 600 to 800 is not completed only in each operation unit 600 to 800, but is designed as a decoration in which each of the operation units 600 to 800 is related to each other.

Whether or not the drive control of each of the operating units 600 to 800 can be executed is affected by their arrangement. That is, if each of the operating units 600 to 800 is driven at an inappropriate timing, there is a possibility that component operations will collide and malfunction. Therefore, drive control is performed after determining the arrangement of the components of other units. controlled as follows.

For example, the change of the first operating unit 600 to the extended state may be performed in any state of the second operating unit 700, and the third operating unit 800 may be controlled to be executed when it is determined that it is in the production standby state. Ru.

The change to the intermediate production state of the first operating unit 600 may be performed as long as the state of the second operating unit 700 is arbitrary, the vertical arrangement of the third operating unit 800 is arbitrary, and the rotational operation is not switched. It is controlled to be executed when it has been determined.

The change to the extended state of the second operating unit 700 may be performed in any state of the first operating unit 600, and the third operating unit 800 is controlled to be executed when it is determined to be in the production standby state.

The change of the second operation unit 700 to the intermediate performance state is controlled so that the state of the first operation unit 600 can be any, the vertical arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be any, and the rotation operation is executed when it is determined that a switching rotation operation is not occurring.

In the control in which the third operating unit 800 changes to the extended state and no rotation is performed or only an integral rotation operation occurs, the first operating unit 600 is determined to be in the intermediate effect state or the effect standby state, and the second operating unit 700 is It is executed when it is determined that the process is in an intermediate performance state or a performance standby state.

The control by which the third operating unit 800 changes to the extended state and the switching rotation operation occurs is executed when the first operating unit 600 is determined to be in a performance standby state and the second operating unit 700 is determined to be in a performance standby state.

As described above, drive control of each of the operating units 600 to 800 is not possible at arbitrary timing, but is controlled to be executed after determining the arrangement of members of other units.

Next, the center frame C86 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 87.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the center frame 86 is composed of one part, but in the second embodiment, the center frame C86 is composed of two members: an upper frame C86a and a lower frame C86b. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 72 is a front view of the game board C13 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 72, the center frame C86 is a member that has a shape that can be fitted into the window 60a (see FIG. 7) of the base plate 60, and is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 with tapping screws or the like. It includes an upper frame C86a and a lower frame C86b.

The upper frame C86a is disposed along the upper side (upper side in FIG. 72) and the left and right (left and right sides in FIG. 72) inner edges of the window 60a (see FIG. 7) of the base plate 60, and the lower frame C86b is arranged along the inner edges of the window 60a (see FIG. 7) of the base plate 60. 60 along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 72) of the window portion 60a. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through the area surrounded by the upper frame C86a and the lower frame C86b.

The upper frame C86a is a part of the center frame 86 in the first embodiment (a part disposed along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 72) of the window 60a of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 7)). , that is, the part where the lower frame C86b is disposed) is omitted, and the other parts except for the omitted part have the same structure as the center frame 86 in the first embodiment.

Next, the lower frame C86b will be described. Figure 73 is a front perspective view of the lower frame C86b, and Figure 74 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame C86b. Note that in Figures 73 and 74, only a portion of the base plate 60 is partially illustrated, and the tapping screws that fasten the lower frame C86b to the base plate 60 are omitted.

As shown in Figures 73 and 74, the lower frame C86b is provided with an inlet COPin formed as an opening capable of receiving balls, a first passage CRt1 connected to the inlet COPin, a second passage CRt2 through which balls guided along the first passage CRt1 flow, a third passage CRt3 through which balls guided along the second passage CRt2 (balls that have reciprocated along the second passage CRt2 in its longitudinal direction) flow, a fourth passage CRt4 and a fifth passage CRt5 through which balls guided along the third passage CRt3 are sorted by the sorting member C170 and flow down, a sixth passage CRt6 through which balls guided along the fourth passage CRt4 flow down, and an outlet COPout formed as an opening through which balls guided along the fifth passage CRt5 flow out to the play area (see Figures 81 and 82).

Note that an upper frame passage CRt0 (see FIG. 72) is formed in the upper frame C86a. The upper frame passage CRt0 guides balls that enter (enter) from the area on the left side in front view (left side in FIG. 72) of the game area (the area between the center frame C86 (upper frame C86a) and the rail 61). The receiving port COPin of the lower frame C86b is connected to the downstream end of the upper frame passage CRt0.

That is, the ball that has flown (entered) from the gaming area into the upper frame passage CRt0 flows (entered) from the upper frame passage CRt0 into the first passage CRt1 of the lower frame C86b via the reception port COPin.

A distribution member C170 that operates according to the weight of the balls is disposed on the lower frame C86b (see Figures 81 and 82). When a series of balls is guided down the third passage CRt3, the leading ball is distributed to the fourth passage CRt4, while the trailing ball is distributed to the fifth passage CRt5. If the distance between the series of balls is greater than a predetermined amount, both the leading ball and the trailing ball are distributed to the fourth passage CRt4.

Here, the outlet COPout, which is the outlet of the fifth passage CRt5 (the opening through which the balls flow out into the play area), is formed (positioned) at a position vertically above the first winning hole 64 (see FIG. 72). Therefore, balls distributed to the fifth passage CRt5 are likely to win at the first winning hole 64 (there is a high probability of winning at the first winning hole 64).

On the other hand, in the sixth passage CRt6, not only is a central outflow surface C181 formed (placed) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) to allow balls guided along the sixth passage CRt6 to flow out into the play area, but side outflow surfaces C182 are also formed (placed) at two different positions in the width direction of the game board 13 (left and right direction in Figure 72) from vertically above the first winning opening 64. In addition, undulations are formed in the sixth passage CRt6, with side outflow surfaces C182 formed at the bottom of the undulations and a central outflow surface C181 formed at the top of the undulations.

Therefore, a ball allocated to the fourth passage CRt4 has a higher probability of flowing out from the side outlet surface C182 into the play area in the sixth passage CRt6 than from the central outlet surface C181 into the play area, and as a result, it is less likely to win the first winning hole 64 (it has a lower probability of winning the first winning hole 64 than a ball allocated to the fifth passage CRt5 described above).

In this way, in the lower frame C86b of this embodiment, when a series of balls flows into the third passage CRt3, the preceding balls are distributed to the normal passage (fourth passage CRt4), while the following balls are distributed to the normal passage (fourth passage CRt4). The ball is sorted to a path where it is easy to win the first prize opening 64 (in the present embodiment, a passage (fifth passage CRt5) that almost certainly allows the ball to win the first prize opening 64). Therefore, in order to increase the probability of a ball winning in the first prize opening 64 (reliably winning a prize), the player can expect a state in which the balls will be connected, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Next, the detailed configuration of the lower frame C86b will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 to 87 in addition to FIGS. 73 to 74.

Figure 75 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame C86b, and Figure 76 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame C86b. Figure 77 is a top view of the lower frame C86b, Figure 78 is a front view of the lower frame C86b, and Figure 79 is a rear view of the lower frame C86b. Figure 80(a) is a side view of the lower frame C86b as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXa in Figure 78, and Figure 80(b) is a side view of the lower frame C86b as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXb in Figure 78.

Figures 81 and 82 are cross-sectional views of the lower frame C86b taken along line LXXXI-LXXXI in Figure 77, and Figure 83 is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame C86b taken along line LXXXIII-LXXXIII in Figure 78. Figure 84(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C86b at part LXXXIVa in Figure 81, and Figure 84(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C86b taken along line LXXXIVb-LXXXIVb in Figure 77. Note that Figure 81 shows a state in which the distribution member C170 is arranged in a first position, and Figure 82 shows a state in which the distribution member C170 is arranged in a second position.

As shown in Figures 73 to 84, the lower frame C86b includes a front member C110, a dish member C120 disposed on one longitudinal side (the side in the direction of arrow L) of the front member C110, a back member C130 disposed opposite to the back surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the front member C110 at a predetermined distance, a first intermediate member C140 disposed on the front surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) of the back member C130, and a second intermediate member C140 disposed on the front surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow F) of the back member C130. The panel is provided with a second intermediate member C150 arranged facing each other at a predetermined distance on the rear surface (the surface facing the front direction), a first intermediate member C160 and a distribution member C170 interposed between the rear surface member C130 and the second intermediate member C150, a second intermediate member C180 interposed between the front surface member C110 and the first and second intermediate members C140, C150, and a decorative member C190 and a detouring member C200 disposed on the rear surface of the rear surface member C130.

In addition, the lower frame C86b has each member fastened and fixed to each other by tapping screws, and the distribution member C170 and the decoration member C190 are rotatably supported by the back member C130, so that one (single body) ) (see Figure 73).

In addition, the lower frame C86b is made of a light-transmitting resin material (i.e., transparent so that the rear side components and balls can be seen through) except for the distribution member C170 and decorative member C190, and the distribution member C170 and decorative member C190 are made of a colored resin material. This allows the player to visually see the balls passing through the first passage CRt1 to the sixth passage CRt6, as well as the distribution action of the distribution member C170 and the associated displacement of the decorative member C190, enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In this case, it is sufficient that at least one or both of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150 of the lower frame C86b are made of a light-transmitting resin material. This is because the player can visually confirm at least one or both of the line-up of balls in the third passage CRt3 (whether the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball is smaller than a predetermined amount) and the distribution operation by the distribution member C170, while visually confirming that the trailing ball has been distributed to the fifth passage CRt5 by the distribution member C170, and therefore such balls will enter the first winning hole 64 from the outlet COPout with a high probability (almost all balls in this embodiment), and therefore it is sufficient that the player does not need to visually confirm the balls being guided down the fifth passage CRt5.

The distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190 may be made of a light-transmissive (or colored) resin material, and may be painted on the front side or may have a sticker attached thereto.

Also, on the other hand, at least one or both of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150 may be made of a colored resin material, or at least one or both of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150 may be painted or have a sticker attached. In other words, the balls passing through the third passage CRt3 and the distribution member C170 may be configured so as to be invisible to the player from the front side.

The front member C110 includes a plate-shaped front part C111 forming the front, a plate-shaped bottom part C112 erected from the back surface of the front part C111, and one longitudinal side of the front part C111 and the bottom part C112 ( and a connecting portion C113 disposed on the arrow L direction side).

The front portion C111 has multiple through holes C111a drilled in the plate thickness direction along the outer edge of the lower side (arrow D direction) of the front portion C111. The lower frame C86b, in an assembled state (unitized state), is fitted into the window portion 60a from the front of the base plate 60, and is fixed (disposed) to the base plate 60 by fastening tapping screws inserted into the through holes C111a to the base plate 60.

In the front portion C111, an outlet COPout is formed (drilled in the plate thickness direction) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 72). As described above, the outlet COPout is an opening that serves as an exit when the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt5 flows out into the play area.

The bottom surface of the second intervening member C180 is disposed opposite the upper surface of the bottom surface portion C112, and a portion of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed between the bottom surface portion C112 and the second intervening member C180 (recess C183). Therefore, compared to, for example, a case in which a through hole formed through the second intervening member C180 is used as part of the fifth passage CRt5, the structure can be simplified and production costs can be reduced.

The bottom surface portion C112 is formed continuously over the entire length of the front surface portion C111, and the upright tip (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the bottom surface portion C112 is in contact with the front surface of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150. be touched. This suppresses the intrusion of foreign objects such as wires.

A reception port COPin is formed in the connecting portion C113 (perforated in the thickness direction). As described above, the receiving port COPin is an opening that receives the ball from the upper frame passage CRt0 of the upper frame C86a. Note that when the center frame C86 is attached (arranged) to the base plate 60, the back surface of the upper frame C86a is overlapped with the front surface of the front portion C111 and the connecting portion C113, and both are fastened and fixed with tapping screws. Thereby, the downstream end of the upper frame passage CRt0 and the receiving port COPin are communicated with each other.

The dish member C120 includes an upper bottom part C121 and a lower bottom part C122 that form the bottom of the passage, and an upper side wall part C123 and a lower side wall part C124 that form the side walls of the passage.

The upper bottom portion C121 extends in the left-right direction (direction of arrow FB) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and slopes downward in a direction away from the receiving port COPin (direction of arrow R). It is formed by Note that the upper bottom surface portion C121 is located vertically lower (in the direction of arrow D) than the receiving port COPin, and a vertical step is formed between it and the upper frame passage CRt0. That is, the dish member C120 is configured to allow the ball to freely fall from the upper frame passage CRt0 to the upper bottom surface portion C121.

A groove C121a having a U-shaped cross section is provided in the center of the upper bottom surface portion C121 in the width direction (arrow LR direction) (see FIG. 84). The groove C121a extends linearly in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). The groove width of the groove C121 (dimension in the direction of arrow LR) is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere, and the groove depth of the groove C121a (dimension in the direction of arrow UD) is made smaller than the bottom surface of the groove C121a. The depth is set so that the ball does not touch the ball.

Thereby, the ball on the upper bottom surface portion C121 can be supported at two locations (a pair of ridgeline portions where the upper bottom surface portion C121 and the groove C121a intersect). Therefore, compared to the case where the groove C121a is not formed (that is, the case where the ball is supported at only one location), the contact area between the ball and the passage can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to buffer (receive) the impact of the ball falling from the upper frame passage CRt0 and to increase the resistance when the ball rolls.

As described above, by dropping the ball from the upper frame passage CRt0 to the upper bottom part C121 and supporting the ball on the upper bottom part C121 at two places, two When a ball flows (falls) from the upper frame passage CRt0 to the upper bottom part C121 (first passage CRt1), the ball delays the falling of the preceding ball in the upper bottom part C121 (first passage CRt1), and the ball moves backward. This allows the ball to easily catch up with the ball in front. Therefore, the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball can be reduced.

The upper side wall portion C123 partitions the upstream and downstream ends of the upper bottom portion C121 (first passage CRt1) and the passage width of the upper bottom portion C121 (first passage CRt1). Note that the passage width is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (a dimension smaller than at least twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). This setting allows multiple balls to be guided only in series.

A notch C123a is formed in the upper side wall portion C123 at the downstream end of the upper bottom portion C121 (first passage CRt1). The ball is allowed to flow down from the passage CRt1) to the lower bottom portion C122 (second passage CRt2).

The lower bottom portion C122 extends in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and also in the direction of extension (direction of arrow FB) and in the vertical direction (direction of arrow FB). The cross-sectional shape in a plane including the UD direction) is curved into a circular arc convex downward in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow D) (see FIG. 84(b)).

The lower side wall portion C124 defines the ends of one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the ball is guided) of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) and the passage width of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2). The passage width is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball (at least a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the ball, preferably a dimension smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the ball), and multiple balls can only be guided in series.

When viewed from above, the lower bottom surface portion C122 is arranged parallel to the upper bottom surface portion C121, and is disposed in a position where the downstream end of the upper bottom surface portion C121 (the end on the side in the direction of arrow B) is adjacent to one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (the end on the side in the direction of arrow B).

At the position corresponding to the cutout portion C123a in the upper side wall portion C123, the lower side wall portion C124 is not formed, and as described above, the balls can flow down from the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) via the cutout portion C123a.

A notch C124a is formed in the lower side wall C124 at a position corresponding to the bottom (the lowest vertical position) of the arc-shaped curved lower bottom surface C122, and the balls can flow down from the lower bottom surface C122 (second passage CRt2) to the bottom surface C142 (third passage CRt3) through this notch C124a.

As described above, the lower bottom surface portion C122 is curved in an arc shape, and has an upwardly inclined side (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122) from the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1). Since the ball is flown down, the flown down ball is reciprocated between one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2), and then the ball is moved down the notch portion C124a. The ball can be caused to flow down from the bottom part C142 (third passageway CRt3).

As a result, when two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) with a specified distance between them, the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) can be used to make the trailing ball catch up with the leading ball, thereby reducing the gap between the leading and trailing balls (connecting the balls).

The lower bottom surface portion C122 has an outflow surface C122a recessed at a position corresponding to the cutout portion C124a (i.e., the lowest position in the vertical direction). The outflow surface C122a is a portion for allowing the ball guided along the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) to flow out to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3), and is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3).

Therefore, after the balls have reciprocated on the lower bottom surface portion C122, their rolling speed has decreased, and the outflow surface C122a can be used to smoothly outflow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3). In other words, by utilizing the reciprocating motion on the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2), balls with a reduced gap between the leading ball and the trailing ball (balls in a connected state) can be made to outflow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining that connected state.

Note that, when viewed from above, the width of the concave surface of the outflow surface C122a (dimension along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface C122, dimension in the direction of arrow FB) is equal to the width of the notch C124a. The closer the side is, the larger the shape is (see FIG. 77).

In addition, when viewed from above, when a ball is in contact with the lower side wall portion C124 located on the opposite side (opposing side) of the cutout portion C124a, the ball rolls (crosses) on the outflow surface C122a. That is, even when the ball rolling (reciprocating) on the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) rolls at a position furthest from the cutout portion C124a (a position where the lateral apex of the ball is in contact with the lower side wall portion C124), the outflow surface C122a is formed up to a range that overlaps with the center of the ball in a top view (the rolling line, which is the trajectory of the lower apex of the ball as it rolls on the lower bottom surface portion C122, crosses the outflow surface C122a).

On the other hand, if the outflow surface C122a is recessed (formed) in the lower bottom part C122, the ball that has flown down to the lower bottom part C122 (second passage CRt2) will flow into the lower bottom part C122 (second passage CRt2). CRt2) may flow out (flow down) to the bottom portion C142 (third passageway CRt3) due to the slope of the outflow surface C122a without reciprocating once or before reciprocating a sufficient number of times. . That is, without reducing the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball, there is a risk that both balls may flow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passageway CRt3) while remaining separated from each other.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C122 is formed to be inclined downward in the direction away from the cutout portion C124a (in the direction of arrow L) (see FIG. 84). As a result, due to the effect of the inclination of the lower bottom surface portion C122, the ball is pressed against the lower side wall portion C124 located on the opposite side (opposing side) to the notch portion C124a, and the ball is It can be rolled (reciprocated) in two passages CRt2).

This makes it possible to prevent the ball from flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface C142 (third passage CRt3) due to the inclination of the outflow surface C122a before the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently slow. In other words, until the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently slow, it is possible to make the ball easily overcome (cross) the outflow surface C122a, and to make the ball easily move back and forth sufficiently along the lower bottom surface C122 (second passage CRt2). As a result, it is possible to ensure that the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball and the gap between the leading ball and the trailing ball is reduced (the balls are linked together).

Note that the arcuate shape of the lower bottom portion C122 (the cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extending direction of the lower bottom portion C122 (direction of arrow FB) and the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD), A circular arc shape that is convex in the downward direction (direction of arrow D, see FIG. 84(b)) has a radius of the circular arc shape at one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction. The radius is made smaller than the radius of the arc shape in the region between (the region including the outflow surface C122a). That is, the radius of the arc shape in the region including the outflow surface C122a is increased.

This makes it easier for the balls to reciprocate and for the trailing ball to catch up with the leading ball in the initial stage (the stage where the balls reciprocate to one and the other end in the longitudinal direction or their vicinity), while making it easier for the leading and trailing balls to maintain a connected state in the stage where the rolling speed of the reciprocating balls slows (the stage where the balls do not reach the one and the other end in the longitudinal direction or their vicinity and the balls reciprocate in a relatively narrow area including the outflow surface C122a). As a result, it is easier for the balls to flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining a connected state.

The dish member C120 is arranged in such a position that the extension direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) is aligned along the front-to-rear direction (direction of arrow F-B), and is placed inside the window portion 60a of the base plate 60, so that the space in the front-to-rear direction formed by the window portion 60a can be effectively utilized. This ensures the full length of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2), making it easier to string the balls together.

The back member C130 includes a main body C131 formed in a plate shape, and a lower stopper C132, an upper stopper C133, and an axis support seat C134 that are erected from the front of the main body C131.

An opening C131a is formed in the main body C131, which is an opening for communicating a passage (fifth passage CRt5) formed on the front side and the back side of the main body C131. A concave portion C131b is formed below the opening C131a by recessing the outer edge of the main body portion C131. The recessed portion C131b forms a part of the fifth passage CRt5 between the recessed portion C131b and the detour member C200.

The lower stopper portion C132 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the sorting member C170 when the sorting member C170 is displaced downward, thereby determining the second position of the sorting member C170 (see FIG. 82). On the other hand, the upper stopper portion C133 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the upper surface of the sorting member C170 when the sorting member C170 is displaced upward, thereby determining the first position (predetermined position) of the sorting member C170 (see FIG. 81).

The shaft support portion C134 is formed as a shaft support (bearing) that rotatably supports the shaft C192. The shaft C192 is fixed to the decorative member C190, and the distribution member C170 is unrotatably connected to the shaft C192 inserted from the back surface of the main body portion C131, so that the distribution member C170 and the decoration member C190 are fixed to each other. They are integrally rotatably supported by the main body part C131 (pivot support part C134). Further, the shaft C192 is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion C134 in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

The first intermediate member C140 includes a plate-shaped main body C141, a bottom surface C142 that stands upright from the back surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the main body C141, a top surface C143, and a passage portion C144, and is disposed on the left side of the back surface member C130 when viewed from the front.

When the first intermediate member C140 is disposed on the rear member C130, the bottom surface portion C142, the top surface portion C143, and the erected ends (in the direction of arrow B) of the passage portion C144 are abutted against the front surface of the rear member C130. As a result, a third passage CRt3 is formed by the space partitioned by the rear member C130 and the first intermediate member C140 (main body portion C141, bottom surface portion C142, and top surface portion C143), and a fourth passage CRt4 is formed by the space partitioned by the rear member C130, the first intermediate member C140 (passage portion C144), and the sorting member C170 in the second position (see FIG. 82).

Note that the bottom surface portion C142 is sloped downward from the pan member C120 side toward the distribution member C170 side. Further, the passage portion C144 includes an opposing portion C144a formed at a position facing the distribution member C170 in the second position, and a bottom portion C144b forming a rolling surface of the ball. It is formed to be inclined downward from the distribution member C170 side in the second position toward the opposing part C144a side, and also to be inclined downward from the back member C130 side to the front member C110 side. Therefore, the ball can be received into the fourth passage CRt4 from the distribution member C170 that has been displaced to the second position, and the ball can be caused to flow (roll) into the sixth passage CRt6.

Here, the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) of the dish member C120 rolls the ball in the front-to-back direction (the direction of the arrows F-B), the ball flows down from the dish member C120 to the bottom surface portion C142 in the left-to-right direction (the direction of the arrows L-R) (to the right in this embodiment), and the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) rolls the ball flowing down from the dish member C120 in the left-to-right direction (the direction of the arrows L-R) (to the right in this embodiment).

In this case, the interval between the leading ball CB1 and the trailing ball CB2 (see FIG. 85) is determined by the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second path CRt2), and both balls CB1 and CB2 are It flows down from the side bottom part C122 (second passage CRt2) to the bottom part C142 (third passage CRt3) along the left-right direction, and also flows down (rolls) down the bottom part C142 (third passage CRt3) in the left-right direction. ), the distance between both balls CB1 and CB2 can be confirmed from a front view, making it easier for the player to visually confirm. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

The second intermediate member C150 has a plate-shaped main body C151 and a bottom surface C152 standing upright from the rear surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the main body C151, and is disposed on the right side of the rear surface member C130 when viewed from the front. When the second intermediate member C150 is disposed on the rear surface member C130, the standing tip (on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the bottom surface C152 abuts against the front surface of the rear surface member C130.

The main body C151 has a recess C151a formed by recessing its outer edge. The bottom surface C152 has a detour member C200 (gutter C203) disposed opposite its underside, and a portion of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed between the recess C151a and the bottom surface C152 and the detour member C200 (gutter C203). Therefore, the structure can be simplified and production costs can be reduced, for example, compared to a case in which the detour member C200 is formed into a cylindrical shape and used as part of the fifth passage CRt5.

The first interposed member C160 is a member that forms a rolling surface of a ball in a part of the fifth passage CRt5, and is interposed between the facing member C130 and the second intermediate member C150. That is, a part of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed by the space defined by the back surface member C130, the second intermediate member C150 (main body portion C151), and the first intervening member C160.

The first intermediate member C160 has a cross-sectional shape in a plane including its extension direction (arrow L-R direction) and the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) that is curved into an arc that is convex vertically downward (arrow D direction) (see FIG. 82). Therefore, the balls sorted by the sorting member C170 to the first intermediate member C160 (fifth passage CRt5) can be made to reciprocate on the first intermediate member C160 and then flow out to the opening C131a.

This allows the time required for the balls sorted by the sorting member C170 to flow out to the opening C131a to be longer, compared to a configuration in which the balls sorted by the sorting member C170 are directly sorted out to the opening C131a. In other words, it makes it easier for players hoping for a state in which there is a high probability of the ball entering the first winning port 64 (winning), to notice that such a state has been created, and allows them time to enjoy such a state. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the first interposed member C160 has an outflow to a position corresponding to the opening C131a of the back member C130 (that is, the lowest height position in the vertical direction of the rolling surface of the first interposed member C160). The surface C160a is recessed. The outflow surface C160a is a part for allowing the ball guided by the first intervening member C160 to flow out into the opening C131a, and is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the opening C131a.

The distribution member C170 includes a main body part C171 in which a fitting hole C171a is formed on one side, and a receiving part C172 formed in the other side of the main body part C171 opposite to the side in which the fitting hole C171a is formed. and a rolling part C173 formed on the upper surface side of the main body part C171, and is rotatable about a shaft C192 (shaft support part C134) fitted in a fitting hole C171a.

The fitting hole C171a is formed as a hole having a D-shaped cross section, and the shaft C192 having a cross-sectional shape matching the cross-sectional shape is fitted into the fitting hole C171a, thereby fixing the shaft C192 to the main body portion C171 in a non-rotatable manner. The shaft C192 is also fixed to the decorative member C190 without rotation, so that the main body portion C171 (distributing member C170) and the decorative member C190 are integrated (formed as one unit) via the shaft C192. Ru.

In this case, the center of gravity of the unit consisting of the distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190 is offset to one side (the side opposite the distribution member C170 across the axis C192, the right side in Figure 81) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C192). Therefore, in an unloaded state, the distribution member C170 is raised on the receiving section C172 side (rotated clockwise around the axis C192 in front view), and is in a state in which rotation is restricted by the upper stopper section C133 (disposed in the first position (predetermined position)) (see Figure 81).

On the other hand, when the ball is received in the receiving portion C172 of the distribution member C170, the weight of the ball causes the overall center of gravity to be shifted to the other side (with respect to the axis C192) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C192). It is eccentric to the side where the dividing member C170 is disposed (the left side in FIG. 81). Therefore, when the ball is received in the receiving part C172, the distributing member C170 is lowered on the receiving part C172 side (rotated counterclockwise around the axis C192 when viewed from the front), and the rotation is restricted by the lower stopper part C132. (see FIG. 82).

At least a portion of the main body C191 of the decorative member C190 is visible to the player, and as the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) between the first and second positions, the decorative member C190 (main body C191) also rotates, changing the position (shape) that is visible to the player. Therefore, based on the position (shape) of the decorative member C190, the state of the distribution member C170 (i.e., the distribution direction of the balls) can be recognized by the player. In addition, the decorative member C190 can serve both as a weight for displacing the distribution member C170 and as a part that allows the player to recognize the distribution direction of the balls, which reduces production costs.

In addition, after the distribution member C170 is arranged at the second position, when the ball is discharged (flowed) from the receiving part C172 to the passage part C144 of the first intermediate member C140, the distribution member C170 The decorative member C190 is returned to the first position (predetermined position) by the action of its own weight (the eccentricity of the center of gravity from the axis C192).

In this way, the displacement (return) of the distribution member C170 to the first position is performed by the weight (weight) of the unit consisting of the distribution member C170 and the decorative member C190, so for example, a biasing spring may be provided. The structure can be simplified compared to the case where the biasing spring biases the distribution member C170 toward the first position.

Furthermore, compared to the case of using a biasing spring, the displacement of the distribution member C170 to the first position (return operation) can be made at a lower speed, making it easier for the trailing ball CB2 to reach the rolling part C173. can. That is, after the distribution member C170 starts to be displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position, it is displaced (rotated) to a position where the trailing ball CB2 cannot flow onto the rolling portion C173. This can increase the amount of time it takes to complete the process. Furthermore, it is possible to provide the possibility that the third ball that follows the trailing ball CB2 also reaches the rolling portion C173 (see FIGS. 85 to 87).

The receiving part C172 includes an opposing part C172a formed at a position facing the third passage CRt3 at the first position, and a facing part C172a that supports the ball received at the first position and rolls the ball toward the passage part C144 at the second position. and a bottom surface portion C172b forming a rolling surface for movement.

When the sorting member C170 is positioned in the first position, the receiving portion C172 is formed such that the facing portion C172a is approximately perpendicular to the extension direction of the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140, and the bottom surface portion C172b is inclined upward from the facing portion C172a toward the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (see FIG. 81).

Here, in a state in which the distribution member C170 is disposed at the first position, the facing portion C172a is inclined with respect to the direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (the rotation of the facing portion C172a is If the moving part C173 side is inclined in a direction that is farther away from the third passage CRt3 than the bottom part C172b side, there is a risk that the ball that collides with the opposing part C172a will be bounced upward and flow back into the third passage CRt3. There is.

On the other hand, the opposing portion C172a is substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 when the distribution member C170 is disposed at the first position. The ball received from the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3) is received by the opposing portion C172a, and can be prevented from flowing back into the third passage CRt3.

In addition, when the sorting member C170 is positioned in the first position, if the bottom surface C172b is formed to slope downward from the opposing portion C172a toward the bottom surface C142 (passage portion C144) of the first intermediate member C140, the balls received in the receiving portion C172 will flow out into the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140 prematurely, and the weight of the balls will not be utilized, which may prevent the sorting member C170 from reaching the second position.

On the other hand, the bottom portion C172b is formed to be inclined upward from the opposing portion C172a toward the bottom portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 when the distribution member C170 is placed at the first position. The ball can be held on the bottom portion C172b at least until the distribution member C170 rotates by a predetermined amount from the first position. Thereby, the time until the ball received in the receiving part C172 flows out to the passage part C144 of the first intermediate member C140 can be delayed. As a result, the weight of the ball can be effectively utilized to ensure that the distribution member C170 reaches the second position.

For the reasons mentioned above (preventing backflow into the third passage CRt3), the opposing portion C172a may be inclined in a direction such that the rolling portion C173 side is closer to the third passage CRt3 than the bottom surface portion C172b side.

The receiving portion C172 is formed such that, when the distribution member C170 is placed in the second position, the bottom portion C172b slopes downward from the opposing portion C172a toward the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140 ( (See Figure 82). Thereby, the ball received in the receiving part C172 can be reliably flowed out to the passage part C144 of the first intermediate member C140.

Further, while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface portion C172b, the weight of the ball is applied to the distribution member C170, and the distribution member C170 is moved to the second position (i.e., the trailing ball is moved to the rolling portion C173 (the second position). 5 passage CRt5) can be easily maintained.

The rolling portion C173 is a portion for guiding (distributing) the balls rolling on the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 to the second intervening member C160 (fifth passage CRt5). Yes, when the distribution member C170 is placed in the second position, the downstream end of the bottom surface C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 and the downstream end of the second intervening member C160 (fifth passage CRt5) It is located (erected) between the upstream end and the upstream end.

The upstream end (the end on the arrow L direction side) of the rolling portion C173 is formed to protrude from the opposing portion C172a of the receiving portion C172. That is, the upstream end (the end on the arrow L direction side) of the rolling portion C173 is provided with a portion protruding from the opposing portion C172a toward the upstream side (first intermediate member C140 (third passage CRt3) side, arrow L direction). A plate-shaped portion is formed. By inserting this plate-shaped portion between the balls CB1 and CB2, both balls (balls CB1, CB2) can be separated.

When the distribution member C170 is disposed at the second position, the height position of the upstream end (end in the direction of arrow L) of the rolling portion C173 (rolling surface) is positioned vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the height position of the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow R) of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) of the first intermediate member C140. That is, a step is formed between the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173, and when the distribution member C170 disposed at the second position is displaced (rotated) by a predetermined amount (predetermined rotation angle) toward the first position, the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 are disposed at the same height position.

When a ball rolling on the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 flows into the receiving portion C172, the weight of the ball displaces (rotates) the distributing member C170 downward from the first position, and the lower surface of the distributing member C170 abuts against the lower stopper portion C132, thereby positioning the distributing member C170 at the second position.

In this case, there is a risk that the distribution member C170 will be bounced upward (in the direction of the arrow U) due to the impact when the lower surface collides with the lower stopper portion C132. If the upward bounce of the distribution member C170 causes the height position at the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 (rolling surface) to be positioned vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) relative to the height position at the downstream end of the bottom portion C142 (rolling surface) of the first intermediate member C140, there is a risk that the balls will not be able to flow (roll) from the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 into the rolling portion C173.

In particular, if a ball collides with the sorting member C170 (the upstream end surface of the rolling portion C173) that has been bounced upward, and the impact of the ball's collision causes the sorting member C170 to bounce further upward (if the ball pushes the sorting member C170 further upward), there is a risk that the ball will flow into (be received by) the receiving portion C172, even though it should have flowed (rolled) into the rolling portion C173.

On the other hand, when the distribution member C170 is disposed at the second position, as described above, the downstream end of the bottom portion C142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 (rolling surface) are Since a step is formed between them, even if the distribution member C170 is flipped upward due to an impact, the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 will be lower than the downstream end of the bottom portion C142 due to the step between the two. It can be suppressed from being located vertically upward (in the direction of arrow U). That is, it is possible to allow the distribution member C170 to be flipped upward by the difference in level between the two. Therefore, the ball to be flowed (rolled) into the rolling part C173 (the trailing ball CB2 whose distance from the leading ball CB1 is equal to or less than a predetermined amount) is transferred to the bottom part C142 (third passage CRt3). It is possible to easily flow (roll) from the rolling portion C173 into the rolling portion C173.

Furthermore, the distribution member C170 is formed such that the upstream end face of the rolling portion C173 (the face facing the first intermediate member C140, the face in the direction of the arrow L) is inclined downward from the rolling portion C173 toward the first intermediate member C140 (bottom surface portion C142). That is, the upstream end face of the rolling portion C173 is formed in a shape such that the edge portion on the receiving portion C172 (opposing portion C172a) side is closer to the first intermediate member C140 than the edge portion on the rolling surface side of the rolling portion C173.

As a result, when a ball collides with the upwardly flipped distributing member C170 (the upstream end face of the rolling part C173), the ball collides with the distributing member C170 (the upstream end face of the rolling part C173). ) can be set to be a force that pushes down the distribution member C170. As a result, the ball to be flowed (rolled) into the rolling part C173 (the trailing ball CB2 whose distance from the preceding ball CB1 is equal to or less than a predetermined amount) is transferred to the bottom part C142 (third passage CRt3). ) to the rolling portion C173 (rolling).

The receiving section C172 and the rolling section C173 are arranged on the same side of C192 (the side where the weight of the ball rotates the sorting member C170 in the same direction). Therefore, even if the weight of the ball received by the receiving section C172 causes the sorting member C170 to be positioned in the second position and the ball is then discharged from the receiving section C172, the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling section C173 can be used to maintain the sorting member C170 in the second position. In other words, when there is a ball to be guided to the fifth passage CRt5, the weight of the ball can be used to maintain the position of the sorting member C170 in a position for guiding the ball to the fifth passage CRt5.

Therefore, there is no need to maintain the sorting member C170 in the second position by utilizing the weight of the balls received in the receiving portion C172 (balls rolling on the bottom surface portion C172b), and the extension length of the bottom surface portion C172b can be shortened, thereby making the sorting member C170 smaller. As a result, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the sorting member C170 can be increased.

Here, the sorting member C170 is configured so that the direction in which the balls roll from the bottom portion C142 (third passage CRt3) towards the receiving portion C172 (the direction in which the receiving portion C172 receives the balls, arrow R direction) is opposite to the direction in which the balls roll from the receiving portion C172 to the passage portion C144 (the direction in which the received balls are made to roll, arrow L direction). In other words, the sorting member C170 is configured to reverse (change direction) the flow (rolling) direction of the balls in the receiving portion C172.

As a result, compared to when the direction in which the receiving section C172 receives the balls and the direction in which the balls roll from the receiving section C172 to the passage section C144 are the same, the balls can be retained in the sorting member C170 (receiving section C172) for the time required for reversal, and the weight of the balls retained in the receiving section C172 can be used to easily maintain the sorting member C170 in the second position. As a result, the balls can be stably rolled in the rolling section C173.

In addition, by utilizing the inversion of the balls, the residence time can be secured, and the extension length of the bottom surface portion C172b in the receiving portion C172 can be shortened accordingly, thereby making the distribution member C170 smaller. As a result, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the distribution member C170 can be increased.

The second intervening member C180 is a member that forms a rolling surface of the ball in the sixth passage CRt6, and is interposed between the front member C111 and the opposing first intermediate member C140 and second intermediate member C150. That is, the sixth passage CRt6 is formed by a space partitioned by the front member C110, the first intermediate member C140, the second intermediate member C150, and the second intervening member C180.

As described above, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member C180 has a concave surface (central outflow surface C181 and lateral outflow surface C182) that slopes downward toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) to allow the ball guided through the second interposed member C180 (sixth passage CRt6) to flow out into the play area. In addition, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the sixth passage CRt6 has undulations, with the lateral outflow surface C182 located at the bottom of the undulations and the central outflow surface C181 located at the top of the undulations.

The upper edge (edge in the direction of arrow U) of the front portion C111 of the front member C110 protrudes upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member C180, except for the areas where the central outflow surface C181 and the side outflow surface C182 are formed. In other words, a ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member C180 flows out (flows down) into the play area only from the central outflow surface C181 or the side outflow surface C182.

A recess C183 is formed in the bottom surface of the second intermediate member C180, and as described above, a portion of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed between the recess C183 and the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C110.

The decorative member C190 includes a main body C191 formed in a plate shape and a shaft C192 fixed to the main body C191, and as described above, is connected (integrated) to the distribution member C170 via the shaft C192. ) to be done. In addition, on the front of the main body part C191, a design such as a character is displayed by printing or attaching a sticker, and the operation of the distribution member C170 is made visible to the player based on the movement (displacement) of the character. .

The axis C192 is disposed perpendicular to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 72). This allows the dimensions of the lower frame C86b in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) to be reduced.

The detour member C200 includes a plate-shaped main body C201, a wall portion C202 erected from the front surface (the surface facing the direction of arrow F) of the main body C201, and a gutter portion C203 formed by further extending a portion of the wall portion C202 toward the front surface, and is disposed on the rear surface side of the rear surface member C130 at a position opposite the opening C131a.

In a state where the detour member C200 is disposed on the back member C130, the upright tip (the side in the direction of arrow F) of the wall portion C202 is in contact with the back surface of the back member C130 (main body portion C131), and the gutter portion C203 is The upright tip (the side in the direction of arrow F) is in contact with the back surface of the second intermediate member C150 (main body portion C151), and the edge of the gutter portion C203 is in contact with the bottom surface of the second intermediate member C150 (bottom surface portion C152). be touched.

As a result, a part of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed by the space partitioned between the back member C130 (main body portion C131) and the detour member C200 (main body portion C201 and wall portion C202), and the space partitioned between the second intermediate member C150 (bottom portion C152) and the detour member C200 (gutter portion C203) (see FIG. 83).

The gutter portion C203 is inclined downward from the rear member C130 side toward the second intermediate member C150 side. Therefore, the ball that flows into the detour member C200 from the opening C131a of the rear member C130 can be made to roll on the gutter portion C203 and flow into the fifth passage CRt5 formed between the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C110 and the second intermediate member C180 (recess C183).

Next, the operation of distributing balls by the distributing member C170 will be explained. 85 to 87 are partially enlarged sectional views of the lower frame C86b showing the transition of the ball distribution operation by the distribution member C170, and correspond to the cross section taken along the line LXXXI-LXXXI in FIG. 77.

Note that FIGS. 85(a) and 85(b) show a state in which the distribution member C170 is placed at the first position, and correspond to FIG. 81. 86(b) and 87 show a state in which the distribution member C170 is placed at the second position, and correspond to FIG. 82.

As shown in FIG. 85(a), when the sorting member C170 is positioned in the first position, the receiving portion C172 is positioned in a position that can receive (allow the ball CB1 to flow in) the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140.

That is, the receiving portion C172 has an opposing portion C172a disposed at a position intersecting an extension line of the bottom portion C142 (rolling surface), and a bottom portion C172b disposed at a position vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the extension line of the bottom portion C142 (rolling surface).

In addition, when the distribution member C170 is placed in the first position, the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) and the bottom surface (the rolling surface) of the rolling portion C173 are connected to each other. The distance between the upstream end (the end in the direction of arrow L) on the opposite surface (the surface in the direction of arrow D) is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the ball (a dimension that allows the ball to pass through). .

On the other hand, when the distribution member C170 is placed at the first position, the rolling portion C173 is at a position where it cannot receive the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (the ball CB1 cannot flow into it). will be placed in

That is, in the rolling portion C173, the bottom portion C172b is arranged at a position (one level higher) in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow U) than the extension line of the bottom portion C142 (rolling surface). Note that the interval in the vertical direction (height of the step) between the rolling portion C173 and an extension of the bottom portion C142 (rolling surface) is set to be larger than the radius of the sphere. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the ball from climbing over the step and flowing into the rolling portion C173 of the distribution member C170 in the first position.

When the sorting member C170 is placed in the first position, the distance between the downstream end (the end in the direction of arrow R) of the top surface portion C143 of the first intermediate member C140 and the upstream end (the end in the direction of arrow L) of the rolling portion C173 is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball cannot pass). This makes it possible to prevent the ball from climbing over the step and flowing into the rolling portion C173 of the sorting member C170 in the first position. However, this distance may also be set to a distance larger than the diameter of the ball.

When the ball CB1 (the leading ball) and the ball CB2 (the trailing ball with a predetermined interval between them) roll on the bottom surface C142 of the first intermediate member C140, FIG. ), the ball CB1 flows into (receives) the receiving part C172 of the distribution member C170, the ball CB1 abuts (receives) the opposing part C172a, and is held in the receiving part C172.

Furthermore, when the gap between balls CB1 and CB2 is relatively small, ball CB2 catches up with ball CB1 and comes into contact with ball CB1. As described above, when the sorting member C170 is placed in the first position, the gap between the downstream end of the top surface portion C143 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball cannot pass), so that ball CB2 can be prevented from passing over ball CB1 and flowing into the rolling portion C173. In other words, ball CB2 can be made to wait behind (upstream of) ball CB1.

As shown in FIG. 85(b), when the ball CB1 is received in the receiving part C172, the weight of the ball CB1 causes the distribution member C170 to move from the first position to the second position, as shown in FIG. 86(a). is displaced (rotated). Further, when the ball CB2 has caught up with the ball CB1, the weight of the ball CB2 is also applied to the distribution member C170.

The receiving portion C172 has an area on the side of the opposing portion C172a that is connected to the bottom portion C172b, and an area on the side of the bottom portion C172b that is connected to the opposing portion C172a, i.e., the connecting portion between the opposing portion C172a and the bottom portion C172b, that is, is curved in an arc that is convex toward the axis C192 and has approximately the same shape as the outer shape of the sphere (approximately the same diameter as the sphere), and the arc-shaped curved portion is capable of holding the sphere.

Furthermore, the distance between the distribution member C170 (the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow L) of the bottom surface portion C172b) and the first intermediate member C140 (the connecting portion between the bottom surface portion C142 and the facing portion C144a) is When the distribution member C170 is placed in the first position, the size is set to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere (dimensions through which the sphere cannot pass), and the distribution member C170 is displaced from the first position to the second position ( (rotation), it is gradually enlarged.

That is, when the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) to a predetermined intermediate position between the first position and the second position (the position between FIG. 86(a) and FIG. 86(b)), the above-mentioned The distance between the distribution member C170 (the downstream end (the end in the direction of arrow L) of the bottom part C172b) and the first intermediate member C140 (the connecting part between the bottom part C142 and the facing part C144a) is the diameter of the sphere. When the distribution member C170 is expanded to approximately the same size (a size that allows the ball to pass through) and is further displaced (rotated) from the predetermined intermediate position to the second position, the above-mentioned interval is further expanded and the second The maximum spacing is created in two positions.

Therefore, while the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position, the state in which the ball CB1 is received in the receiving portion C172 is maintained. That is, the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) while receiving the ball CB1 in the receiving portion C172 from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position. Thereby, the state in which the ball CB2 is kept in contact with the ball CB1 can be maintained, and the state in which the ball CB2 is located at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 can be maintained.

In this case, the distance between the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow R) of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end (end in the direction of arrow L) of the bottom surface (surface opposite the rolling surface, surface in the direction of arrow D) of the rolling portion C173 is gradually reduced as the sorting member C170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, and is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball cannot pass) before the sorting member C170 reaches a predetermined intermediate position. Therefore, the ball CB2 can be prevented from flowing into (being received by) the receiving portion C172.

Moreover, when the distribution member C170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the trajectory of the ball CB1 held in the receiving part C172 (the connecting part between the facing part C172a and the bottom part C172b) Locus of the upstream end (end in the direction of arrow L) on the bottom surface (surface opposite to the rolling surface, surface in the direction of arrow D) of the rolling portion C173, relative to the outer edge (the outer edge on the opposite side to the axis C192) is configured to pass on the side closer to the axis C192.

Therefore, it is possible to maintain the state in which the ball CB2 is in contact with the ball CB1, and maintain the state in which the ball CB2 is located at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142. ) can push back the ball CB2. That is, by inserting the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 between the balls CB1 and CB2, both balls can be separated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball CB2 from flowing into (accepting) the receiving portion C172. Moreover, it is possible to gradually roll the ball CB2 to the rolling portion C173 and stabilize the subsequent rolling.

When the sorting member C170 is further displaced (rotated) from the state shown in FIG. 86(a) toward the second position, the ball CB1 rolls on the bottom surface portion C172b toward the passage portion C144, and the ball CB2 flows down to the rolling portion C173 (is received by the rolling portion C173).

As shown in Figures 86(b) and 87, when the sorting member C170 is placed in the second position, the ball CB1 flows from the receiving portion C172 into the passage portion C144 (fourth passage CRt4), and the ball CB2 rolls in the rolling portion C173 and flows into the first intermediate member C160 (fifth passage CRt5).

After the balls CB1 and CB2 have flowed into the fourth passage CRt4 and the fifth passage CRt5, the distribution member C170 is returned (displaced) from the second position to the first position by its own weight. Note that even when the distribution member C170 is placed at the second position, or even after the distribution member C170 starts displacement (rotation) from the second position to the first position, the third ball When the ball reaches the rolling portion C173 and flows into the rolling surface of the rolling portion C173, the third ball rolls on the rolling portion C173 and flows (guides) into the fifth passage CRt5.

As described above, the upstream end surface (the surface facing the first intermediate member C140, the surface in the direction of arrow L) of the rolling portion C173 extends from the rolling portion C173 to the first intermediate member C140 (the bottom surface portion C142). ), even after the distributing member C170 starts displacing (rotating) from the second position to the first position, the upstream inclined surface of the rolling part C173 ( The third ball can be made easier to flow into the rolling portion C173 by using the end face).

The distribution member C170 is configured to be displaceable (rotatable) from the first position to the second position by the weight of only one ball. Therefore, when the distance between ball CB1 and ball CB2 is greater than a predetermined amount, both balls CB1 and CB2 are received in turn by the receiving portion C172, and are distributed to the fourth passage CRt4 through the distribution operation described above.

As described above, according to the lower frame C86b in the second embodiment, when the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 are spaced apart by a predetermined amount or less (including the case where the space between the two balls is 0), The ball CB1 can be distributed (guided) to the fourth path CRt4, and the ball CB2 can be distributed (guided) to the fifth path CRt5 by the distribution member C170, which is displaced to the second position by the weight of the ball CB1. On the other hand, if the balls CB1 and CB2 are connected with an interval exceeding a predetermined distance, both balls (the balls CB1 and the balls CB2) can be distributed (guided) to the fourth path CRt4. In this way, the guided path can be changed depending on the state of the series of balls CB1 and CB2 (whether or not the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball exceeds a predetermined amount), thereby improving interest. be able to.

Next, the center frame C2086 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 103. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the lower frame C2086b in the third embodiment, and FIG. 89 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame C2086b. Note that in FIGS. 88 and 89, only a part of the base plate 60 is partially illustrated, and the tapping screws for fastening and fixing the lower frame C2086b to the base plate 60 are omitted.

As shown in Figures 88 and 89, the lower frame C2086b is provided with an receiving port COP2000in formed as an opening capable of receiving a ball, a first passage CRt2001 connected to the receiving port COP2000in, a second passage CRt2002 through which the balls guided through the first passage CRt2001 (balls that have reciprocated along the longitudinal direction of the first passage CRt2001) flow down, and a third passage CRt2003 and a fourth passage CRt2004 through which the balls guided through the second passage CRt2002 are sorted by a sorting member C2170 and flow down. CRt2004, a sixth passage CRt2006 through which balls guided along the third passage CRt2003 and balls that fall from the fourth passage CRt2004 (balls that do not reach the end of the fourth passage CRt2004) flow down, a fifth passage CRt2005 through which balls guided along the fourth passage CRt2004 (balls that reach the end of the fourth passage CRt2004) flow down, and an outlet COP2000out formed as an opening through which balls guided along the fifth passage CRt2005 flow out to the play area (see Figures 96 and 97).

Note that the center frame in the third embodiment is composed of an upper frame (not shown) and a lower frame C2086b. The upper frame in the third embodiment is different from the upper frame passage CRt0 of the upper frame C86a in the second embodiment in the shape of its upper frame passage (not shown), and the other configurations are the same as in the second embodiment. Since it has the same configuration as the upper frame C86a, a description thereof will be omitted.

The upper frame passage is used for balls that enter (enter) from the area on the left side (left side in FIG. 72) of the gaming area when viewed from the front (the area between the center frame (upper frame) and the rail 61 (see FIG. 72)). The downstream end of the upper frame passage is connected to the receiving port COP2000in of the lower frame C2086b. That is, the ball that has flown (entered) from the gaming area into the upper frame passage is flown (entered) from the upper frame passage into the first passage CRt2001 of the lower frame C2086b via the reception port COP2000in.

A distribution member C2170 that operates according to the weight of the balls is disposed on the lower frame C2086b (see Figures 96 and 97). When a series of balls is guided down the second passage CRt2002, the leading ball is distributed to the third passage CRt2003, while the trailing ball is distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004. If the distance between the series of balls is greater than a predetermined amount, both the leading ball and the trailing ball are distributed to the third passage CRt2003.

Here, the ball that reaches the end of the fourth passage CRt4 flows down to the fifth passage CRt5, and the outlet COPout, which is the outlet of the fifth passage CRt2005 (the opening that allows the ball to flow out into the play area), is formed (positioned) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 (see Figure 72). Therefore, a ball guided down the fifth passage CRt2005 is likely to enter the first winning opening 64 (there is a high probability of entering the first winning opening 64).

On the other hand, in the sixth passage CRt2006, not only is a central outflow surface C181 formed (placed) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) to allow balls guided into the sixth passage CRt2006 to flow out into the play area, but side outflow surfaces C182 are also formed (placed) at two different positions in the width direction of the game board 13 (left and right direction in Figure 72) from vertically above the first winning opening 64. In addition, undulations are formed in the sixth passage CRt2006, with side outflow surfaces C182 formed at the bottom of the undulations and a central outflow surface C181 formed at the top of the undulations.

Therefore, in the sixth passage CRt2006, the ball distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004 has a higher probability of flowing out from the side outflow surface C182 to the gaming area than the probability of flowing out from the central outflow surface C181 to the gaming area, and as a result, , it is difficult to win into the first winning hole 64 (the probability of winning into the first winning hole 64 is lower than the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 mentioned above).

In this way, in the lower frame C2086b of this embodiment, as in the second embodiment, when a series of balls flows into the second passage CRt2002, the leading ball is diverted to the normal passage (third passage CRt2003), while the trailing ball is diverted to the fourth passage CRt2004, which directs the ball down a passage that is more likely to win the first winning port 64 (in this embodiment, the passage (fifth passage CRt2005) that almost certainly ensures that the ball will win the first winning port 64). Therefore, in order to increase the probability of the ball winning the first winning port 64 (ensuring a win), the player is made to look forward to the formation of a series of balls, which increases the excitement of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the ball guided through the fourth passage CRt2004 is configured to be able to fall into the sixth passage halfway, and only the ball that reaches the end of the fourth passage CRt2004 without falling is guided to the fifth passage CRt2005. It is possible to flow down (inflow). Therefore, in order to increase the probability of a ball winning in the first prize opening 64 (to ensure winning), after the trailing ball among the consecutive balls is distributed to the fourth path CRt2004, such It is possible to make the player expect that the ball will reach the end of the four-path CRt2004 without falling, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Next, the detailed configuration of the lower frame C2086b will be described with reference to Figures 88 to 89 as well as Figures 90 to 103.

Figure 90 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame C2086b, and Figure 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame C2086b. Figure 92 is a top view of the lower frame C2086b, Figure 93 is a front view of the lower frame C2086b, and Figure 94 is a rear view of the lower frame C2086b. Figure 95(a) is a side view of the lower frame C2086b as viewed in the direction of the arrow XCVa in Figure 93, and Figure 95(b) is a side view of the lower frame C2086b as viewed in the direction of the arrow XCVb in Figure 93.

96 and 97 are cross-sectional views of the lower frame C2086b taken along the line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 92. 98 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame C2086b taken along the line XCVIII-XCVIII in FIG. 94, and FIG. 99 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame C2086b taken along the line XCIX-XCIX in FIG. Note that FIG. 96 shows a state in which the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, and FIG. 97 shows a state in which the distribution member C2170 is arranged in the second position.

As shown in FIGS. 88 to 99, the lower frame C2086b includes a front member C2110, a plate member C2120 disposed on one longitudinal side (arrow L direction side) of the front member C2110, and A back surface member C2130 that is arranged facing each other at a predetermined interval on the back surface (surface in the direction of arrow B), a first intermediate member C2140 and a second 2 intermediate member C2150, first intervening member C2160, magnetic part C2400 and receiving member C2500, distribution member C2170 interposed between facing back member C2130 and first intermediate member C2140, front member C2110 and back member A second intervening member C2180 is provided between the opposing members C2130, and a detour member C2200 and a magnet C2300 are provided on the back surface of the back member C2130.

In addition, the lower frame C2086b is fastened and fixed to each other by tapping screws, and the distribution member C2170 is rotatably supported by the back member C2130 and the first intermediate member C2140, so that one (single body) ) (see Figure 88).

In addition, in the lower frame C2086b, the other members except the distribution member C2170 are made of a light-transmitting resin material (that is, transparent through which the back side member and the sphere can be seen through), and the distribution member C2170 is made of a colored resin material. Constructed from resin material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball passing from the first passage CRt2001 to the sixth passage CRt2006, and the player can also visually recognize the distribution operation by the distribution member C2170, making the game more interesting.

In this case, it is sufficient for the lower frame C2086b that at least the first intermediate member C2140 is made of a light-transmitting resin material. The player can visually check the state of the series of balls in the second path CRt2002 (whether the interval between the leading ball and the following ball is smaller than a predetermined amount) and the sorting operation by the sorting member C2170, and If it can be visually confirmed that the trailing ball has been distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004 by the distribution member C2170, the ball will flow into the first prize opening 64 from the outlet COPout with a high probability (in this embodiment, it will flow into the fifth passage CRt2005). This is because if the ball is guided through the fifth passageway CRt2005, almost all the balls will enter the player, so there is no need for the player to visually recognize the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005.

Note that the distribution member C2170 may be made of a light-transmissive (or colored) resin material, and may have its front surface painted or may have a sticker attached thereto.

Also, on the other hand, the first intermediate member C2140 may be made of a colored resin material, or may be painted or have a sticker attached to it. In other words, the balls passing through the third passage CRt2003 and the distribution member C2170 may be configured so as to be invisible to the player from the front side.

The front member C2110 has a plate-shaped front portion C111 that forms the front side, and a plate-shaped bottom portion C112 that stands upright from the back side of the front portion C111.

A plurality of insertion holes C111a are formed in the front part C111 in the thickness direction along the outer edge of the lower side (arrow D direction side) of the front part C111. The lower frame C2086b is fitted into the window portion 60a from the front of the base plate 60 in the assembled state (unitized state), and the tapping screw inserted into the insertion hole C111a is fastened to the base plate 60. It is fixed (disposed) on the base plate 60.

In the front part C111, an outlet COPout is formed (perforated in the thickness direction) at a position vertically above the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 72). As described above, the outflow port COPout is an opening that serves as an exit when the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 flows out to the game area.

The bottom surface of the second intervening member C2180 is disposed opposite to the top surface of the bottom surface portion C112. Note that a cylindrical portion communicating with the outlet COPout is formed in the bottom portion C112, and this cylindrical portion is a part of the fifth passage CRt2005. Therefore, since an overlapping portion (seam) between the front member C2110 and the second intervening member C180 is not formed on the inner wall surface of the fifth passage CRt2005, when a player looks into the fifth passage CRt2005 from the outlet COPout, Not only can the appearance be improved, but also foreign objects such as wires can be prevented from entering through the overlapping portions (seams).

The bottom part C112 is formed continuously over the entire length of the front part C111, and the upright tip (the side in the direction of arrow B) of the bottom part C112 is in front of the first intermediate member C2140 and the first intervening member C2160. be touched. This suppresses the intrusion of foreign objects such as wires.

The dish member C2120 includes an upper bottom part C2121 and a lower bottom part C2122 that form the bottom of the passage, and a side wall part C2124 that forms the side wall of the passage.

The upper bottom surface portion C2121 extends in the front-to-rear direction (the direction of the arrows LR) as a substantially straight passage when viewed from above, and is formed to slope downward in the direction away from the receiving port COP2000in (the direction of the arrow).

The lower bottom surface portion C2122 extends in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and also in the direction of extension (direction of arrow FB) and in the vertical direction (direction of arrow The cross-sectional shape in a plane including the UD direction) is curved into a circular arc convex downward in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow D) (see FIG. 84(b)).

The side wall portion C2124 defines the passage width of the upper bottom surface portion C2121 (first passage CRt2001), the ends of one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the ball is guided) of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001), and the passage width of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001). The passage width is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball (a dimension at least smaller than twice the diameter of the ball, preferably smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the ball), and multiple balls can only be guided in series.

The lower bottom portion C2122 intersects the upper bottom portion C2121 at approximately 90 degrees when viewed from above, and the downstream end (the end in the direction of arrow R) of the upper bottom portion C2121 and one end in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom portion C2122. The two sides (ends in the direction of arrow F) are arranged at adjacent positions.

A cutout portion C124a is formed in the side wall portion C2124 at a position corresponding to the bottom (the lowest vertical position) of the arc-shaped curved lower bottom surface portion C2122, and the balls can flow down from the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) through this cutout portion C124a.

As described above, the lower bottom portion C2122 is formed to be curved in an arc shape, and the ball is flowed down from the upper bottom portion C2121 to the upward slope side (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom portion C2122). After reciprocating the ball that has flown down between one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom part C2122 (first passage CRt2001), the ball is moved from the notch part C124a to the bottom part C2142 (first passage CRt2001). The ball can be flowed down into the two-pass CRt2002).

As a result, when the two balls flow from the upper bottom part C2121 to the lower bottom part C2122 (first passage CRt2001) with a predetermined interval apart, the lower part C2122 (first passage CRt2001) By using the reciprocating motion, it is possible to make the trailing ball catch up with the leading ball and reduce the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball (to make the balls line up).

An outflow surface C122a is recessed in the lower bottom surface portion C2122 at a position corresponding to the notch portion C124a (that is, a position having the lowest height in the vertical direction). The outflow surface C122a is a part for causing the ball guided through the lower bottom part C2122 (first passage CRt2001) to flow out to the bottom part C2142 (second passage CRt2002). It is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the surface.

Therefore, after the balls have reciprocated on the lower bottom surface portion C2122, their rolling speed has decreased, and the outflow surface C122a can be used to smoothly outflow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002). In other words, by utilizing the reciprocating motion on the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001), balls with a reduced distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball (balls in a connected state) can be made to outflow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) while maintaining that connected state.

Note that, when viewed from above, the width of the concave surface of the outflow surface C122a (dimension along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface C2122, dimension in the direction of arrow FB) is equal to the width of the notch C124a. The closer the side is, the larger the shape is (see FIG. 92).

In addition, when the ball is in contact with the lower side wall C2124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the notch C124a when viewed from above, the ball rolls (traverses) on the outflow surface C122a. That is, the ball rolling (reciprocating) in the lower bottom surface C2122 (first passage CRt2001) is located at the farthest position from the notch C124a (the lateral top of the ball contacts the lower side wall C2124). position), an outflow surface C122a is formed to the extent that it overlaps with the center of the sphere when viewed from above (this is the locus of the lower top of the ball as it rolls on the lower bottom surface C2122). The rolling line crosses the outflow surface C122a).

On the other hand, if the outflow surface C122a is recessed (formed) in the lower bottom part C2122, the ball that has flown down to the lower bottom part C2122 (first passage CRt2001) will flow through the lower bottom part C2122 (first passage CRt2001). CRt2001) without reciprocating even once or before reciprocating a sufficient number of times, there is a possibility that it will flow out (flow down) to the bottom part C2142 (second passage CRt2002) due to the slope of the outflow surface C122a. . That is, without reducing the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball, there is a risk that both balls may flow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) with the distance between them.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C2122 is formed to be inclined downward in the direction away from the notch portion C124a (in the direction of arrow L) (see FIG. 96). As a result, due to the action of the slope of the lower bottom surface portion C2122, the ball is pressed against the side wall portion C2124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the notch portion C124a, and the ball is pushed against the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (the first passageway). CRt2001) can be used to roll (reciprocate).

Thereby, before the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently low, it is possible to suppress the ball from flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) due to the effect of the slope of the outflow surface C122a. That is, until the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently low, the outflow surface C122a is easily crossed (crossed), and the ball is sufficiently reciprocated along the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001). It can be easily done. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball and the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball is reduced (the balls are connected together).

The arc shape of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (a cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction (arrow F-B direction) and vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) of the lower bottom surface portion C2122, which is an arc shape that is convex vertically downward (arrow D direction), see Figures 84(b) and 95(b)) has a radius of the arc shape at one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction that is smaller than the radius of the arc shape in the region between the one end side and the other end side (region including the outflow surface C122a). In other words, the radius of the arc shape in the region including the outflow surface C122a is larger.

This makes it easier for the balls to reciprocate and for the trailing ball to catch up with the leading ball in the initial stage (the stage where the balls reciprocate to one and the other end in the longitudinal direction or their vicinity), while making it easier for the leading and trailing balls to maintain a connected state in the stage where the rolling speed of the reciprocating balls has slowed (the stage where the balls do not reach the one and the other end in the longitudinal direction or their vicinity and the balls reciprocate in a relatively narrow area including the outflow surface C122a). As a result, it is easier for the balls to flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) while maintaining a connected state.

The back member C2130 includes a main body C2131 formed in a plate shape and a shaft support C2134 erected from the front of the main body C2131.

The main body part C2131 has an opening C2131a which is an opening for communicating the passage (fifth passage CRt2005) formed on the front side and the back side of the main body part C2131, and a distribution member C2170 (weight C2175). An opening C2131c, which is an opening for avoiding interference, is formed. A concave portion C2131b is formed below the opening C2131a by recessing the outer edge of the main body portion C2131. The recessed portion C2131b forms a part of the fifth passage CRt2005 between the opposite sides of the detour member C2200.

The shaft support seat C2134 is formed as a shaft support (bearing) that rotatably supports the shaft C2174 of the distribution member C2170. The shaft C2174 is supported by the shaft support seat C2134 and the shaft support seat C2141b of the first intermediate member C2140 in a position along the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction).

The first intermediate member C2140 includes a plate-shaped main body C2141, a bottom surface C2142 erected from the rear surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the main body C2141, a top surface C2143, a passage portion C2144, and a lower stopper portion C2145, and is disposed on the left side of the rear surface member C2130 when viewed from the front.

An opening C2141a is formed in the main body C2141, which is an opening for communicating passages (third passage CRt2003 and sixth passage CRt2006) formed on the front side and the back side of the main body C2141. Further, a shaft support portion C2141b is provided upright from the back surface of the main body portion C2141. The shaft support portion C2141b is formed as a shaft support (bearing) that rotatably supports the shaft C2174 of the distribution member C2170.

When the first intermediate member C2140 is disposed on the back member C2130, the upright tips (on the arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface portion C2142 and the top surface portion C2143 are in contact with the front surface of the back surface member C2130. As a result, a second passage CRt2002 is formed by a space partitioned between the back surface member C2130 and the first intermediate member C2140 (main body portion C2141, bottom surface portion C2142, and top surface portion C2143), and a second passage CRt2002 is formed between the back surface member C2130 and the first intermediate member C2140. A third passage CRt2003 is formed by a space defined by C2140 (bottom part C2142 and passage part C2144) and the distribution member C2170 in the second position (see FIG. 97).

The bottom surface portion C2142 is sloped downward from the pan member C2120 side toward the distribution member C2170 side. Moreover, the passage part C2144 is located between the distribution member C2170 (bottom part C2172b) in the second position and the opening C2141a, and the passage part C2144 is located between the distribution member C2170 (bottom part C2172b) in the second position and the opening C2141a. It is formed with a downward slope towards the side. Therefore, when the passage section C2144 receives a ball from the distribution member C2170 that has been displaced to the second position, it can cause the ball to flow out (roll) into the sixth passage CRt2006 via the opening C2141a.

The bottom surface portion C2142 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the upper surface of the sorting member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) when the sorting member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) is displaced upward, thereby determining the first position of the sorting member C2170 (see FIG. 96). On the other hand, the lower stopper portion C2145 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the sorting member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) when the sorting member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) is displaced downward, thereby determining the second position of the sorting member C2170 (see FIG. 97).

Note that when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion C2173 is displaced (raised) upward. That is, the bottom surface portion C2173 when the distribution member C2170 is placed in the second position is higher than the upper surface (rolling surface) of the bottom surface portion C2173 when the distribution member C2170 is placed in the first position. It is located on the U side).

The second intermediate member C2150 comprises a plate-shaped main body C2151, a bottom surface C2152 and wall surface C2153, C2154 erected from the rear surface (the surface on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the main body C2151, and is disposed to the right of the rear surface member C2130 when viewed from the front, with a predetermined distance between it and the first intermediate member C2140.

In this embodiment, the distance between the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member C2150 (the distance in the direction of the arrows L-R) is set to a value larger than the dimension obtained by adding at least twice the diameter of the ball to the longitudinal dimension (direction of the arrows L-R) of the receiving member C2500. Therefore, a space through which the ball can pass can be secured on both sides of the longitudinal direction (direction of the arrows L-R) of the receiving member C2500 (both between the first intermediate member C2140 and between the second intermediate member C2150). This increases the variety (variation) of directions in which the ball can flow down, making the game more interesting.

When the second intermediate member C2150 is disposed on the rear member C2130, the bottom portion C2152 is positioned so as to be in communication with the opening C2131a of the rear member C2130, and is tilted downward toward the opening 2131a. Therefore, when the bottom portion C2152 receives a ball that has reached the end of the fourth passage CRt2004 (a ball that has fallen from the end of the magnetic portion C2400), it can cause the ball to flow (roll) into the opening C2131a. In other words, a part of the fifth passage CRt2005 is formed on the upper surface side of the bottom portion C2152.

When the second intermediate member C2150 is disposed on the rear member C2130, the erected tips (on the arrow B direction side) of the bottom portion C2152 and the wall portions C2153 and C2154 abut against the front surface of the rear member C2130. In addition, the main body portion C2151 and the wall portions C2153 and C2154 protrude upward (in the arrow U direction) by a predetermined amount along the edge of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the bottom portion C2152.

The wall portion C2153 located on the side farther from the magnetic portion C2400 forms a surface that intersects with an extension of the direction of movement of the ball guided through the fourth passage CRt2004 (the direction along the lower edge (edge that attracts the ball) of the magnetic portion C2400). This allows the ball that is ejected from the fourth passage CRt2004 (that falls from the magnetic portion C2400) to be directly received by the wall portion C2153, or to be received by the wall portion C2153 after bouncing (jumping up) from the bottom portion C2152 and then dropped onto the bottom portion C2152. In this embodiment, the wall portion C2153 is formed to a position higher than the lower edge (edge that attracts the ball) at the end (end in the direction of arrow R) of the magnetic portion C2400.

On the other hand, the protrusion dimension of the bottom part C2152 from the top surface is the protrusion dimension of the wall part C2154 located on the side closer to the magnetic part C2400, and the protrusion dimension of the main body part C2151 is the protrusion dimension of the wall part C2154 located on the side far from the magnetic part C2400. It is made smaller (lower) than the protrusion dimension of C2153. Thereby, the ball can fall from the bottom part 2152 (fifth passage CRt2005) to the first intervening member C2160 or the second intervening member C2180 (sixth passage CRt2006), thereby increasing the interest of the game. Note that it is preferable that the protruding dimensions of the wall portion C2154 and the main body portion C2151 be smaller than the diameter of the sphere.

The receiving member C2500 has a first bottom surface portion C2501 and a second bottom surface portion C2502 that form the upper surface (rolling surface), and is disposed between the opposing first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member 2150, at a position below the magnetic portion C2400 (in the direction of the arrow U). Therefore, a ball that has fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic portion C2400) can be received by the first bottom surface portion C2501 and the second bottom surface portion C2502 and allowed to flow down (roll) to the first intermediate member C2160.

The first bottom part C2501 is formed to be inclined downward from the connection part with the second bottom part C2502 toward the first intermediate member C2140 side (in the direction of arrow L), and the second bottom part C2502 is formed to be inclined downward from the connection part with the second bottom part C2502 It is formed to be inclined downward from the connection part with the second intermediate member C2150 (in the direction of arrow R). Further, the first bottom surface portion C2501 and the second bottom surface portion C2502 are tilted downward from the front side of the receiving member C2500 toward the back side (back surface member C2130 side) (see FIG. 99).

As described above, a space for at least one sphere is formed between the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member C2150 on both sides of the receiving member C2500 in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction).

Therefore, the ball that has fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic part C2400) is rolled in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the first bottom part C2501 or the second bottom part C2502, and the first interposed member C2160 It can be flowed down to. In this case, the direction in which the ball is caused to flow down can be changed depending on the part (first bottom part C2501 or second bottom part C2502) that receives the ball that has fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic part C2400).

In addition, the ball that has fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic portion C2400) can be made to roll in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the first bottom surface portion C2501 or the second bottom surface portion C2502, and then flow down from the downstream end of the first bottom surface portion C2501 or the second bottom surface portion C2502 to the first intermediate member C2160. This makes it easier to make the ball roll along the longitudinal direction of the first intermediate member C2160.

In addition, at least one or both of the first bottom surface portion C2501 and the second bottom surface portion C2502 may be inclined upward from the front side to the rear side (back member C2130 side) of the receiving member C2500, or may be non-inclined (i.e., horizontal) from the front side to the rear side (back member C2130 side) of the receiving member C2500.

The receiving member C2500 may also be in a form in which a space through which the ball can pass is secured only on one side of its longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) (i.e., a space through which the ball can flow (pass) is formed only between it and either the first intermediate member C2140 or the second intermediate member C2150, and the ball cannot flow (pass) between it and the other). In this case, the longitudinal dimension of the first bottom surface portion C2501 or the second bottom surface portion C2502 is secured, and the rolling time of the ball can be increased accordingly. This can increase the interest of the game.

The first intermediate member C2160 is a member that forms a rolling surface that allows the balls flowing down from the receiving member C2500 to flow down to the second intermediate member C2180, and is interposed between the opposing first intermediate member C2140 and second intermediate member C2150.

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the first intervening member C2160 has a concave surface (central outflow A surface C2161 and a side outflow surface C2162) are formed. The central outflow surface C2161 is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the central outflow surface C181 (i.e., the first prize opening 64) of the second intervening member C2180, and the side outflow surface C2162 is They are formed (arranged) at two different positions from C2161 in the width direction of the game board 13 (horizontal direction in FIG. 72). Moreover, undulations are formed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposed member C2160, a side outflow surface C2162 is formed at the bottom of the undulation, and a central outflow surface C2161 is formed at the top of the undulation.

The side outflow surface C2162 is formed (placed) at a different position toward the outside (arrow L direction or arrow R direction) in the width direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72) of the game board 13 with respect to the side outflow surface C182 of the second intervening member C2180. Therefore, the ball flowing down from the side outflow surface C2162 can be made to flow down further outside than the side outflow surface C182 of the second intervening member C2180 (i.e., the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intervening member C2180 that slopes downward toward the side outflow surface C182). Therefore, such balls can be made to roll easily along the longitudinal direction of the second intervening member C2180. As a result, an opportunity is created for the ball to flow down from the central outflow surface C181 of the second intervening member C2180 (i.e., the ball enters the first winning hole 64 (wins)), which increases the interest of the game.

The distribution member C2170 includes a main body C2171 on which the shaft C2174 is supported, a receiving portion C2172 formed on one side of the main body C2171, a rolling portion C2173 formed on the upper surface side of the main body C2171, and a brass weight C2175 disposed (attached) to the main body C2171 at a position opposite the receiving portion C2172 across the shaft C2174, and is rotatable around the shaft C2174 (shaft support seat portions C2134, C2141b).

The center of gravity of the distributing member C2170 is on the other side (the side where the weight C2175 is disposed, that is, the opposite side to the receiving part C21720 across the axis C2174, the right side in FIG. 96) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C2174). Be eccentric. Therefore, in the no-load state, the distributing member C2170 is in a state in which the receiving part C2172 side is raised (rotated clockwise around the axis C2174 when viewed from the front) and the rotation is restricted by the bottom part C2142 (in the first position). (see FIG. 96).

On the other hand, when a ball is received in the receiving portion C2172 of the distributing member C2170, the weight of the ball causes the overall center of gravity to be offset to one side (the side where the receiving portion C2172 is formed, i.e., the side opposite the weight C2175 with respect to the axis C2174, the left side of FIG. 97) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C2174). Therefore, when a ball is received in the receiving portion C2172, the receiving portion C2172 side of the distributing member C2170 is lowered (rotated counterclockwise around the axis C2174 in a front view), and the rotation is restricted by the lower stopper portion C2145 (disposed in the second position) (see FIG. 97).

Note that after the distribution member C2170 is placed at the second position, when the ball is discharged (flowed) from the receiving portion C2172 to the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140, the distribution member C2170 is returned to the first position by the action of its own weight (the eccentricity of the center of gravity from the axis C2174).

In this way, the displacement (return) of the distribution member C2170 to the first position is performed by the weight (mass) of the distribution member C2170 itself, so the structure can be simplified compared to, for example, a case in which a biasing spring is provided and the biasing spring biases the distribution member C2170 toward the first position.

In addition, compared to when a biasing spring is used, the displacement (returning operation) of the sorting member C2170 to the first position can be slowed down, making it easier for the trailing ball CB2 to reach the rolling part C2173. In other words, it is possible to lengthen the time it takes for the sorting member C2170 to be displaced (rotated) to a position where the trailing ball CB2 cannot flow onto the rolling part C2173 after it starts to displace (rotate) from the second position toward the first position. Furthermore, it is possible to provide the possibility for a third ball, which is further behind the trailing ball CB2, to reach the rolling part C2173 (see Figures 100 to 102).

The receiving part C2172 includes an opposing part C2172a formed at a position facing the second passage CRt2002 at the first position, and a part that supports the received ball at the first position and rolls the ball toward the passage part C2144 at the second position. and a bottom surface portion C2172b forming a rolling surface for movement.

When the sorting member C2170 is positioned in the first position, the receiving portion C2172 is formed such that the facing portion C2172a is approximately perpendicular to the extension direction of the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140, and the bottom surface portion C2172b is inclined upward from the facing portion C2172a toward the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (see FIG. 96).

Here, in a state where the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the first position, the facing part C2172a is inclined with respect to the direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the bottom face part C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (the rotation of the facing part C2172a is If the moving part C2173 side is inclined in a direction that is farther away from the second passage CRt2002 than the bottom part C2172b side, there is a risk that the ball that collides with the opposing part C2172a will be bounced upward and flow back into the second passage CRt2002. There is.

In contrast, when the distribution member C2170 is arranged in the first position, the opposing portion C2172a is oriented approximately perpendicular to the extension direction of the bottom portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140, so that the balls received from the bottom portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 are received by the opposing portion C2172a, preventing them from flowing back into the third passage CRt2003.

In addition, when the sorting member C2170 is positioned at the first position, if the bottom surface C2172b is formed to slope downward from the opposing portion C2172a toward the bottom surface C2142 (passage portion C2144) of the first intermediate member C2140, the balls received in the receiving portion C2172 will flow out into the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140 prematurely, and the weight of the balls will not be utilized, which may prevent the sorting member C2170 from reaching the second position.

In contrast, the bottom surface portion C2172b is formed so as to incline upward from the opposing portion C2172a toward the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 when the sorting member C2170 is disposed in the first position, so that the balls can be held on the bottom surface portion C2172b at least until the sorting member C2170 rotates a predetermined amount from the first position. This makes it possible to delay the time until the balls received in the receiving portion C2172 flow out into the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140. As a result, the weight of the balls can be effectively utilized to ensure that the sorting member C2170 reaches the second position.

In this case, in this embodiment, when the sorting member C2170 is arranged in the second position, the angle of the upward inclination of the bottom surface portion C2172b in the region of the base end side (right side in FIG. 96, arrow R direction side) connected to the opposing portion C2172a is set to an angle greater than the angle of the upward inclination of the tip side (left side in FIG. 96, arrow L direction side) opposite the opposing portion C2172a. In other words, when the sorting member C2170 is arranged in the first position, the angle of the downward inclination of the bottom surface portion C2172b in the region of the tip side (left side in FIG. 96) opposite the opposing portion C2172a is set to an angle greater than the angle of the downward inclination of the base end side (right side in FIG. 96) connected to the opposing portion C2172a.

Therefore, in the initial stage when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the receiving part C2172 is While ensuring that the ball is held in the (bottom part C2172b), in the latter stage, the downward slope in the area on the tip side (left side in FIG. 96) of the bottom part C2172b is used to move the ball to the passage part C2144 (third passage CRt2003). The ball can be released smoothly.

In addition, for the reason mentioned above (prevention of backflow to the second passage CRt2002), the opposing part C2172a may be inclined in a direction in which the rolling part C2173 side is closer to the second passage CRt2002 than the bottom part C2172b side.

When the sorting member C2170 is placed in the second position, the receiving portion C2172 is formed such that the bottom surface portion C2172b slopes downward from the opposing portion C2172a toward the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140 (see FIG. 97). This allows the balls received in the receiving portion C2172 to flow reliably into the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140.

Further, while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface portion C2172b, the weight of the ball is applied to the distribution member C2170, and the distribution member C2170 is moved to the second position (i.e., the trailing ball is moved to the rolling portion C2173 (the second position). 4 passage CRt4) can be easily maintained.

The rolling portion C2173 is formed in a region opposite to the receiving portion C2172 (bottom portion 2172b) with the axis C2174 interposed therebetween. That is, when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position by the weight of the ball received in the receiving part C2172, the area is raised upward (in the direction of arrow U) with the rotation. A rolling portion C2173 is formed in a region including at least. That is, when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the downstream side of the rolling part C2173 is lifted upward, and the distance between it and the magnetic part C2400 is shortened. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling portion C2173 can be easily transferred (adsorbed) to the magnetic portion C2400.

In this case, if the sorting member C2170 is arranged in the second position and the rolling portion C2173 is formed only on the opposite side of the axis C2174 in the horizontal direction (arrow L-R direction), when a ball flows down from the bottom surface portion 2142 (second passage CRt2002) to the rolling portion C2173, the weight of the ball and the force of the fall may cause the sorting member C2170 to rotate towards the first position. Therefore, the height position (vertical position) of the rolling portion C2173 is lowered and the distance between the rolling portion C2173 and the magnetic portion C2400 is increased, which may cause the ball rolling on the rolling portion C2173 to not jump to (be attracted to) the magnetic portion C2400.

In contrast, the rolling portion C2173 is formed over a range (area) that overlaps vertically with the axis C2174 when the sorting member C2170 is placed in the second position (see FIG. 97). That is, the area on the upstream side (second passage CRt2002 side) of the rolling portion C2173 is located to one side in the horizontal direction (the direction of the arrow L) of the axis C2174, and the weight of the balls rolling on that upstream side can be made to act as a force in a direction that maintains the sorting member C2170 in the second position.

Therefore, when a ball flows down from the bottom surface portion 2142 (second passage CRt2002) to the rolling portion C2173, the weight of the ball and the momentum of the fall are used to apply an inertial force to the sorting member C2170 in a direction to maintain the state in the second position, and while the sorting member C2170 is attempting to displace (rotate) in a direction to maintain the state in the second position due to the action of that inertial force, the ball can be made to roll to the area downstream of the rolling portion C2173. As a result, it is possible to easily cause the ball rolling on the rolling portion C2173 to jump (be attracted) to the magnetic portion C2400.

The extended length of the bottom portion C2172b of the receiving portion C2172 (the length in the direction in which the ball is guided) is set to be larger than the extended length of the rolling portion C2173. Therefore, while a ball is rolling on the rolling portion C2173, it is possible to easily create a state in which another ball is simultaneously rolling on the bottom surface portion C2172b of the receiving portion C2172. That is, while the ball is rolling on the rolling portion C2173, the weight of another ball can be applied to the distribution member C2170 on the bottom surface portion C2172b of the receiving portion C2172.

As a result, when the ball rolls on the rolling surface C2173, the distribution member C2170 is displaced from the second position to the first position by the weight of the ball (the downstream side of the rolling surface C2173 is displaced downward). ) can be suppressed. As a result, the ball rolling on the rolling portion C2173 can be easily transferred (adsorbed) to the magnetic portion C2400.

In particular, the bottom surface C2172b of the receiving portion C2172 extends in a direction away from the axis C2174 (in a direction perpendicular to the axis C2174), so that as the ball rolls on the bottom surface C2172b, the distance between the point of application of the force (the position where the weight of the ball acts) and the fulcrum (center of rotation) can be made larger (increased). In other words, as the ball rolls on the bottom surface C2172b, it becomes easier to maintain the sorting member C2170 in the second position (the force required to displace (rotate) the sorting member C2170 arranged in the second position to the first position can be increased).

As a result, when the ball rolls on the rolling surface C2173, the distribution member C2170 is displaced from the second position to the first position by the weight of the ball (the downstream side of the rolling surface C2173 is displaced downward). ) can be suppressed. As a result, the ball rolling on the rolling portion C2173 can be easily transferred (adsorbed) to the magnetic portion C2400.

Here, the distribution member C2170 is arranged in the direction in which the ball rolls from the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) toward the receiving part C2172 (the direction in which the receiving part C2172 receives the ball, the direction of arrow R), and The direction in which the ball rolls (the direction in which the received ball is rolled, the direction of arrow L) is the opposite direction. That is, in the receiving portion C2172, the downward direction (rolling) direction of the ball is reversed (changed in direction).

As a result, compared to when the direction in which the receiving section C2172 receives the balls and the direction in which the balls roll in the receiving section C2172 are the same, the time the balls remain in the sorting member C2170 (receiving section C2172) can be secured for the time required for reversal, and the weight of the balls remaining in the receiving section C2172 can be utilized to easily maintain the sorting member C2170 in the second position. As a result, the balls can be stably rolled in the rolling section C2173.

The rolling portion C2173 is a portion for guiding (distributing) the balls rolling on the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the magnetic portion C2400 (fourth passage CRt2004), and is positioned (installed) between the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 and the upstream end of the magnetic portion C2400 (fourth passage CRt2004) when the distribution member C2170 is disposed in the second position.

As described above, when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) between the first position and the second position, the height position of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion C2173 changes in the vertical direction. It is displaced (raised and lowered) in the direction (arrow UD). Thereby, the rolling portion C2173 can be placed at a position lower than the magnetic portion C2400.

As a result, by arranging the distribution member C2170 in the second position and displacing (raising) the rolling part C2173 upward, it is brought closer to the magnetic part C2400 and attracts the ball against the action of gravity. On the other hand, by arranging the distribution member C2170 in the first position and displacing (raising) the rolling part C2173 downward, it is separated from the magnetic part C2400 and the ball can be moved by using the action of gravity. It is possible to reliably form a mode in which no adsorption occurs.

The connection portion between the upstream end of the rolling part C2173 (the end on the arrow L direction side) and the opposing part C2172a of the receiving part C2172 is on the upstream side (first intermediate member C2140 (second passage CRt2002) side, arrow L direction) It is formed in the shape of an acute-angled protrusion that protrudes toward the By inserting this protrusion-shaped portion between the balls CB1 and CB2, both balls (balls CB1, CB2) can be separated.

When the sorting member C2170 is arranged in the second position, the height position of the upstream end (end in the direction of arrow L) of the rolling part C2173 (rolling surface) is positioned vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the height position of the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow R) of the bottom surface part C2142 (rolling surface) of the first intermediate member C2140. That is, a step is formed between the downstream end of the bottom surface part C2142 and the upstream end of the rolling part C2173, and when the sorting member C170 arranged in the second position is displaced (rotated) by a predetermined amount (predetermined rotation angle) toward the first position, the downstream end of the bottom surface part C2142 and the upstream end of the rolling part C2173 are arranged at the same height position.

Here, when the ball rolling on the bottom part C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 flows into the receiving part C2172, the distribution member C2170 is displaced downward from the first position by the weight of the ball. (rotation), and the lower surface of the distribution member C2170 comes into contact with the lower stopper portion C2145, so that the distribution member C2170 is arranged at the second position.

In this case, there is a risk that the distribution member C2170 will be bounced upward (in the direction of the arrow U) due to the impact when the lower surface collides with the lower stopper portion C2145. If the upward bounce of the distribution member C2170 causes the height position at the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (rolling surface) to be positioned vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U) relative to the height position at the downstream end of the bottom portion C2142 (rolling surface) of the first intermediate member C2140, there is a risk that the balls will not be able to flow (roll) from the bottom portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 into the rolling portion C2173.

In particular, if a ball collides with the sorting member C2170 (the upstream end surface of the rolling portion C2173) that has been bounced upward, and the impact of the ball's collision causes the sorting member C2170 to be bounced further upward (if the ball pushes the sorting member C2170 further upward), there is a risk that the ball will flow into (be received by) the receiving portion C2172, even though it should have flowed (rolled) into the rolling portion C2173.

In contrast, when the sorting member C2170 is placed in the second position, as described above, a step is formed between the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (rolling surface), so even if the sorting member C2170 is bounced upward by an impact, the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 can be prevented from being positioned vertically above (in the direction of the arrow U) the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 by the step between them. In other words, the sorting member C2170 can be allowed to be bounced upward by the step between them. Therefore, it is possible to easily allow the ball that should flow (roll) into the rolling portion C2173 (the trailing ball CB2 whose gap with the leading ball CB1 is equal to or less than a predetermined amount) to flow (roll) from the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) into the rolling portion C2173.

Note that, as in the case of the second embodiment, the upstream end surface (the surface facing the first intermediate member C2140, the surface in the direction of arrow L) of the rolling portion C2173 is connected from the rolling portion C2173 to the first It may be tilted downward toward the intermediate member C2140 (bottom portion C2142). That is, the upstream end face of the rolling part C2173 is attached to the first intermediate member C2140 so that the edge on the receiving part C2172 (opposed part C2172a) side is closer to the edge on the rolling surface side of the rolling part C2173. It is also possible to have a cross-sectional shape that is close to each other.

As a result, when a ball collides with the sorting member C2170 (the upstream end face of the rolling portion C2173) that has been bounced upward, the direction of the force acting from the ball on the sorting member C2170 (the upstream end face of the rolling portion C2173) can be set to a force in the direction of pushing the sorting member C2170 downward. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for a ball that should flow (roll) into the rolling portion C2173 (a trailing ball CB2 whose gap with the preceding ball CB1 is less than a predetermined amount) to flow (roll) from the bottom portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) into the rolling portion C2173.

The magnetic part C2400 is a long metal plate-like body, and is capable of attracting a ball by utilizing the magnetic force exerted by the magnet C2300 arranged on the back surface of the back surface member C2130. Note that multiple magnets C2300 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic part C2400.

When the sorting member C2170 is placed in the second position, a ball flows down from the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the rolling portion C2173. The ball that rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion C2173 jumps from the downstream end of the rolling portion C2173 to the upstream end of the magnetic portion C2400. That is, the ball is attracted to the lower edge of the magnetic portion C2400 (the ridgeline formed by the intersection of the front surface (surface in the direction of arrow F) and the lower surface (surface in the direction of arrow D)) (see FIG. 103). The ball attracted to the magnetic portion C2400 is moved along the lower edge (longitudinal direction) of the magnetic portion C2400 by the momentum of the ball due to the jump (rolling) and the action of gravity due to the downward inclination of the magnetic portion C2400.

In this case, depending on the state of the ball (the speed of the ball when it jumps from the rolling part C2173 of the distribution member C2170 to the magnetic part C2400, the position of the ball, the rotational state of the ball, etc.), the lower edge of the magnetic part C2400 An unstable state can be created in which the ball may fall (the ball may not reach the end). As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In particular, the magnetic part C2400 (fourth passage CRt2004) forms a passage between the distribution member C2170 and the fifth passage CRt2005, which can increase the interest of the game. In other words, the balls distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004 by the distribution member C2170 are only balls (trailing ball CB2) that flow (roll) down the second passage CRt2002 when the distance between them and the preceding ball CB1 is less than a predetermined amount (i.e., when connected to the preceding ball CB1), and the possibility of such a trailing ball B2 occurring is relatively low. By displacing the ball (trailing ball B2) that reaches the distribution member C2170 through such a low possibility in an unstable state where there is a possibility of it falling (possibility of it not reaching the fifth passage CRt2005), the player is made to expect that it will pass through safely, which can increase the interest of the game.

The thickness dimension of the magnetic part C2400 is set to a value smaller than the diameter of the sphere (in this embodiment, 6% of the diameter of the sphere). Therefore, in the ball whose outer surface point CP1 is attracted to the lower edge of the magnetic portion C2400, the outer surface point CP2 at a position lower than the position CP1 comes into contact with the front surface of the main body portion C2131. In this case, the center of gravity of the sphere is located farther from the front of the main body C2131 than the outer surface point CP2, so the weight of the ball (gravity acting on the center of gravity) moves the outer surface point CP2 to the main body with the outer surface point CP1 as the fulcrum. 2131 (see FIG. 103).

As a result, when a ball is attracted to the magnetic part C2400, the ball can be supported at two points, outer surface point CP1 and outer surface point CP2, and as a result, the movement of the ball along the lower edge (longitudinal direction) of the magnetic part C2400 can be stabilized. In addition, the frictional resistance between the outer surface point CP2 and the front surface of the main body part 2131 can be used to slow down the movement of the ball. This also stabilizes the movement of the ball, and increases the time it takes to pass through the fourth passage CRt2004, increasing the interest of the player who hopes that the ball will reach the fifth passage CRt2005 without falling.

In this way, by arranging the magnet C2300 and the magnetic part C2400 with the main body part c2131 of the back member C2130 in between, and making the ball move (slide) along the magnetic part C2400, the attraction force can be adjusted. The passage path of the ball can be formed with a simple structure while making it easy to optimize the frictional force.

The second intervening member C2180 is a member that forms the rolling surface of the balls in the sixth passage CRt2006, and is interposed between the front member C2110 and the opposing first intermediate member C2140 and first intervening member C2160. In other words, the sixth passage CRt2006 is formed by the spaces partitioned by the front member C2110, the first intermediate member C2140, the first intervening member C2160, and the second intervening member C2180.

As described above, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intervening member C2180 is formed with a concave surface (central outflow surface C181 and lateral outflow surface C182) that slopes downward toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) to allow balls guided through the second intervening member C2180 (sixth passage CRt2006) to flow out into the play area. In addition, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the sixth passage CRt2006 is formed with undulations, with the lateral outflow surface C182 located at the bottom of the undulations and the central outflow surface C181 located at the top of the undulations.

Note that the upper edge (edge in the direction of arrow U) of the front part C111 of the front member C2110 is the upper surface (rolling edge) of the second intervening member C2180, except for the area where the central outflow surface C181 and the side outflow surface C182 are formed. (moving surface) upwards (in the direction of arrow U). That is, the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intervening member C2180 flows out (flows down) into the game area only from the central outflow surface C181 or the side outflow surface C182.

A recess C183 is formed in the bottom surface of the second intermediate member C2180, and as described above, a portion of the fifth passage CRt2005 is formed between the recess C183 and the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C2110.

The detour member C2200 includes a plate-shaped main body C2201, a wall C2202 that stands up from the front of the main body C2201 (the surface in the direction of arrow F), and a part of the wall C2202 that further extends toward the front. It is provided with a gutter part C2203 that is formed as a groove, and is disposed on the back side of the back member C2130 at a position facing the opening C2131a.

When the detour member C2200 is disposed on the rear member C2130, the erected tip (arrow F direction side) of the wall portion C2202 abuts against the rear face of the rear member C2130 (main body portion C2131), and the erected tip (arrow F direction side) of the gutter portion C2203 abuts against the rear face of the second interposed member C2180, and the edge of the gutter portion C2203 abuts against the bottom face of the first interposed member C2160.

As a result, a space is partitioned between the back member C2130 (main body part C2131) and the detour member C2200 (main body part C2201 and wall surface part C2202), and a space is divided between the first interposed member C2160 and the detour member C2200 (gutter part C2203). A part of the fifth passage CRt2005 is formed by the partitioned space (see FIGS. 98 and 99).

The gutter portion C2203 is inclined downward from the rear member C2130 side toward the second intermediate member C2180 side. Therefore, the ball that flows into the detour member C2200 from the opening C2131a of the rear member C2130 can be made to roll on the gutter portion C2203 and flow into the fifth passage CRt2005 formed between the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C2110 and the second intermediate member C2180 (recess C183).

Next, the ball sorting operation by the sorting member C2170 will be described. Figures 100 to 102 are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame C2086b showing the transition of the ball sorting operation by the sorting member C2170, and correspond to the cross section at line XCVI-XCVI in Figure 92. Figure 1036 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C2086b at line CIII-CIII in Figure 102(b).

Note that Figs. 100(a) and 100(b) show the state in which the distribution member C2170 is arranged in the first position, and correspond to Fig. 96. Figs. 102(a) and 102(b) show the state in which the distribution member C2170 is arranged in the second position, and correspond to Fig. 97.

As shown in FIG. 100(a), when the distribution member C2170 is disposed at the first position, the receiving portion C2172 can receive the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (ball CB1 can flow in).

That is, the receiving portion C2172 has an opposing portion C2172a disposed at a position intersecting an extension line of the bottom portion C2142 (rolling surface), and a bottom portion C2172b disposed at a position vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the extension line of the bottom portion C2142 (rolling surface).

When the distribution member C2170 is placed in the first position, the distance between the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow R) of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end (end in the direction of arrow L, the connection portion between the rolling portion C2173 and the opposing portion C2172a) is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the ball (a dimension through which the ball can pass).

On the other hand, when the sorting member C2170 is positioned in the first position, the rolling portion C2173 is positioned in a position that cannot receive the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (the ball CB1 cannot flow in).

That is, the bottom surface portion C2172b of the rolling portion C2173 is positioned vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the extension line of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) (one step higher). The vertical distance (height of the step) between the rolling portion C2173 and the extension line of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) is set to a dimension larger than the radius of the ball. This makes it possible to prevent the ball from climbing over the step and flowing into the rolling portion C2172b of the sorting member C2170 in the first position.

Note that when the distribution member C2170 is disposed at the first position, the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the top surface portion C2143 of the first intermediate member C2140 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (the arrow L (the end on the direction side) is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere (a dimension that allows the sphere to pass through). This allows the ball to overcome the step and flow into the rolling portion C2172b of the distribution member C2170 in the first position.

In this case, when the distribution member C2170 is in the first position, the rolling portion C2173 is located on the opposite side of the axis C2174 from the bottom portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) in the horizontal direction (arrow L-R direction), and is tilted downward in the direction away from the bottom portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) (arrow R direction).

Therefore, even if a ball climbs over the step and flows into the rolling portion C2172b of the sorting member C2170 in the first position, the ball can be prevented from rotating the sorting member C2170 toward the second position (i.e., the rolling portion C2173 can be lifted upward), and the ball can be allowed to fall toward the second intermediate member 2150 (sixth passage CRt2006) along the downward slope of the rolling portion C2173. As a result, the ball that climbs over the step can be prevented from jumping onto (being attracted to) the magnetic portion C2400 and flowing down the fourth passage CRt2004 (reaching the fifth passage CRt2005).

However, the magnetic part C2400 may be arranged at a position where the ball that has climbed over the step can jump onto (be attracted to) the magnetic part C2400. That is, when the distance between the balls CB1 and CB2 is relatively small and the ball CB2 catches up with the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 overcomes the ball CB1, the magnetic part is located at a position where the ball CB2 can jump (adsorb) onto the magnetic part C2400. C2400 may be provided. Since the ball CB2 is originally a ball that should be distributed to the fourth path CRt2004, this ball is prevented from falling to the second intermediate member 2150 side (sixth path CRt2006), which is disadvantageous to the player. You can prevent it from happening.

When ball CB1 (a leading ball) and ball CB2 (a trailing ball spaced a predetermined distance from the leading ball) roll on the bottom surface C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140, as shown in FIG. 100(b), ball CB1 flows into (is received by) the receiving portion C2172 of the sorting member C2170, and ball CB1 abuts (is received by) the opposing portion C2172a and is held in the receiving portion C2172.

Also, if the distance between balls CB1 and CB2 is relatively small, ball CB2 will catch up with ball CB1 and come into contact with ball CB1. This allows ball CB2 to wait behind (upstream of) ball CB1.

As shown in FIG. 100(b), when ball CB1 is received by receiving portion C2172, the weight of ball CB1 displaces (rotates) sorting member C2170 from the first position to the second position as shown in FIG. 101(a). Also, when ball CB2 catches up with ball CB1, the weight of ball CB2 is also applied to sorting member C2170.

Here, the receiving portion C2172 is formed such that the area of the opposing portion C2172a that is connected to the bottom portion C2172b and the area of the bottom portion C2172b that is connected to the opposing portion C2172a, i.e., the connecting portion between the opposing portion C2172a and the bottom portion C2172b, are curved in an arc that is convex toward the axis C2174 and has approximately the same shape as the outer shape of the sphere (approximately the same diameter as the sphere), and the arc-shaped curved portion is capable of holding the sphere.

In addition, the distribution member C2170 (the region on the upstream side (arrow R direction side) of the rolling surface of the bottom part C2172b) and the first intermediate member C2140 (the downstream end (the arrow R direction side) of the bottom part C2142) When the distribution member C2170 is placed in the first position, the distance between the two is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the sphere (a dimension through which the sphere cannot pass), and the distance between the distribution members C2170 and By being displaced (rotated) toward the second position, it is gradually enlarged.

That is, when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) to a predetermined intermediate position between the first position and the second position (a position between FIG. 101(a) and FIG. 101(b)), the above-mentioned Between the distribution member C2170 (the region on the upstream side (in the direction of arrow R) of the rolling surface of the bottom part C2172b) and the first intermediate member C2140 (the end part on the downstream side (in the direction of arrow R) of the bottom part C2142) When the interval is expanded to a dimension that is approximately the same as the diameter of the ball (dimension that allows the ball to pass through), and the distribution member C2170 is further displaced (rotated) from the predetermined intermediate position to the second position, the above-mentioned interval is further enlarged to form a maximum spacing at the second position.

Therefore, while the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position, the state in which the ball CB1 is received in the receiving portion C2172 is maintained. That is, the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) while receiving the ball CB1 in the receiving portion C2172 from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position. Thereby, the state in which the ball CB2 is in contact with the ball CB1 can be maintained, and the state in which the ball CB2 is located at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 can be maintained.

In this case, the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end (the end on the arrow L direction side, the connecting portion with the opposing portion C2172a) of the rolling portion C2173. The distance between the balls is gradually reduced by displacing (rotating) the distributing member C2170 from the first position to the second position, and before the distributing member C2170 reaches the predetermined intermediate position, It is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter (a dimension that the ball cannot pass through). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball CB2 from flowing into (accepting) the receiving portion C2172.

In addition, when the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the trajectory of the upstream end (end on the arrow L direction side, connecting part with the opposing part C2172a) of the rolling part C2173 is configured to pass closer to the axis C2174 than the outer edge (outer edge opposite the axis C2174) of the trajectory of the ball CB1 held in the receiving part C2172 (connecting part between the opposing part C2172a and the bottom part C2172b).

Therefore, the ball CB2 can be maintained in contact with the ball CB1, and the ball CB2 can be maintained at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142, while the ball CB2 can be pushed back by the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (the end on the direction of the arrow L, the connecting portion with the opposing portion C2172a). In other words, the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 can be inserted between the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 to separate the two balls. This makes it possible to prevent the ball CB2 from flowing into (being received by) the receiving portion C2172. In addition, the ball CB2 can be gradually rolled into the rolling portion C2173, and the subsequent rolling can be stabilized.

When the sorting member C2170 is further displaced (rotated) from the state shown in FIG. 101(a) toward the second position, as shown in FIG. 101(b), the ball CB1 rolls on the bottom surface portion C2172b toward the passage portion C2144, and the ball CB2 flows down to the rolling portion C2173 (is received by the rolling portion C2173).

As shown in Figures 102(a) and 102(b), when the sorting member C2170 is placed in the second position, the ball CB1 flows from the receiving portion C2172 into the passage portion C2144 (third passage CRt2003), and the ball CB2 that rolls in the rolling portion C2173 jumps to (is attracted to) the magnetic portion C2400 and flows into the fourth passage CRt2004.

After the balls CB1 and CB2 flow into the third passage CRt2003 and the fourth passage CRt2004, the distributing member C2170 returns (displaces) from the second position toward the first position due to its own weight.

When the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the second position, or even after the sorting member C2170 starts to move (rotate) from the second position to the first position, if the third ball reaches the rolling portion C2173 and flows into the rolling surface of the rolling portion C2173, the third ball rolls on the rolling portion C2173. In this case, depending on whether the ball CB1 is on the receiving portion C2172 (bottom surface portion C2172b) or the rolling speed (momentum) of the third ball, it is determined whether the ball CB1 falls to the second intermediate member 2150 side (sixth passage CRt2006) or jumps (is attracted) to the magnetic portion C2400 and flows into the fourth passage CRt2004. In other words, two states can be formed.

Note that the distribution member C2170 is configured to be able to be displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position with only the weight of one ball. Therefore, when the distance between the balls CB1 and CB2 is larger than a predetermined amount, both the balls CB1 and CB2 are received in the receiving part C2172 in order, and after passing through the above-mentioned sorting operation, they are transferred to the third passage CRt2003. be distributed to.

As described above, according to the lower frame C2086b in the third embodiment, when the balls CB1 and CB2 are connected to each other with an interval of less than a predetermined amount, the balls CB1 are distributed (guided) to the third passage CRt2003. ), and the distribution member C2170, which is displaced to the second position by the weight of the ball CB1, can lift the ball CB2 upward and distribute (guide) it to the fourth passage CRt2004, while the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 are When the balls are connected with an interval exceeding a predetermined amount, both balls (ball CB1 and ball CB2) can be distributed (guided) to the third path CRt2003. In this way, the guided path can be changed depending on the state of the series of balls CB1 and CB2 (whether the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball exceeds a predetermined amount), thereby improving interest. be able to.

Next, the center frame C3086 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107.

In the second embodiment, the distribution member C170 is rotated, but in the third embodiment, the distribution member C3170 is slid. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Figures 104 and 106 are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame C3086b in the fourth embodiment, and Figures 105 and 107 are rear views of the lower frame C3086b. Note that Figures 104 and 105 show a state in which the distribution member C3170 is arranged in a first position, and Figures 106 and 107 show a state in which the distribution member C3170 is arranged in a second position. Also, Figures 104 and 106 correspond to a cross section taken along line LXXXI-LXXXI in Figure 77.

The lower frame C3086b in the fourth embodiment is configured identically to the lower frame C86b in the second embodiment, except for the structure for displacing the distribution member C3170 and the structure for linking the decorative member C3190 to the distribution member C3170.

As shown in Figures 104 to 107, two linear guide grooves C3131c are provided in the main body C131 of the back member C3130, extending in the vertical direction in a parallel orientation. These two guide grooves C3131c are arranged in an orientation that inclines in the direction closer to the first intermediate member C140 as they move downward (in the direction of arrow D).

In other words, the horizontal position (arrow L-R direction) of the sorting member C3170 in the second position is located closer to the intermediate member C140 (arrow L side) than the horizontal position of the sorting member C3170 in the first position.

The distribution member C3170 has a total of four shafts C3171a, one pair above the other, protruding from the back surface of the main body C3171. The shafts C3171a are guided parts that are slidably inserted into the guide grooves C3131c, and the shafts C3171a slide along the guide grooves C3131c, causing the distribution member C3170 to slide (linearly move) between the first position and the second position.

A pair of shafts C3171a are disposed in each of the left and right guide grooves C3131c. Therefore, the distribution member C3170 can slide between the first position and the second position without causing a change in posture due to rotation (i.e., while maintaining a constant inclination angle of the bottom surface portion C172b and the rolling portion C173).

A collar CW having a diameter larger than the width of the guide groove C3131c is provided at the tip of the shaft C3171a inserted into the guide groove C3131c, and this collar CW acts as a stopper to prevent the shaft C3171a from slipping out of the guide groove C3131c.

The distribution member C3170 is defined (arranged) at the first position by the shaft c3171a coming into contact with the upper end (end in the direction of arrow U) of the guide groove C3131c and upward displacement being restricted (Fig. 104 and FIG. 105), the lower stopper portion C132 comes into contact with the lower surface of the distributing member C3170 to restrict downward displacement, thereby defining (arranging) the distributing member C3170 in the second position (see FIGS. 106 and 107). ).

The decorative member C3190 includes an arm portion C3193 that is integrally formed with the main body portion C191 and extends radially outward about the axis C192. It extends along the radial direction around the center. A shaft C3171a is slidably inserted into the guide groove C3193a.

The decorative member C3190 has its center of gravity eccentric to one side (the side opposite the distribution member C3170 across the axis C192, the left side of FIG. 105) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C192). Therefore, in an unloaded state, the decorative member C3190 is in a position in which the arm portion C3193 is lifted upward (rotating counterclockwise around the axis C192 in rear view, see FIG. 105), and the distribution member C3170 is in a state in which it is disposed in the first position by the axis C3171a being pushed upward by the arm portion C3193 (see FIGS. 104 and 105).

On the other hand, when a ball is received in the receiving portion C172 of the sorting member C3170, the weight of the ball causes the center of gravity of the sorting member C3170 and the decorative member C3190 as a whole to be offset to the other side (the side where the sorting member C3170 is arranged with respect to the axis C192, the right side in Figure 107) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C192). In other words, when a ball is received in the receiving portion C172, the weight of the ball causes the sorting member C3170 to descend along the guide groove C3131c and to be positioned in the second position. Also, the decorative member C3190 has its arm portion C3193 pushed downward by the axis C3171a, and is rotated clockwise around the axis C192 in rear view (see Figure 107).

When a ball is bowled from the receiving portion C172 to the passage portion C144 in the second position, the decorative member C3190 is rotated counterclockwise around the axis C192 in rear view by utilizing the eccentricity of its center of gravity, and the arm portion C3193 is raised upward. As a result, the axis C3171a is pushed upward by the arm portion C3193, and the distribution member C3170 is positioned (returned) to the first position (see Figures 104 and 105).

The sorting operation of balls CB1 and CB2 by the sliding displacement of sorting member C3170 between the first position and the second position is the same as in the second embodiment described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, according to the lower frame C3086b in the fourth embodiment, when the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 are connected with an interval equal to or less than a predetermined amount (including the case where the distance between the two balls is 0), The ball CB1 can be distributed (guided) to the fourth path CRt4, and the ball CB2 can be distributed (guided) to the fifth path CRt5 by the distribution member C170, which is displaced to the second position by the weight of the ball CB1. On the other hand, if the balls CB1 and CB2 are connected with an interval exceeding a predetermined distance, both balls (the balls CB1 and the balls CB2) can be distributed (guided) to the fourth path CRt4. In this way, the guided path can be changed depending on the state of the series of balls CB1 and CB2 (whether or not the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball exceeds a predetermined amount), thereby improving interest. be able to.

Here, in a structure in which the sorting member C170 rotates around the axis C192, as in the second embodiment, in order to ensure the amount of displacement of the receiving portion C172 (allowing it to displace between the position facing the third passage CRt3 and the position facing the fourth passage CRt4), it is necessary to increase the length (distance) between the axis C192 and the receiving portion C172, which results in an increase in the size of the sorting member C170 in the width direction (the direction connecting the axis C192 and the receiving portion C172).

In contrast, in this embodiment, the sorting member C3170 is displaced by sliding in the vertical direction, so the amount of displacement of the receiving portion C172 is ensured (i.e., it can be displaced between a position facing the third passage CRt3 and a position facing the fourth passage CRt4), while the sorting member C3170 can be made smaller in the width direction because there is no need to provide a part connecting the center of rotation (axis C192) and the receiving portion C172. In other words, the width dimension of the sorting member C3170 can be the length dimension of the rolling surface of the rolling portion C173 (the dimension in the direction of the arrows L-R).

Next, referring to FIG. 108, the plate member C4120 in the fifth embodiment will be described. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figure 108(a) is a top view of the dish member C4120 in the fifth embodiment, Figure 108(b) is a cross-sectional view of the dish member C4120 taken along line CVIIIb-CVIIIb in Figure 108(a), and Figure 108(c) is a cross-sectional view of the dish member C4120 taken along line CVIIIc-CVIIIc in Figure 108(a).

The dish member C4120 includes an upper bottom part C4121 and a lower bottom part C4122 that form the bottom of the passage, and an upper side wall part C4123 and a lower side wall part C4124 that form the side walls of the passage.

The upper bottom surface portion C4121 extends along the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) as a substantially linear passageway (first passageway CRt4001) when viewed from above, and also extends in the direction approaching the lower side bottom surface portion C4122 (arrow LR direction). R direction).

The upper side wall portion C4123 defines the passage width of the upper bottom portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001). Note that the passage width is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (a dimension smaller than at least twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). This setting allows multiple balls to be guided only in series. However, the width of the passage may be a size that allows guiding a plurality of balls in parallel (a size larger than twice the size of the balls).

A notch C4123a is formed in the upper side wall portion C4123 at the downstream end of the upper bottom portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001). The ball is allowed to flow down from the passageway CRt4001) to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passageway CRt4002).

The lower bottom surface portion C4122 extends in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) when viewed from above, and is formed of straight line portions C4122a that are approximately straight at one end and the other end in the extension direction, and arc portion C4122b that is curved in an arc shape with a concave outflow surface C122a side between the pair of straight line portions C4122a when viewed from above. Note that the arc portion C4122b is shaped to protrude most toward the upstream side (arrow L direction) of the extension direction (arrow L-R direction) of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 at approximately the center in the front-rear direction.

The cross-sectional shape of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 in a plane including the extension direction (arrow F-B direction) and the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) is formed as a plane that slopes downward vertically (arrow D direction) toward the arc portion C4122b in the pair of straight line portions C4122a, and is formed approximately horizontally in the arc portion C4122b. In other words, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the arc portion C4122b is formed as a plane perpendicular to the vertical direction.

The lower side wall portion C4124 defines the ends of one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the ball is guided) of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) and the passage width of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002). The passage width is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball (at least a dimension smaller than twice the diameter of the ball, preferably a dimension smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the ball), and multiple balls can only be guided in series.

The straight line portion C4122a of the lower bottom portion C4122 is disposed substantially perpendicular to the upper bottom portion C4121 when viewed from above, and is connected to the downstream end (end in the direction of arrow R) of the upper bottom portion C4121 and the lower bottom surface. One end of the portion C4122 in the longitudinal direction (the end on the arrow B direction side, the upwardly inclined side of the straight portion C4122a) is disposed at a position adjacent to the other end.

At the position corresponding to the cutout portion C4123a in the upper side wall portion C4123, the lower side wall portion C4124 is not formed, and as described above, the balls can flow down from the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001) to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) via the cutout portion C4123a.

A notch C124a is formed in the lower side wall C4124 on the inner diameter side of the arc portion C4122b (the side toward the center of the arc in a top view, the side in the direction of arrow R) at approximately the center in the front-to-rear direction of the arc portion C4122b (the position where the curved shape protrudes most in the direction of arrow L), and balls can flow down from the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3, see Figure 81) through this notch C124a.

As described above, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is formed from a pair of straight portions C4122a and an arc portion C4122b, and the ball flows down from the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001) to the upwardly inclined side of the straight portion C4122a (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122). The ball that flows down can then be reciprocated between one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002), and then the ball can be caused to flow down from the cutout portion C124a to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3, see Figure 81).

As a result, when two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001) to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) with a specified distance between them, the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) can be used to make the trailing ball catch up with the leading ball, thereby reducing the gap between the leading and trailing balls (connecting the balls).

The arcuate portion C4122b of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 has a position corresponding to the cutout portion C124a (that is, approximately the center of the arcuate portion C4122b in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow F-B) (the most protruding portion in the direction of arrow L of the curved shape). An outflow surface C122a is recessed in the position).The outflow surface C122a is a part for causing the ball guided through the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second path CRt4002) to flow out to the bottom surface portion C142 (third path CRt3). It is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) (see FIG. 81).

Therefore, after the balls have reciprocated on the lower bottom surface portion C4122, their rolling speed has decreased, and the outflow surface C122a can be used to smoothly outflow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3). In other words, by utilizing the reciprocating motion on the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002), balls with a reduced gap between the leading ball and the trailing ball (balls in a connected state) can be made to outflow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining that connected state (see FIG. 81).

In addition, the outflow surface C122a is formed in such a way that, when viewed from above, the width of the concave surface (the dimension in the direction along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface portion C4122, the dimension in the direction of the arrow F-B) is larger on the side closer to the cutout portion C124a.

In addition, when the ball is in contact with the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (opposing side, arrow L direction side) of the cutout portion C124a in top view, the ball rolls (crosses) on the outflow surface C122a. That is, even when the ball rolling (reciprocating) on the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) rolls at the position furthest from the cutout portion C124a (the position where the lateral apex of the ball abuts on the lower side wall portion C4124), the outflow surface C122a is formed up to the range overlapping with the center of the ball in top view (the rolling line, which is the trajectory of the lower apex of the ball as it rolls on the lower bottom surface portion C4112, crosses the outflow surface C122a).

On the other hand, if the outflow surface C122a is recessed (formed) in the lower bottom part C4122, the ball that has flowed down to the lower bottom part C4122 (second passage CRt4002) will flow through the lower bottom part C4122 (second passage CRt4002). CRt4002) without reciprocating even once or before reciprocating a sufficient number of times, there is a possibility that it will flow out (flow down) to the bottom part C142 (third passage CRt3) due to the effect of the slope of the outflow surface C122a. . That is, without reducing the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball, there is a risk that both balls may flow (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passageway CRt3) while remaining separated from each other.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is curved in an arc shape, and a notch portion C124a is formed on the inner diameter side of the arc portion C4122b (the center side of the arc when viewed from above, the direction of arrow R). Therefore, a centrifugal force is applied to the ball rolling on the arc portion C4122b toward the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (opposing side) to the notch portion C124a, and the ball can be rolled (reciprocated) on the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) while being pressed against the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (opposing side) to the notch portion C124a.

This makes it possible to prevent the ball from flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface C142 (third passage CRt3, see FIG. 81) due to the inclination of the outflow surface C122a before the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently slow. In other words, until the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently slow, it is possible to make the ball easily overcome (cross) the outflow surface C122a, and to make the ball easily move back and forth sufficiently along the lower bottom surface C4122 (second passage CRt4002). As a result, it is possible to ensure that the trailing ball catches up with the leading ball and the gap between the leading ball and the trailing ball is reduced (the balls are linked together).

Next, the lower frame C5086b in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 109(a). Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 109(a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame C5086b in the sixth embodiment, and corresponds to the cross-section taken along the line XCIX-XCIX in FIG. 94. In addition, in FIG. 109(a), only the cross section of the back member C2130, the magnet C2300, and the magnetic part C5400 of the lower frame C5086b is illustrated.

The magnetic part C5400 is an elongated body made of metal, and a protrusion is provided to protrude vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the end on the opposite side (in the direction of arrow F) to the back surface member C2130. Therefore, the magnetic portion C5400 has a substantially L-shaped cross-section. Further, the protrusion of the magnetic part C5400 is arranged such that the end thereof on the back member C2130 side is spaced apart from the front of the back member C2130 by a distance larger than the radius of the sphere, and the cross-sectional shape of the bottom surface of the magnetic part C5400 is formed linearly in the width direction (arrow FB direction).

The magnetic part C5400 is capable of attracting the ball by utilizing the magnetic force exerted by the magnet C2300 disposed on the back surface of the back surface member C2130. Note that multiple magnets C2300 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic part C5400.

When the sorting member C2170 is placed in the second position, a ball flows down from the bottom surface C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the rolling portion C2173. The ball that rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion C2173 jumps from the downstream end of the rolling portion C2173 to the upstream end of the magnetic portion C5400 (see FIG. 102). That is, the ball is attracted to the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic portion C5400. The ball attracted to the magnetic portion C5400 is moved to the downstream end of the magnetic portion C5400 along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic portion C5400 by the momentum of the ball due to the jump (rolling) and the action of gravity due to the downward inclination of the magnetic portion C5400. This allows the ball that flows down along the magnetic portion C5400 to be guided to the fifth passage CRt2005 (see FIG. 97).

As described above, the protruding portion of the magnetic part C5400 is disposed at a position where the end on the back member C2130 side is separated from the front of the back member C2130 by a distance larger than the radius of the sphere, so that the protrusion extends along the magnetic part C5400. The ball flowing down and the back surface member C2130 are prevented from coming into contact with each other. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the frictional force from being applied to the ball, it is possible to increase the speed at which the ball flows down. In addition, since the ball is not supported in front of the back member C2130, it is possible to create an aspect in which the ball sways as it flows down, and there is a possibility that the ball will fall from the magnetic part C5400 (possibility that it will not reach the fifth passage CRt2005). can be made higher. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the behavior of the ball, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Next, the lower frame C6086b in the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 109(b). Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 109(b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame C6086b in the seventh embodiment, and corresponds to the cross-section taken along the line XCIX-XCIX in FIG. In addition, in FIG. 109(b), only the cross section of the back member C2130, the magnet C2300, and the magnetic part C6400 of the lower frame C6086b is illustrated.

The magnetic part C6400 in the seventh embodiment is different from the magnetic part C5400 in the sixth embodiment in that the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic part C6400 is an inclined surface facing the back member C2130 (that is, closer to the back member C2130 as it is upward in the vertical direction). The other configurations are the same as those of the magnetic part C5400 in the sixth embodiment, except that the magnetic part C5400 is formed as a magnetic part C5400 in the sixth embodiment.

The ball attracted to the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic portion C6400 is brought into contact with the back member C2130 due to the effect of the slope of the bottom surface and the magnetic force directly applied from the magnet portion C2300. Therefore, a frictional force can be applied to the ball, and the speed of the ball flowing down along the magnetic part C6400 can be slowed down. This makes it possible to lengthen the travel time of the ball and increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the ball can be sandwiched between the protrusion of the magnetic part C6400 and the back member C2130, preventing the ball from falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic part C6400.

Next, the center frame D86 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 110 to 122.

In the first embodiment, the center frame 86 is constructed from one part, but in the eighth embodiment, the center frame D86 is constructed from two members, an upper frame D86a and a lower frame D86b. Note that the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description is omitted.

Figure 110 is a front view of the game board D13 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in Figure 110, the center frame D86 is configured in a shape that can fit into the window portion 60a (see Figure 7) of the base plate 60, and is a member that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 by tapping screws or the like, and includes an upper frame D86a and a lower frame D86b.

The upper frame D86a is arranged along the inner edges of the upper side (upper side in FIG. 110) and left and right sides (left and right sides in FIG. 110) of the window portion 60a (see FIG. 7) of the base plate 60, and the lower frame D86b is arranged along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 110) of the window portion 60a of the base plate 60. The third pattern display device 81 is visible through the area surrounded by the upper frame D86a and the lower frame D86b.

Note that the upper frame D86a is a part of the center frame 86 in the first embodiment (a part disposed along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 110) of the window 60a of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 7). That is, the portion where the lower frame D86b is disposed) is omitted, and the other portions except for the omitted portion have the same structure as the center frame 86 in the first embodiment.

Next, the lower frame D86b will be explained. FIG. 111 is a front perspective view of the lower frame D86b, and FIG. 112 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame D86b. Note that in FIGS. 111 and 112, only a part of the base plate 60 is partially illustrated, and the tapping screws for fastening and fixing the lower frame D86b to the base plate 60 are omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 111 and 112, the lower frame D86b includes a receiving port DOPin formed as an opening capable of receiving a ball, a first passage DRt1 communicating with the receiving port DOPin, and a first passage. A second path DRt2 through which the ball guided through DRt1 flows down, and a ball guided through the second path DRt2 (a ball that reciprocated in the second path DRt2 along its longitudinal direction (arrow FB direction)) The ball guided through the third passage DRt3 (the ball that reciprocated along the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the third passage DRt3) flows down the third passage DRt3. A fourth passage DRt4, a fifth passage DRt5, and a sixth passage DRt6, which are sorted according to the position where they are flowed down, and a seventh passage DRt7, through which the balls guided through the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5 flow down. An eighth passage DRt8 through which the balls guided through the sixth passage DRt6 flow down, and an outflow port DOPout formed as an opening through which the balls guided through the eighth passage DRt8 flow out to the game area are formed ( (See FIGS. 119 to 121).

Note that the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8 are connected to the downstream end of the sixth passage DRt6 and the upstream end of the eighth passage DRt8, forming one passage. That is, the upstream part (first half) of the passage is formed by the sixth passage DRt6, and the downstream part (second half) is formed by the eighth passage DRt8.

In addition, an upper frame passage DRt0 (see FIG. 110) is formed in the upper frame D86a. The upper frame passage DRt0 is a passage that guides balls that flow in (enter) from the area on the left side of the play area when viewed from the front (left side of FIG. 110) (the area between the center frame D86 (upper frame D86a) and the rail 61), and the downstream end of the upper frame passage DRt0 is connected to the receiving port DOPin of the lower frame D86b.

That is, a ball that flows (enters) the upper frame passage DRt0 from the play area flows (enters) from the upper frame passage DRt0 through the receiving opening DOPin into the first passage DRt1 of the lower frame D86b.

The passage width of the third passage DRt3 is defined by opposing side walls (side wall portion D142 of intermediate member D140 and side wall portion D132 of back member D130) spaced a predetermined distance apart, and one of the side walls defining the passage width (side wall portion D132 of back member D130) is partially divided (side wall is not formed), and a flow-down port DOPfl through which the balls can flow down is opened at a position adjacent to the divided area in a top view.

The ball guided through the third passage DRt3 (the ball that reciprocated along the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the third passage DRt3) passes through the outlet DOPfl to the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage. The ball can flow down (enter the ball) into either DRt5 or the sixth passage DRt6.

The flow outlet DOPfl is formed as a generally rectangular space (opening) in a top view that extends in the direction (arrow B direction) perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3 and extends along the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3. Ru. Note that the flow outlet DOPfl is defined by the main body portion D131 and the connecting portion D133 of the back member D130.

In the downflow port DOPfl, the upstream ends (upstream openings) of the fourth passage DRt4, the sixth passage DRt6, and the fifth passage DRt5 are arranged in sequence along the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3. That is, the upstream end (upstream opening) of the sixth passage DRt6 is located in the longitudinal center of the downflow port DOPfl, and the upstream ends (upstream openings) of the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5 are located on one longitudinal side (arrow L direction side) and the other longitudinal side (arrow R direction side) of the downflow port DOPfl, respectively, with the upstream end of the sixth passage DRt6 in between.

Therefore, a ball that reciprocates along the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3 and flows down to an area including the center of the flow outlet DOPfl in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) flows (enters the ball) into the sixth passage DRt6. Balls that flow down to a region including one longitudinal side (the side in the direction of arrow L) or the other side (the side in the direction of arrow R) of the outflow port DOPfl flow (enter the ball) into the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5. Ru. That is, which of the fourth passage DRt4 to the sixth passage DRt6 the ball guided through the third passage DRt3 is distributed to is determined depending on the position (area) of the ball flowing down from the third passage DRt3.

Here, the ball guided through the sixth passage DRt6 flows down (flows into) the eighth passage DRt8, and the outlet DOPout, which is the exit of the eighth passage DRt8 (an opening that allows the ball to flow out to the gaming area), is It is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 110). Therefore, the balls distributed to the sixth path DRt6 are likely to win the first prize opening 64 (the probability of winning the first prize opening 64 is high).

On the other hand, when the ball is guided through the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5, it flows down (flows into) the seventh passage DRt7. In the seventh passage DRt7, a central outflow surface D151 is formed (placed) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the front side (arrow F direction side) to allow the ball guided through the seventh passage DRt7 to flow out into the play area. In addition, side outflow surfaces D152 are formed (placed) at two different positions in the width direction of the game board 13 (left and right direction in FIG. 110) from vertically above the first winning opening 64. In addition, undulations are formed on the seventh passage DRt7, with side outflow surfaces D152 formed at the bottom of the undulations and a central outflow surface D151 formed at the top of the undulations.

Therefore, a ball allocated to the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5 has a higher probability of flowing out from the side outlet surface D162 into the play area in the seventh passage DRt7 than from the central outlet surface D161 into the play area, and as a result, it is less likely to win the first winning hole 64 (it has a lower probability of winning the first winning hole 64 than a ball allocated to the sixth passage DRt6 described above).

In this way, the lower frame D86b in the present embodiment makes it easier for the balls reciprocating in the third path DRt3 along the longitudinal direction to win in the first prize opening 64 by distributing them to the sixth path DRt6. (In this embodiment, it is possible to almost certainly make the ball win in the first prize opening 64). Therefore, when the ball reciprocates along the longitudinal direction of the third path DRt3, it is distributed to the sixth path DRt6 in order to increase the probability that the ball will win in the first prize opening 64 (to ensure winning). It is possible to make the player expect that the game will be played, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the lower frame D86b in this embodiment, a pair of displacement members D180 are disposed at the upstream end (upstream opening) of the sixth passage DRt6 so as to be openable and closable (displaceable between a closed position and an open position). The pair of displacement members D180 are disposed such that the base ends are rotatably supported and the tip ends opposite the base ends are disposed on the upper side (the side indicated by the arrow U), and the tip ends are displaced (rotated) in a direction approaching or separating from each other around the base ends as a rotation axis, thereby displacing (rotating) between the closed position and the open position.

The pair of displacement members D180 are arranged at a predetermined distance in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the outflow port DOPfl, and balls that flow (enter) between the opposing pair of displacement members D180 flow (enter) into the sixth passage DRt6, and balls that do not flow (enter) between the opposing pair of displacement members D180 flow (enter) into the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5.

The distance between the tips of the pair of displacement members D180 is larger in the open position than in the closed position, and when the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) to the open position, the area in which the ball can flow (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 is enlarged and the area in which the ball can flow (enter) the fourth and fifth passages DRt4, DRt5 is reduced compared to when the pair of displacement members D180 are in the closed position. In other words, the proportion of the distance between the tips of the pair of displacement members D180 to the distance (dimension) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the outflow port DOPfl is larger in the open position than in the closed position. Therefore, when the pair of displacement members D180 are in the open position, it is easier for balls to flow (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 compared to when they are in the closed position.

In this case, as described below, when a ball flows (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) from the closed position to the open position using the weight (mass) of the ball. Specifically, a rolling member D170 is disposed in the sixth passage DRt6, and while a ball is rolling on the rolling member D170, the pair of displacement members D180 are disposed (displaced) in the open position, and while no ball is present on the rolling member D170, the pair of displacement members D180 are disposed (displaced) in the closed position.

In this way, in the lower frame D86b of this embodiment, when a ball flows (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) to the open position (making it easier for the ball to enter the sixth passage DRt6), thereby making it easier for balls following the ball that has entered the sixth passage DRt6 (for example, a ball reciprocating in the longitudinal direction of the third passage DRt3, a subsequent ball) to enter the sixth passage DRt6.

Therefore, when the first ball enters the sixth path DRt6, the second ball following the ball enters the sixth path DRt6 due to the displacement (rotation) of the pair of displacement members D180 to the open position. If the following second ball enters the sixth path DRt6, the following second ball enters the sixth path DRt6 (second ball (by displacing the displacement member D180 to the open position using its weight), the third ball that follows next (the third ball that follows the second ball) is likely to enter the sixth path DRt6. States can be formed and these aspects can be repeated thereafter. Therefore, the player can expect that a chain of balls entering the sixth path DRt6 will occur due to the ball entering the sixth path DRt6. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In this embodiment, when the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) to the closed position, the minimum opposing distance is set to a dimension slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (for example, 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere), and when displaced (rotated) to the open position, the opposing distance at the tip side is set to approximately three times the diameter of the sphere.

Next, the detailed configuration of the lower frame D86b will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 122 in addition to FIGS. 111 to 112.

FIG. 113 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame D86b, and FIG. 114 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame D86b. FIG. 115 is a top view of the lower frame D86b, FIG. 116 is a front view of the lower frame D86b, and FIG. 117 is a rear view of the lower frame D86b.

118(a) is a side view of the lower frame D86b as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIIIa in FIG. 116, and FIG. 118(b) is a side view of the lower frame D86b as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIIIb in FIG. 116.

119(a), FIG. 120(a), and FIG. 121(a) are partially enlarged sectional views of the lower frame D86b, and correspond to the cross section taken along the line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 115. 119(b), FIG. 120(b), and FIG. 121(b) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame D86b.

Note that in FIGS. 119(a) and 119(b), the state in which the rolling member D170 is placed at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position is shown in FIGS. 121(a) and 119(b). FIG. 121(b) shows a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed at the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed at the open position.

Furthermore, Figures 120(a) and 120(b) show the state during the displacement when the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position (or from the second position to the initial position (first position)) and the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) from the closed position to the open position (or from the open position to the closed position).

Further, in FIGS. 120(a) and 121(a), illustration of the ball rolling on the rolling member D170 is omitted, and in FIGS. 119(b), 120(b), and 121(b), A state in which the detour member D200 is removed is illustrated.

122(a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame D86b taken along the line CXXIIa-CXXIIa in FIG. 115, and FIG. 122(b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame D86b taken along the line CXXIIb-CXXIIb in FIG. 115. 122(c) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame D86b taken along the line CXXIIc-CXXIIc in FIG. 119.

As shown in Figures 111 to 122, the lower frame D86b comprises a front member D110, a dish member D120 disposed on one longitudinal side (arrow L direction side) of the front member D110, a back member D130 disposed opposite the back surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) of the front member D110 at a predetermined distance, an intermediate member D140 disposed opposite the back surface of the front member D110 and the front surface of the back member D130 at a predetermined distance (surface on the arrow F direction side), and an intermediate member D140 disposed opposite the back surface of the front member D110 and the front surface of the back member D130 at a predetermined distance. The support member D210 includes a first intermediate member D150 that is fixed to the rear member D130, a second intermediate member D160 that is fixed between the opposing intermediate member D140 and the rear member D130, a rolling member D170 and a displacement member D180 that are disposed between the opposing intermediate member D140 and the rear member D130, a transmission member D190 and a detour member D200 that are disposed on the rear side of the rear member D130, and a support member D210 that is displaceably disposed (rotatably supported) on the rear member D130, has one side (arrow F direction side) to which the displacement member D180 is fixed and the other side (arrow B side) to which the transmission member D190 can abut.

The rolling member D170 and the displacement member D180 are disposed between the opposing intermediate member D140 and the back member D130 in a displaceable (rotatable) manner, and the transmission member D190 is disposed on the back side of the back member D130 in a displaceable (rotatable) manner.

The lower frame D86b is configured as a single unit by fastening each component to the other components with tapping screws, and the rolling component D170, the displacement component D180, and the transmission component D190 are each displaceably disposed (rotatably supported) on the back component D130 (see FIG. 111).

In addition, the lower frame D86b is made of a light-transmitting resin material (i.e., transparent so that the rear side components and the ball can be seen through) except for the displacement member D180 and the transmission member D190, and the displacement member D180 and the transmission member D190 are made of a colored resin material. This allows the player to see the ball passing through the first passage DRt1 to the eighth passage DRt8, and also allows the player to see the opening and closing operation (opening and closing state) of the displacement member D180, which increases the fun of the game.

In this case, it is sufficient that the lower frame D86b is made of a light-transmitting resin material in the member located on the front side (arrow F direction side) of at least one of the displacement member D180 or the rolling member D170. Alternatively, only a part of the front side of at least one of the displacement member D180 or the rolling member D170 may be made of a light-transmitting resin material. If the displacement member D180 can be seen, the player can understand whether the ball is likely to flow down (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 based on its open/closed state. Even if the displacement member D180 is not visible, if the rolling member D170 can be seen, the player can understand the open/closed state of the displacement member D180 based on the rotation state of the rolling member D170 (the position that changes depending on the presence or absence of a rolling ball), which can increase the interest of the game.

Therefore, it is preferable to construct the rolling member D170 from a colored resin material, because this allows the player to easily visually recognize the rotation state of the rolling member D170 (the position that changes depending on the presence or absence of a rolling ball).

Note that the rolling member D170, the displacement member D180, and the transmission member D190 are made of a light-transmissive (transparent or colored) resin material, and the front surfaces thereof are painted or have a sticker attached. Also good.

On the other hand, the lower frame D86b may be configured so that the components located on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the displacement member D180 or rolling member D170 are made of a light-impermeable resin material (or are painted or have a sticker attached) so that the displacement member D180 or rolling member D170 is not visible to the player from the front side.

The front member D110 includes a plate-shaped front portion D111 that forms the front, a plate-shaped bottom portion D112 that stands upright from the back surface of the front portion D111, and a connecting portion D113 that is disposed on one longitudinal side (the side in the direction of the arrow L) of the front portion D111 and the bottom portion D112.

The front portion D111 has multiple through holes D111a drilled in the plate thickness direction along the outer edge of the lower side (arrow D direction side) and the lateral side (arrow L direction side) of the front portion D111. The lower frame D86b, in an assembled state (unitized state), is fitted into the window portion 60a from the front of the base plate 60, and is fixed (disposed) to the base plate 60 by fastening tapping screws inserted into the through holes D111a to the base plate 60.

In the front portion D111, an outlet DOPout is formed (drilled in the plate thickness direction) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 110). As described above, the outlet DOPout is an opening that serves as an exit when the ball guided through the eighth passage DRt8 flows out into the play area.

The bottom surface of the bottom surface portion D112 is disposed opposite the bottom surface of the first intervening member D150, and a portion (the most downstream portion) of the eighth passage DRt8 is formed between the bottom surface portion D112 and the first intervening member D150 (recess D153). Therefore, the structure can be simplified and production costs can be reduced, for example, compared to a case in which a through hole formed through the first intervening member D150 is used as part of the eighth passage DRt8.

The bottom surface portion D112 is formed continuously over the entire longitudinal area of the front surface portion D111, and the erected tip (arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface portion D112 abuts over the entire area against the erected tip (arrow F direction side) of the bottom surface portion D144 of the intermediate member D140. This prevents foreign objects such as wires from entering from the bottom side of the lower frame D86b.

In addition, in the bottom part D112, the vertical dimension of the part that partitions the eighth passage DRt8 from the front part D111 is larger than the vertical dimension of other parts of the bottom part D112, and the eighth part of the bottom part D112 The upright tip of the portion that defines the passage DRt8 is brought into contact with the front surface of the main body D141 of the intermediate member D140.

A plate member D120 is disposed on the upper surface side (the side in the direction of arrow U) of the connecting portion D113, and is fastened and fixed with a tapping screw.

The dish member D120 includes a receiving port DOPin, an upper bottom surface portion D121 and a lower bottom surface portion D122 that form the bottom surface of a passage that guides the ball received from the receiving port DOPin, and an upper side wall portion D123 that forms a side wall of the passage. and a lower side wall portion D124.

As described above, the reception port DOPin is an opening that receives the ball from the upper frame passage DRt0 of the upper frame D86a (see FIG. 110). Note that when the center frame D86 is attached (arranged) to the base plate 60, the back surface of the upper frame D86a is overlapped with the front surface of the front portion D111 and the connecting portion D113, and both are fastened and fixed by tapping screws. Thereby, the downstream end of the upper frame passage DRt0 and the receiving port DOPin are communicated with each other.

The upper bottom portion D121 extends in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and slopes downward in a direction away from the receiving port DOPin (direction of arrow B). It is formed by Note that the upper bottom surface portion D121 is located vertically lower (in the direction of arrow D) than the downstream end of the upper frame passage DRt0, and a vertical step is formed between it and the downstream end of the upper frame passage DRt0. . That is, the dish member D120 is configured to allow the ball to freely fall from the upper frame passage DRt0 to the upper bottom surface portion D121.

A groove D121a with a U-shaped cross section is recessed in the center of the upper bottom surface portion D121 in the width direction (arrow L-R direction) (see Figure 84). The groove D121a extends linearly in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). The groove width (dimension in the arrow L-R direction) of the groove D121a is set smaller than the diameter of the ball, and the groove depth (dimension in the arrow U-D direction) of the groove D121a is set to a depth such that the ball does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the groove D121a.

Thereby, the ball on the upper bottom surface portion D121 can be supported at two locations (a pair of ridgeline portions where the upper bottom surface portion D121 and the groove D121a intersect). Therefore, compared to the case where the groove D121a is not formed (that is, the case where the ball is supported at only one location), the contact area between the ball and the passage can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to buffer (receive) the impact of the ball falling from the upper frame passage DRt0 and increase the resistance when the ball rolls.

As described above, by dropping a ball from the upper frame passage DRt0 onto the upper bottom surface portion D121 and supporting the ball on the upper bottom surface portion D121 at two points, when two balls flow (drop) from the upper frame passage DRt0 into the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1) with a specified distance between them, the flow down of the leading ball is delayed in the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1), making it easier for the trailing ball to catch up with the leading ball. This makes it possible to reduce the distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball.

The upper side wall portion D123 is a wall portion that separates the downstream end (arrow B direction side) of the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1) from the passage width of the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1), and is formed as a plate-like body erected in the vertical direction (arrow F-B direction). The passage width is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball (a dimension at least smaller than twice the diameter of the ball, preferably a dimension smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the ball), and multiple balls can only be guided in series.

A notch D123a is formed in the upper side wall portion D123 at the downstream end of the upper bottom portion D121 (first passage DRt1). The ball is allowed to flow down from the passage DRt1) to the lower bottom surface D122 (second passage DRt2).

The lower bottom surface portion D122 extends in the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB) as a substantially linear passage when viewed from above, and also in the direction of extension (direction of arrow FB) and in the vertical direction (direction of arrow FB). The cross-sectional shape in a plane including the UD direction) is curved into an arc shape that is convex in the vertical direction downward (in the direction of arrow D) (see FIG. 121).

The lower bottom part D122 is located vertically lower (in the direction of arrow D) than the downstream end of the upper bottom part D121 (the part where the notch D123a is formed), and A vertical step is formed between the two. In other words, the dish member D120 is configured to allow the ball to fall freely from the upper bottom portion D121 to the lower bottom portion D122.

The lower side wall portion D124 defines the ends of one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the direction in which the ball is guided, the direction of the arrow F-B) of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) and the passage width of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2). The passage width is set to a dimension equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the ball (a dimension at least smaller than twice the diameter of the ball, and preferably smaller than a dimension 1.3 times the diameter of the ball), and multiple balls can only be guided in series.

When viewed from above, the lower bottom surface portion D122 is arranged parallel to the upper bottom surface portion D121, and is disposed in a position where the downstream end (end portion on the side in the direction of arrow B) of the upper bottom surface portion D121 is adjacent to one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (end portion on the side in the direction of arrow B).

The lower side wall portion D124 is not formed at the position corresponding to the notch portion D123a in the upper side wall portion D123, and as described above, water is supplied from the upper bottom portion D121 (first passage DRt1) through the notch portion D123a. The ball is allowed to flow down (fall) to the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2).

A notch D124a is formed in the lower side wall D124 at a position corresponding to the bottom (the lowest vertical position) of the arc-shaped curved lower bottom surface D122, and the balls can flow down from the lower bottom surface D122 (second passage DRt2) to the first intervening member D150 (third passage DRt3) through this notch D124a.

As described above, the lower bottom part D122 is curved in an arc shape, and has an upper bottom part D121 (first passage DRt1) on one upward slope side (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom part D122). ), the ball is reciprocated between one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom portion D122 (second passageway DRt2), and then the ball is removed from the notch. The ball can flow down from the portion D124a to the first intervening member D150 (third passage DRt3).

As a result, when two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion D121 (first passage DRt1) to the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) with a specified distance between them, the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) can be used to make the trailing ball catch up with the leading ball, thereby reducing the gap between the leading and trailing balls (connecting the balls).

An outflow surface D122a is recessed in the lower bottom surface portion D122 at a position corresponding to the notch portion D124a (that is, the lowest height position in the vertical direction). The outflow surface D122a is a part for allowing the ball guided through the lower bottom surface part D122 (second passage DRt2) to flow out to the first interposed member D150 (third passage DRt3), and It is formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward (the third passage DRt3).

Therefore, after the balls have reciprocated on the lower bottom surface portion D122, their rolling speed has decreased, and the outflow surface D122a can be used to smoothly outflow (flow down) into the first intermediate member D150 (third passage DRt3). In other words, by utilizing the reciprocating motion on the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2), balls with a reduced distance between the leading ball and the trailing ball (balls in a connected state) can be made to outflow (flow down) into the first intermediate member D150 (third passage DRt3) while maintaining that connected state.

Note that, when viewed from above, the width of the concave surface of the outflow surface D122a (dimension along the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface D122, dimension in the direction of arrow FB) is equal to the width of the notch D124a. The closer the side is, the larger the shape is (see FIG. 115).

In addition, when viewed from above, when a ball is in contact with the lower side wall portion D124 located on the opposite side (opposing side) of the cutout portion D124a, the ball rolls (crosses) on the outflow surface D122a. That is, even when the ball rolling (reciprocating) on the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) rolls at a position furthest from the cutout portion D124a (a position where the lateral apex of the ball is in contact with the lower side wall portion D124), the outflow surface D122a is formed up to a range that overlaps with the center of the ball in a top view (the rolling line, which is the trajectory of the lower apex of the ball as it rolls on the lower bottom surface portion D122, crosses the outflow surface D122a).

In the present embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion D122 has a cross-sectional shape in a plane perpendicular to its extension direction (arrow F-B direction) and parallel to the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) in the horizontal direction (arrow F-D direction). -B direction) is formed in a straight line shape parallel to the B direction. However, as in the case of the embodiment described above (see FIG. 84), the lower bottom surface portion D122 may be tilted downward in the direction away from the notch portion D124a (in the direction of arrow L).

The outflow surface D122a is formed at one end side (in this embodiment, the upper side) of the center of the lower bottom surface D122 in the longitudinal direction (the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating on the lower bottom surface D122, the arrow FB direction). It is disposed at a position biased towards (close to) the downstream end side of the bottom surface portion D121 (in the direction of arrow B) (see FIG. 121).

In this case, the height position in the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) of the lower bottom surface portion D122 is the same at one end side in the longitudinal direction (end side in the direction of arrow B) and the other end side (end side in the direction of arrow F), and the arc shape of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (a cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extension direction (arrow F-B direction) and the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction) of the lower bottom surface portion D122, which is an arc shape that is convex vertically downward (arrow D direction)) is made larger in curvature between the one end side in the longitudinal direction (arrow B direction) and the outflow surface D122a than in curvature between the other end side in the longitudinal direction (arrow F direction) and the outflow surface D122a. In other words, the radius between the one end side in the longitudinal direction (arrow B direction) and the outflow surface D122a is made smaller than the radius between the other end side in the longitudinal direction (arrow F direction) and the outflow surface D122a.

As a result, in the region between the other end in the longitudinal direction (arrow F direction side) and the outflow surface D122a, it is possible to make it easier for the trailing ball to catch up with the leading ball, and to make the collision gentle when catching up (i.e. (by suppressing the gap between the two balls from widening due to the impact when the trailing ball collides with the leading ball), it is possible to easily form a state in which the leading ball and the trailing ball are connected. As a result, both spheres can be easily flowed (flowed down) into the first interposed member D150 (third passageway DRt3) in a continuous state.

Note that when the dish member D120 is disposed in such a manner that the extending direction of the lower bottom surface portion D122 (second passage DRt2) is along the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB), the window portion 60a of the base plate 60 Since the window portion 60a is disposed within the window portion 60a, the space in the front and rear direction formed by the window portion 60a can be effectively utilized. Therefore, the entire length of the lower bottom portion D122 (second passage DRt2) can be ensured, making it easy to connect the balls.

The back member D130 includes a main body D131 formed in a plate shape, a side wall D132 formed in a plate shape that is located closer to the front side (the direction of arrow F) than the main body D131 and is arranged in a parallel posture to the main body D131, a connecting portion D133 that connects the main body D131 and the side wall D132, and a partition wall D134 that stands upright from the back of the main body D131.

The main body D131 is formed with a support portion D131a that supports the shaft D171 of the rolling member D170, a support hole D131b that supports the shaft D211 of the support member D210, an insertion hole D131c through which the body D192 of the transmission member D190 is inserted, openings D131d and D131e that allow a ball to pass through, and a protrusion D131f that can come into contact with the ball.

The pivot support D131a is formed as a bearing on the front surface (the surface in the direction of arrow F) of the main body portion D131, and the pivot support D141a is formed on the back surface of the intermediate member D140 at a position facing the pivot support D131a. In the rolling member D170, the ends of the shaft D171 protrude from one side surface and the other side surface in the width direction (front-back direction, arrow FB direction). The shaft D171 is disposed in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and both ends of the shaft D171 are supported by the shaft support D131a of the back member D130 and the shaft support D141a of the intermediate member D140, respectively. . Thereby, the rolling member D170 is rotatably disposed between the back surface member D130 and the intermediate member D140.

The shaft support hole D131b is formed as a hole that penetrates the main body portion D131 in the plate thickness direction (direction of the arrow FB), and a shaft support D141b is provided on the back surface of the intermediate member D140 at a position facing the shaft support hole D131b. It is formed. The shaft D211 of the shaft support member D210 is inserted into the shaft support hole D131b of the main body portion D131 and the shaft hole of the displacement member D180 in order in a posture along the front-rear direction (direction of arrow FB), and is inserted into one side of the displacement member D180. One end of the shaft D211 protruding from the side surface (on the intermediate member D140 side) is pivotally supported by the shaft support D141b of the intermediate member D140. Thereby, the displacement member D180 is rotatably disposed between the facing member D130 and the intermediate member D140.

The insertion hole D131c is formed to penetrate the main body portion D131 in the plate thickness direction (arrow FB direction), and is formed as an opening (hole) having a size that allows rotation of the body portion D192 of the transmission member D190. In the transmission member D190, the ends of a shaft D191 protrude from one end face and the other end face in the axial direction (front-back direction, arrow FB direction) of the body portion D192, and both ends of the shaft D191 are connected to the intermediate member. It is pivotally supported by the pivot support D141c of D140 and the pivot support D201 of the detour member D200, respectively. Thereby, the transmission member D190 is rotatably disposed between the intermediate member D140 and the detour member D200 and on the back side of the back member D130.

The openings D131d and D131e are formed as openings (holes) having a size that allows a ball to pass through the main body D131 in the thickness direction (direction of arrow FB). That is, it is formed as an opening for communicating the passages (fifth passage DRt5 and eighth passage DRt8) formed on the front side and the back side of the main body portion D131. Note that the openings D131d and D131e are set to a size that allows only one ball to pass through them (two balls cannot pass through them at the same time).

Here, the sixth passage DRt6 is formed on the front side of the rear member D130 (main body part D131) (facing the intermediate member D140), and the eighth passage DRt8 is formed on the upstream side (first half) on the rear side of the rear member D130 (main body part D131) (facing the detour member D200) and on the downstream side (second half) on the front side of the rear member D130 (main body part D131) (inside the intermediate member D140, facing the front member D110 and the first intervening member D150).

Therefore, the downstream end of the sixth passage DRt6 and the upstream end of the eighth passage DRt8 are connected by the opening D131d, and the upstream side (first half) and downstream side (second half) of the eighth passage DRt8 are connected by the opening D131e. That is, the ball flowing down (guided) the sixth passage DRt6 passes through the opening D131d, moves from the front side to the back side of the back member D130 (main body part D131), and flows into the eighth passage DRt8. Also, the ball flowing down (guided) the upstream side (first half) of the eighth passage DRt8 passes through the opening D131e, moves from the back side to the front side of the back member D130 (main body part D131), and flows into the downstream side (second half) of the eighth passage DRt8.

The protrusion D131f is a protrusion (elongated stripe) that protrudes from the front surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow F) of the main body D131 and extends linearly along the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow U-D). The protrusions are formed at multiple locations (protrusions) at predetermined intervals (equal intervals in this embodiment) along the rolling direction of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 (the longitudinal direction of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170). In the embodiment, they are arranged at five locations (see FIG. 122(c)). Note that the protrusion dimensions and cross-sectional shape of the protrusion D131f are the same along the extending direction (vertical direction).

When viewed from the front, the distance between the lower end (end on the arrow D direction side) of the protrusion D131f and the upper surface of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 arranged at the second position is smaller than the radius of the sphere. position (see Figure 121). Therefore, even when the rolling member D170 is placed in the second position, the ball and the protrusion D131f can come into contact with each other.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the upper end of the protrusion D131f (the end on the side in the direction of arrow U) has a spherical distance from the upper surface of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 disposed at the initial position (first position). (see FIG. 119). Therefore, even if the ball jumps upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the upper surface of the rolling member D170 (main body part D172) disposed at the second position, the ball and the protrusion D131f can come into contact with each other. Ru.

In this embodiment, the spacing between the plurality of protrusions D131f (the spacing in the direction of the arrow LR) is set to be substantially equal to the diameter of the sphere. Moreover, the plurality of protrusions D131f are arranged in the rolling direction of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 (the main body part of the rolling member D170 D172 (longitudinal direction) at different positions. That is, the protrusion D131f of the back member D130 and the protrusion D141g of the intermediate member D140 are arranged in a staggered manner along the rolling direction of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 (the longitudinal direction of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170). (See FIG. 122(c)). Thereby, the rolling of the ball in the sixth path DRt6 can be delayed.

That is, the protrusions D131f and D141g function as action means that act on the ball passing through the sixth passage DRt6, and by applying resistance to the ball, the speed of the ball can be lowered. Therefore, the time required for the ball to pass through the sixth passage DRt6 (rolling member D170) can be lengthened, and the time required for the weight of the ball to act on the rolling member D170 (that is, the displacement member D180 is at least in the closed position) can be lengthened. It is easier to maintain (for a longer time) a state in which the ball is more open than the ball, making it easier for the ball to enter the ball.

The protruding tip of the protrusion D131f is curved to have an arc-like cross section. However, the cross section of the protrusion D131f may also be substantially rectangular. The protrusion D131f may also have a linear shape extending in a direction inclined relative to the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D), or may have a shape that includes at least a portion of a curved shape extending to have an arc-like curve.

When the protrusion D131f is formed into a linear shape extending in a direction inclined relative to the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D), it is preferable to incline the upper side (in the direction of the arrow U) of the ball's rolling surface (the upper surface of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170) in a direction that is located upstream (in the direction of the arrow R) of the sixth passage DRt6. This is because, when a ball bounces up from the rolling surface collides with the protrusion D131f, a force component is applied to the ball in a direction that pushes the ball back in the opposite direction to the rolling direction (upstream), making it easier to delay the ball.

The side wall portion D132 is disposed at a height position such that its upper edge (in the direction of the arrow U) is higher than the upper surface of the second intervening member D160 (in the direction of the arrow U), and the side wall portion D132 is located at a height above the upper surface of the second intervening member D160 (in the direction of the arrow U). Together with the portion D142, the passage width of the third passage DRt3 is defined.

The partition wall D134 partitions the eighth passage DRt8 together with the main body portion D131 and the detour member D200. That is, the detour member D200 is disposed opposite to the main body portion D131, and the area between the opposing members and partitioned by the partition wall D134 is defined as the eighth passage DRt8. The area partitioned by the partition wall D134 is formed into a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the rear (viewed in the direction of arrow F), and has an opening D131d at one longitudinal end (direction of arrow L) and an opening D131d at the other longitudinal end (direction of arrow L). Openings D131e are respectively arranged on the arrow R direction side) and are inclined downward from one longitudinal end side to the other end side.

The intermediate member D140 has a main body D141 formed in a plate shape, and is located on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the main body D141 and is arranged in a parallel attitude to the main body D141, and is formed in a plate shape. A side wall portion D142, a connecting portion D143 connecting the main body portion D141 and the side wall portion D142, a bottom portion D144 erected from the front side of the main body portion D141, and a partition wall (a partition wall erected from the back side of the main body portion D141). A fourth passageway dividing wall D145L, a fifth passageway dividing wall D145R, a sixth passageway dividing wall D146, and an eighth passageway dividing wall D147).

The main body D141 is formed with a support portion D141a that supports the shaft D171 of the rolling member D170, a support portion D141b that supports the shaft D211 of the support member D210, a support portion D141c that supports the shaft D191 of the transmission member D190, openings D141d, D141e, and D141f that allow the ball to pass through, and a protrusion D141g that can come into contact with the ball.

The pivot supports D141a, D141b, and D141c are formed as bearings on the back surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) of the main body portion D141, and as described above, the pivot supports D131a of the back member D130, the pivot support hole D131b, and the detour member D200. Each is formed at a position facing the pivot support D201.

That is, the shaft D171 of the rolling member D170 is supported by the shaft support portion D131a of the back member D130 and the shaft support portion D141a of the intermediate member D140, the shaft D211 of the shaft support member D210 is supported by the shaft support hole D131b of the back member D130 and the shaft support portion D141b of the intermediate member D140, and the shaft D191 of the transmission member D190 is supported by the shaft support portion D141c of the intermediate member D140 and the shaft support portion D201 of the detour member D200. The shaft D171 of the rolling member D170, the shaft D211 of the shaft support member D210, and the transmission member D190 are all disposed with their axial directions aligned with the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrow F-B).

The openings D141d, D141e, and D141f are formed as openings (holes) having a size that allows a ball to pass through the main body D141 in the thickness direction (arrow FB direction).

The openings D141d and D141e are formed as outlets of the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5, respectively (openings that allow the balls to flow into the seventh passage DRt7), and are formed above the upper surface (the ball rolling surface) of the first intermediate member D150. That is, the balls guided through the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5 flow out (down) into the seventh passage DRt7 via the openings D141d and D141e.

The opening D141f is formed as a communication port (opening) that connects the downstream end of the eighth passage DRt8 located on the back side of the intermediate member D140 (main body portion D141) with the upstream end of the eighth passage DRt8 located on the front side of the intermediate member D140 (main body portion D141). In other words, the opening D141d is formed as part of the passage (eighth passage DRt8) that penetrates the main body portion D141 of the intermediate member D140.

The protrusion D141g is a protrusion (elongated stripe) that protrudes from the back surface (the surface in the direction of the arrow B) of the main body D141 and extends linearly along the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow U-D). The protrusions are formed at multiple locations (protrusions) at predetermined intervals (equal intervals in this embodiment) along the rolling direction of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 (the longitudinal direction of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170). In the embodiment, six locations) are provided (see FIG. 122(c)). Note that the protrusion dimensions and cross-sectional shape of the protrusion D141g are the same along the extending direction (vertical direction).

In this embodiment, the arrangement intervals of the plurality of protrusions D141g (intervals in the arrow LR direction) are set to approximately the same interval as the diameter of the sphere. Moreover, the plurality of protrusions D141g are arranged in the rolling direction of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 (the main body part of the rolling member D170 D172 (longitudinal direction) at different positions. That is, the protrusion D131f of the back member D130 and the protrusion D141g of the intermediate member D140 are arranged in a staggered manner along the rolling direction of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 (the longitudinal direction of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170). (See FIG. 122(c)). Thereby, the rolling of the ball in the sixth path DRt6 can be delayed.

That is, the protrusions D131f and D141g function as action means that act on the ball passing through the sixth passage DRt6, and by applying resistance to the ball, the speed of the ball can be lowered. Therefore, the time required for the ball to pass through the sixth passage DRt6 (rolling member D170) can be lengthened, and the time required for the weight of the ball to act on the rolling member D170 (that is, the displacement member D180 is at least in the closed position) can be lengthened. It is easier to maintain (for a longer time) a state in which the ball is more open and the ball is more likely to enter the ball.

In this embodiment, the facing distance (distance in the direction of arrows F-B) between the front of the main body D131 of the back member D130 and the back of the main body D141 of the intermediate member D140 is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of a sphere, and the facing distance (distance in the direction of arrows F-B) between an imaginary surface (flat surface) connecting the tips of multiple protrusions D131f and an imaginary surface (flat surface) connecting the tips of multiple protrusions D141g is set to a dimension approximately the same as or slightly smaller than the diameter of the sphere. However, the facing distance between the two imaginary surfaces may be set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere.

The protruding tip of the protrusion D141g is curved to have an arcuate cross section. However, the cross-sectional shape of the protrusion D141g may be approximately rectangular. Further, the protrusion D141g may have a linear shape extending in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD), or may have a curved shape extending in an arc shape. The shape may be included in the part.

When the protrusion D141g is formed into a linear shape extending in a direction inclined relative to the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D), it is preferable to incline the upper side (in the direction of the arrow U) of the ball's rolling surface (the upper surface of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170) in a direction that is located upstream (in the direction of the arrow R) of the sixth passage DRt6. This is because, when a ball bounces up from the rolling surface and collides with the protrusion D141g, a force component is applied to the ball in a direction that pushes the ball back in the opposite direction to the rolling direction (upstream), making it easier to delay the ball.

The side wall portion D142 is disposed at a height such that its upper edge (in the direction of the arrow U) is higher than the upper surface of the second intervening member D160 (in the direction of the arrow U), and as described above, Together with the side wall portion D132 of the back member D130, the passage width of the third passage DRt3 is defined.

The connecting portion D143 connects the lower edge (arrow D direction side) of the side wall portion D142 to the upper edge (arrow U direction side) of the main body portion D141 continuously over the entire longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), and the second intermediate member D160 is disposed on the upper surface side (arrow U direction side) of the connecting portion D143.

The connecting portion D143 faces the fourth passage dividing wall D145L and the fifth passage dividing wall D145R of the intermediate member D140 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction (direction of the arrow UD), and the fourth passage DRt4 is formed between the facing portions. and a fifth passage DRt5 are formed, respectively. That is, the connecting portion D143 forms the upper surface (upper inner surface) of the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5.

The bottom part D144 is formed continuously along the edge of the main body part D141 in the area excluding the opening D141f, and the upright tip (the side in the direction of arrow F) of the bottom part D144 is connected to the bottom part D112 in the front member D110. is brought into contact with the erected tip (in the direction of arrow B). That is, the bottom surface portion D144 is formed by being divided into a region where the opening D141f is opened and a region near the region.

In the region where the bottom portion D144 is divided (the region including the opening D141f), as described above, the upright tip of the portion of the bottom portion D112 of the front member D110 that partitions the eighth passage DRt8 is located below the opening D141f. The main body portion D141 is brought into contact with the front surface of the main body portion D141 on the left and right sides (the side in the direction of arrow L and the side in the direction of arrow R).

The fourth passage partition wall D145L, together with the main body D141 and the main body D131 and connecting portion D133 of the back member D130, partitions the fourth passage DRt4, and forms a portion (rolling portion) whose upper surface is the rolling surface of the ball, and a portion (vertical wall portion) whose inner wall surface receives the ball rolling on the rolling portion (rolling surface) and determines the end point of the ball's rolling.

That is, in the fourth passage partitioning wall D145L, a rolling portion extends in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and one longitudinal end side (arrow R direction side) of the rolling portion is located at the flow port DOPfl when viewed from above. (a position where the ball that has entered (flowed down) the ball can be received) and is tilted downward toward the other end in the longitudinal direction (in the direction of arrow L); The other end in the longitudinal direction is extended to a position where it overlaps the lower edge of the opening D141d, and the extended end (the other end in the longitudinal direction) is connected to a vertical wall portion extending in the up-down direction (arrow UD direction).

Note that the fourth passage dividing wall D145L has a part (region overlapping with the opening D141d) on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (the side in the direction of arrow L) that is inclined downward toward the opening D141d, so that the fourth passage dividing wall D145L (rolling direction side) The ball that has reached the other end in the longitudinal direction of the moving surface is allowed to roll toward the opening D141d.

Therefore, the ball that enters the fourth passageway DRt4 from the outlet DOPfl is received (received) by one end in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side) of the fourth passageway dividing wall D145L, and the ball enters the fourth passageway dividing wall D145L. It is rolled toward the other end in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction side). The ball that has reached the other end in the longitudinal direction abuts (receives) the vertical wall connected to the other end in the longitudinal direction, and after the rolling is regulated, it passes through the opening D141d to the seventh passage DRt7. 1 interposed member D150).

The fifth passage partition wall D145R, together with the main body D141 and the main body D131 and connecting portion D133 of the back member D130, partitions the fifth passage DRt5, and forms a portion (rolling portion) whose upper surface is the rolling surface of the ball, and a portion (vertical wall portion) whose inner wall surface receives the ball rolling on the rolling portion (rolling surface) and determines the end point of the ball's rolling.

The fifth passage partition wall D145R is formed symmetrically with respect to the fourth passage partition wall D145L with the displacement member D180 at the center when viewed from the front, and its configuration and function are substantially the same as those of the fourth passage partition wall D145L described above, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The sixth passage partition wall D146, together with the main body D141, the fourth passage partition wall D145L, the main body D131 of the back member D130, and the rolling member D170, partitions the sixth passage DRt6, and forms a part (rolling part) whose upper surface is the rolling surface of the ball, and a part (vertical wall part) whose inner wall surface receives the ball rolling on the rolling part (rolling surface) and determines the end point of the ball's rolling.

That is, the sixth passage dividing wall D146 is arranged in parallel with one end of the rolling member D170 in the longitudinal direction (on the arrow L direction side, on the extension line of the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the rolling member D170), and prevents the rolling of the ball. A rolling part formed to be able to receive a ball rolled on member D170, and a rolling part connected to the end of the rolling surface (opposite side to rolling member D170) and extending in the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD). A vertical wall portion is formed.

The sixth passage partition wall D146 has an upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling portion that is inclined downward toward the opening D141f, allowing the ball received from the rolling member D170 to roll toward the opening D141f.

Therefore, the ball that enters the sixth passage DRt6 from the outlet DOPfl and rolls on the rolling member D170 is received by the rolling part (rolling surface) of the sixth passage dividing wall D146, and After coming into contact with (receiving) the vertical wall portion connected to the end portion and restricting rolling, it flows out (flows down) to the eighth passage DRt8 via the opening D141f.

The eighth passage dividing wall D147 is a part that divides a part of the eighth passage DRt8 (the part formed between the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140), and has a cylindrical shape with a substantially rectangular (frame-like) cross section. The opening D141f communicates with the opening D131e of the back member D130. That is, the balls flowing out from the opening D131e of the back member D130 flow into the passage (space) defined by the eighth passage partition wall D147, flow down (roll) through the passage (space), and then flow from the opening D141f. It flows out and flows into the remaining part of the eighth passage DRt8 (the part formed between the front member D110 and the first intervening member D150).

The first intervening member D150 is a member that forms the rolling surface of the balls in the seventh passage DRt7, and is interposed between the opposing front member D110 and intermediate member D140. That is, the seventh passage DRt7 is formed by the space partitioned between the front member D110, the intermediate member D140, and the first intervening member D150. The upper surface (rolling surface) of the first intervening member D150 is curved in a circular arc that is convex downward (in the direction of arrow D) when viewed from the front, and the balls that flow down from the fourth passage DRt4 (opening D141d) or the fifth passage DRt5 (opening D141e) can reciprocate along the curve.

As described above, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first intervening member D150 is provided with a front side (arrow) in order to cause the ball guided through the first intervening member D150 (seventh passage DRt7) to flow out into the game area. A concave surface (a central outflow surface D151 and a side outflow surface D152) is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the F direction side. Further, an undulation is formed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the seventh passage DRt7, and a side outflow surface D152 is arranged at the bottom of the undulation, while a central outflow surface D151 is arranged at the top of the undulation.

Note that the upper edge (edge in the direction of arrow U) of the front part D111 of the front member D110 is the upper surface (rolling edge) of the first interposed member D150, except for the area where the central outflow surface D151 and the side outflow surface D152 are formed. (moving surface) upwards (in the direction of arrow U). That is, the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first intervening member D150 flows out (flows down) into the game area only from the central outflow surface D151 or the side outflow surface D152.

A recess D153 is formed in the bottom surface of the first intermediate member D150, and as described above, a portion of the eighth passage DRt8 is formed between the recess D153 and the bottom surface portion D112 of the front member D110.

The second intervening member D160 is a member that forms a rolling surface of the ball in the third passage DRt3, and is interposed between the facing member D130 and the intermediate member D140. That is, the third passage DRt3 is formed by the space defined by the back member D130, the intermediate member D140, and the second intervening member D160. The upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intervening member D160 is curved in an arc shape convex downward (in the direction of arrow D) when viewed from the front, so that the ball flowing down from the second passage DRt2 can be It is possible to reciprocate along the curve.

In the present embodiment, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intervening member D160 is located at a position corresponding to the center in the longitudinal direction (direction of arrows LR) of the outlet DOPfl (the opposing space of the pair of displacement members D180). is the lowest, and the height position increases toward one end or the other end (in the direction of arrow L or direction of arrow R) in the longitudinal direction of the second intervening member D160 (third passageway DRt3). Ru.

That is, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intermediate member D160 is formed with an upward inclination from a position corresponding to the opposing space of the pair of displacement members D180 toward one or the other end in the longitudinal direction (the direction of arrow L or the direction of arrow R). Therefore, the ball can reciprocate along the longitudinal direction (the direction of arrows L-R) of the third passage DRt3.

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the second intervening member D160 has a surface facing toward the back side (arrow B direction side) in order to cause the balls to flow out from the second intervening member D160 (third passage DRt3) to the outlet DOPfl. Concave surfaces (a central outflow surface D161 and a side outflow surface D162) that are inclined downward are formed (concavely provided).

The central outflow surface D161 is disposed (formed) at a position corresponding to the center (opposing space of a pair of displacement members D180) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the outflow port DOPfl. On the other hand, the lateral outflow surface D162 is disposed (formed) at a position corresponding to the opposing space of the displacement member D180 (closed position) toward one or the other end of the second intervening member D160 (third passage DRt3) in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction or arrow R direction) when the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position, and is disposed (formed) at a position corresponding to the opposing space of the displacement member D180 (closer to the center of the opposing space than the tip of the displacement member D180) when the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position.

Therefore, when the displacement member D180 is positioned in the closed position, a ball flowing down from the central outflow surface D161 to the downflow port DOPfl can enter the space between the pair of opposing displacement members D180 (i.e., the sixth passage DRt6), and a ball flowing down from the side outflow surface D162 to the downflow port DOPfl can enter the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5.

On the other hand, when the displacement member D180 is positioned in the open position, both the ball flowing down from the central outflow surface D161 to the downflow port DOPfl and the ball flowing down from the side outflow surface D162 to the downflow port DOPfl can enter between the pair of opposing displacement members D180 (i.e., the sixth passage DRt6).

In this embodiment, the longitudinal dimension (arrow L-R direction) of the flow-down port DOPfl is set to a dimension that allows the ball to flow down (enter) the fourth passage DRt4 and the fifth passage DRt5 when the displacement member D180 is placed in the open position.

That is, between the tip of the displacement member D180 disposed in the open position and the connecting portion D133 of the back member D130, there is a gap (interval) larger than the diameter of the sphere in the longitudinal direction of the flow outlet DOPfl (arrow It is secured (formed) in the LR direction). Thereby, even when the displacement member D180 is placed in the open position, the ball can flow down (enter) not only into the sixth path DRt6 but also into the fourth path DRt4 or the fifth path DRt5. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

However, the longitudinal dimension (in the direction of the arrows L-R) of the outflow port DOPfl may be set to a dimension that prevents the ball from flowing down (entering) at least one of the fourth passage DRt4 or the fifth passage DRt5 when the displacement member D180 is placed in the open position.

In other words, the gap (distance) between the tip of the displacement member D180 placed in the open position and the connecting portion D133 of the back member D130 may be smaller than the diameter of the ball when viewed from above (a dimension through which the ball cannot pass). This allows the ball to flow (enter) only into the sixth passage DRt6 when the displacement member D180 is placed in the open position. This can increase the interest of the game.

When viewed from above, the central outflow surface D161 has a concave extension length (dimension in a direction perpendicular to the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating through the third passage DRt3 (arrow F-B direction)) that is greater than the extension length of the lateral outflow surface D162 (concave). Also, when viewed from above, the central outflow surface D161 has a concave width (dimension in a direction parallel to the rolling direction of the ball reciprocating through the third passage DRt3 (arrow L-R direction)) that is greater than the width of the lateral outflow surface D162 (concave).

Therefore, even if the number of central outflow surfaces D161 (one location) is less than the number of lateral outflow surfaces D162 (two locations), the probability that the ball reciprocating through the third passage DRt3 will flow down (enter) from the central outflow surface D161 to the outflow port DOPfl (sixth passage DRt6) can be ensured.

The extension length and width of the concave surface may be set to be the same for the central outflow surface D161 and the side outflow surface D162. Also, contrary to this embodiment, the extension length of the central outflow surface D161 (concave surface) may be set to be shorter than the extension length of the side outflow surface D162 (concave surface). In these cases, when the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position, it becomes difficult for the ball reciprocating in the third passage DRt3 to flow down (enter) the downflow port DOPfl (sixth passage DRt6), and the advantage of placing the displacement member D180 in the open position can be relatively pronounced.

In addition, the formation of at least one or both of the central outflow surface D161 and the side outflow surface D162 (recesses in the upper surface of the second intervening member D160) may be omitted. The position at which the ball reciprocating in the third passage DRt3 flows down to the outflow port DOPfl is made uniform along the longitudinal direction of the outflow port DOPfl (the direction of the arrows L-R), thereby increasing the randomness of which passage the ball will flow down (enter) among the fourth passage DRt4, the fifth passage DRt5, and the sixth passage DRt6.

The rolling member D170 includes an axis D171, a long plate-shaped main body D172 with the axis D171 disposed at one end in the longitudinal direction, a transmission part D173 disposed at the other end in the longitudinal direction of the main body D172 (the side opposite to the side where the axis D171 is disposed), and a weight part D174 disposed on the opposite side of the transmission part D173 (main body D172) across the axis D171, and is disposed between the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140 so as to be rotatable about the axis D171.

As described above, the shaft D171 is disposed in a position that is aligned along the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B). Therefore, when the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) about the shaft D171, the main body D172 is displaced (raised and lowered) in the up-down direction (the direction of the arrows U-D).

The main body D172 has an upper surface that forms a rolling surface for the balls in the sixth passage DRt6, and one end in the longitudinal direction (the side where the shaft D171 is disposed, the side in the direction of arrow L) is connected to the intermediate member D140. It is arranged in parallel with the rolling part (the upper surface is the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146, and on the other end side in the longitudinal direction (opposite side to the side where the shaft D171 is arranged, side in the direction of arrow R) is disposed at a position overlapping with the displacement member D180 when viewed from above (a position where a ball that enters (flows down) between the pair of facing displacement members D180 can be received).

Whether the main body D172 is in any state (posture) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the upper surface of one end side of its longitudinal direction (the side where the axis D171 is arranged, the side in the direction of the arrow L) is positioned at a height position that is approximately the same as or slightly higher (the side in the direction of the arrow U) than the upper surface of the rolling portion (the portion whose upper surface is the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140.

The shaft D171 is embedded inside the main body D172, and the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is formed to a position beyond the shaft D171. That is, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body portion D172 passes above the axis D171 (in the direction of arrow U) and then rolls (inflows) into the rolling portion of the sixth passage dividing wall D146 of the intermediate member D140. be done.

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is formed as a flat surface on the transmission part D173 side, with the boundary being a position above the axis D171 (the side in the direction of the arrow U), and is formed as a curved surface centered on the axis D171 on the weight part D174 side. That is, the shape of the upper surface of the main body D172 cut by a plane perpendicular to the axis D171 is a straight line on the transmission part D173 side, and an arc shape concentric with the axis D171 on the weight part D174 side (see FIG. 119).

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is formed as a flat surface on the side closer to the transmission part D173 than the shaft D171, so that the ball rolling in that area can be prevented from bouncing upward (in the direction of the arrow U). Therefore, the main body D172 can be prevented from being displaced upward by the action of the weight part D174 as the ball bounces upward.

The upper surface of the main body portion D172 does not need to be a straight line in cross section; it is sufficient if no steps are formed, and it may be formed as a smooth surface that continues smoothly along the rolling direction of the ball (a cross-sectional shape in which curves or curves and straight lines are smoothly connected, for example, a sine wave (sine curve) shape).

Here, a configuration is also conceivable in which the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is made to roll (flow) into the rolling portion (the portion whose upper surface is the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140 before reaching the axis D171. However, in such a configuration, the ball is thrown from the upper surface of the main body D172 in a state in which the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 is displaced downward (in the direction of arrow D) by the action of the weight of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 (the state before the rolling member D170 (main body D172) returns to the initial position (first position)). Therefore, the rolling member D170 is affected by the inertial force accompanying the ball being thrown (the effect of the weight of the ball being momentarily no longer acting) and flutters. If the rolling member D170 flutters, the opening and closing state of the displacement member D180 becomes unstable, leading to a decrease in the interest of the game.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the ball rolling on the top surface of the main body part D172 rolls beyond a position above the axis D171 (in the direction of the arrow U), so the effect of the weight of the ball rolling on the top surface of the main body part D172 is suppressed, and the ball can be thrown from the top surface of the main body part D172 with the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170 returned to its initial position (first position). Therefore, even if the rolling member D170 is affected by the inertial force associated with the ball being thrown (the effect of the weight of the ball being momentarily no longer acting), fluttering can be suppressed. As a result, the open/closed state of the displacement member D180 is stabilized, improving the enjoyment of the game.

In this embodiment, as described above, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is formed as a curved surface with the weight D174 side centered on the axis D171, with the boundary being a position above the axis D171 (arrow U direction). Therefore, after the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 passes above the axis D171 (arrow U direction), the weight of the ball does not act on the upper surface of the main body D172. That is, in this embodiment, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is an area on the transmission part D173 side from the position above the axis D171 (arrow U direction), and the area on the weight D174 side from the position above the axis D171 does not function as a rolling surface.

The transmission part D173 is a part for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 to the transmission member D190, and extends from the other longitudinal end side of the main body part D172 toward the opposite side to the shaft D171 (the arrow R direction side). The extended tip side (arrow R direction side) of the transmission part D173 is disposed above (arrow U direction side) the transmitted part D193 of the transmission member D190 (disposed in a position overlapping in a top view).

Therefore, when the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) around the axis D171 by the weight of the ball rolling on its upper surface, and the transmission portion D173 is displaced (descended) downward (in the direction of arrow D), the transmission portion D173 The transmitted portion D193 of the transmitting member D190 is displaced (pressed down) downward, and thereby the transmitting member D190 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D191 (see FIGS. 119 to 121).

The weight portion D174 is a portion for eccentrically centering the center of gravity of the rolling member D170, and extends from one longitudinal end of the main body D172 toward the side opposite to the extending direction of the main body D172 (in the direction of arrow L). At the same time, a metal (brass in this embodiment) weight is buried inside.

In an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not acting on the rolling member D170 (main body D172) (a state in which the ball is not rolling on the main body D172), the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 as a whole is positioned (eccentric) toward the weight portion D174 rather than the axis D171. As a result, by utilizing the weight of the weight portion D174 (eccentricity of the center of gravity from the axis D171), the rolling member D170 is able to maintain its position in the initial position (first position) in an unloaded state, and after being displaced (rotated) from the initial position, it is able to return to the initial position by its own weight.

That is, in the rolling member D170, in an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not applied to the main body D172), the main body D172 and the transmission part D173 are displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U) (as viewed from the front). , it is rotated counterclockwise around the axis D171), is placed at the initial position (first position), and is maintained at the initial position (first position). This eliminates the need for an actuator for driving the rolling member D170 and a sensor for controlling the actuator, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

On the other hand, when the ball rolls on the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, due to the weight of the ball, the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 as a whole moves toward the main body D172 (with the axis D171 in between, the weight part D174 (opposite side)) (eccentric). As a result, the rolling member D170, the main body portion D172 and the transmission portion D173 are displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of arrow D) (rotated clockwise around the axis D171 when viewed from the front), and are brought to the second position. Placed.

The first position (initial position) of the rolling member D170 is determined by the end face of one longitudinal end side (arrow L direction side) of the main body part D172 abutting against the sixth passage partition wall D146 (end face opposite the vertical wall part of the rolling part) of the intermediate member D140. That is, by abutting the main body part D172 against the sixth passage partition wall D146, the upward displacement (counterclockwise rotation as viewed from the front about the axis D171) of the main body part D172 and the transmission part D173 is restricted, and the rolling member D170 is disposed in the first position (initial position) (see FIG. 119).

On the other hand, the second position of the rolling member D170 is determined by the upper surface of the weight portion D174 abutting against the sixth passage partition wall D146 (the lower surface of the rolling portion) of the intermediate member D140. That is, by abutting the weight portion D174 against the sixth passage partition wall D146, the downward displacement (clockwise rotation as viewed from the front about the axis D171) of the main body portion D172 and the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170 is restricted, and the rolling member D170 is positioned in the second position (see FIG. 121).

When the rolling member D170 is placed in the first position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is inclined downward from the other longitudinal end side to the one longitudinal end side, and the rolling member D170 is placed in the second position. Even in this state, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 is tilted downward from the other end in the longitudinal direction toward the one end in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, the ball on the rolling member D170 (main body portion D172) can be reliably rolled toward the opening D141f (eighth passage DRt8).

In this way, the rolling member D170 rolls the ball by utilizing the downward inclination of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172, where the rolling member D170 is rotatably supported around the axis D171, and the angle of downward inclination of the upper surface of the main body D172 relative to the horizontal plane when the ball is rolling (when the weight of the ball is being received) is smaller than the angle of downward inclination when the ball is not rolling (when the weight of the ball is not being received and no load is being applied).

This makes it possible to prevent momentum from being imparted to the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body part D172. This makes it possible to increase (lengthen) the time it takes for the ball to pass over the upper surface of the main body part D172. As a result, the time during which the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling member D170 (main body part D172) is lengthened, making it easier (longer) to maintain (lengthen) the state in which the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position (a state in which the opposing distance between at least one pair of displacement members D180 is wider than the opposing distance when disposed in the closed position).

In this embodiment, the rolling member D170 is formed so that when the weight of one ball is applied to the center of the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the main body D172, the weight of the weight portion D174 side and the weight of the main body D172 side are balanced around the axis D171 (the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 as a whole is located on a vertical line passing through the axis D171).

Therefore, when only one ball rolls on the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, and that ball is located on the transmission part D173 side (opposite the axis D171) rather than the center of the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the main body D172, the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D170 is located (eccentric) closer to the main body D172 than the axis D171, and due to the eccentricity of the center of gravity, the main body D172 and the transmission part D173 are displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of arrow D) (when viewed from the front, they rotate clockwise around the axis D171).

On the other hand, in a state where the ball is located on the axis D171 side (opposite side to the transmission section D173) with respect to the center of the main body D172 in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction), the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 as a whole is located on the axis D171. The body portion D172 and the transmission portion D173 are displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U) due to the eccentricity of the center of gravity (centered on the axis D171 in front view). (rotated counterclockwise).

When two or more balls roll on the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 (when the weight of two or more balls is applied to the main body D172), the rolling position of each ball (main body Regardless of the position of the rolling member D172 in the longitudinal direction, the center of gravity of the rolling member D170 is located (eccentric) closer to the main body D172 than the axis D171, and due to the eccentricity of the center of gravity, the center of gravity of the rolling member D172 and the transmission section D173 are It is displaced (descended) downward (in the direction of arrow D) (rotated clockwise around axis D171 when viewed from the front).

In this way, by providing a balancing position in the middle of the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the rolling surface (main body part D172) of the rolling member D170 (in the longitudinal direction center in this embodiment), the balancing position can be adjusted. After the ball has passed, the rolling member D170 can be gradually displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position. As a result, the displacement member D180 can be gradually displaced (rotated) from the open position to the closed position.

When the weight of one ball acts, the position where the weight of the weight portion D174 side and the weight of the main body portion D172 side are balanced around the axis D171 may be on the axis D171 side of the center of the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the main body portion D172, or may be on the transmission portion D173 side of the center of the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction) of the main body portion D172.

The displacement member D180 is a member for guiding the ball that has flowed down (entered) from the third passage DRt3 into the downflow port DOPfl toward the sixth passage DRt6, and as described above, is supported by the pivot support member D210 and is displaced (rotated) between the closed position and the open position.

The shaft supporting member D210 includes a shaft D211 fixed to the base end side of the displacement member D180, an overhanging portion D212 that overhangs in a direction (radially outward) perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft D211, and the overhanging portion. A connecting pin D213 is provided that projects from D212 in a posture parallel to the axis D211 (a posture along the arrow FB direction) and is connected to the transmission member D190.

As described above, in the shaft support member D210, the shaft D211 is pivotally supported by the shaft support D141b of the intermediate member D140 (main body portion D141) and the shaft support hole D131b of the back member D130 (main body portion D131). The projecting portion D212 is disposed on the back side of the back member D130 (main body portion D131), and the connecting pin D213 projects toward the back side (in the direction of arrow B) in a posture parallel to the axis D211.

The shaft D211 of the shaft support member D210 is fixed to the displacement member D180. The connecting pin D213 is positioned differently in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction (radial direction) relative to the shaft D211 (positioned at an eccentric position relative to the shaft D211). Therefore, when the connecting pin D213 is displaced in accordance with the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D190, the displacement of the connecting pin D213 is converted into the rotation of the shaft D211, and the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) together with the shaft D211.

Note that the connecting pin D213 is disposed outside the axis D211 (on the opposite side to the space where the pair of displacement members D180 face each other). Therefore, by displacing (pushing down) the connecting pin D213 downward (in the direction of arrow D), the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) toward the open position, and the connecting pin D213 is displaced upward (in the direction of arrow U). By being pushed up (pushed up), the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) toward the closed position.

The closed position and the open position of the displacement member D180 are defined by the proximal outer surface of the displacement member D180 coming into contact with the side surfaces of the fourth passageway dividing wall D145L and the fifth passageway dividing wall D145R. That is, the displacement member D180 is moved in a direction in which the pair of displacement members D180 are brought closer to each other (opposing Displacement in the direction in which the distance becomes smaller) or in the direction in which they are separated from each other (in the direction in which the facing distance becomes larger) is regulated, and they are placed in the closed position or the open position (see FIGS. 119 to 121).

Moreover, the displacement member D180 and the shaft support member D210 are integrated (unitized) by fixing the shaft D211 of the shaft support member D210 to the base end side of the displacement member D180.

The part in which the displacement member D180 and the shaft support member D210 are integrated (hereinafter referred to as the "displacement member D180 unit") is such that, at least when it is placed in the closed position, the center of gravity of the displacement member D180 unit as a whole is It is located (eccentrically) closer to the other displacement member D180 than D211. That is, when viewed in the direction of the axis D211 (arrow FB), the center of gravity is located (eccentrically) closer to the other displacement member D180 unit than the imaginary line passing through the axis D211.

As a result, the displacement member D180 unit utilizes the eccentricity of the center of gravity from the axis D211 (that is, the eccentricity of the center of gravity acts as a force to rotate the pair of displacement members D180 in the direction of approaching each other) to close the displacement member D180. It is possible to maintain a posture in a certain position.

The transmission member D190 is a member for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 to the displacement member D180 (shaft supporting member D210). ) and a cylindrical body D192 protruding from the end face on the other side (arrow B direction side), and a transmission target extending radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the body D192 on one side in the axial direction. portion D193, and a main body portion D194 and a weight portion D195 that extend radially outward from the outer peripheral surface on the other axial side of the body portion D192.

The shaft D191 is disposed in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrow FB), and as described above, one end of the shaft D191 is inserted into the intermediate portion by inserting the body portion D192 into the insertion hole D131c of the back member D130. The shaft D191 is pivotally supported by a shaft support D141c of the member D140, and the other end of the shaft D191 is pivotally supported by a shaft support D201 of the detour member D200.

The transmitted portion D193 is a portion to which the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 is transmitted from the rolling member D170 (transmission portion D173), and is located on the front side (in the direction of arrow F) of the main body portion D131 in the back member D130. will be placed.

As described above, the extended tip side (arrow L direction side) of the transmitted part D193 is arranged below (arrow D direction side) the transmission part D173 of the rolling member D170 (arranged at a position overlapping when viewed from above), and when the transmission part D173 is displaced (lowered) downward (arrow D direction), the transmitted part D193 of the transmission member D190 is displaced (pushed down) downward by the transmission part D173, thereby displacing (rotating) the transmission member D190 around the axis D191 (see Figures 119 to 121).

Here, a predetermined gap is formed in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction) between the transmitted part D193 of the transmitting member D190 and the transmitting part D173 of the rolling member D170, and when the rolling member D170 receives the weight of the ball and is displaced (descended) downward (arrow D direction), the transmitting part D173 of the rolling member D170 can come into contact with the transmitted part D193 of the transmitting member D190 after filling the predetermined gap. In other words, the rolling member D170 cannot press the transmitted part D193 of the transmitting member D190 downward unless it is displaced (descended) enough to fill the gap.

This makes it possible to prevent the displacement of the rolling member D170 from being transmitted to the displacement member D180 when the displacement of the rolling member D170 is relatively small. This makes it difficult to succeed in fraudulent acts, such as, for example, hitting the gaming machine to displace (lower) the rolling member D170 or using a foreign object such as a wire to displace (lower) the rolling member D170.

The main body part D194 is a part for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D190 to the connecting pin D213 of the shaft support member D210, and is arranged on the back side (direction side of arrow B) of the main body part D131 in the back member D130. be done.

Grooves D194L and D194R are formed in the main body D194, and the connecting pin D213 of the shaft support member D210 is slidably inserted into these grooves D194L and D194R. Thus, when the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 is transmitted and the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated), the connecting pin D213 is displaced downward or upward (pushed down or up) by the inner wall surfaces of the insertion grooves D194L and D194R of the transmission member D190. As a result, the displacement member D180 unit is displaced (rotated), and the displacement member D180 is placed in the open or closed position.

When viewed in the direction of the axis D191 (arrow F-B direction), the groove D194R has a width dimension (dimension in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the connecting pin D213 slides relative to one another) set to a dimension that is approximately equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connecting pin D213, and extends linearly along a direction that intersects with an arc centered on the axis D191. Therefore, while the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated), the connecting pin D213 inserted in the groove D194R is displaced downward or upward (pushed down or up) by the inner wall surface along the extension direction of the groove D194R.

The groove D194L extends in an arcuate shape having a center on the axis D191 side when viewed in the direction of the axis D191 (the direction of the arrow FB), and has an extending end on the lower side (an end on the side in the direction of the arrow D). , in a state where the rolling member D170 is placed at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is placed at the closed position, the width dimension of the groove at the end on the side where the connecting pin D213 is located is the same as that of the connecting pin The upper extending end (the end in the direction of arrow U) is set to a diameter approximately equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of D213, and the rolling member D170 is located at the second position, and the displacement member D180 is located at the open position. In this state, the width of the groove increases toward the end on the side where the connecting pin D213 is located.

In detail, the inner wall surface along the extension direction of the groove D194L on the side farther from the axis D191 is shaped along an arc centered on the axis D191 (a shape obtained by dividing a circle centered on the axis D191 at a specified central angle), and the inner wall surface on the side closer to the axis D191 is curved in an arc shape whose distance from the axis D191 increases from the lower extension end (the end on the side in the direction of the arrow D) to the upper extension end (the end on the side in the direction of the arrow U).

In addition, in the shaft supporting member D210, since the connecting pin D213 is eccentric with respect to the axis D211, the distance between the connecting pin D213 and the axis D191 of the transmission member D190 is the same as when the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position. , and decreases as the displacement member D180 is displaced toward the open position. That is, as the connecting pin D213 is displaced (pressed down) downward (in the direction of arrow D), the distance between it and the axis D191 of the transmission member D190 becomes smaller.

Therefore, the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated) from the state in which the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position (that is, the state in which the connecting pin D213 is displaced (pushed up) most upwardly (in the direction of arrow U), see FIG. 119). ), the connecting pin D213 is not acted upon by (does not come into contact with) both inner wall surfaces along the extending direction of the groove D194R.

On the other hand, the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated) from the state in which the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position (that is, the state in which the connecting pin D213 is displaced (pressed down) most downwardly (in the direction of arrow D), see FIG. 121). ), the connecting pin D213 is acted upon (abutted) by the inner wall surface on the side closer to the axis D191 among the inner wall surfaces along the extending direction of the groove D194L, and is gradually moved upward ( (direction of arrow U) (pushed up).

In this way, when the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position, the connecting pin D213 is not acted upon by the inner wall surface along the extending direction of the groove D194L even if the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated). , is not displaced downward (not pushed down), and after reaching the upper extending end (end in the direction of arrow U) of the groove D194L (see FIG. 120), at the upper extending end thereof. It is displaced (pushed down) downward by the inner wall surface.

This allows the operation modes (displacement modes) of the pair of displacement members D180 to be different from each other. In other words, it is possible to create a state in which one of the pair of displacement members D180 is stopped while only the other is displaced (rotated).

In other words, in this embodiment, when the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position, a predetermined gap is formed between the connecting pin D213 and the upper extended end of the groove D194L (the end on the arrow U direction side, the inner wall surface) (see FIG. 119).

When the rolling member D170 receives the weight of the ball and is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position), and the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D190 begins, the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194R is displaced (pushed down) downward by the inner wall surface along the extension direction of the groove D194R, thereby starting the displacement (rotation) of the corresponding displacement member D180 (one of the pair of displacement members D180) from the closed position.

On the other hand, the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194L is not displaced downward (is not pushed down) until it reaches the upper extension end of the groove D194L (the extension end on the arrow U direction side, the inner wall surface), thereby maintaining the corresponding displacement member D180 (the other of the pair of displacement members D180) in the closed position.

When the transmission member D190 is further displaced (rotated) in accordance with the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 from the initial position (first position), the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194R continues to be displaced (pushed down) downward by the inner wall surface along the extension direction of the groove D194R, thereby continuing the displacement (rotation) of the corresponding displacement member D180 (one of the pair of displacement members D180) from the closed position to the open position.

On the other hand, when the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194L reaches the upper extended end of the groove D194L (the end on the direction of the arrow U, the inner wall surface) (see FIG. 120), it is displaced (pushed down) downward by the upper extended end (inner wall surface), thereby starting the displacement of the corresponding displacement member D180 (the other of the pair of displacement members D180) from the closed position.

Thereafter, both connecting pins D213 are displaced (pressed down), the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) toward the open position, and when the rolling member D170 reaches the second position, the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) toward the open position. Member D180 is placed in the open position.

In this way, in this embodiment, the timing at which the pair of displacement members D180 start to displace (rotate) from the closed position to the open position can be made different (one can be delayed relative to the other). This allows a change to be made in the open state for a player who is expecting the displacement member D180 to displace to the open position (i.e., the ball flowing (scoring) into the sixth passage DRt6), making the game more interesting.

The weight portion D195 is a portion for decentering the center of gravity of the transmission member D190, and extends from one longitudinal end of the main body portion D194 toward the opposite side of the axis D191 (the direction of the arrow R), with a metal (brass in this embodiment) weight embedded inside.

The weight of the weight portion D195 causes the center of gravity of the transmission member D190 as a whole to be positioned (eccentric) toward the weight portion D195 rather than the axis D191. As a result, the transmission member D190 is able to maintain its position in the initial position (the position where the displacement member D180 is in the closed position, see FIG. 119) by utilizing the weight of the weight portion D195 (eccentricity of the center of gravity from the axis D191), and after being displaced (rotated) from the initial position, it is able to return to the initial position by its own weight (i.e., the displacement member D180 returns to the closed position).

That is, in the transmission member D190, when the transmitted portion D193 is not displaced (pressed down) downward (in the direction of arrow D) by the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170, the main body portion D194 is moved upward (in the direction of arrow U). (rotated counterclockwise around axis D191 in rear view), placed in the initial position (displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position), and maintained at the initial position. This eliminates the need for an actuator for driving the transmission member D190 and a sensor for controlling the actuator, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

The detour member D200 is formed in a plate shape having a larger external shape in rear view than the partitioned area by the partition wall D134 of the back member D130, and is disposed on the upright end surface (the surface in the direction of arrow B) of the partition wall D134. By doing so, the eighth passage DRt8 is partitioned together with the partition wall D134. Further, in the detour member D200, a pivot support D201 is formed in an area that is outward in rear view from the partitioned area by the partitioning wall D134.

Next, the opening/closing operation of the displacement member D180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121 and FIG. 122(c).

As shown in FIG. 119, when the ball is not flowing (entering) from the flow outlet DOPfl into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other), the rolling member D170 is at the initial position (first position). ). Therefore, the transmission member D190 is not acted upon by the rolling member D170, and the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position.

In this state, when a ball (not shown) flows (enters) from the downflow port DOPfl into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of opposing displacement members D180), the ball passes (flows down) between the pair of opposing displacement members D180 and falls onto the upper surface (rolling surface) of the other longitudinal end side (opposite the axis D171, in the direction of arrow R) of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170, and then rolls on the upper surface of the main body part D172 towards one longitudinal end side (the axis D171 side, in the direction of arrow L).

As shown in FIG. 120, when a ball rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) toward the second position under the weight of the ball, and as shown in FIG. 121, when the rolling member D170 is further displaced (rotated) and reaches the second position, a pair of displacement members D180 are positioned in the open position, and the distance between the displacement members D180 is maximized.

The ball (not shown) rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 rolls (flows) from one longitudinal end side (axis D171 side, arrow L side) of the main body D172 into the rolling portion (the portion whose upper surface is the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140, and then rolls (flows) into the eighth passage DRt8 through the opening D131d.

After that, when the ball is no longer present on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, the rolling member D170 is returned to the initial position (first position) by its own weight, and along with this, the transmission member When D190 is returned to the initial position by its own weight, the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 119).

In this manner, in this embodiment, the rolling member D170 (main body portion D172) is supported rotatably around the axis D171, and a ball that flows (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 (between a pair of opposing displacement members D180) rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170 toward the axis D171 side (the direction of the arrow L).

As described above, the rolling member D170 is arranged at the other longitudinal end (the side opposite to the side where the axis D171 is arranged, the side in the direction of the arrow R) in a position overlapping with the displacement member D180 when viewed from above (a position where a ball that has entered (flowed down) between the opposing pair of displacement members D180 can be received (catch)).

Therefore, the ball that has entered (entered) the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) can be dropped onto the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170.

Here, for example, in a structure in which the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body part D172 is set in a direction away from the axis D171, the ball is set on the rolling member D170 (main body part D172). At the initial stage of rolling, the distance between the position where the weight of the ball acts (point of force) and the axis D171 (fulcrum) is close, so the ball rolls a predetermined distance and the distance from axis D171 (the point of force and fulcrum) is close. Until the distance between the balls is secured, the weight of the weight portion D174 cannot be counteracted, and the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) by the weight of the ball. I can't.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, when the ball rolls on the upper surface of the main body portion D172, in the initial stage, the distance between the position where the weight of the ball acts (point of force) and the axis D171 (fulcrum) is determined. Since the influence of the weight portion D174 can be reduced, the rolling member D170 can be easily displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) by the weight of the ball.

In other words, immediately after the ball flows into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of opposing displacement members D180), the rolling member D170 (main body portion D172) is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position), and the displacement member D180 can be quickly displaced toward the open position (and placed in the open position).

In particular, since the ball flowing into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) can be directly dropped onto the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, the weight of the ball can be reduced. The rolling member D170 (main body portion D172) can be displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) by utilizing not only the action of the ball but also the falling force (kinetic energy) of the ball. In this respect as well, the displacement member D180 can be quickly displaced toward the open position (and placed in the open position).

Therefore, it is possible for the player who has witnessed the ball flowing down (entering the ball) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) to immediately start displacing the displacement member D180 to the open position. It is possible to perform at a good tempo.

In addition, when a plurality of balls roll on the third path DRt3, the first ball that enters the sixth path DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) and the back of the first ball When the distance between the second ball following the trailing ball (other balls that have not entered the sixth path DRt6, and subsequent balls) is relatively small, the second ball following the trailing ball is moved to the sixth path DRt6 ( The ball can easily flow into (enter) between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other.

The direction in which the ball rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D170 is a direction approaching the axis D171, so as the ball rolls on the upper surface of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170, the distance between the position where the weight of the ball acts (point of force) and the axis D171 (fulcrum) is gradually shortened, and the influence of the weight part D174 can be increased. Therefore, the rolling member D170 can be gradually returned from the second position toward the initial position (first position).

That is, as the rolling of the ball progresses, the displacement member D180, which has been placed in the open position, can be gradually displaced (rotated) toward the closed position. As a result, for example, when another ball is reciprocating on the third path DRt3, the other ball will not flow into the sixth path DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other). It is possible to increase the interest of the game by making the player pay attention to whether or not the displacement member D180 is in an advantageous state in which it is opened (at least in a state in which the amount of opening is larger than the state in which it is disposed in the closed position).

Furthermore, when a ball that has flowed (entered) the sixth passage DRt6 (between a pair of opposing displacement members D180) falls onto the rolling member D170, the rolling member D170 can receive the fallen ball on the side of the rolling member D170 that has a larger amount of displacement in the up-down direction (the direction of the arrows U-D) (the side away from the axis D171).

The kinetic energy of the dropped ball can therefore be absorbed (consumed) as energy for displacing (rotating) the rolling member D170, i.e., lifting the weight portion D174 upward. As a result, the ball that has fallen onto the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 can be prevented from bouncing upward. As a result, the weight of the ball can be stably applied to the rolling member D170, stabilizing the state of the displacement member D180 (for example, preventing the displacement member D180 from being temporarily displaced (rotated) toward the closed position).

In addition, the ball that has flown (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) is separated from the rolling member D170 by a member (a fixed, non-displaceable member, such as the back member D130 or If the ball is dropped onto a part of the intermediate member D140), that other member is likely to be damaged, but as described above, the kinetic energy of the dropped ball is absorbed (consumed) by the displacement of the rolling member D170. ), it is possible to suppress damage to the rolling member D170, the back surface member D130 that pivotally supports the rolling member D170, and the intermediate member D140 due to ball collisions. As a result, the degree of freedom in design can be increased to the extent that the ball can be allowed to fall (the upper limit of the ball's fall height can be made gentler).

Protrusions D131f and D141g (acting means) are provided in a protruding manner on the main body D131 of the back member D130 and the main body D141 of the intermediate member D140, which form the side wall (inner surface) of the sixth passage DRt6. It is formed so as to be able to act on a ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172.

That is, the protrusions D131f, D141g protrude from the main body parts D131, D141, which are arranged facing each other with a specified distance between them, toward the sixth passage DRt6 and extend linearly in the vertical direction (the direction of the arrows U-D), and are arranged at specified intervals in the direction in which the balls roll in the sixth passage DRt6 (the longitudinal direction of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170).

Therefore, when the ball passes through the sixth passage DRt6, not only when it rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170, but also when it moves while floating above the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D170, the protrusions D131f, D141g come into contact with the ball and provide resistance, thereby slowing down the speed of the ball.

As a result, the time required for the ball to pass through the sixth passage DRt6 (rolling member D170) can be lengthened, and the time during which the weight of the ball acts on the rolling member D170 (i.e., the displacement member D180 is at least more open than in the closed position, making it easier for the ball to enter) can be maintained (lengthened).

In this case, the protrusions D131f, D141g are formed on both sides of the sixth passage DRt6 (main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170) and are arranged in a staggered pattern along the rolling direction of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6 (the longitudinal direction of the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170), so that the ball can be made to abut alternately against the protrusions D131f, D141g as it passes through the sixth passage DRt6.

This not only provides resistance to the ball, but also adds a lateral (perpendicular to the rolling direction) velocity component to the ball's velocity component (the ball's path can be made to zigzag rather than straight). This lengthens the time it takes for the ball to pass through the sixth passage DRt6. Therefore, from this point of view, it becomes easier to maintain (lengthen) the time during which the weight of the ball acts on the rolling member D170 (i.e., the state in which the displacement member D180 is at least more open than the closed position, making it easier for the ball to enter).

On the other hand, since the protrusions D131f and D141g extend along the vertical direction (the direction of the arrow UD), it is difficult to apply resistance to the ball moving in the vertical direction. Therefore, when a ball jumps upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D170 (main body portion D172), it is possible to quickly drop the ball downward (rolling surface). can. Therefore, even if the main body D172 of the rolling member D170 is displaced upward by the action of the weight D174 as the ball bounces upward, the weight of the ball can be quickly transferred to the main body D172 of the rolling member D170. can be applied to quickly return the main body portion D172 to its original state.

As a result, while the ball passes through the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D170, the weight of the ball acts on the main body portion D172, and the displacement member D180 is at least more open than the closed position, making it easier to maintain a state in which the ball can easily enter.

In the rolling member D170, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172 is formed as a flat surface. That is, the upper surface of the main body portion D172 is formed as a smooth surface that continues smoothly along the rolling direction of the ball, and no step is formed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body portion D172 from jumping upward (in the direction of arrow U). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main body portion D172 from being displaced upward due to the action of the weight portion D174 as the ball bounces upward.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the displacement member D180 is formed to be able to be displaced (rotated), and the displacement (rotation) makes it easier for the ball to flow into the sixth passageway DRt6. In the changing structure, when a ball enters the sixth passage DRt6, the displacement member D180 is displaced to the side (open position) where the ball is more likely to enter the sixth passage DRt6. When one ball enters DRt6, the ball that follows that ball (for example, a ball reciprocating in the third path DRt3 in its longitudinal direction, a subsequent ball) is likely to enter the sixth path DRt6. can.

That is, when the first ball enters the sixth path DRt6, the displacement member D180 is displaced by the first ball entering the sixth path DRt6, and the second ball that follows is displaced. It is possible to create a state in which the ball (the second ball following the first ball) is likely to enter the sixth path DRt6, and if the second ball enters the sixth path DRt6, the second ball When the ball enters the sixth path DRt6, the displacement member D180 is displaced, creating a state in which the trailing third ball (the third ball following the second ball) is likely to enter the sixth path DRt6. These aspects can be repeated for the third sphere and beyond.

Therefore, the player can expect that the flow (sinking) of one ball into the sixth passage DRt6 will trigger a chain reaction of balls entering the sixth passage DRt6. As a result, the player's interest in the game can be increased.

In this case, the displacement of the displacement member D180 to the side where the ball is more likely to enter (open position) is achieved by utilizing the weight of the ball that has flowed (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6. This eliminates the need for an actuator to drive the displacement member D180 and a sensor to control that actuator, thereby reducing product costs.

In particular, in this embodiment, the rolling surface of the balls in the sixth passage DRt6 is formed by the rolling member D170, and the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) by the action of the weight of the rolling ball. , you can secure time to utilize the weight of the ball. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the ball easily flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6.

Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123. In the eighth embodiment, the displacement member D180 can be forcibly opened from the outside, but in the ninth embodiment, the displacement member D180 can be restricted from being forcibly opened from the outside. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

Figures 123(a) and 123(b) are cross-sectional views of the lower frame D2086b in the ninth embodiment, and correspond to the cross section taken along line CXIXa-CXIXa in Figure 115. Note that Figure 123(a) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position, while Figure 123(b) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position.

As shown in FIG. 123, the transmission member D2190 includes an engagement portion D2196. The transmission member D2190 differs from the transmission member D190 in the eighth embodiment only in that it further includes an engagement portion D2196, and the rest of the configuration is the same.

The engaging portion D2196 is a portion that allows the rolling member D170 to be displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, and restricts the displacement member D180, which is in the closed position, from being displaced (rotated) toward the open position when the rolling member D170 is in the initial position (first position). It is erected from the upper surface (surface on the side in the direction of the arrow U) of the transmitted portion D193, and is disposed with its outer surface (surface opposite the axis D191) facing the extended tip (end on the side in the direction of the arrow R) of the transmitting portion D173 of the rolling member D170.

The outer surface of the engaging portion D2196 (the surface on the opposite side to the axis D191) corresponds to the displacement of the extending tip (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the transmitting portion D173 when the rolling member D170 is rotated about the axis D171. It is formed in a shape that does not intersect with the locus (a shape that is in contact with the displacement locus or a shape that has a gap between it and the displacement locus). Therefore, displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 from the initial position (first position) to the second position is allowed (see FIG. 123(b)).

Therefore, when a ball flows into the sixth passage DRt6 and rolls on the upper surface of the main body D172 of the rolling member D170, the weight of the ball is used to move the rolling member D170. can be displaced to a second position. As a result, the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170 can displace (push down) the transmitted portion D193 of the transmission member D2190 downward, and the displacement member D180 can be displaced (rotated) to the open position.

Further, the outer surface of the engaging portion D2196 (the surface opposite to the axis D191) is connected to the transmission member when the rolling member D170 is placed at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is placed at the closed position. D2190 is formed in a shape that can restrict rotation in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (counterclockwise in FIG. 123(a), that is, the direction in which the displacement member D180 placed in the open position is displaced toward the open position).

Specifically, when the transmission member D2190 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front (left in FIG. 123(a)), and the outer surface (the surface opposite the axis D191) of the engagement portion D2196 abuts against and presses against the extended tip (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170, the extended tip of the transmission portion D173 is pressed in the direction toward the axis D171 (the axis D171 is positioned on the extension line of the force applied from the engagement portion D2196 to the extended tip of the transmission portion D173).

Therefore, a force component for displacing (rotating) the rolling member D170 is not generated, and the rolling member D170 is maintained (unrotatable) in the initial position (first position), restricting the rotation of the transmission member D2190 in the counterclockwise direction (left direction in FIG. 123(a)) as viewed from the front (see FIG. 123(a)). In other words, the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member D180 from the closed position to the open position is restricted.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the rolling member D170 is placed at the initial position (first position) (that is, when the weight of the ball is not applied), the displacement member D180 is moved from the closed position. Displacement (rotation) toward the open position can be restricted. That is, for example, fraud in which a foreign object such as a wire is inserted to forcibly displace the displacement member D180 in the closed position toward the open position (fraud in which the ball easily flows into the sixth passage DRt6). ) can be suppressed.

In this case, in this embodiment, the displacement (rotation) of the displacement member D180 from the closed position to the open position is restricted by utilizing the rolling member D170 (engaging the engagement portion D2196 of the transmission member D2190 with the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170). Therefore, there is no need to provide a separate part to restrict the displacement member D180 from being forcibly displaced (rotated), and the transmission member D190 can be used, which simplifies the structure for preventing unauthorized forcible displacement of the displacement member D180.

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 124. In the eighth embodiment, the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the rolling member D170 is the direction approaching the axis D171, but in the rolling member D3170 of the tenth embodiment, the rolling direction of the ball is away from the axis D3171. It is said to be the direction of moving away (separated). Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Figures 124(a) and 124(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame D3086b in the tenth embodiment, and correspond to the cross section taken along line CXIXa-CXIXa in Figure 115. Note that Figure 124(a) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position, while Figure 124(b) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position.

As shown in FIG. 124, the rolling member D3170 includes a shaft D3171, a long plate-shaped main body D3172 with the shaft D3171 disposed at the other end in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side), and a main body D3172. A weight portion D3174 disposed on the other longitudinal end side of D3172 (the side on which the shaft D3171 is disposed) and a transmission portion D3173 disposed on the opposite side of the main body portion D3172 with the weight portion D3174 interposed therebetween. It is rotatably arranged around an axis D3171 between the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140.

The parts D3171 to D3174 of the rolling member D3170 are substantially identical in function to the parts D171 to D174 of the rolling member D170 in the eighth embodiment, and differ only in their arrangement. The transmission member D3190 differs from the transmission member D3190 in the eighth embodiment only in the orientation (extension direction) of the transmitted part D3193, and the rest of the configuration is the same.

The shaft D3171 is disposed in a position along the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B) and is supported by a shaft support (not shown) formed on the back member D130 and the intermediate member D140. Therefore, when the rolling member D3170 is displaced (rotated) around the shaft D3171, the main body D3172 is displaced (raised and lowered) in the up-down direction (the direction of the arrows U-D).

The main body portion D3172 is a portion whose upper surface forms the rolling surface of the ball in the sixth passage DRt6, and one longitudinal end side (the side opposite to the side where the axis D3171 is arranged, the side in the direction of arrow L) is juxtaposed to the rolling portion (the part whose upper surface serves as the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140, and the other longitudinal end side (the side where the axis D3171 is arranged, the side in the direction of arrow R) is arranged in a position overlapping with the displacement member D180 in a top view (a position that can receive (catch) a ball that has entered (flowed down) between the opposing pair of displacement members D180).

When the main body D3172 is placed in the second position (posture), the upper surface of one end of its longitudinal direction (the side opposite to the side where the axis D3171 is disposed, the side in the direction of the arrow L) is placed at a height position that is approximately the same as or slightly higher (the side in the direction of the arrow U) than the upper surface of the rolling portion (the portion whose upper surface is the rolling surface) of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140.

The upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 is formed as a flat surface. This prevents the rolling ball from bouncing upward (in the direction of the arrow U). This prevents the main body D3172 from being displaced upward by the action of the weight D3174 as the ball bounces upward.

The upper surface of the main body D3172 does not need to be a flat surface (a cross section cut by a plane perpendicular to the axis D3171 is a straight cross section), but it is sufficient if no steps are formed, and it may be formed as a smooth surface that is smoothly connected along the rolling direction of the ball (a cross section shape in which curves or curves and straight lines are smoothly connected, for example, a sine wave (sine curve) shape).

The weight portion D3174 is a portion for making the center of gravity of the rolling member D3170 eccentric, and is opposite to the direction in which the body portion D3172 extends from the other end in the longitudinal direction of the body portion D3172 (the side where the shaft D3171 is disposed). It extends toward the side (arrow R direction side), and a metal (brass in this embodiment) weight is embedded inside.

The transmission portion D3173 is a portion for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D3170 to the transmission member D3190, and is a portion opposite to the axis D3171 from the extension direction end (end on the arrow R direction side) of the weight portion D3174. It is further extended toward the side (arrow R direction side). The extended distal end side (arrow R direction side) of the transmission portion D3173 is disposed below (arrow D direction side) the transmitted portion D3193 of the transmission member D3190 (disposed in an overlapping position when viewed from above).

Therefore, when the rolling member D3170 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D3171 by the weight of the ball rolling on its upper surface, and the transmission section D3173 is displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U), the transmission section D3173 The transmitted portion D3193 of the transmitting member D3190 is displaced upward (pushed up), and thereby the transmitting member D3190 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D3191. As a result, the displacement member D180 is displaced from the closed position to the open position.

In this embodiment, a protrusion protrudes (stands up) from the transmitting part D3173 toward the transmitted part D3193. However, a protrusion may protrude (stand up) from the transmitted part D3193 toward the transmitting part D3173. In other words, it is sufficient that the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D3170 can be transmitted to the transmitting member D3190 via the transmitting part D3173 and the transmitted part D3193.

In an unloaded state where the weight of the ball is not applied to the rolling member D3170 (main body D3172) (the ball is not rolling on the main body D3172), the center of gravity of the rolling member D3170 as a whole is aligned with the axis. It is located (eccentrically) closer to the weight portion D3174 (and transmission portion D3173) than D3171. As a result, the rolling member D3170 is placed at the initial position (first position) in the no-load state by utilizing the weight of the weight part D3174 (and the transmission part D3173) (the eccentricity of the center of gravity from the axis D3171). It is possible to maintain this posture, and after being displaced (rotated) from the initial position, it is possible to return to the initial position by its own weight (see FIG. 124(a)).

That is, in the rolling member D3170, in an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not applied to the main body D3172), the main body D3172 is displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U) (in a front view, the axis D3171 (rotated clockwise around ), placed at the initial position (first position), and maintained at the initial position (first position). This eliminates the need for an actuator for driving the rolling member D3170 and a sensor for controlling the actuator, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

On the other hand, when a ball rolls on the main body D3172 of the rolling member D3170, the weight of the ball causes the center of gravity of the rolling member D3170 as a whole to be positioned (eccentric) toward the main body D3172 (the opposite side of the axis D3171 from the weight D3174). As a result, the main body D3172 of the rolling member D3170 is displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of arrow D) (when viewed from the front, it is rotated counterclockwise around the axis D3171) and is positioned in the second position.

The first position (initial position) of the rolling member D3170 is determined by the lower surface (surface on the arrow D side) of one longitudinal end side (arrow L side) of the main body D3172 abutting against a stopper portion protruding from the intermediate member D140. That is, by abutting the main body D3172 against the stopper portion, the downward displacement (counterclockwise rotation as viewed from the front about the axis D3171) of the main body D3172 is restricted, and the rolling member D3170 is disposed in the first position (initial position) (see FIG. 124(a)).

On the other hand, the second position of the rolling member D3170 is defined by the lower surface (the surface in the direction of arrow D) of the weight portion D3174 coming into contact with a stopper portion protruding from the intermediate member D140. That is, in the rolling member D3170, the weight portion D3174 is brought into contact with the stopper portion, so that upward displacement (counterclockwise rotation in front view around the axis D3171) of the main body portion D3172 is regulated. 2 positions (see FIG. 124(b)).

When the rolling member D3170 is arranged in the first position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 is inclined downward from the other longitudinal end side toward the one longitudinal end side, and when the rolling member D3170 is arranged in the second position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 is inclined downward from the other longitudinal end side toward the one longitudinal end side. Therefore, the ball on the rolling member D3170 (main body D3172) can be reliably rolled toward the opening D131d (eighth passage DRt8).

In this way, the rolling member D3170 rolls the ball by utilizing the downward slope of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D3172, and the rolling member D3170 is rotatably rotated around the axis D3171. In this embodiment, the angle of the downward inclination of the top surface of the main body D3172 with respect to the horizontal plane is such that the angle of the downward inclination when the ball is rolling (the state receiving the weight of the ball) is the angle of the downward inclination when the ball is rolling (the state where the ball is receiving the weight of the ball). It is made larger than the angle of the downward slope in the rolling state (no load state where the ball is not receiving weight).

In other words, in this embodiment, the ball that flows (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 falls to a position on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body part D3172, close to the axis D3171, and rolls on the upper surface of the main body part D3172 in a direction away from the axis D3171.

As a result, in the initial stage when the ball rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 of the rolling member D3170, the distance between the position where the weight of the ball acts (point of force) and the axis D3171 (fulcrum) is shortened. , the weight of the weight part D3174 is made dominant, and as the ball rolls on the upper surface of the main body part D3172, the distance from the axis D191 (distance between the point of force and the fulcrum) is gradually increased (lengthened), and the weight of the weight part D3174 is set to be dominant. The weight of the portion D174 can be counteracted. As a result, the rolling member D3170 can be gradually displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position.

In other words, as the ball continues to roll, the displacement member D180 can be gradually displaced (rotated) from the closed position to the open position, gradually increasing the amount of opening (the distance between the opposing displacement members D180). This allows, for example, when the second ball reciprocates along the third passage DRt3, to gradually increase the expectation that the second ball will flow (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 (between the opposing displacement members D180), making the game more interesting.

In addition, even if the distance between the first ball that has entered the sixth passage DRt6 and the second ball that follows the first ball (another ball that has not entered the sixth passage DRt6, the following ball) is relatively large, it is possible to make it easier for the following second ball to flow (enter) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of opposing displacement members D180).

On the other hand, by setting the direction in which the ball rolls on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D3170 to be a direction away from (separating from) the axis D171, at least the ball can move toward the terminal end (one longitudinal end) of the main body D3172. When the rolling member D3170 reaches the end (the end on the side in the direction of arrow L), the rolling member D3170 is placed at the second position.

In other words, just before the ball rolls (flows) from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 into the rolling portion of the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140, the distance from the axis D191 (distance between the force point and the fulcrum) is at its maximum, and the weight of the ball is acting at its maximum on the main body D3172. However, when the ball rolls (flows) from the upper surface of the main body D3172 into the rolling portion of the sixth passage partition wall D146, the effect of the weight of the ball instantly disappears, and only the effect of the weight part D3174 remains.

Therefore, the rolling member D3170 can be returned from the second position to the initial position (first position) at maximum speed, and the displacement member D180 that was in the open position can be instantly placed in the closed position. This allows for a performance with good tempo. In addition, the player can focus on whether the second ball will enter (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of opposing displacement members D180) in time for the displacement member D180 to be gradually displaced (rotated) toward the open position, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the rolling member D3170 of this embodiment, when the number of balls rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D3172 is one ball, that ball is on one longitudinal end side of the main body D3172 (arrow The rolling member D3170 is gradually displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position as the ball is rolled toward the end on the L direction side, and the ball is rotated in the longitudinal direction of the main body D3172. When the ball reaches one end (the end in the direction of arrow L) (at least before the ball rolls (inflows) into the sixth passage partition wall D146 of the intermediate member D140), the rolling member D3170 is in the second position. is configured to be placed in

Next, the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 125. In the eighth embodiment, only the rolling member D170 is disposed in the path from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout (the path formed by the sixth path DRt6 and the eighth path DRt8). A rolling member D170 and a second rolling member D4220 are disposed in the path from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout in the embodiment (the passage formed by the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8). Ru. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Figures 125(a) and 125(b) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame D4086b in the eleventh embodiment, showing the partition wall D4134 and the second rolling member D4220 cut along a plane perpendicular to the axis D4221.

In addition, in FIG. 125(a), the second rolling member D4220 is arranged at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is arranged at the closed position, but in FIG. 125(b), the second rolling member The moving member D4220 is shown in the second position and the displacement member D180 is shown in the open position.

As shown in FIG. 125, the rear member D4130 has a partition wall D4134 erected from its rear surface.

The partition wall D4134, together with the main body D131, the detour member D200, and the second rolling member D4220, defines the eighth passage DRt8. That is, the detour member D200 is disposed opposite the main body D131, and the area defined between them by the partition wall D4134 and the second rolling member D4220 defines the eighth passage DRt8.

The second rolling member D4220 includes an axis D4221, a long plate-shaped main body D4222 with the axis D4221 disposed at one longitudinal end (the side in the direction of arrow L), a weight D4224 disposed at one longitudinal end (the side where the axis D4221 is disposed) of the main body D4222, and a transmission part D4223 disposed on the opposite side of the main body D4222 across the weight D4224, and is disposed between the back member D4130 and the detour member D200 so as to be rotatable about the axis D4221.

Note that the functions of the parts D4221 to D4224 of the second rolling member D4220 are substantially the same as those of the parts D171 to D174 of the rolling member D170 in the eighth embodiment, and only the arrangement is different. Further, in the partition wall D4134 of the back member D4130, a part of the wall portion forming the rolling surface of the ball is omitted compared to the partition wall D134 in the eighth embodiment (main body portion D4222 of the second rolling member D4220 ), but the other configurations are the same.

The shaft D4221 is disposed in a position along the front-rear direction (the direction of the arrows F-B) and is supported by a shaft support portion (not shown) formed on the back member D4130 and the detour member D200. Therefore, when the second rolling member D4220 is displaced (rotated) around the shaft D4221, the main body portion D4222 is displaced (raised and lowered) in the up-down direction (the direction of the arrows U-D).

The main body portion D4222 is a portion whose upper surface forms a rolling surface for the ball in the eighth passage DRt8, and one longitudinal end side (the side where the shaft D4221 is disposed, the side in the direction of arrow L) is inserted into the opening D131e. The partition wall D4134 is arranged in parallel with the rolling part (the upper surface is the rolling surface) of the partition wall D4134, and the other end in the longitudinal direction (the side opposite to the side where the shaft D4221 is arranged, the side in the direction of arrow R) is disposed on the downstream side of the opening D131d (a position where the ball flowing down from the opening D131d can be received).

Whether the main body D4222 is in any state (posture) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the upper surface of one end of its longitudinal direction (the side where the axis D4221 is arranged, the arrow L direction side) is positioned at a height position that is approximately the same as or slightly higher (arrow U direction side) than the upper surface of the rolling part (the part whose upper surface becomes the rolling surface) of the partition wall D4134 that rolls the ball into the opening D131e.

The axis D4221 is embedded inside the main body D4222, and the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D4222 is formed up to a position beyond the axis D4221. That is, after the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D4222 passes above the axis D4221 (the direction of the arrow U), it rolls (flows) into the rolling portion of the partition wall D4134, which rolls the ball into the opening D131e.

The weight portion D4224 is a portion for decentering the center of gravity of the second rolling member D4220, and extends from one end of the main body portion D4222 in the longitudinal direction (the side where the axis D4221 is disposed) toward the opposite side to the extension direction of the main body portion D4222 (the side indicated by the arrow L), and has a metal (brass in this embodiment) weight embedded inside.

The transmission part D4223 is a part for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the second rolling member D4220 to the transmission member D190, and extends from the extension direction end (end on the arrow R direction side) of the weight part D4224 toward the transmission member D190 (weight part D195). The extension tip side (arrow U direction side) of the transmission part D4223 is disposed below (arrow D direction side) the weight part D195 of the transmission member D190 (disposed in a position overlapping in a top view).

Therefore, when the second rolling member D4220 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D4221 by the weight of the ball rolling on its upper surface, and the transmission part D4223 is displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U), the transmission The weight portion D195 of the transmission member D190 is displaced upward (pushed up) by the portion D4223, and thereby the transmission member D190 is displaced (rotated) about the axis D191. As a result, the displacement member D180 is displaced from the closed position to the open position.

In a no-load state where the weight of the ball is not applied to the second rolling member D4220 (main body part D4222) (a state in which the ball is not rolling on the main body part D4222), the center of gravity of the second rolling member D4220 as a whole The position is located (eccentric) closer to the weight portion D4224 (and transmission portion D4223) than the axis D4221. As a result, the second rolling member D4220 uses the weight of the weight portion D4224 (and the transmission portion D4223) (the eccentricity of the center of gravity position from the axis D4221) to move the second rolling member D4220 to the initial position (first position) in the no-load state. It is possible to maintain the posture arranged in the position, and after being displaced (rotated) from the initial position, it is possible to return to the initial position (first position) by its own weight (see Fig. 125(a)). ).

In other words, when the second rolling member D4220 is in an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not acting on the main body portion D4222), the main body portion D4222 is displaced (raised) upward (in the direction of arrow U) (rotated counterclockwise around the axis D4221 when viewed from the front), and is placed in and maintained in the initial position (first position). This makes it possible to eliminate the need for an actuator for driving the second rolling member D4220 and a sensor for controlling that actuator, thereby reducing product costs.

On the other hand, when the ball rolls on the main body D4222 of the second rolling member D4220, the center of gravity of the second rolling member D4220 as a whole moves toward the main body D4222 (with the axis D4221 in between) due to the weight of the ball. (on the opposite side to the weight portion D4224) (eccentrically). As a result, the second rolling member D4220 is disposed at the second position with the main body D4222 being displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of arrow D) (rotated clockwise around the axis D4221 when viewed from the front). Ru.

The first position (initial position) of the second rolling member D4220 is determined by the end face (surface on the arrow L side) of one longitudinal end side (arrow L side) of the main body D4222 abutting against the partition wall D4134, and the second position of the second rolling member D4220 is determined by the underside (surface on the arrow D side) of the other longitudinal end side (arrow R side) of the main body D4222 abutting against the partition wall D4134.

When the second rolling member D4220 is disposed at the first position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D4222 is tilted downward from the other end in the longitudinal direction to the one end in the longitudinal direction, and the second rolling member D4220 is in the second position. Even in the state where the main body portion D4222 is disposed, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D4222 is inclined downward from the other longitudinal end side to the one longitudinal end side. Therefore, the ball on the second rolling member D4220 (main body portion D4222) can be reliably rolled toward the opening D131e.

Thus, according to this embodiment, the rolling member D170 is disposed in the sixth passage DRt6, and the second rolling member D4220 is disposed in the eighth passage DRt8 downstream of the sixth passage DRt6. Therefore, compared to the eighth embodiment, even if the length of the path (passage, i.e., the section from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout) is the same, the section in which the weight of the ball can be utilized can be secured (lengthened) by the amount of the second rolling member D4220 disposed. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain (lengthen) the state in which the displacement member D180 is displaced to the open position (the state in which the displacement member D180 is at least more open than the closed position, making it easier for the ball to enter).

Here, the longitudinal dimension (length of the upper surface (rolling surface)) of the first member (rolling member D170 (main body part D172)) is extended to secure (lengthen) a section where the weight of the ball can be used. With this configuration, it is difficult to arrange the rolling member D170 whose longitudinal dimension is extended in the limited space (width direction (arrow LR direction) dimension) of the lower frame D86b. By biasing the installation position of the pair of displacement members D180 to one side in the width direction (arrow L direction side) of the lower frame D86b, the longitudinal dimension (upper surface (rolling surface)) of the rolling member D170 (main body portion D172) Although it is possible to extend the length of the moving surface), there is a limit to the length that can be extended. Further, the third passage DRt3 cannot be shaped to allow the ball to move back and forth, which reduces the interest of the game.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of members (in this embodiment, the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220) are arranged to ensure a (long) section in which the weight of the ball can be utilized. With this configuration, the limited space of the lower frame D4086b can be effectively utilized to ensure a sufficient (long) section in which the weight of the ball can be utilized. Furthermore, the third passage DRt3 can be shaped to allow the ball to move back and forth, making the game more interesting.

That is, since the second rolling member D4220 is disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the rolling member D170 and these are overlapped in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), the lower frame D4086b By effectively utilizing the thickness in the front-rear direction that becomes a dead space, the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 can ensure (lengthen) a section where the weight of the ball can be used.

In addition, in this way, the pair of displacement members D180 can be arranged at the center of the width direction (arrow LR) of the lower frame D4086b while securing (lengthening) the section where the weight of the ball can be used. The DRt3 can be shaped so that the ball can reciprocate (a shape that slopes downward toward the center in the width direction), making the game more interesting.

In a configuration in which only one member (rolling member D170) is arranged in a path (passage, i.e., the section from a pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout), a predetermined displacement of the displacement member D180 (displacement from a closed position to an open position due to the weight of the ball, and a displacement mode in which the displacement member D180 returns to the closed position after the ball passes) is only formed once while one ball passes through the path, but if multiple members (rolling member D170 and second rolling member D4220) are arranged in the path (passage), the above-mentioned predetermined displacement of the displacement member D180 can be formed multiple times (twice in this embodiment) while one ball passes through the path. By repeatedly opening and closing the displacement member D180, a player who expects a ball to flow (enter) into the sixth path DRt6 can focus on the relationship between the displacement state of the displacement member D180 and other balls on the third path DRt3, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in a configuration in which only one member (rolling member D170) is disposed in the path (passage, that is, the section from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout), the path is divided into multiple (two or more) balls. Even if the ball passes, the displacement member D180 can be displaced in only one manner (i.e., it is moved from the closed position to the open position due to the weight of the ball and returned to the closed position after the ball passes), but it can be displaced in multiple ways. If the members (rolling member D170 and second rolling member D4220) are arranged in a path (passage), the displacement mode of the displacement member D180 that can be formed while a plurality of balls pass through the path is Can be done in multiple ways. That is, by combining the timings at which the weight of the ball acts on one and the other of the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220 (the timing at which the ball rolls), the displacement mode of the displacement member D180 can be varied. As a result, a surprising performance can be performed.

The transmission part D173 of the rolling member D170 is located above the transmitted part D193 of the transmission member D190 (in the direction of the arrow U), and displaces (pushes) the transmitted part D193 downward when the weight of the ball acts on the main body part D172. The transmission part D4223 of the second rolling member D4220 is located below (in the direction of the arrow D) the weight part D195 of the transmission member D190, and displaces (pushes) the weight part D195 upward when the weight of the ball acts on the main body part D4222.

That is, when the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 operate under the action of the weight of the ball to displace (rotate) the transmission member D190, the directions of displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D190 are the same, The movements of the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 are not opposed. Similarly, when one of the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220 returns to its initial position (displaced (rotated) by the weight of the weights D174 and D4224 without the weight of the ball acting on it), the rolling member Regardless of the state of motion of D170 or the other of the second rolling member D4220, one motion and the other motion are not opposed (both one motion and the other motion are allowed).

In this way, the displacement (rotation) when the weight of the balls of the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 is applied can be transmitted to the transmission member D190 individually and independently, and the displacement (rotation) when the action of the weight of the balls of the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 is released can be performed individually and independently.

Therefore, when multiple balls pass through the path (passage, i.e., the section from the pair of displacement members D180 to the outlet DOPout), depending on the rolling positions of the balls, the transmission member D190 can be displaced (rotated) due to the movement of only one or the other of the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220, or the transmission member D190 can be displaced (rotated) due to the movement of both the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220, and by combining these, the manner in which the displacement member D180 is displaced can be diversified.

For example, if the weight of a ball is applied to either the rolling member D170 or the second rolling member D4220 while the displacement member D180 is being displaced (rotated) toward the closed position, the movement of either of them can displace the displacement member D180 toward the open position while it is being displaced toward the closed position.

In addition, for example, when the weight of a ball is applied to one of the rolling members D170 or the second rolling members D4220, and the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) toward the open position by the action of one of the members, the weight of a ball is applied to the other of the rolling members D170 or the second rolling members D4220, and the action of the weight of the ball is greater on the other member (the force displacing the displacement member D180 is stronger), the displacement member D180 can be displaced to the open position at a faster displacement speed by the action of the other member.

Further, according to the present embodiment, a member (transmission means) for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 to the displacement member D180 and a member (transmission means) for transmitting the displacement (rotation) of the second rolling member D4220 to the displacement member D180 are provided. There is no need to separately provide a member for transmitting (transmitting means), and the transmitting member D190 can be used in common as such a member (transmitting means). Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced and the structure can be simplified. As a result, improved operational reliability and reduced product costs can be achieved.

Next, the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 126. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 126 is a partially enlarged rear view of the lower frame D5086b in the twelfth embodiment, showing a state with the detour member D200 removed. Note that FIG. 126(a) shows a state in which the rolling member D170 is placed at the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is placed at the closed position.

As shown in FIG. 126, grooves D5194L and D194R are formed in the main body D5194, and the connecting pins D213 of the shaft support member D210 are slidably inserted into these grooves D5194L and D194R.

The transmission member D5190 differs from the transmission member D190 in the eighth embodiment only in the shape of the groove D194L, and the rest of the configuration is the same.

When viewed in the direction of the axis D191 (the direction of the arrow F-B), the groove D5194L extends in an arc-like curve with its center on the axis D191 side, and the width of the groove is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the connecting pin D213. The width of the groove is constant along the extension direction of the groove D5194L.

In detail, the inner wall surface along the extension direction of the groove D5194L, both the inner wall surface on the side farther from the axis D191 and the inner wall surface on the side closer to the axis D191, have a shape along an arc centered on the axis D191 (a shape obtained by dividing a circle centered on the axis D191 at a specified central angle).

Therefore, the connecting pin D213 is not acted upon (is not abutted against) by both of the inner wall surfaces along the extension direction of the groove D5194L, but is acted upon only by the lower or upper extension end (the end in the direction of the arrow D or the end in the direction of the arrow U) of the groove D5194L (it is displaced upward or downward (pushed down or pushed down) by the inner wall surface at the lower or upper extension end).

As a result, according to this embodiment, not only when the displacement member D180 is displaced from the closed position to the open position, but also when the displacement member D180 is displaced from the open position to the closed position, the operation mode (displacement mode) of the pair of displacement members D180 can be made different from each other (a state can be created in which one of the pair of displacement members D180 is stopped while only the other is displaced (rotated)).

Specifically, when the displacement member D180 is in the open position, a predetermined gap is formed between the connecting pin D213 and the lower extension end of the groove D5194L (the end on the side in the direction of the arrow D, the inner wall surface) (see FIG. 121).

When the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D170 from the second position to the initial position (first position) is started, and accordingly the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D5190 to the initial position is started, the groove D194R The connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194R is displaced upward (pushed up) by the inner wall surface along the extending direction of the groove D194R, and thereby the corresponding displacement member D180 (one of the pair of displacement members D180) Displacement (rotation) from the open position is started.

On the other hand, the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D5194L is not displaced upward (is not pushed up) until it reaches the extending end on the lower side of the groove D5194L (the extending end on the direction of arrow D, the inner wall surface), thereby maintaining the corresponding displacement member D180 (the other of the pair of displacement members D180) in the open position.

When the transmission member D5190 is further displaced (rotated) with the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member from the second position, the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D194R is aligned in the extending direction of the groove D194R. It continues to be displaced (pushed up) upward by the inner wall surface, thereby continuing the displacement (rotation) of the corresponding displacement member D180 (one of the pair of displacement members D180) from the open position to the closed position.

On the other hand, when the connecting pin D213 inserted into the groove D5194L reaches the lower extending end (end in the direction of arrow D, inner wall surface) of the groove D5194L, the connecting pin D213 passes through the groove D5194L. The displacement member D180 (the other of the pair of displacement members D180) starts to be displaced from the open position.

Thereafter, both connecting pins D213 are displaced upward (pushed up), the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced (rotated) toward the closed position, and when the transmission member D190 reaches the initial position, the pair of displacement members D180 is placed in the closed position (see Figure 119).

In this way, in this embodiment, not only the timing at which the pair of displacement members D180 start to displace (rotate) from the closed position to the open position, but also the timing at which they start to displace (rotate) from the open position to the closed position can be made different (one delayed relative to the other). This allows for variation in the manner in which the displacement members D180 are displaced to the closed position, making the game more interesting for players who expect the displacement members D180 to be in an open state (i.e., a state in which it is easy for balls to flow (enter) the sixth passage DRt6).

Next, the lower frame D6086b in the 13th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 127 to 130.

In the eighth embodiment, all balls that flow into (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 are guided to the eighth passage DRt8 (outlet DOPout). In the thirteenth embodiment, however, the ninth passage DRt9 is connected to the sixth passage DRt6, and balls that flow into (enter) the sixth passage DRt6 are guided to either the eighth passage DRt8 (outlet DOPout) or the ninth passage DRt9 (outlet DOP6out). The same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

FIG. 127 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame D6086b in the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 128 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame D6086b. FIG. 129 is a front view of the lower frame D6086b, and FIGS. 130(a) and 130(b) are partially enlarged sectional views of the lower frame D6086b.

Note that FIG. 130(a) corresponds to a cross section taken along the line CXIXa-CXIXa in FIG. 115, and FIG. 130(b) corresponds to a cross section taken along the line CXXIIc-CXXIIc in FIG. 119.

As shown in Figures 127 to 130, the lower frame D6086b in the 13th embodiment is formed with a ninth passage DRt9 that is connected to the middle of the sixth passage DRt6, and an outlet DOP6out that is formed as an opening through which balls guided to the ninth passage DRt9 flow out into the play area.

That is, a ball that flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 and reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6 flows into (enters) the eighth passage DRt8, flows down the eighth passage DRt8, and then flows out from the outlet DOPout into the playing area, while a ball that flows into (enters) the sixth passage DRt6 and flows into (enters) the ninth passage DRt8 midway along the sixth passage DRt6 flows down the ninth passage DRt9, and then flows out from the outlet DOP6out into the playing area.

Here, the outlet DOPout, which is the outlet of the 8th passage DRt8 (the opening that allows the balls to flow out into the play area), is formed (positioned) at a position vertically above the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 110). Therefore, a ball that flows down from the 6th passage DRt6 to the 8th passage DRt8 is likely to win at the first winning opening 64 (there is a high probability of winning at the first winning opening 64).

On the other hand, the outlet DOP6out, which is the outlet of the ninth passage DRt9 (the opening that allows the balls to flow out to the gaming area), is arranged at a different position to one side in the horizontal direction with respect to the first prize opening 64 (see FIG. 110). (The first winning opening 64 is formed (arranged) in a position that does not overlap in the vertical direction). Therefore, the ball that has flown down from the sixth passage DRt6 to the ninth passage DRt9 is less likely to win a prize in the first prize opening 64 (the probability of winning a prize in the first prize opening 64 is higher than that of the ball that has flown down to the eighth passage DRt8 mentioned above). (low).

In this way, in the lower frame D6086b of this embodiment, when a ball reciprocating along the third passage DRt3 in its longitudinal direction is diverted to the sixth passage DRt6, the ball flowing down the sixth passage DRt6 does not flow down to the ninth passage DRt9 on the way, but reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6, making it easier for the ball to win the first winning hole 64 (in this embodiment, the ball is almost guaranteed to win the first winning hole 64). Therefore, when the ball flows down the sixth passage DRt6, in order to increase the probability of the ball winning the first winning hole 64 (ensuring a win), the player can expect the ball to reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6 without flowing down to the ninth passage DRt9 on the way, which increases the interest of the game.

Furthermore, when the ball is flown down to the end of the sixth passage DRt6, the pair of displacement members D180 are displaced to the open position while maximizing the time for the weight of the ball to act on the rolling member D170. (rotated) state (the ball is made easier to enter the sixth path DRt6) can be easily maintained. On the other hand, if the ball flowing down the sixth passage DRt6 flows down to the ninth passage DRt9 midway, the weight of the ball cannot be applied to the rolling member D170, and the pair of displacement members D180 It is displaced (rotated) to the closed position (it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the sixth passage DRt6). Therefore, when the balls flow down the sixth passage DRt6, the pair of displacement members D180 are kept displaced (rotated) to the open position, and the balls are distributed from the third passage DRt3 to the sixth passage DRt6. In order to make it easier, the player can expect to reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6 without flowing down to the ninth passage DRt9 on the way, and from this point as well, the interest of the game can be increased.

The front member D6110 includes an opening DOP6out formed in the front part D111, and a plate-shaped bottom part D6112 that stands up from the back side of the front part D111, and the intermediate member D6140 stands up from the front side of the main body part D141. The main body portion D141 includes a bottom portion D144 and an opening D6148 formed in the main body portion D141.

The bottom surface portion D6112 is formed continuously over the entire longitudinal area of the front surface portion D111, and the bottom surface portion D6144 is formed continuously along the edge of the main body portion D141 in the area excluding the opening D141f, and the erected tip of the bottom surface portion D6112 (on the side in the direction of arrow B) and the erected tip of the bottom surface portion D6144 (on the side in the direction of arrow F) are abutted over the entire area. This prevents foreign objects such as wires from entering from the bottom side of the lower frame D6086b.

A portion of the bottom portions D6112 and D6144 (a portion located below the opening D6148 in the intermediate member D6140) forms a rolling surface of the ninth passage DRt9. The portion forming the rolling surface is formed at a predetermined distance (a distance larger than the diameter of the sphere) from the bottom surface of the first intervening member D150.

The portions of the bottom surface D6112, D6144 that form the rolling surfaces described above are formed with a downward incline toward approximately the center in the longitudinal direction (arrow L-R direction), and the outflow surfaces D6112a, D6144a are recessed in the portions that are lowest in height in the vertical direction (approximately the center in the longitudinal direction).

The outflow surfaces D6112a and D6144a are parts for allowing the balls guided by the bottom surfaces D6112 and D6144 (portions forming rolling surfaces) to flow out to the outflow port DOP6out, and are concave surfaces that slope downward toward the outflow port DOP6out. It is formed as one piece. That is, the opening DOP6out is formed at a position corresponding to the outflow surfaces D6112a and D6144a (a position where the sphere can flow out).

The opening D6148 of the intermediate member D6140 is formed as an opening (hole) that receives the balls rolling on the rolling member D170 (sixth passage DRt6) into the ninth passage DRt9, penetrating the main body D141 in the plate thickness direction (arrow F-B direction). That is, the opening 6148 is formed in one of the pair of side walls that define the sixth passage DRt6, and the upstream end of the ninth passage DRt9 is connected to the middle of the sixth passage DRt6 via the opening 6148.

The dimension of the opening D6148 in the longitudinal direction of the rolling member D170 is set to a size that allows multiple balls (three balls in this embodiment) to pass through at the same time. The lower edge of the opening D6148 is formed at a position lower (in the direction of the arrow U) than the upper surface of the rolling member D170 that is placed in the second position (the position pushed down to the bottom) by the weight of the ball (see FIG. 130(a)), and the upper edge of the opening D6148 is formed at a position that is spaced apart from the upper surface of the rolling member D170 that is placed in the initial position (the first position, the position returned to the top) without the weight of the ball acting thereon, with a distance greater than the diameter of the ball. Therefore, the ball can pass through the opening D6148 regardless of the displacement (rotation) position of the rolling member D170.

The side edge (hereinafter referred to as the "upstream side edge") located on the upstream side (arrow R direction side, right side in Figure 130(a)) of the sixth passage DRt6 of the opening D6148 is disposed downstream (arrow L direction side, left side in Figure 130(a)) of the edge portion on the upstream side (arrow R direction side, right side in Figure 130(a)) of the sixth passage DRt6 of the rolling member D170 in a front view.

In this embodiment, the upstream edge of the opening D6148 is disposed at a position (downstream position) that does not vertically overlap with the opposing space at the base of the pair of displacement members D180. That is, it is located downstream in the sixth passage DRt6 by a predetermined distance (approximately equal to the diameter of a sphere in this embodiment) from the base (opposing surface facing the upstream displacement member D180) of the pair of displacement members D180 that is located downstream in the sixth passage DRt6 (arrow L direction side, left side of Figure 130 (a)).

This prevents a ball that has flowed (entered) between the pair of opposing displacement members D180 and fallen into the sixth passage DRt6 from immediately flowing (entering) into the ninth passage DRt9 through the opening D6148, and allows the ball to roll on the rolling members D170. Therefore, the weight of the ball can be applied to the rolling members D170 to displace (rotate) the pair of displacement members D180 to the open position, and the player can be made to pay attention to whether the ball will reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6, increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, a protrusion D141g is provided on the main body D141 to protrude from the upstream side edge of the opening D6148 at a position on the upstream side of the sixth passage DRt6 (the side in the direction of arrow R, the right side in FIG. 130(b)). Ru. Therefore, when the ball that enters (enters) between the opposing sides of the pair of displacement members D180 and falls into the sixth passage DRt6 rolls on the rolling member D170 along its longitudinal direction, the action of the protrusion D141g (contact) delays the rolling of the ball (reduces the speed), making it easier for the player to grasp the ball rolling on the rolling member D170, and the action (contact) of the protrusion D141g allows the ball to The player can expect the ball to move to the side opposite to the opening D6148 (to the side of the main body D131) and reach the end of the sixth path DRt6. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The side edge (hereinafter referred to as the "downstream side edge") located downstream (arrow L direction side, left side of Figure 130(a)) of the opening D6148 in the sixth passage DRt6 is disposed upstream (arrow R direction side, right side of Figure 130(a)) of the edge portion (axis D171) of the rolling member D170 on the downstream side (arrow L direction side, left side of Figure 130(a)) of the sixth passage DRt6 in a front view.

In this embodiment, the downstream side edge of the opening D6148 is arranged at a position that does not overlap the opening D131d in front view (a position on the upstream side). That is, in the sixth passage DRt6, a predetermined distance (approximately equivalent to the diameter of the sphere in this embodiment) from the upstream side (arrow R direction side, right side in FIG. 130(a)) side edge of the sixth passage DRt6 of the opening D131d. Located on the upstream side.

Thereby, even though the ball has reached the end of the sixth path DRt6, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing (entering) into the ninth path DRt9 through the opening D6148. Therefore, if the ball passes through the downstream side edge of the opening D6148, the player can feel a sense of security that the ball will surely flow (enter the ball) into the eighth passage DRt8. This allows the player to keep an eye on where the ball is going, making the game more interesting.

However, the downstream side edge of the opening D6148 may be arranged at a position overlapping with the opening D131d in front view (a position overlapping with the downstream side edge of the opening D131d or a position on the downstream side). In this case, even after the ball reaches the end of the sixth path DRt6, it is still unclear whether the ball will enter the eighth path DRt8 or the ninth path DRt9. This allows the player to keep an eye on where the ball is going, making the game more interesting.

As described above, the protrusions D131f, D141g are arranged in a staggered pattern, with the protrusion D131f protruding from the main body D131 upstream of the upstream edge of the opening D6148 in the sixth passage DRt6. Therefore, when a ball that has fallen into the sixth passage DRt6 rolls on the rolling member D170, the action (contact) of the protrusion D131f can move (change the rolling direction) the ball toward the opening D6148 (main body D141). That is, the ball affected by the protrusion D131f collides (comes into contact with) the main body D141 located upstream of the upstream edge of the opening 6148 on the sixth passage DRt6 (in the direction of arrow R, to the right in Figures 130(a) and 130(b)), allowing the player to focus on whether the ball is bounced away from the opening D6148 or flows (enters) into the ninth passage DRt9 through the opening D6148, increasing the player's interest in the game.

Further, a plurality of protrusions D131f of the main body portion D131 are arranged between the upstream side edge and the downstream side edge of the opening D6148 at overlapping positions in a front view (see FIG. 130(a)). Thereby, the protrusion D131f acts on (contacts) the ball rolling on the rolling member D170, and a change can be imparted to the rolling direction of the ball (a component of the rolling direction toward the opening D6148). This creates a possibility that the ball will flow into the ninth passageway DRt9 through the opening D6148 due to the contact with the protrusion D131f, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Here, the pachinko machine 10 is placed in a posture tilted by about 1 to 2 degrees with respect to the vertical direction (a so-called "lying" posture, that is, with the top surface facing the back side ( (in the direction of arrow B). In this case, in this embodiment, the opening D6148 is located in a wall portion (main body portion D141) located on the front side (front side of the pachinko machine 10, side in the direction of arrow F) among the wall portions that partition the sixth passageway DRt6. An opening is formed.

As a result, when a ball rolls along the longitudinal direction of the rolling member D170, the "laying" of the pachinko machine 10 makes it easier for the ball to pass through the main body D131 side, and as a result, the protrusion D131f can be easily applied to the ball. On the other hand, the rolling surface (upper surface) of the rolling member D170 is inclined upward from the main body D131 side toward the opening D6148 side due to the "laying" of the pachinko machine 10, so the ball moved toward the opening D6148 by the action of the protrusion D131f can be moved toward the main body D131 side by the downward inclination of the rolling surface (upper surface).

As a result, when the protrusion D131f acts (contacts) the ball relatively strongly, the ball flows (enters) through the opening D6148 into the ninth passage DRt9, whereas when the protrusion D131f acts (contacts) the ball relatively weakly, the ball heading toward the opening D6148 can be returned to the main body D131 by the downward inclination of the rolling surface (upper surface). Therefore, depending on the manner in which the protrusion D131f acts on the ball (such as the speed of the ball when it contacts and the angle of entry of the ball), the rolling behavior of the ball can be changed, making the game more interesting.

Moreover, by utilizing the "laying down" of the pachinko machine 10 in this way, each member of the lower frame D6086b can be configured in a mutually orthogonal relationship. That is, the main body portion D131 and the main body portion D141 are arranged in parallel, and the rolling surface (upper surface) of the rolling member D170 is orthogonal to the main body portions D131, D141 (that is, the axis D171 is arranged in parallel with the main body portion D131, D141). It can be configured such that it is pivoted in a posture orthogonal to D141. Therefore, there is no need to place only some of these members in an inclined position with respect to other members, or to support the shaft D171 in an inclined position, and the structure can be simplified accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to improve the moldability and assemblability of each part. As a result, product costs can be reduced.

Next, the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 131. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

131(a) to 131(c) are partially enlarged rear views of the lower frame D7086b in the fourteenth embodiment, in which the rolling member D170 is located between the initial position (first position) and the second position. A transition state is illustrated when the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) between the closed position and the open position.

In addition, in Fig. 131(a) to Fig. 131(c), the state in which the detouring member D200 is removed is illustrated. Also, Fig. 126(a) corresponds to a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position (see Fig. 119), and Fig. 131(c) corresponds to a state in which the rolling member D170 is disposed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position (see Fig. 121). Fig. 131(b) corresponds to a state in the middle of displacement when the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position (or from the second position to the initial position (first position)) and the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) from the closed position to the open position (or from the open position to the closed position) (see Fig. 120).

As shown in Figures 131(a) to 131(c), the transmission member D7190 in the 14th embodiment includes a display unit D7197 that is disposed on the outer edge of the main body D194 and extends from the outer edge of the main body D194 in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the axis D191. In detail, the display unit D7197 extends upward (in the direction of the arrow U) from the longitudinal end of the main body D194, which is the end opposite the axis D191.

Here, the upper edge (edge on the side of the arrow U direction) of the side wall portion D132 of the back member D130 and the upper edge (edge on the side of the arrow U direction) of the side wall portion D142 of the intermediate member D140 are positioned (height position) approximately the same in the up-down direction (arrow U-D direction).

As shown in FIG. 131(a), when the rolling member D170 is placed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 119), the longitudinal end (end opposite the axis D191) of the main body D194 is positioned at the uppermost position (arrow U direction side) as the transmission member D7190 is displaced (rotated). As a result, the extended tip side (part) of the display unit D7197 protrudes (is positioned) above the upper edge (edge on the arrow U direction side) of the side wall portion D132 of the back member D130, and the protruding portion is visible to the player.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 131(c), when the rolling member D170 is placed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is placed in the open position (see FIG. 121), the longitudinal end of the main body D194 (the end opposite the axis D191) is placed at the lowest position (arrow D direction side) due to the displacement (rotation) of the transmission member D7190. As a result, the entire display unit D7197 is immersed (placed) below the upper edge (edge on the arrow U direction side) of the side wall portion D132 of the back member D130 (the entire display unit D7197 is placed on the back side of the side wall portion D132). Therefore, the player cannot directly see the display unit D7197. However, it is possible to see the display unit D7197 through the intermediate member D140 and the back member D130.

In this way, the amount of protrusion (protruding dimension) of the extended tip side (part) of the display unit D7197 protruding from the upper edge (edge on the arrow U direction side) of the back member D130 (side wall portion D132) is maximum when the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 119) as shown in FIG. 131(a). As shown in FIG. 131(b) when the weight of the ball acts on the rolling member D170 and the displacement member D180 is displaced from the closed position toward the open position, the above-mentioned amount of protrusion (size of the part visible to the player) gradually decreases, and is minimum (not protruding and not visible to the player) when the displacement member D180 is placed in the open position (see FIG. 121).

Therefore, the player can grasp the displacement state of the displacement member D180 (whether it is in the open or closed position) by visually checking whether the extended tip side (part) of the display portion D7197 protrudes above the upper edge (edge in the direction of arrow U) of the back member D130 (side wall portion D132). Furthermore, the player can grasp the displacement state of the displacement member D180 (whether it is in a position between the open and closed positions) by visually checking the amount of protrusion (protrusion dimension).

Next, the lower frame D8086b in the 15th embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 132 to 134.

In the 13th embodiment, the protrusion amount (protrusion dimension) of the protrusion D131f toward the rolling member D170 is constant regardless of the displacement (rotation) position of the rolling member D170. However, in the 15th embodiment, the protrusion amount (protrusion dimension) of the protrusion D131f toward the rolling member D8170 changes (increases or decreases) depending on the displacement (rotation) position of the rolling member D170. Note that the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description is omitted.

Here, the lower frame D8086b in the 15th embodiment has the same configuration (e.g., shape and number) as D6086b in the 13th embodiment, except that the protrusion D131f includes the second protrusion D131fa and the weight of the weight portion D8174 of the rolling member D8170 is different. Therefore, a description of the configuration other than the second protrusion D131fa and the rolling member D6087 will be omitted.

Figures 132(a) and 132(b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame D8086b in the fifteenth embodiment, and correspond to the cross section taken along line CXIXa-CXIXa in Figure 115. Note that Figure 132(a) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D8170 is disposed in the initial position (first position) and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position (see Figure 119), while Figure 132(b) illustrates a state in which the rolling member D8170 is disposed in the second position and the displacement member D180 is disposed in the open position (see Figure 121).

Figure 133(a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame D8086b taken along line CXXXIIIa-CXXXIIIa in Figure 132(a), and Figure 133(b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame D8086b taken along line CXXXIIIb-CXXXIIIb in Figure 132(b). Figure 134 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame D8086b, and corresponds to the cross section taken along line CXXIIc-CXXIIc in Figure 119.

As shown in FIGS. 132 to 134, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) protrusions D131f provided on the back member D8130 have rolling contact from predetermined (two in this embodiment) protrusions D131f. A second protrusion D131fa is provided to protrude toward the member D8170. In the present embodiment, the (predetermined) protrusion D131f from which the second protrusion D131fa protrudes is located on the downstream side (arrow There are two protrusions D131f located on the L direction side).

The body part D172 of the rolling member D8170 has a recess formed on the side (edge) facing the back member D8130, which is recessed in the protruding direction of the protrusion D131f (the direction in which the protrusion D131f is received) when viewed from above (see FIG. 134). The recesses are arranged at multiple locations (four locations in this embodiment) at predetermined intervals (approximately equal intervals in this embodiment) along the longitudinal direction of the body part D172 of the rolling member D8170. That is, the recesses are formed (recessed) at positions facing the protrusions D131f.

Note that in this embodiment, the shape of the recess when viewed from above is curved into an arc. However, the shape may be rectangular. That is, the shape of the rolling member D8170 is not limited as long as it has a size that does not interfere with the second protrusion D131fa when the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated).

The second protrusion D131fa protrudes from the front surface (surface facing the direction of arrow F) of the protrusion D131f toward the recess of the rolling member D8170 (main body D172) described above, and the protruding tip side (part) of the second protrusion D131fa is received in the recess of the rolling member D8170 (main body D172) described above (positioned in the internal space of the recess) when viewed from above (see FIG. 134). That is, when viewed from above, part of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D8170 (main body D172) is formed by the second protrusion D131fa.

The protruding tip of the second protrusion D131fa is curved to have an arc-like cross section. However, the cross section of the second protrusion D131fa may be substantially rectangular. The protruding direction of the second protrusion D131fa is the same as the protruding direction of the protrusion D131f. However, the protruding direction of the second protrusion D131fa may be a different direction (inclined direction) from the protruding direction of the protrusion D131f.

The height position (position in the direction of arrows U-D) of the second protrusion D131fa is set so that when the rolling member D8170 is placed in the initial position (first position), the upper surface (surface on the side in the direction of arrow U) of the second protrusion D131fa is substantially the same as or slightly lower than the upper surface (rolling surface of the ball) of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D8170 (see FIG. 133(a)), and when the rolling member D8170 is placed in the second position, the upper surface (surface on the side in the direction of arrow U) of the second protrusion D131fa is higher than the upper surface (rolling surface of the ball) of the main body part D172 of the rolling member D8170 (see FIG. 133(b)).

In other words, when the rolling member D8170 is disposed in the initial position (first position), the side of the second protrusion D131fa (the surface facing the upstream side of the sixth passage DRt6, the surface on the right side in Figures 132(a) and 132(b)) is disposed at a position (in the direction of arrow D) lower than the upper surface of the main body part D172 (the rolling surface of the ball), so that the side of the second protrusion D131fa does not come into contact with (does not act on) the ball passing through the sixth passage DRt6 (rolling on the upper surface of the main body part D172).

On the other hand, when the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) by a predetermined amount from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the side surface of the second protrusion D131fa (facing the upstream side of the sixth passage DRt6) The sixth The side surface of the second projection D131fa can be brought into contact (acted) with the ball passing through the passage DRt6 (rolling on the upper surface of the main body portion D172).

Note that when the rolling member D8170 is placed in the second position, the side surface of the second protrusion D131fa that is placed at a higher position (on the arrow U direction side) than the upper surface (rolling surface of the ball) of the main body portion D172 The area of is assumed to be the maximum. Therefore, in this case, even if the ball rolls (moves in the sixth passage DRt6) while bouncing on the rolling surface, the side surface of the second protrusion D131fa is brought into contact with (acts on) the ball. It's easy to do.

The second protrusion D131fa is formed on the opposite side of the opening D6148 across the rolling member D8170 (main body D172). That is, the second protrusion D131fa protrudes toward the opening D6148. When a ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is acted upon by the second protrusion D131fa (when it comes into contact with the second protrusion D131fa), the ball is caused to roll toward the opening D6148 (ninth passage DRt9) in reaction to the action (contact), and the ball is more likely to flow (enter) into the opening D6148 (ninth passage DRt9). That is, the ball is less likely to reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6.

In an unloaded state (a state in which the weight of the ball is not acting on the rolling member D8170 (main body portion D172) (a state in which the ball is not rolling on the main body portion D172), as described above, the center of gravity of the rolling member D8170 as a whole is located (eccentric) toward the weight portion D8174 side from the axis D171, and the rolling member D8170 is maintained (or returned) to the initial position (first position). On the other hand, in a state in which a ball rolls on the main body portion D172 of the rolling member D8170 and the center of gravity of the rolling member D8170 as a whole including the ball is located (eccentric) toward the main body portion D172 side (the opposite side of the axis D171 from the weight portion D8174), the main body portion D172 is displaced (lowered) downward (in the direction of the arrow D) (disposed in the second position).

In this case, in the present embodiment, when one ball is located at position DP (see FIG. 132) of main body portion D172 (state where the weight of one ball acts on position DP), the rotation including that ball is The weight of the weight portion D8174 is set so that the center of gravity of the entire moving member D8170 is located on the axis D171.

That is, assuming a static state in which the balls do not roll, one ball is located upstream of the position DP of the main body D172 (on the opposite side to the axis D171) (the weight of one ball is acts on the position DP), the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) in the direction toward the second position, and one ball is located on the position DP of the main body D172 (the weight of the ball acts on the ball). ) state, the rolling member D8170 is balanced around the axis D171 (that is, the force that displaces (rotates) the rolling member D8170 is not formed), and is located downstream of the position DP of the main body portion D172 (on the axis D171 side). ) (the weight of the one ball acts on the position DP), the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) in the direction toward the first position.

According to the rolling member D8170 configured in this way, one ball from the third passage DRt3 is placed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling member D8170 (main body portion D172) at the initial position (first position). When the ball is flown down, the weight of the ball (and the momentum of the fall) causes the main body portion D172 to be displaced downward (in the direction of arrow D), and the rolling member D8170 is disposed at the second position.

When the ball rolls on the upper surface of the main body D172 toward the downstream side (position DP), the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D8170 including the ball gradually approaches the axis D171, so that the main body D172 is gradually displaced (rotated) upward (in the direction of arrow U), and rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position.

When the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body portion D172 reaches position DP, the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D8170 continues in the direction toward the first position due to the influence of the inertial force associated with the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D8170 up to that point, and when the ball passes position DP, the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D8170 including the ball is decentered toward the weight portion D8174, accelerating the displacement (rotation) of the rolling member D8170 in the direction toward the first position.

In the present embodiment, after the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 passes the position DP, the rolling member D8170 moves before reaching the second protrusion D131fa located on the upstream side (in the direction of the arrow R). placed in the second position. That is, when only one ball flows down (enters the ball) into the sixth passage DRt6, the second protrusion D131fa does not act on (contact) the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body portion D172.

However, due to factors such as the downstream position and direction of the ball from the third passage DRt3, and collisions with the displacement member D180 during the flow, the speed (rolling speed) of the ball toward the downstream side may be average. If the speed is faster than the rolling member D8170, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the main body D172 reaches the upstream (or downstream) second protrusion D131fa before the rolling member D8170 is placed in the second position. As a result, the ball may be acted upon by the second protrusion D131fa. In other words, even when only one ball is rolling, a case can be created in which the action of the second protrusion D131fa can be applied to the ball, making the player pay attention to the influence of the above-mentioned factors, and increasing the interest of the game. can be increased.

In addition, in this embodiment, the distance between the second protrusion D131fa located on the upstream side (arrow R direction side) and the position DP is set to approximately twice the diameter of the sphere. However, this distance can be set arbitrarily. When only one ball is rolled, by shortening the above-mentioned distance, the action of the second protrusion D131fa can be easily imparted to the ball, while by increasing the above-mentioned distance, the second protrusion This makes it difficult to apply the effect of the protrusion D131fa to the ball.

Here, in the present embodiment, in a state where two balls are located on the main body portion D172 (a state where the weight of the two balls acts), regardless of the respective positions of the two balls (for example, Even if both balls are located downstream of the position DP (between the axis D171 and the position DP), the center of gravity of the entire rolling member D8170 including those balls is located at the main body D172 rather than the axis D171. The weight of the weight portion D8174 is set so that it is eccentric to the side.

Therefore, for example, when only one ball rolls on the main body D172 and the rolling position of the ball exceeds the position DP, the rolling member D8170 is placed at the initial position (first position). Even in the state (that is, the state in which the second protrusion D131fa is not acting on (abutting) the ball and the ball is expected to reach the end of the sixth path DRt6), other balls are in the third path DRt3. When the balls flow into the sixth passage DRt6 (the two balls are positioned on the upper surface of the rolling member D8170 (main body portion D172)), the rolling member D8170 is placed in the second position. (or at least displaced (rotated) toward the second position), and the second protrusion D131fa can act on (contact) the ball (a state in which the ball easily flows into (enters into) the ninth passage DRt9 ) can be formed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, if only one ball (ball rolling on the rolling member D8170 (main body portion D172)) enters the sixth passage DRt6, the ball is given a second bump. By making it difficult for the part D131fa to act (contact), it is possible to make it easier for the ball to reach the end of the sixth passage DRt6 (allowing it to enter the first prize opening 64), while the first ball is rolled. In this state, when the second ball further flows down (enters the ball) into the sixth passage DRt6, the second protrusion D131fa acts on (contacts) the first ball, and the second ball is brought into contact with the end of the sixth passage DRt6. 1 ball can be made difficult to reach.

That is, since the ball that reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6 enters the first winning hole 64 (see FIG. 110) via the eighth passage DRt8, the player expects the ball to flow (enter) from the third passage DRt3 into the sixth passage DRt6 when there are no balls on the rolling member D8170. On the other hand, after the first ball flows (enters) into the sixth passage DRt6, the player expects that the next ball (second ball) will not flow (enter) further into the sixth passage DRt6 so that the second protrusion D131fa will not act (contact) on the first ball. In this way, the player is not always expected to flow (enter) into the sixth passage DRt6, but the expected situation can be changed depending on the number of balls that enter the sixth passage DRt6, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In particular, in this embodiment, as the first ball approaches the position DP, the rolling member D8170 is displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position, and the displacement member D180 is moved to the open position. is gradually displaced (rotated) from to the closed position. When the first ball passes the position DP, the rolling member D8170 is placed in the first position and the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position.

That is, as the first ball approaches the second protrusion D131fa, the displacement member D180 is gradually displaced (rotated) toward the closed position, and the second ball flows from the third passage DRt3 into the sixth passage DRt6 ( Entering the ball) can be difficult. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the first ball will reach the end of the sixth path DRt6.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced by part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment. The same applies to the modified examples (other embodiments) shown below, where part or all of the configuration in one modified example may be combined with or replaced by part or all of the configuration in another modified example to form another modified example. Any embodiment may be applied to the modified examples shown below, and any modified example (combination or replacement of modified examples) may be applied to any embodiment.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the balls once flow down to the front side by the sorting device 300 and then flow down to the rear, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the time required for the ball to flow down may be ensured by forming a plurality of path bends or by forming a deceleration convex portion that decelerates the ball, without forming a part that flows down toward the front side.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the lower bottom surface of the front design member 141 of the second winning opening 140 has a curved surface shape, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and the falling of the ball is blocked by contact. Any shape that can be used is fine. For example, it may be configured with an inclined planar shape, or may be formed with a large number of small protrusions protruding from the planar surface, so that an irregular load can be applied to the colliding ball.

In the above first embodiment, a ball that enters the specific winning opening 65a flows down the sorting device 300 primarily through the flow path components 334 to 336 in order, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, an opening penetrating downwards may be formed in the center of the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a, allowing the ball to flow directly into the third flow path component 336 through this opening.

For example, when balls enter one ball at a time, the ball does not pass through the opening, but when a plurality of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a as a group, the ball can pass through the opening. Also good. In this case, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be changed depending on whether the ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a passes through the opening or not.

In the first embodiment, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 are arranged behind the specific winning opening 65a, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may be arranged directly below the downstream end of the second flow path configuration section 335. In this case, the order of the first flow path configuration section 334 and the second flow path configuration section 335 may be reversed. In other words, when the ball enters the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, the branch to each detection sensor SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after flowing down in the left and right directions, or the branch to each detection sensor SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after flowing down in the front and back directions (flowing down toward the front side).

In the first embodiment, the flow path direction and inclination of each flow path component 334-336 were described as features of the sorting device 300 alone, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when installing the pachinko machine 10 on an island, the flow path direction and inclination may be designed taking into account the "laying down" that is performed on a daily basis.

Laying refers to installing the pachinko machine 10 not in a vertical position but in a tilted state in the front-rear direction. Usually, a pachinko machine is installed in a position where it is tilted backwards by approximately one degree. Compared to the explanation of the above-mentioned sorting device 300 alone (state without aging), considering the installation angle of about 1 degree, the first flow path forming part 334 and the second flow path having an inclination in the front and back direction. The meaning of the slope of the component 336 changes.

In other words, as described above, the sorting device 300 alone is designed so that the first flow path component 334 is inclined downward from the horizontal by 7 degrees to the front, and the third flow path component 336 is inclined downward from the horizontal by 5 degrees to the rear, but when the installation angle is considered, both the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336 form flow paths that are inclined downward by 6 degrees. On the other hand, the second flow path component 335 is inclined in the left-right direction, so it is less affected by the installation angle and can be considered to be inclined at about 5 degrees, as described above.

In this case, the acceleration of the balls flowing down through the sorting device 300 is the same in the first flow path component 334 and the third flow path component 336, and the acceleration is slightly smaller in the second flow path component 335. This allows the speed at which the balls flow down in the left and right directions to be slowed down, making it easier for the player to see the balls flowing down the second flow path component 335. Also, since the first flow path component 334 remains shorter than the third flow path component 336, the balls can pass through the first flow path component 334 in a shorter time than they pass through the third flow path component 336.

In this way, the flow of the balls inside the sorting device 300 is affected by the laying of the pachinko machine 10 because it has flow paths in the front-to-rear direction. Therefore, if the inclination angle of each flow path component 334, 336 is made smaller than the laying angle (approximately 1 degree), the flow direction of the balls in the flow path components 334, 336 will change (reverse) depending on the quality of the laying (angle setting), so the inclination angle needs to be set to an angle larger than the laying angle.

In addition, in a configuration in which the flow of the balls inside the sorting device 300 has a flow path in the front and back direction, and the flow path is visible, slight differences in the flow speed of the balls flowing down the flow path may cause There is a possibility that the degree of laziness of the pachinko machine 10 can be ascertained. If you really want to understand the degree of aging, the flow path of the sorting device 300 should be configured to be easily visible.

On the other hand, in the first embodiment, in order to prevent the degree of "rest" from being understood from slight differences in the speed at which the ball flows down, the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 are arranged to surround the front periphery of each flow path component 334-336, the variable winning device 65 is arranged to cover the upper side, and the light diffusion surface 340 is arranged to reduce visibility on the lower side.

In this way, the visibility of the balls flowing down each flow path component 334-336 is made poor except at the player's normal line of sight (a range of 0 degrees to approximately 30 degrees from the front). This makes it possible to avoid the degree of "rest" of the pachinko machine 10 being understood by comparing the flow speed of the balls flowing down each flow path component 334-336.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the slope of the first flow path forming part 334 is larger than the slope of the third flow path forming part 336, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, this slope relationship may be reversed, or the slopes may be configured with the same slope.

Further, although each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 has been described as a straight flow path bent to form a spiral flow path, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may have a meandering shape or may have a stepwise bent flow path shape.

Furthermore, although the flow path is configured to be bent at right angles at the connection points of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may be bent at an acute angle or may be bent at an obtuse angle at the connection point. Additionally, crunes may be employed as each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336.

Although the first embodiment described above is designed such that the time required for the ball to pass through the third flow path forming section 336 is 0.3 seconds, the design is not limited to this. For example, it may be designed such that the time required to pass through the third flow path forming portion 336 is 1 second (0.6 seconds or more). As a result, even if the ball enters the sorting device 300 while maintaining the firing interval (0.6 seconds), the ball on the upstream side flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 is transferred to the ball on the downstream side. In this case, the third flow path forming portion 336 can be made to function as a blindfold for the balls flowing down.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the flow time of the ball is ensured by ensuring the path length of the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, protrusions are provided that are elongated and protrude alternately from both inner walls of the path up to the slide displacement member 370 in a direction intersecting the downward direction of the game ball, and the protrusions collide with the game balls. It may also be configured to slow down the ball. Thereby, it is possible to ensure the time for the ball to flow down without increasing the path length.

The deceleration ridges may be evenly arranged over the entire range of the path up to the slide displacement member 370, or may be unevenly arranged. For example, by forming no ridges on the first flow path component 334 and the second flow path component 335, and forming ridges only on the third flow path component 336, the balls can be made to quickly reach the third flow path component 336 while flowing slowly down the third flow path component 336.

Further, the direction in which the protrusions are provided may be such that they are protruded alternately from the left and right directions toward the inside of the ball's downward path, or they may be protruded from the bottom to the top at a predetermined interval. You can also go in that direction.

In the case of a protrusion from the left and right, the load applied to the ball from the protrusion has a left and right component, so it is preferable to consider the arrangement so that the ball is not erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by this load. For example, at the position closest to the slide displacement member 370, by protruding from the left and right outer walls toward the left and right inner sides, the load from the protrusions is directed not toward the normal detection sensor SE12 side but toward the partition plate section 338 side. By doing so, it is possible to easily avoid the ball being erroneously guided to the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of protruding upward from the bottom, the protrusion itself may function as a cover for the slide displacement member 370, so it is preferable to design the height and position of the protrusion in consideration of the player's line of sight. .

The protrusions may be formed so that they can move in and out. In this case, they may be able to block the flow of the ball when in the protruding state, and resume the flow of the ball when in the retracted state.

In the first embodiment, the case where the front side of the slide displacement member 370 is covered by the balls flowing down the front side is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable decorative member may be placed in front of the sorting device 300, and the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 may be covered by this decorative member. This decorative member may be driven, or may be operated by the weight of the balls.

In addition, the case where the ball provides a screen is not limited to the case where the ball is placed on the front side. For example, if a mirror is placed on the back side of the sliding displacement member 370 and the state of the sliding displacement member 370 is visually confirmed using the reflection of the mirror, the screen function can be achieved by placing the ball between the sliding displacement member 370 and the mirror.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball reaching the slide displacement member 370 is blindfolded, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first winning hole 64 may be placed behind the gaming area like the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, and the first winning hole 64 may be blindfolded, or the other general winning hole 63 may be blindfolded. Anything is fine.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the channel forming portions 334 to 336 are formed from linear channels capable of guiding balls one by one, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a meandering flow path, or may be formed as a flow path with multiple branches, or the flow path width may be large or small, and in areas where the flow path width is large, balls may easily accumulate. may be configured.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which a blindfolding effect is created by the balls heading toward the slide displacement member 370, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a discharge path for discharging balls that have entered the other winning holes 63, 64, 65, and 140 may be arranged in front of the slide displacement member 370 (for example, arranged so as to intersect at the front side), and the slide displacement member 370 may be blindfolded by the discharge path and the balls arranged on the discharge path.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a exclusively passes through the first flow path configuration section 334 and flows to the second flow path configuration section 335 side (near side). It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a seesaw-like distribution mechanism that distributes the balls is disposed downstream of the specific winning opening 65a, and the distribution mechanism selects the balls flowing toward the second flow path configuration part 335, so that some of the balls are sorted. The ball may flow toward the second flow path forming portion 335 side.

The distribution mechanism may be one that is displaced by the weight of the balls, or may be driven by a drive device to perform a certain operation from the opening and closing of the opening and closing plate 65b, or may be controlled to operate in a certain pattern from the power-on of the pachinko machine.

When controlling the drive, for example, the balls may be controlled to flow to the second flow path component 335 side when the type of winning ball changes. For example, when a ball enters a specific winning port 65a and the number of balls that enter exceeds the count number (10 balls/round) (excess winning), the balls may be configured to flow to the second flow path component 335 side. In this case, the number of balls flowing down the second flow path component 335 side can be compared with the number of excess winning balls paid out, allowing the player to quickly grasp the additional profit that can be obtained. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

Also, for example, in a configuration in which a ball that enters the first winning port 64 flows down the distribution device 300, if a ball enters when the number of reserved special symbols 1 is four (full), the ball may be configured to flow to the second flow path configuration section 335 side. In this case, by visually checking the ball flowing on the second flow path configuration section 335 side, the player can be made aware that the number of reserved special symbols 1 is full. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

If the displacement is caused by the weight of the ball, a predetermined action may be repeated each time a ball arrives, or it may be configured to perform a different action depending on the number of arriving balls. For example, when one ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the balls may not flow toward the second flow path configuration section 335, and when two or more balls enter the specific winning openings 65a together, the balls may flow toward the second flow path configuration section 335. The reverse may also be possible.

Furthermore, these operating modes may be the same downstream of the detection sensors SE1 arranged in a pair on the left and right of the specific winning opening 65a, or may be configured to be different on the left and right.

Here, if the time for the ball to flow down from the specific prize opening 65a to the slide displacement member 370 is long, the game may be delayed due to the long ball ejection time. Therefore, for example, by using the above-mentioned distribution mechanism, a certain number of balls that have entered the specific winning hole 65a are allowed to flow down to the second channel forming part 335 side, and subsequent balls are The liquid may be discharged without passing through the flow path forming section 335. Thereby, there is no need to wait for the counted number of balls to flow down the flow path forming parts 334 to 336, so the length between rounds can be set short.

In the first embodiment, the distribution device 300 is disposed below the third pattern display device 81, and the balls are directed toward the front near the bottom end of the play area, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the specific winning port 65a may be disposed above the bottom edge of the third pattern display device 81, and the flow path components 334-336 of the distribution device 300 may be disposed adjacent to the third pattern display device 81 or toward the front of the display area when viewed from the front.

In this case, the line of sight for viewing the balls flowing down the sorting device 300 can be made to be the line of sight facing the display area side of the third symbol display device 81. In this case, by associating the size of the profit that the player obtains from the falling ball on the distribution device 300 with the content of the notification on the liquid crystal display, the player can check the display to determine whether the profit is large or small. You can easily check whether you have earned it or not.

In addition, although a case has been described in which the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 is visually recognized at a position shifted downward in front view with respect to the ball rolling on the third flow path component 336, this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 may be arranged in such a manner that the ball rolling on the third flow path forming part 336 is not vertically displaced when viewed from the front and can be visually recognized as overlapping the ball rolling on the third flow path forming part 336. Also good. In this case, not only the balls that have entered the sorting device 300 but also the balls rolling on the inner rail 61 can function as a screen for the balls flowing down the third flow path forming section 336.

In the above first embodiment, the operation pattern Y of the slide displacement member 370 is described as switching the slide displacement member 370 to the front position at a time when the ball that entered the specific winning hole 65a cannot reach it, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the slide displacement member 370 may be controlled to switch to the front position 1.2 seconds after the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In this case, the forward flow ball that has reached the slide displacement member 370 before 1.2 seconds has elapsed can be caused to enter the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, the trailing ball that flows to follow the leading ball and reaches the slide displacement member 370 after 1.2 seconds has passed enters the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12.

Here, if the trailing ball is in a positional relationship that functions as a blindfold for the front ball, the player can set the timing at which the flow of the front ball changes toward the probability change detection sensor SE11 (downward) to the trailing ball. It is hidden and cannot be seen. Furthermore, since the trailing ball normally enters the detection sensor SE12, the player may assume that the ball does not enter the probability change detection sensor SE11.

In this way, it is possible to make it appear as if the ball has not entered the through hole of the probability change detection sensor SE11, so that the display effect of the time saving state and the probability variation state can be made similar to maintain the player's sense of expectation. In a gaming machine, the presentation effect of the display presentation can be improved.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball that collides with the left and right inner protrusions 318 does not flow toward the normal detection sensor SE12 due to the load caused by the collision alone, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the flow path on the upstream side of the left and right inner protrusions 318 may be configured so that the speed and rotation of the ball until it is guided to the left and right inner protrusions 318 can be configured in multiple types (for example, The degree of freedom in the downward direction of the ball is increased by arranging a It may be configured so that it can be guided by the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the above first embodiment, the sliding displacement member 370 and each of the protruding portions 317 to 319 are formed as separate bodies, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the protruding portions 317 to 319 may be integrally formed with the sliding displacement member 370. In other words, at least one of the protruding portions 317 to 319 may protrude from the upper protruding portion 376 of the sliding displacement member 370.

In the first embodiment, the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370 is described as operation pattern Y, which takes into account the possibility of being hidden by the ball, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is also possible to incorporate control that causes the LED of the light-emitting means 351 to emit light when it is hidden by the ball.

In the above first embodiment, the case where the displacement resistance of the axis O1 is changed by the shape of the guide slot 616 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement resistance may be changed by changing the width length of the guide slot 616 to form an external phase of the gap, or the displacement resistance may be changed by using magnetic force or the biasing force of a coil spring.

In the first embodiment, the shape of the guide slot 616 is bent at an intermediate position, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be bent multiple times. In this case, a plurality of positions can be formed where the resistance to vertical displacement of the axis O1 increases.

The shape of the guide slot 616 may also be designed for the purpose of varying the magnitude of the change in angle θ during rotation of the rotating member 620. For example, the guide slot 616 may be formed in a shape capable of guiding the supported member 640 so as to partially form a range in which the magnitude of the angle θ during rotation of the rotating member 620 can be maintained.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the guide slot 616 is fixed, but the guide hole 616 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of guide slots 616 are formed in which the axis O1 is movable, and the axis O1 is changed by a predetermined switching means (for example, another drive device or a button-type switching device that is switched by contacting the rotating member 620). The guide elongated hole 616 to be guided may be configured to be switchable, or the guide elongated hole 616 may be configured to be able to change shape.

In the first embodiment described above, a configuration has been described in which the second decorative rotating member 660 is placed on the right side of the third symbol display device 81 and the first presentation surface 661a is directed diagonally forward and to the left, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not a thing. For example, it may be configured such that the performance surface is directed forward and diagonally to the right when it is placed on the left side of the third symbol display device 81, or when it is placed on the lower side (upper side) of the third symbol display device 81. The display surface may be configured to face diagonally upward (downward) in the front direction.

In the first embodiment, the rotating member 620 is arranged on the proximal side of the displacement, but the structure is not limited to this. good. On the other hand, the use of the rotating member 620 instead of the linearly moving member functions favorably to ensure the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b.

For example, when a laterally sliding member is fixed to the driven side of the supported member 640, the angles that affect the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the overhanging decorative portion 652b are limited to angles above the horizontal (angle a1, etc.). In contrast, when the rotating member 620 is used, not only angles above the horizontal but also angles below the horizontal (angle b1, etc.) can be used. Regardless of this advantageous effect, a linearly sliding member may be connected to the driven side of the supported member 640.

In the above first embodiment, the second decorative rotating member 660 is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped, and decorations are applied to three sides that intersect at right angles, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second decorative rotating member 660 may be formed with a pentagonal cross section, and each side may be configured to be controlled to stop in a position facing forward.

In the first embodiment, the decorative fixing member 670 is a fixed decorative member, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be provided. In this case, it is possible to easily switch between displays that are easily viewed as one with the first operating unit 600 and the second operating unit 700.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the rotation axis of the rotation member 620 and the second decorative rotation member 660 can intersect at right angles, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotation member 660 may be configured with the front-rear component as an axis (as an oblique rotation axis).

In the above first embodiment, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 is set to make it easier to maintain the second operating unit 700 in the intermediate performance state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet may be arranged near the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and this magnet may be configured to generate an adhesive force between itself and a magnet arranged on the right front plate member 710, so that this adhesive force is easily generated when the second operating unit 700 is in the intermediate performance state.

Further, for example, instead of forming the inclined portions 751 and 762 linearly, they may be formed in a curved shape such as a wave shape or a sawtooth shape. Further, when using the coil spring CS2, the biasing force is not limited to one that is generated only when the coil spring CS2 is compressed, but may be configured so that the biasing force is generated in response to the expansion displacement of the coil spring CS2.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the posture of the shaft rotating member 785 is maintained by elastically deforming the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c until the attraction force of the magnet Mg is exceeded, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, instead of using the elastic deformation of the gear, a tolerance may be provided for the sliding friction between the rotating shaft and the support cylinder that supports the shaft.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the covering member 787 rises from below and enters the front side from the rear end of the gaming area, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a mode may be adopted in which it protrudes to the front side by downward displacement. In this case, the upper edge of the center frame 86 may be crossed from below to the front, or the upper edge of the center frame 86 may be extended forward from above the gaming area (for example, above the front frame 14).

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the rotation of the covering member 787 is in the opposite direction so that the sub decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 are not visually recognized together, thereby reducing the discriminating ability. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. isn't it. For example, instead of a mode in which the sub decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 rotate while facing the front side, it may be a mode in which they rotate while facing left and right outwards. Further, even if the rotation is in the same direction, the rotation angle may be shifted.

In the first embodiment described above, the second operating unit 700 and the third operating unit 800 are configured to rotate (reverse) the shaft rotating member 785 and the rotating member 834 using the rotation angle of the link mechanism (intermediate arm member 783, intermediate arm member 850), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a configuration in which a groove is dug in a single stroke in the metal rod 832 that guides the rotating member 834 and a protruding piece protruding from the rotating member 834 is inserted into the groove, the rotation timing of the rotating member 834 can be determined depending on the design of the groove.

In the above first embodiment, a case has been described in which control is performed such that it is determined that the switching rotation operation has been switched to the integral rotation operation when the output of the detection sensor 813 changes from a state in which the detectable portion 844 is arranged on the detection sensor 813, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the drive direction of the drive motor 861 is reversed with the detectable portion 844 not arranged on the detection sensor 813, it may be determined that the switching rotation operation has been switched to the integral rotation operation by detecting that the detectable portion 844 has entered the detection sensor 813.

In the first embodiment, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are configured to differ in places, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the magnet Mg2 may be disposed on both decorative members 870 and 880, or both decorative members 870 and 880 may be plated.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation are clearly separated by providing the torque limiter 866, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an oil damper that generates viscous resistance may be provided. In addition, in the case of an oil damper, resistance continues to occur regardless of the switching of the operation mode, so a torque limiter is better at reducing displacement resistance in the rotational direction after the operation mode is switched to integral rotation operation. This makes it easy to realize high-speed rotation after switching to integral rotation operation.

In the above first embodiment, the case where the light LD1 is reflected to the front side by the plating portion 871a has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light may be reflected by the metal rod 832. During the integral rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is arranged on the base end side (inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832, so that the metal rod 832 is hidden by the linear motion member 833. However, when the linear motion member 833 is arranged on the tip side (outer diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832 during the switching rotation operation, the base end side (inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832 is exposed, so that the light LD1 can be reflected.

In the above second to seventh embodiments, the balls roll in series on the bottom surface C142, C2142 of the first intermediate member C140, C2140, and only one ball flows into the distribution member C170, C2170, C3170 (receiving portion C172, C2172, C3172 or rolling portion C173, C2173, C3173) at a time. However, the bottom surface C142, C2142 of the first intermediate member C140, C2140 may be configured so that two or more balls can roll in parallel on the bottom surface C142, C2142, and two or more balls can flow into the distribution member C170, C2170, C3170 (receiving portion C172, C2172, C3172 or rolling portion C173, C2173, C3173) at a time.

In the second to seventh embodiments described above, a case was described in which a ball flowing down the area of the play area on the left side as viewed from the front (left side in FIG. 72) (the area between center frame C86 (upper frame C86a) and rail 61) flows into (enters) lower frames C86b, C2086b, and C3086b. However, instead of or in addition to this, a configuration may also be used in which a ball flowing down the area of the play area on the right side as viewed from the front (right side in FIG. 72) flows into (enters) lower frames C86b, C2086b, and C3086b.

In the second to seventh embodiments described above, a case has been described in which one upper frame passage CRt0 is communicated with the intake ports COPin and COP2000in, but a plurality of upper frame passages CRt0 are formed in the upper frame C86b, and they are connected to each other. It may be configured to communicate with the receiving ports COPin and COP2000in.
In the second to seventh embodiments described above, the distribution members C170, C2170, and C3170 are returned to the first position by their own weight. It may be applied as an auxiliary force when the portion members C170, C2170, and C3170 return to the first position. Alternatively, it may be applied as an auxiliary force when the distribution members C170, C2170, and C3170 are displaced to the second position. Note that examples of the biasing means include coil springs, torsion springs, leaf springs, and the like.

In the second and third embodiments described above, the distribution members C170, C2170 are directly supported on the shafts C192, C2174, but the distribution members C170, C2170 may be displaceable by a link mechanism. In this case, the link mechanism may be a parallel link mechanism or an unequal length link mechanism.

In the above third embodiment, a passage (fourth passage CRt2004) through which the balls that roll on the rolling portion C2173 of the sorting member C2170 pass is formed by the magnetic portion C2400, but like other passages, the fourth passage CRt2004 may be formed as a passage through which the balls roll along the rolling surface and pass (flow down).

In the fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which the guide groove C3131c is formed in a straight line, but it may be formed in a curved line. Further, the shape may be a combination of straight lines and curved lines.

In the above fifth embodiment, the arc portion C4122b of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is described as being formed with a uniform arc shape (same curvature) in top view, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and arc shapes with different radii may be combined. For example, the curvature of the arc at one end side and the other end side of the arc portion C4122b in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) may be made larger than the curvature of the arc in the region between the one end side and the other end side (region including the outflow surface C122a), i.e., the curvature of the arc in the region including the outflow surface C122a may be made smaller. In this case, in the initial stage (the stage where the balls reciprocate to one and the other longitudinal ends of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or their vicinity), it is easier to reciprocate the balls and make it easier for the trailing ball to catch up with the leading ball, while in the stage where the rolling speed of the reciprocating balls is low (the balls do not reach the one and the other longitudinal ends of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or their vicinity, and the balls reciprocate in a relatively narrow area including the outflow surface C122a), it is easier to maintain the leading ball and the trailing ball in a connected state. As a result, it is easier to flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining the two balls in a connected state.

In the fifth embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the lower bottom portion C4122 in a plane including the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) is approximately horizontal in the arcuate portion C4122b. In other words, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the circular arc portion C4122b is formed as a plane perpendicular to the vertical direction. It may be curved into a circular arc shape that is convex in the direction (direction). Alternatively, it may be formed as a downwardly inclined plane similar to the pair of linear portions C4122a, or may be formed as a downwardly inclined plane different from the pair of linear portions C4122a. As a result, in the initial stage (the stage in which the ball reciprocates to one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or the vicinity thereof), it is easy to reciprocate the ball, and the ball that follows the preceding ball At the stage when the rolling speed of the reciprocating ball has become low (the ball does not reach one end and the other end in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface C4122 or the vicinity thereof, and the outflow surface C122a In the stage where the ball reciprocates in a relatively narrow area including the ball, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the leading ball and the trailing ball are connected. As a result, it is possible to easily cause the balls to flow out (flow down) to the bottom portion C142 (third passageway CRt3) while maintaining the state in which both balls are connected.

In the above fifth embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (straight line portion C4122a and arc portion C4122b) may be formed to slope downward in a direction away from the cutout portion C124a (the direction of arrow L). This allows the ball to roll (reciprocate) on the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) while being pressed against the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the cutout portion C124a.

In the second, third and fifth embodiments, a protrusion may be provided around the outflow surface C122a protruding vertically upward (in the direction of the arrow U). This makes it possible to prevent the balls from rolling from the outflow surface C122a to both ends in the extension direction of the lower bottom surface portions C122, C2122 and C4122, and makes it easier for the balls to flow out (down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3).

In the sixth embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the bottom surface of the magnetic part C5400 is described as being linear in the width direction (arrow F-B direction), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the cross-sectional shape of the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic part C5400 may be curved in an arc shape. If the arc shape has a radius that is approximately the same as the radius of the ball and is convex toward the vertical upward direction (arrow U direction), the contact area between the ball and the magnetic part C5400 can be increased, and the ball can be prevented from falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic part C5400. On the other hand, if the arc shape is convex toward the vertical downward direction (arrow D direction), the ball can be made to sway as it flows down, and the possibility that the ball will fall from the magnetic part C5400 (the possibility that it will not reach the fifth passage CRt2005) can be increased. As a result, the player can be drawn to the behavior of the ball, and the interest of the game can be increased.

In the seventh embodiment, the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic part C6400 is formed as an inclined surface facing the back member C2130 (that is, a surface that approaches the back member C2130 as it goes upward in the vertical direction). The present invention is not limited to this, and may be formed as an inclined surface facing away from the back member C2130 (that is, a surface that is further away from the back member C2130 as it goes upward in the vertical direction). Thereby, the ball attracted to the magnetic part C6400 and the back member C2130 can be arranged in a position where they are separated from each other, and it is possible to suppress the ball flowing down along the magnetic part C6400 from coming into contact with the back member C2130. .

In the third and seventh embodiments, the main body C2131 of the back member C2130 approaches the magnetic parts C2400, C6400 side (direction of arrow F) as it goes vertically downward (direction of arrow D) (i.e., It may also be formed as a surface that approaches the magnetic portions C2400 and C6400 as it goes downward. This allows the magnetic parts C2400, C6400 and the back member C2130 to sandwich the ball flowing down along the magnetic parts C2400, C6400, and prevents the ball from falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic parts C2400, C6400. can be suppressed.

In the third, sixth, and seventh embodiments, in addition to the magnet C2300 disposed on the back surface of the back member C2130, a magnet C2300 may be additionally disposed vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D). . When the added magnet C2300 is placed vertically above (in the direction of arrow U) the center of the ball attracted to the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400, the magnetic force acting on the ball is reduced by the added magnet C2300. Since the orientation is upward in the vertical direction, it is possible to suppress the ball from falling before moving to the downstream ends of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400. On the other hand, when the added magnet C2300 is placed vertically below (in the direction of arrow D) the center of the ball attracted to the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400, the added magnet C2300 acts on the ball. Since the direction of magnetic force is vertically downward,
The possibility that the ball will fall from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400 (the possibility that it will not reach the fifth passage CRt2005) can be increased.

In the third, sixth, and seventh embodiments described above, the magnet C2300 disposed on the back surface of the back member C2130 may be formed to extend vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D). As a result, in addition to the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, C6400, the ball can be attracted by the effect of the magnetic force directly applied from the magnet C2300, and the ball can be prevented from falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, C6400. It can be suppressed.

In the third, sixth, and seventh embodiments described above, differences in strength may be provided between the magnetic forces of the plurality of magnets C2300 arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400. For example, if the magnetic force of the magnet C2300 disposed on the upstream side is stronger than the magnetic force of the other magnets C2300, the balls rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling part C2173 are transferred to the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, C6400. In other words, it can be easily guided to the fourth passage CRt2004. Furthermore, for example, if the magnetic force of one magnet C2300 of the plurality of magnets C2300 is weaker than the magnetic force of the other magnets C2300, a ball passing through that one magnet C2300 may be dropped from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, C6400. (the possibility of not being able to reach the fifth passage CRt2005) can be increased. Thereby, the interest of the game can be increased.

In the third, sixth and seventh embodiments, the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400 and C6400 may be changed. For example, the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged downstream is inclined vertically downward (in the direction of the arrow D) with respect to the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged upstream. In other words, when the magnets C2300 are arranged in a convex shape, it is possible to easily direct the balls flowing down along the magnetic parts C2400, C5400 and C6400 toward the magnets C2300 arranged downstream, and to prevent the balls from falling from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400 and C6400. On the other hand, when the magnets C2300 arranged downstream are arranged in a manner in which the arrangement direction of the magnets C2300 arranged upstream is inclined vertically upward (arrow U direction), in other words, when the magnets C2300 are arranged in a concave shape, the possibility that the balls will fall from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400 at the boundary between the upstream and downstream sides of the magnet C2300 (the possibility that they will not reach the fifth passage CRt2005) can be increased. In addition, the arrangement shape of the magnets C2300 may be formed in a straight line or in an arc. In addition, instead of the magnets C2300, the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400 may be arranged in the above shape (convex or concave, and linear or arc).

In the third, sixth, and seventh embodiments described above, adjacent magnets C2300 of the plurality of magnets C2300 arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400 may be formed apart from each other. In this case, it is possible to create a section in which the magnetic force is not applied to the ball in the extending direction of the magnetic sections C2400, C5400, and C6400, and there is a possibility that the ball will fall from the magnetic section C2400, C5400, and C6400 in this section (the fifth passage The possibility of not being able to reach CRt2005 can be increased.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, when the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170, the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) to the open position, but this is not necessarily the case. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the displacement member D180 may be formed to be displaced (rotated) to the closed position when the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170. That is, when the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 are arranged at the initial position (first position), the displacement member D180 is arranged at the open position, and the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 are arranged at the second position. In the closed state, the displacement member D180 may be arranged in the closed position. In this case, when the ball flows down (enters) into the sixth passage DRt6, the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) to the side where it becomes difficult for the ball to flow down (enter) into the sixth passage DRt6. Therefore, the first ball flows down (enters) the sixth passage DRt6, and before the first ball reaches the end of the sixth passage DRt6, the second ball flows down (enters) the sixth passage DRt6. The interest of the game can be increased by making it more difficult for the first ball to fall (enter) into the sixth path DRt6 than when the first ball flows down (enters) into the sixth path DRt6.

When the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 are configured so that the displacement member D180 is displaced (rotated) to the closed position when the weight of the ball is applied to them, the structure in which the displacement (rotation) of the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 from their initial position (first position) to their second position is transmitted to the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 can be reversed from the case described above (the cases of the 8th to 15th embodiments). That is, when the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 are displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the positional relationship between the transmitting parts D173 and D3173 and the receiving parts D193 and D3193 can be set so that the transmitting members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 rotate in the opposite direction to the above-mentioned case.

Specifically, in the eighth embodiment, the transmitted part D193 is extended in a direction away from the rolling member D170 (to the right in FIG. 119(a), in the direction of arrow R), and the transmitting part D173 is extended up to above the transmitted part D193, so that when the rolling member D170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the transmitting part D173 pushes the transmitted part D193 downward (in the direction of arrow D) (i.e., rotates the transmitting member D190 in the opposite direction to the eighth embodiment (clockwise in FIG. 119(a)).

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, the transmitted portion D3193 is extended toward the rolling member D170 (left side in FIG. 124(a), direction of arrow L), and the transmitted portion D3173 extends below the transmitted portion D3193. is extended, and when the rolling member D3170 is displaced (rotated) from the initial position (first position) to the second position, the transmitting part D3173 pushes the transmitted part D3193 upward (in the direction of arrow U) (i.e. , the transmission member D3190 may be rotated in the opposite direction to that in the tenth embodiment (clockwise in FIG. 124(a)).

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, a pair of displacement members D180 are displaced by one transmission member D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190 (rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 or second rolling member D4220). Although the case where displacement is transmitted to a pair of displacement members D180 by one transmission member D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190 has been described, two transmission members are provided and one of the pair of displacement members D180 is used as the first transmission member. (The displacement of the rolling members D170, D3170 or the second rolling member D4220 is transferred to the displacement of the pair of displacement members D180 by the first transmission member and the second transmission member.) It may also be configured such that the information is transmitted to one side and the other side, respectively.

In this case, for example, in the eleventh embodiment, the displacement of the rolling member D170 may be transmitted by a first transmission member, and the displacement of the second rolling member D4220 may be transmitted by a second transmission member. This allows the displacement mode of the displacement member D180 to be diversified, improving the entertainment value of the game.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, in the sixth passage DRt6, the facing distance (arrow The interval in the F-B direction) is constant along the vertical direction (arrow U-D direction), and a virtual plane (plane) connecting the tips of the plurality of protrusions D131f and the tips of the plurality of protrusions D141g We have explained the case where the opposing distance (distance in the direction of the arrow F-B) between the virtual plane (plane) in which the The facing interval of at least one of them may be changed along the vertical direction.

For example, the opposing distance may be narrowed upward (in the direction of arrow U, in the direction moving away from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 (main body parts D172, D3172)). This allows balls that bounce up from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 (main body parts D172, D3172) to quickly descend, making it easier for the weight of the ball to act. This technical concept also applies to the opposing distance in the eighth passage DRt8.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, protrusions D131f, D141g are provided protruding from the front of the main body D131 of the back members D130, D4130, D8130 and the back of the main body D141 of the intermediate members D140, D6140, respectively. However, recesses may be provided on the front of the main body D131 of the back members D130, D4130, D8130 and the back of the main body D141 of the intermediate members D140, D6140, respectively. The recesses can also delay the passage (rolling) of the balls.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the protrusions D131f and D141g are illustrated as examples of delay means for delaying the passage of the ball, but other means may be employed. As another means, for example, a ball passing (rolling) through the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body portion D172, D3172, D4222 of the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220 can come into contact with it. For example, a means that is disposed at a certain position and is displaced or deformed by contact therewith (for example, a windmill, a metal elastic spring (a leaf spring or a coil spring), an elastic piece made of resin, a rubber sheet, etc.) is exemplified. That is, an example is a means for delaying the passage of the ball by utilizing energy (kinetic energy or viscous resistance) generated by contact with the ball.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172, D3172, D4222 of the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220 is flat, but the upper surface (rolling surface) may be provided with irregularities or steps. This provides resistance to the ball, slowing its passage (rolling).

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, when the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220, the sixth passage DRt6 (the opposite side of the pair of displacement members D180) Although a case has been described in which the ball is made easier to enter (enter the ball) into the ball (between the ball and the ball), a configuration opposite to this may be used. That is, the initial position of the displacement member D180 is the open position, and when the weight of the ball is applied to the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170 or the second rolling member D4220, the displacement member D180 is placed in the closed position. The ball may be made less likely to flow into (enter into) the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other). In this case, the game state may be such that the ball flowing into the fourth path DRt4 or the fifth path DRt5 is more advantageous than the ball flowing into the sixth path DRt6.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the case where the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 are provided to transmit the displacement of the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170, or the second rolling member D4220 to the displacement member D180 has been described, but the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 may be omitted. In other words, the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170, or the second rolling member D4220 may be directly connected to the displacement member D180 (displacement member D180 unit), and the displacement of the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170, or the second rolling member D4220 may be directly transmitted to the displacement member D180.

For example, grooves D194L and D194R of the transmission member D190 (body portion D194) are provided in the rolling member D170, D3170, 8170 or the second rolling member D4220, and the connecting pin D213 of the shaft support member D210 is provided in the grooves D194L and D194R. Connect (insert). Thereby, since the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, and D5190 are omitted, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, in the initial position (the state in which the displacement member D180 is disposed in the closed position), between the transmitted portion D193 of the transmission members D190, D2190 and the transmission portion D173 of the rolling member D170. A gap is formed in the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD) between the transmitted portion D3193 of the transmitting member D3190 and the transmitting portion D3173 of the rolling member D3170, and between the weight portion D195 of the transmitting member D190. Although a case has been described in which no gap is formed in the vertical direction (direction of arrow UD) between the transmission portion D4223 of the second rolling member D4220, these may be reversed.

In other words, in the initial position (when the displacement member D180 is in the closed position), no gap is formed in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrows U-D) between the transmitted part D193 of the transmission members D190 and D2190 and the transmission part D173 of the rolling member D170, and a gap may be formed in the vertical direction (in the direction of the arrows U-D) between the transmitted part D3193 of the transmission member D3190 and the transmission part D3173 of the rolling member D3170, and between the weight part D195 of the transmission member D190 and the transmission part D4223 of the second rolling member D4220.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the pair of displacement members D180 are rotatable, but at least one (or both) of the pair of displacement members D180 may be configured to be slidably displaced. Even in a configuration in which there is slidable displacement, the ease with which the ball can enter the sixth passage DRt6 can be changed, thereby improving the excitement of the game. Examples of the manner of slidable displacement include a manner in which there is displacement along a straight line, a manner in which there is displacement along a curved line, and a manner in which there is displacement along a shape that combines a straight line and a curved line.

This displacement mode also applies to the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, the second rolling member D4220, and the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190, and at least one of these (or all of them) may be configured to be slidably displaceable.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, the second rolling member D4220, and the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190 are configured to be able to return to their initial positions by their own weight. Although the case has been described in which the case is returned to the initial position, a biasing means for applying a biasing force in the direction of returning to the initial position may be provided. If these returns to the initial position can be performed quickly, the displacement member D180 can be quickly placed in the closed position, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. Note that examples of the biasing means include a coil spring, a leaf spring, a torsion spring, and a rubber-like elastic body.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, a pair of displacement members D180 are described, but the number of displacement members D180 may be one or three or more. In other words, it is sufficient that the ease of balls flowing into (entering) the sixth passage DRt6 is changed by the displacement of the displacement member D180.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the ease of balls flowing into (entering) the sixth passage DRt6 is changed by changing the distance between the pair of displacement members D180. However, the distance between the pair of displacement members D180 may not be changed. For example, the displacement (rotation) directions of one and the other of the pair of displacement members D180 may be the same (the distance between the displacement members is kept constant, and the position of the open portion at the tip of the displacement member D180 is displaced left and right (in the direction of the arrows L-D)). In other words, it is sufficient that the ease of balls flowing into (entering) the sixth passage DRt6 is changed by the displacement of the displacement member D180.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, one of the pair of displacement members D180 is always linked to the displacement of the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190, and the other of the pair of displacement members D180 is not linked to the displacement of the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 for a predetermined period of time. However, both of the pair of displacement members D180 may be configured to always be linked to the displacement of the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190, or both of the pair of displacement members D180 may be configured to not be linked to the displacement of the transmission members D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, and D7190 for a predetermined period of time.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, a case has been described in which the protrusions D131f and D141g are formed continuously along the extending direction (vertical direction), but the protruding parts D131f and D141g are It may be formed discontinuously (formed intermittently) along the direction. This makes it easier to provide resistance to the upward bounce of the ball. In this case, the protrusions D131f and D141g may be arranged in a staggered manner along the extension direction (vertical direction). This makes it easier to provide resistance to the upward bounce of the ball.

Although not described in the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, a restricting means may be provided to restrict the movement of the ball that has flowed (entered) the sixth passage DRt6 (between the opposing pair of displacement members D180) and fallen onto the upper surface of the main body portion D172, D3172 of the rolling member D170, D3170, D8170 in the direction opposite to the rolling direction in the main body portion D172, D3172 (the direction of arrow R). The restricting means may be provided in any of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170, the back member D130, D4130, D8130, or the intermediate member D140, D6140. In addition, examples of the restricting means include a portion that is erected from either the rolling member D170, D3170, or D8170, the back member D130, D4130, or D8130, or the intermediate member D140 or D6140 and is shaped so that it can come into contact with a ball.

In the eighth embodiment to the fifteenth embodiment, the ball flowing into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) is transferred to the main body portions D172 and D3172 of the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170. Although the case where the ball is dropped onto the upper surface has been described, the ball that has flown (entered) into the sixth passage DRt6 (between the pair of displacement members D180 facing each other) is dropped onto the back member D130, D4130, D8130, or the intermediate member D140. , D6140, and the ball is dropped onto the upper surface of a portion (receiving portion) formed in the receiving portion, and the ball flows (rolls) into the main body portions D172, D3172 of the rolling members D170, D3170, D8170. Since the main bodies D172 and D3172 of the rolling members D170, D3170, and D8170 can receive the ball when the impact of the fall has subsided (reduced), the flapping of the displacement member D180 at the initial stage when the weight of the ball acts ( vibration) can be suppressed.

In the eighth to fifteenth embodiments, the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8 (upstream portion) are arranged in parallel (side by side) when viewed from above (in the direction of arrow D) (i.e., arranged at different positions in the front-to-rear direction (in the direction of arrow F-B)). In this case, the dimensions of the lower frames D86b to D8086b in the up-down direction (in the direction of arrows U-D) can be reduced. However, the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8 (upstream portion) may also be arranged in parallel (side by side) when viewed from the front (in the direction of arrow B) (i.e., arranged at different positions in the up-to-down direction (in the direction of arrows U-D)). In this case, it is preferable that the sixth passage DRt6 and the eighth passage DRt8 (upstream portion) overlap when viewed from above (in the direction of arrow D). This allows the dimensions of the lower frames D86b-D8086b in the front-to-rear direction (arrow F-B direction) to be reduced.

In the eleventh embodiment, the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 are arranged in parallel (side by side) when viewed from above (as viewed in the direction of arrow D), but the rolling member D170 and the second rolling member D4220 may be arranged in series (arranged in a straight line along the longitudinal direction) when viewed from above (as viewed in the direction of arrow D).

In the fourteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the display section D7197 is disposed on the main body section D194, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the display section D7197 may be disposed on the weight section D195. That is, the display portion D7197 may be disposed on the outer edge of the weight portion D195 and may be extended from the outer edge of the weight portion D195 in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the axis D191.

In this case, the positioning of the display unit D9197 can be reversed from that described above (when the displacement member D180 is in the closed position, the display unit D7197 is not visible to the player, and when the displacement member D180 is in the open position, the protrusion of the display unit D7197 is maximized). In addition, the weight of the display unit D7197 can be used to reduce (or omit) the amount of metal weight embedded in the weight unit D195, thereby reducing the number of parts and material costs.

In the fifteenth embodiment, the case where the second protrusion D131fa is formed on only some (two in this embodiment) of the plurality (five in this embodiment) of the protrusions D131f has been described; It is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of second protrusions D131fa formed is arbitrary, and may be one, or three or more. The second protrusion D131fa may be formed in all of the plurality of protrusions D131f. Further, the second protrusion D131fa may be formed only on the protrusion D131f that overlaps with the opening D6148 of the intermediate member D140 when viewed from the front, or the second protrusion D131fa may be formed only on the protrusion D131f that does not overlap with the opening D6148 of the intermediate member D140 when viewed from the front. A portion D131fa may also be formed.

In the above fifteenth embodiment, when the rolling member D8170 is arranged in the first position, the dimension by which the upper surface of the second protrusion D131fa protrudes from the upper surface (rolling surface) of the main body D172 is larger for the second protrusion D131fa located on the upstream side (the side farther from the axis D171), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and each second protrusion D131fa may have the same dimension. Alternatively, the dimension may be larger for the second protrusion D131fa located on the downstream side (the side closer to the axis D171).

The present invention may be implemented in a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, there are pachinko machines (commonly known as 2-hit, 3-hit, and 3-hit machines) that increase the expected value of a jackpot once you hit the jackpot once and until you hit the jackpot multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times). It may also be implemented as Furthermore, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that provides a predetermined game value to the player, with the necessary condition of landing a ball in a predetermined area. Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and enters a special gaming state with the requirement that a ball be won in the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, the present invention may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and so-called gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, a lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information, and then displays the determined identification information, and that starts the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a lever), stops the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed, and a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, provided that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various invention concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<The point at which the ball passing through the path forming means conceals the passed means>
A gaming machine A1 comprising a path forming means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow gaming balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, wherein the path forming means comprises a displaceable means that can be positioned in a position overlapping at least a portion of a first gaming ball flowing down the path forming means, on the upstream side of the passed means and in front of the first gaming ball, when viewed in a predetermined direction.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a big prize component 300 that can configure multiple types of flow paths for game balls toward the ball detection hole 431, and are configured so that the area around the ball detection hole 431 is difficult to recognize due to a decorative plate 302 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the decorative plate 302 always makes it difficult to recognize the ball detection hole 431, so it is not possible to respond to a game mode in which the ball entering the ball detection hole 431 is confirmed to continue or stop the launch of the game ball, and there is a possibility that the player will feel dissatisfied. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the parts related to the game ball launch operation.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, since the means for reducing the visibility of the first game ball in the route configuring means is the predetermined displaceable means, it is possible to configure a state in which the first game ball is easily visible. be done. Therefore, when the first game ball is easily visible, it is easier to check the flow of the first game ball and decide whether to continue or stop the game ball firing operation. Improvements can be made in related areas.

Note that the form of the predetermined displaceable means is not limited at all. For example, it may be another game ball, or it may be a decorative member that is movable between the flow path of the game ball and the glass unit.

The form of the passing means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance related to the drawing of a pattern (e.g., a starting opening), a prize ball entrance related to the payout of prize balls, or any other means through which game balls can pass.

Gaming machine A2 is characterized in that in gaming machine A1, the displacement means is a second gaming ball that flows downstream upstream of the first gaming ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A1, gaming machine A2 can change the visibility of the first gaming ball by using the gaming ball guided toward the passing means, which reduces material costs and design costs compared to when other decorative members are used as the displaceable means.

In gaming machine A2, gaming machine A3 is characterized in that the path configuring means includes a front-back direction path formed with a front-back width length that allows a second game ball to be placed in front of the first game ball. .

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, since the front-rear direction path is configured so that the second gaming ball can be placed in front of the first gaming ball, the second gaming ball can be placed in front of the first gaming ball. At least a part of the first game ball can be hidden by the second game ball.

In the gaming machine A3, the forward-rearward direction path is defined as the second game ball when the first game ball and the second game ball flow down the path forming means at a firing interval set in the firing device. A game machine A4 characterized in that the game ball is configured to hide at least a portion of the first game ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A3, gaming machine A4 can also provide the effect of making it difficult to recognize a first gaming ball as a second gaming ball when multiple gaming balls flow down the path configuration means with the launch intervals unchanged. This makes it possible to create a difficult-to-recognize situation even under normal circumstances.

Gaming machine A5 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine A3 or A4, in the front-rear direction path, the front-side component is arranged closer to the center of the gaming area than the back-side component.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines A3 and A4, gaming machine A5 can configure a forward/backward path that is inclined along the line of sight of the player looking at the passing means, making it easier for the first gaming ball to be hidden by the second gaming ball. In other words, the blindfolding effect can be improved.

Gaming machine A6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine A5, the front side component is positioned in the line of sight of the player who is looking at the passing means.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine A5, gaming machine A6 can produce a similar blindfolding effect regardless of the length of the distance between the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball placed on the forward/backward path.

In other words, it is usually believed that the closer the first and second game balls are to each other, the greater the concealment effect, but if the first and second game balls are positioned in the line of sight, the effect of the distance between them can be eliminated.

A gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the path configuration means in any of the gaming machines A2 to A6 includes a front-rear direction path formed with a front-rear width length that allows a second gaming ball to be placed in front of the first gaming ball, and a left-right direction path formed with a left-right width that allows the gaming ball to flow down in the left-right direction upstream of the front-rear direction path.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines A2 to A6, gaming machine A7 can also block the player's line of sight with gaming balls flowing down a left-right path, so a concealing effect can be created not only when the player views the passed-through means with a line of sight that does not shift left or right relative to the passed-through means, but also when the player shifts left or right and peers at the passed-through means. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner in which the ball enters the passed-through means, regardless of the direction of the player's line of sight (a concealing effect can be created in all directions).

This effect is more pronounced when one side of the flow path extending in the front-rear direction is sealed with a wall. In other words, when one side is sealed with a wall, the wall acts as a screen on the left or right side, making it easier to create a state in which the passing means is not visible.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A7, the route configuring means has a first downstream route in which the game ball passes through the passed means in a first manner, and a second downstream route in which the game ball passes in a second manner. and a downstream path, wherein the first game ball can be visually recognized at least partially covered by the predetermined displaceable means, regardless of which downstream path of the path configuration means the first game ball flows down. A gaming machine A8 characterized by being configured as follows.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, gaming machine A8 can make it difficult to recognize the flow pattern of the gaming ball flowing down the path forming means, regardless of whether or not the gaming ball passes through the passing means, thereby increasing the attention to the gaming ball flowing down the path forming means.

The first and second aspects are not limited in any way. For example, the direction in which the ball flows down may be different, or the detection sensor through which the ball passes may be different.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8 is provided with a branching means for dividing the flowing direction of the game ball on the upstream side of the passing means, and the branching means is provided with a switching means for switching the flowing direction of the received gaming ball, The game machine A9 is characterized in that the route configuring means is constructed such that the game balls whose falling paths are separated by a branching means are configured so that the game balls that reach the switching means flow down the same route in a predetermined section.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the gaming machine A9 makes it more difficult to grasp the flow of the gaming ball, since the gaming ball that reaches the switching means flows down the same path for a certain section, compared to when the gaming ball that reaches the switching means immediately flows down a path that corresponds to the subsequent flow path. This makes it possible to improve the player's ability to focus on the gaming ball.

In the gaming machine A9, the path configuration means has a protruding portion that protrudes toward the gaming balls flowing down, and the protruding portion acts to branch the gaming balls in the branching means. A10.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A9, the protruding portion can act on the branching of the game ball, so that the structure is simpler than, for example, when the branching is caused by the movement of the valve body. can improve the durability of

In the gaming machine A10, the protruding part includes a first protruding part extending in a predetermined direction and a second protruding part extending in a direction different from the first protruding part, and the first protruding part A gaming machine A11 characterized in that the amount of protrusion of the second protrusion portion is different from the amount of protrusion of the second protrusion portion.

According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A10, the influence that the first protrusion has on the game ball and the influence that the second protrusion has on the game ball, depending on the manner in which the game ball flows down. can be made different. Thereby, while utilizing the fixed first protruding portion and second protruding portion, it is possible to produce an effect of branching the game ball according to a predetermined rule according to the downward flow mode of the game ball.

<Points to appeal for the introduction of a ball passing through a route forming means into a passed means>
A gaming machine B1 comprising a path forming means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow gaming balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, the path forming means having a specified portion that constitutes the upstream side of the passed means, the specified portion being positioned on a more conspicuous side than the passed means, and configured to be able to guide gaming balls to the passed means.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is equipped with a big winning component 300 that can configure multiple types of falling paths for game balls toward a ball detection hole 431, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is configured to be difficult to recognize with a decorative plate 302, and a large winning part 300 is provided. Depending on the state of the winning parts 300, there are gaming machines in which the game balls may fall away from the decorative board 302, or the game balls may flow down so as to be hidden behind the decorative board 302 (for example, in special machines). (Refer to Publication No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the highly visible game balls that come off the decorative board 302 and flow down are configured so that they deviate from the ball detection hole 431 and flow down, and are hidden behind the decorative board 302. Since a part of the game ball flowing down is guided to the ball detection hole 431, the visibility of the game ball does not correspond to the amount of profit that the player can obtain, and the player pays attention to the game ball. Since things tend to be wasted, there is a possibility that players may feel dissatisfied. That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of making the way the game ball flows down after it has attracted attention so that it is meaningful to draw attention to.

In response to this, gaming machine B1 is configured so that a gaming ball that has flowed down a specified section arranged on the more conspicuous side can be guided to the passing means, and so the degree of improvement in attention to the gaming ball can be associated with the gaming ball passing through the passing means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the likelihood that a gaming ball that has flowed down a specified section will pass through the passing means, leading to an improvement in terms of the significance of paying attention to the gaming ball after it has attracted attention.

In addition, with this configuration, it is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight with the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion, and it is less likely that the player will miss the game ball heading toward the passing means. be able to.

The form of the passing means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance related to the drawing of a pattern (e.g., a starting opening), a prize ball entrance related to the payout of prize balls, or any other means through which game balls can pass.

Note that the aspect of the conspicuous side is not limited at all. For example, it may be placed on the display device side that easily catches players' attention, it may be placed on the prize opening side or the starting opening side, it may be placed on the front side (near side) that is easy for players to see, or it may be placed on the front side (front side) that is easy for players to see. The stage side (mainly the lower edge of the frame formed by the center frame where the game ball is temporarily held) is a place where the ball tends to attract attention as a place where the probability of ball landing is significantly high, and the side where the game ball is temporarily held is directly connected to winning the jackpot. The V prize opening side, the ball rental device side as an operation target, the production operation button side, the area where the game ball that strayed from the ball entry opening flows down (the area where players are frustrated and follow it with their eyes), The bright side or other side may be used for switching between light and dark in the light emitting means. Alternatively, a less conspicuous side may be intentionally formed to make it relatively conspicuous.

In the gaming machine B1, the route configuring means includes a second predetermined part that makes the game ball that enters the route configuring means less noticeable than when the ball enters the route, and the predetermined part has a larger area than the second predetermined part. Game machine B2 is characterized in that it is placed on a conspicuous side.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B1, gaming machine B2 reduces the attention of the gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means at the second specified section before it flows down the specified section, thereby making it possible to highlight the attention of the gaming ball as it flows down the specified section.

Gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the predetermined portion of gaming machine B1 or B2 has sections where the flow speed of gaming balls differs.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B1 and B2, gaming machine B3 can improve the effect of attracting the player's attention compared to when there is no difference in the flow speed of the gaming balls.

Gaming machine B4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine B3, the second flow speed of gaming balls flowing down the second specified portion is configured to be faster than the first flow speed of gaming balls flowing down the specified portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B3, gaming machine B4 can shorten the time it takes for a gaming ball that has entered the path configuration means to reach a specified section.

Gaming machine B5 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B4, characterized in that the specified section has a section in which the displacement speed of the gaming ball when viewed in a specified direction differs.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines B1 to B4, there is a section in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball when viewed in a predetermined direction is different, regardless of the magnitude of the actual falling speed of the game ball. Therefore, by reducing the displacement speed of the game ball at any predetermined location when viewed in a predetermined direction, the player's line of sight can be easily focused on the predetermined location and diverted from other parts. .

The manner in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball is made different is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a difference between displacement on a straight line arranged on a plane perpendicular to the front-to-rear direction when viewed from the front and displacement on a straight line having a front-to-rear component, a difference between displacement on a straight line and displacement in a curved or serpentine shape, or some other difference.

Gaming machine B6 is any one of gaming machines B1 to B5, and is characterized in that it is equipped with an introduction means configured to be able to introduce gaming balls into the path configuration means, and the predetermined portion is disposed outside the introduction means when viewed in a predetermined direction.

Gaming machine B6 can ensure the visibility of the introduction means in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines B1 to B5. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the introduction means while also increasing the attention to gaming balls that are likely to pass through the passing means.

Any one of the game machines B1 to B6 is characterized by comprising an avoidance means configured to cause the game ball on the front side of the path forming means to flow downward so as to avoid the line of sight directed toward the passing means or the predetermined part. A gaming machine B7.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines B1 to B6, the game ball is configured to be able to flow downward on the front side of the path forming means, and the flowing path of the game ball is directed to the passing means. Since an avoidance means is provided to avoid this, it is possible to both secure the size of the game area and ensure the visibility of the game ball toward the passing means.

The manner in which the game ball affected by the avoidance means flows down is not limited in any way. For example, it may flow down avoiding a position directly in front of the passing means, it may flow down avoiding a straight line connecting the passing means and the player's eye position, it may flow down avoiding a position directly in front of the last position at which the player can see the game ball heading towards the passing means, it may flow down avoiding a straight line connecting the last position mentioned above and the player's eye position, or it may be something else.

In the gaming machine B7, the route configuring means includes an accepting state changing means configured to be able to change the state between an accepting state in which the falling game balls can be accepted and a non-accepting state in which the flowing game balls cannot be accepted, and the accepting state changing means is , a game machine B8 characterized in that, in changing the state from the accepting state to the non-accepting state, the game ball that has reached the accepting state changing means in the accepting state can be guided to the path configuring means side. .

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B7, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball flowing downward as if bridging after reaching the receiving state changing means from blocking the line of sight toward the passing means. Can be done.

The gaming machine B7 or B8 is provided with a dividing means that is disposed above the passing means when viewed from the front and that divides a gaming area, and that the dividing means is configured such that the game ball can flow down the left and right outer sides. Characteristic game machine B9.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B7 and B8, gaming machine B9 uses a partitioning means to prevent gaming balls from flowing down in front of the passing means, making it easier to ensure visibility toward the passing means.

Note that the mode of the partitioning means is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a plate-shaped portion that constitutes a falling surface of a game ball, or it may be a ball entry hole forming means into which a game ball can enter. Further, the partition means may be a means whose shape (appearance) is fixed or a means whose shape (appearance) is variable.

In the game machine B9, the route configuring means includes an acceptance state changing means configured to be able to change the state between an acceptance state in which the falling game balls can be accepted and a non-acceptance state in which the falling game balls cannot be accepted, and A gaming machine B10 characterized in that a portion on the side of the state changing means is configured to easily guide the game ball to the receiving state changing means side.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B9, it is possible to configure the game ball to be received by the partitioning means to push the game ball into the receiving state changing means while it is being received by the receiving state changing means. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which a game ball that skids while being received deviates from the receiving state changing means and falls on the front side of the passing means.

For example, the receiving state changing means may be a special winning device equipped with an opening/closing plate that tilts and displaces on a left-right axis, and the partitioning means may be a first winning port located above the special winning port of the special winning device. A game ball that reaches the special winning port just before the opening/closing plate is closed is often pinched between the pivoting tip of the opening/closing plate and the edge of the opening that is covered by the opening/closing plate, and slides sideways in the direction of the edge (the direction of the pivoting axis of the opening/closing plate).

After skidding, the game ball can reach any position in the formation range of the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate, so if at least a part of the opening/closing plate is placed above the means to be passed, There is a possibility that the subsequent game ball may pass through the front position of the passing means after falling to the front side, and the game ball after skidding should not be allowed to fall to the front side.

If it is not possible to prevent the game ball from falling to the front side after skidding, it becomes necessary to arrange the opening/closing plate avoiding the front position of the means to be passed, which reduces the degree of freedom in designing the opening/closing plate. become.

In contrast, gaming machine B10 makes it easier to prevent the game ball from falling onto the front side of the opening and closing plate after sliding sideways, improving the design freedom of the opening and closing plate.

Gaming machine B11 is any one of gaming machines B7 to B10, characterized in that gaming balls flowing down the path configuration means and gaming balls flowing down the front side of the path configuration means are configured to flow down in a similar manner.

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B7 to B10, the game balls that may flow down the route configuring means and pass through the passed means, and the game balls that may flow down the front side of the route configuring means By making it difficult to distinguish between game balls that do not pass through the passing means, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the number of game balls flowing down the route configuring means.

In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to determine from the game balls flowing down near the route configuring means whether the game ball can easily enter the route configuring means or when it cannot easily enter the route configuring means.

A gaming machine B12 is any one of the gaming machines B1 to B11, and is characterized by having a light-emitting means that irradiates light from behind the ball flowing down the specified portion.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B11, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the front side of the ball flowing down a predetermined portion is reflected by light and the ball becomes difficult to see.

<Points to ensure the path length to the V-hole while saving space>
A gaming machine C1 comprising: a path forming means configured to allow gaming balls to flow down; a passed means configured to allow gaming balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through; and a state switching means configured to switch between a first state in which the gaming balls can flow down to the passed means and a second state different from the first state, wherein the path forming means comprises a delay means which delays the vertical displacement of the gaming balls, and the delay means allows the gaming balls to flow down towards the passed means.

In some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, a distribution unit 75 that is configured to be movable left and right is arranged in the flow path of the gaming ball that entered the second large winning opening 12, and the flow direction of the gaming ball can be changed by the positioning of the distribution unit 75 (see, for example, JP 2014-155538 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, it is essential for the distribution unit 75 to operate for a short period of time to prevent erroneous entry into the specific area 73 or balls being caught by the distribution unit 75, and some players may feel suspicious of the behavior of the distribution unit 75 and be unable to continue playing with confidence.

One example of a solution to this problem is to lengthen the flow path length from the second large prize opening 12 to the distribution section 75. For example, by changing the position of the distribution section 75 from directly below the second large prize opening 12 to a position near the center of the left and right of the play area (near the first large prize opening 10), it is possible to ensure a long flow path length from the second large prize opening 12 to the distribution section 75. This is thought to reduce the possibility of an erroneous prize entry into the specific area 73.

On the other hand, when this method is implemented, it becomes necessary to ensure the visibility of the flow path of the game ball over a wide area from the second large prize opening 12 to the first large prize opening 10, and the design freedom of the game area is limited in this area. In other words, there is a problem in that the design freedom of the game area is limited over a wide area in order to prevent erroneous winning into the specific area 73.

In other words, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in terms of preventing game balls from entering the game area by mistake while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, since the route configuring means is provided with the predetermined delay means, even if the vertical length of the route configuring means in front view is shortened to save space, the route configuring means can be inserted into the route configuring means. It is possible to secure a long time for the game ball to pass through the passing means.

Therefore, the timing at which it becomes necessary to operate the state switching means to switch whether or not the game ball can enter the passing means can be set to a predetermined time after the game ball enters the path configuration means, so that erroneous winning can be avoided without operating the opening/closing device that switches whether or not the game ball can enter the path configuration means for a short period of time. This makes it possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the opening/closing means is operating hastily. This makes it possible to avoid erroneous entry of game balls while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

Note that the form of the delay means is not limited at all. For example, a mode may be adopted in which a convex portion for deceleration is formed on the downstream path, or a mode may be provided in which a predetermined downstream path is provided in which the game ball flows down a downstream path having a front-back component.

In gaming machine C1, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow paths, and the predetermined flow paths are configured so that the acceleration of the game ball flowing down the flow path toward the front side is greater than that of the flow path toward the back side. Gaming machine C2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C1, gaming machine C2 can ensure a longer period during which the player can see the gaming ball flowing down a specified flow path.

The cause of the difference in the acceleration of the game ball is not limited in any way. For example, it may be the inclination of the specified flow path relative to the horizontal plane, or the design of the surface shape on the game ball side of the specified flow path.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the delaying means includes a plurality of predetermined downstream paths, and among the predetermined downstream paths, the downstream path toward the front side is better than the downstream path that flows down while maintaining the front and back position. A game machine C3 is characterized in that it is configured such that the acceleration of the game ball flowing down is increased.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines C1 and C2, gaming machine C3 can ensure a longer period during which the player can see the gaming balls flowing in front of them. This makes it easier to increase the player's attention to the gaming balls flowing down a specified flow path.

It should be noted that the cause of the difference in acceleration of the game ball is not limited in any way. For example, the magnitude of the inclination of the predetermined downstream path with respect to the horizontal plane may be used, or the design of the surface shape of the predetermined downstream path on the game ball side may be used.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the delay means is provided with a plurality of predetermined downstream paths, and the predetermined downstream paths are such that the game ball is positioned in front of the passing means when viewed in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine C4 characterized in that it is configured to pass through.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines C1 to C3, when the game ball is placed in the front position, the visibility of the vicinity of the passing means can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to improve attention to the area near the means to be passed.

Gaming machine C5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine C4, the front position can be configured in multiple places.

According to the gaming machine C5, by arranging the game balls at a plurality of front positions, it is possible to hide at least a portion of the game balls on the back side by the game balls on the front side. Since the means to be passed is arranged on the back side than the game balls on the back side, the view toward the means to be passed can be blocked by a plurality of game balls, and the visibility of the means to be passed can be reduced. .

In this case, if the interval between the game balls entering the predetermined downstream path is short, it is possible to create a state in which the game ball is always placed at one of the front positions, so it is possible to create a state in which the passing means cannot be seen. It becomes possible.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the route forming means is formed so as to be visually recognized in a spiral manner when viewed from above.

Gaming machine C6 has the same effect as any of gaming machines C1 to C5, and in addition, it can shorten the vertical width required to install a path configuration means of the same length.

In addition, compared to when a turn-around path is formed, there is no need to make the path walls thinner, which improves the strength of the flow path, and reduces the possibility of ball clogging, etc., compared to a turn-around path that turns 180 degrees.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the path configuring means includes a front-rear passage section extending in the front-rear direction.

Gaming machine C7 has the same effect as any of gaming machines C1 to C6, but also reduces the width of the path configuration means, so that a pair of path configuration means can be configured symmetrically with a reduced width.

Gaming machine C8 is any one of gaming machines C1 to C7, characterized in that the passing means is positioned diagonally downward and rearward with respect to the ball receiving portion of the path configuration means.

Gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines C1 to C7, makes it easier for the passing means and the ball receiving portion of the path forming means to be within the field of view of a player looking from the front side.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C8, gaming machine C9 is characterized in that the path configuration means includes a first receiving means configured to be able to receive gaming balls, and a second receiving means different from the first receiving means and configured to be able to receive gaming balls, and is configured so that the profits obtained by the player change depending on the receiving mode of the gaming balls of the first receiving means and the second receiving means.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines C1 to C8, gaming machine C9 has a first receiving means and a second receiving means that are configured to be able to receive gaming balls at all times, and furthermore, the benefits obtained by the player change depending on the receiving mode of the gaming balls by the first receiving means and the second receiving means, thereby improving the player's attention to the gaming balls.

The manner in which the game balls are received is not limited in any way. For example, the game balls may be received only by the first receiving means, or only by the second receiving means, or a predetermined number of game balls may be received by the first receiving means and a predetermined number of game balls may be received by the second receiving means. Also, the frequency with which balls enter each receiving means may differ, or the balls may enter at different positions.

In the gaming machine C9, the change in the profit obtained by the player depends on whether the game ball is accepted only by one of the first receiving means or the second receiving means, or whether the first receiving means and the second receiving means A game machine C10 characterized in that the problem occurs depending on whether a game ball is received by both of the game balls.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C9, it is possible to make it easier for the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined firing mode by setting the magnitude of the profit that the player can obtain. .

The benefits that the player can obtain are not limited in any way. For example, it may be the ease of recognizing the game balls flowing down, or it may be a benefit related to the game obtained by the game balls flowing down (payout of prize balls, winning a jackpot, the game state changing to a special state after the jackpot ends, the game state changing to a normal state (falling down), etc.).

In the gaming machine C9 or C10, the gaming machine C11 is characterized in that the route configuring means is configured such that the path from the first receiving means and the second receiving means to the passed means is symmetrical.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines C9 and C10, gaming machine C11 can reduce the possibility of a player suffering a disadvantage regardless of whether the game ball is mainly shot from the left or right side.

In any of gaming machines C9 to C11, the path configuration means includes an acceptance state change means configured to be able to change between an acceptance state in which the game ball flowing down can be accepted and a non-acceptance state in which the game ball cannot be accepted, and the acceptance state changes depending on the shape of the acceptance state change means or the state change state. Gaming machine C12 is characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C9 to C11, the acceptance mode changes depending on the shape of the acceptance state changing means or the mode of state change, so that the player's skill regarding shooting the game ball is improved. It is possible to reduce the influence of the skill level on the profits obtained by the player.

A gaming machine C13 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine C12, the state change mode of the receiving state change means is configured in a plurality of types.

According to the game machine C13, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C12, even when the game balls are ejected in a fixed ejection manner, the manner in which the game balls are received by the first receiving means and the second receiving means is improved. can be changed. Thereby, the profit obtained by the player can be adjusted based on the state change mode of the acceptance state change means.

<Important points regarding the opening and closing member that moves parallel to the direction in which the ball flows>
Gaming machine XA1 comprises a path forming means configured to allow game balls to flow down, a passing means configured to allow game balls that have flowed down the path forming means to pass through, and a state switching means configured to be able to change between an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the path forming means and a non-introduction state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the path forming means, wherein the state switching means is configured so that the direction of displacement occurring during the state change is along the direction in which the game ball flows down.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a big prize component 300 that can configure multiple flow paths for game balls toward the ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, JP 2017-185021 A). However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the flow direction of the game balls and the opening and closing direction of the opening and closing plate of the big prize component 300 are approximately perpendicular, and the opening and closing operation is completed without being involved in the rolling of the game balls, so there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the role of the opening and closing plate (state switching means).

In contrast, according to the gaming machine XA1, the direction of displacement of the state switching means is configured to follow the direction in which the gaming ball flows downward, so that the state switching means is displaced when the gaming ball is in close proximity to or in contact with the state switching means, thereby affecting the change in the rolling pattern of the gaming ball. This makes it possible to improve the role of the state switching means.

For example, when a gaming ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means can be slid to the right with the gaming ball on top of it, applying a load to the gaming ball that rotates it in the forward direction of the rolling rotation, thereby accelerating the gaming ball.

Conversely, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, by sliding the state switching means to the left with the game ball on top of it, the rolling rotation can be controlled against the game ball. Since a load is applied to rotate the game ball in the opposite direction, the rotation of the game ball can be delayed.

In addition, when the state switching means slides so as to graze the bottom end of the rolling game ball, a load can be applied to the game ball that is not only in the rolling direction of the game ball, but also has a component in a direction perpendicular to the rolling direction, so that the change in the flow pattern of the game ball can be made complex and irregular.

Due to these influences on the falling state of the game ball, the falling state of the ball riding on the state switching means can be varied in various ways during the opening/closing operation of the state switching means, so that the player who visually recognizes the game ball becomes bored. You can concentrate on playing the game without worrying about it.

In addition, the positional relationship between the opening and closing operation of the state switching means and the gaming ball is not limited in any way. For example, it may be positioned so that it rubs against the side of the gaming ball, or it may be positioned so that it collides with the gaming ball in the direction opposite to the flow of the gaming ball.

In the state switching means that is displaced in such a manner as to collide with the game ball, the direction of the closing operation is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured so that the closing operation is performed in the direction opposite to the direction in which the game ball is flowing down, and the game ball can be bounced back, or the closing operation is performed in the forward direction of the direction in which the game ball is flowing, and the subsequent introduction of the game ball. It may be configured to be regulated with less resistance.

<Points regarding the opening/closing member that causes the ball to flow in the first direction when opened and in the second direction when closed>
a path forming means configured to allow a game ball to flow down; a passing means configured to allow a game ball flowing down the path forming means to pass; an introduction state in which a game ball can be introduced into the passing means; A state switching means configured to be able to change the state between a non-introduction state in which the game ball cannot be introduced into the passing means, and the state switching means is capable of guiding the game ball in the first direction in the introduction state. A game machine XB1 characterized in that the game ball is configured to be able to be guided in the second direction in the non-introduced state.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a big winning component 300 that can configure a plurality of types of falling paths of game balls toward the ball detection hole 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the lower movable body 371 guides the game ball to the right when it is extended to the front, but when it is retracted to the rear, it does not come into contact with the game ball and falls freely. Therefore, I will not provide any guidance. In other words, the lower movable body 371 does not affect the flow of the game ball. Therefore, when it is retracted to the rear side, it is necessary to prepare a part other than the lower movable body 371 to guide the falling of the game ball (such as a frame part). There is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of reducing the number of components (members).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Since no members are required, the number of required components (members) can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the downward direction of the game ball in a limited space.

The relationship between the first direction and the second direction is not limited in any way. For example, the angle between the directions may be an acute angle, a right angle, or an obtuse angle. For example, in the case of a right angle, the first direction may be set downward and the second direction may be set left and right with respect to the game ball flowing down in the front-to-back direction. In this case, it is possible to maximize the difference in direction after guidance by the state switching means begins, while only slight displacement of the game ball is discernible when viewed from the front before it is guided by the state switching means.

The arrangement of the guide section that produces the guiding effect of the state switching means is not limited in any way. For example, the guide section may be disposed on a movable member of the state switching means, or the guide section may be disposed on a non-movable section in the periphery of the state switching means, and may be configured so that the state is switched to one in which the game ball is likely to approach or come into contact with the guide section by the operation of the movable member.

When the guide is provided on a movable member, it is preferable that the design not only provides guidance after switching between the introduced state and the non-introduced state is completed, but also takes into consideration the effect on the game ball during the state switching operation.

For example, when the state switching means includes a movable member that is displaced in a direction opposite to the direction of flow of the game balls, rather than providing a wall with a planar shape perpendicular to the direction of flow, it is preferable to )-shaped wall portion makes it easier to avoid a situation where the load generated when the movable member collides with the game ball increases in the direction of causing the game ball to flow backwards. This makes it easier to avoid backflow of game balls.

<Sequence of separation, reversal, combination, and rotation>
The displacement means is configured to be displaceable so that the visually recognized surface changes, and the displacement means includes a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and in a predetermined manner of displacement, the first displacement A gaming machine D1 characterized in that the member and the second displacement member are configured to be relatively displaced.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a rotating base 214 disposed at the tip of a base arm 220 is configured to be rotatable multiple times (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-116782). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, although the rotating base 214 rotates and displaces, the surface visible to the player side is the same, so there is a problem in that it is difficult to maintain attention to the displacing means.

In contrast, gaming machine D1 is configured so that the visible surface of the displacement means can be changed in response to the displacement, allowing attention to be maintained on the displacement means.

In addition, the appearance of the displacement means can be changed by displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member relative to each other, thereby increasing the attention to the displacement means.

In the gaming machine D1, the predetermined displacement includes at least a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member move toward or away from each other based on a collection section where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are collected and arranged, and a second displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member rotate based on the collection section. In the gaming machine D2, the predetermined displacement includes at least a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member move toward or away from each other based on a collection section.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D1, gaming machine D2 can easily dynamically cause relative movement between the first and second displacement members. That is, with only the first displacement as a displacement based on the assembly part, the displacement between the first and second displacement members is likely to be reduced at the terminal part where the distance from the assembly part is the shortest or longest, and the first and second displacement members may appear to be stationary, which may reduce the presentation effect. However, by mixing in the second displacement, it is possible to cause a rotational displacement even at the terminal part, improving the presentation effect.

A gaming machine D3 in the gaming machine D1 or D2, wherein the displacement in the predetermined manner includes at least a third displacement in which the visually recognized surface of the displacement means is reversed.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, by reversing the surface visible by the third displacement, the decorations visible to the player before and after the third displacement can be noticeably different. can be set.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D3, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be fixed by adsorption or adhesion, and the load related to the fixation is applied to the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A gaming machine D4 is characterized in that it operates in a direction that limits the displacement of members.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D1 to D3, the load related to fixation acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member, so the load related to fixation is reduced. The displacements of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be designed by taking these into account.

For example, in the case of driving force transmission by gears, if deformation of the shape is not taken into account, mechanical displacement will occur. However, if the load related to fixing is taken into account, the elastic change of the component due to the load will become apparent, causing a delay in the timing of the displacement of the component.

Further, the degree of fixation may be configured to differ depending on the visible surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

In this case, since the effect of fixing differs depending on the side that is visually recognized, it is possible to set the strength of the fixing on the side that is visually recognized by the player.

As a result, for example, with respect to the reversed surfaces of the same displacement means, one surface is tightly combined to make it easy to see as an integral part, and the other surface is loosely combined to make it easy to see in a state where relative displacement is easy. Can be done.

In addition, for example, by configuring the degree of adhesion of the first displacement member and the second displacement member to differ for each fixed position, it is possible to configure a state in which the degree of fixation of the first displacement member and the second displacement member differs.

Note that the manner in which adsorption is enabled is not limited at all. For example, it may be adhered with an adhesive tape or may utilize the attraction force between a magnet and a metal part. Further, the first reversing member and the second reversing member may be designed to use, for example, fixing screws, screws, or the like as the metal parts that are attracted to the magnet.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement means is configured to be able to be displaced in forward and reverse directions, and in a predetermined state, it is displaced in the forward direction in a first displacement manner, and in the reverse direction in the first displacement mode. A game machine D5 that is configured to be displaced in a second displacement manner different from the displacement manner, and the second displacement manner is configured such that after being displaced in a predetermined manner, the game machine is displaced in the first displacement manner.

According to gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of any of gaming machines D1 to D4, the displacement mode of the displacement means is configured to be different in the forward and reverse directions, and the second displacement mode is configured as a displacement mode in which a predetermined mode is added before the first displacement mode, so that the amount of displacement required for the displacement means when retracting the displacement means can be reduced. This reduces the attention to the displacement means when retracting, and relatively increases the attention to the displacement means that displaces at the presentation position.

In conventional machines, the rotation pattern was the same in both forward and reverse directions, so after extending the display to the performance position (the position in front of the LCD display area), it was necessary to rotate again in the opposite direction multiple times before retreating to the retracted position (the position outside the LCD display area). In this case, there was a possibility that the viewer's gaze would be drawn to the part retreating from the performance position, which could be seen as a problem.

The type of displacement is not limited in any way. For example, it may be a rotational displacement or a linear displacement. The displacement may be on a plane, may span multiple planes, or may be three-dimensional.

A game machine D6 in the game machine D5, wherein the displacement means includes a release means configured to release load transmission when the operating resistance becomes larger than a predetermined amount.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D5, the displacement mode of the displacing means can be changed by varying the operational resistance of the internal structure of the displacing means.

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D6 includes a light emitting unit that irradiates light toward the displacement unit, the displacement unit includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the displacement unit includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member. The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the second displacement member is configured to be able to change the visual recognition mode of the light from the light emitting means depending on whether the surface to be viewed is one side or the other side.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines D1 to D6, gaming machine D7 can change the appearance of the displacement means with respect to the light from the light emitting means in accordance with the visible surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

For example, there are cases where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as emitting light individually, and cases where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as emitting light as a unit. It can be changed with .

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7 is provided with a detection means for detecting the arrangement of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be able to detect whether or not the displacement of the displacement means is in an allowable state. Features gaming machine D8.

According to gaming machine D8, in any of gaming machines D1 to D7, the detection means can detect a state in which the displacement of the displacement means is permissible, so that the displacement means can be prevented from colliding with surrounding structural parts during displacement.

In addition, since the displacement of the displacement means can be executed while detecting the section in which the displacement means can be displaced by the detection means, the displacement mode including enlargement and contraction can be performed to some extent after being displaced from the production position to the retreat position. By controlling the displacement, it is possible to suppress the increase in attention to the displacement means when displacing from the presentation position to the retreat position, compared to the case where the displacement is performed in a displacement manner including enlargement/contraction from the start of displacement. .

Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D7 is characterized in that it is provided with a detection means for detecting the state of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be able to detect two or more types of numerical values regarding the displacement of the displacement means. Game machine D9.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines D1 to D7, gaming machine D9 can reduce the number of detection means. Various types of values for the displacement of the displacement means are exemplified. For example, they may be values for the respective positions and attitudes of different movable members, or they may be values related to the change in the operating mode when the operating mode changes at a predetermined timing.

Further, the arrangement of the detection means is not limited at all. For example, by arranging the detection means on the displacement proximal end side of the displacement means, it is easy to configure a structure for detecting the arrangement and posture of the second displacement means connected to the displacement distal end side of the displacement means.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D9, the displacement means includes the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member have one side facing the player. When the first displacement member and the second displacement member face one side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member face the player. While the displacement member and the second displacement member can be distinguished, if the first displacement member and the second displacement member face the other side toward the player, the first displacement member and the second displacement member A gaming machine D10 characterized in that it is configured such that the two are indistinguishable from each other.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D9, gaming machine D10 can maintain high expectations from the player that a reversal action will occur, regardless of the state of the first and second displacement members when one side is facing the player.

<Points for changing the easily visible surface by arranging the displacement means having a plurality of visible surfaces>
A gaming machine E1 is provided with a displacement means having a first visible surface and a second visible surface configured to be visible, and the displacement means is configured to be switchable between a first state in which the first visible surface is easy to see and a second state in which the second visible surface is easy to see depending on the arrangement.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a reversing unit 71 configured to be reversible, and are configured to change the appearance visually recognized by the player by changing the visible surface (for example, , see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-153095). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the reversal of the reversing operation unit 71 is performed in a fixed position, and therefore the player's line of sight cannot be changed by changing the visible surface. That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of efficiently changing the player's line of sight.

In contrast, with gaming machine E1, the displacement means can switch between a state in which the first visible surface is easily visible and a state in which the second visible surface is easily visible depending on the position, so that the line of sight of a player who wishes to see the first visible surface or the second visible surface can be changed in a manner that follows the path of the change in position of the displacement means.

A gaming machine E2 characterized in that the gaming machine E1 includes an open part that is opened so that the displacement means can be visually recognized, and the displacement means is configured such that the open part side is easily recognized.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E1, gaming machine E2 allows a player looking through the opening to the rear side to easily see the first visible surface or the second visible surface of the displacement means.

Gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the displacement means in gaming machine E2 is positioned closer to the rear side when placed on the edge of the opening than when placed in the center of the opening.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E2, gaming machine E3 makes it possible to make the displacement means visible from the front when it is placed in the center of the open section, while reducing the amount of eye movement required when viewing the displacement means when it is placed on the edge of the open section. This makes it possible to achieve both good visibility of the displacement means and reduced fatigue for the player who follows the displacement means with their eyes.

Gaming machine E4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines E1 to E3, the displacement means has a plurality of sets of the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and when the first visible surface and the second visible surface of one set are visible, the first visible surface and the second visible surface of the other set are difficult to see.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines E1 to E3, gaming machine E4 has different letters and figures for each set on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, allowing players viewing the displacement means to see different letters and figures, and by configuring the first visible surface and the second visible surface of the set that are not intended to be visible to be difficult to see, it is possible to avoid the appearance of the displacement means being unsightly.

For example, in the first group, characters and figures indicating that the expectation that the lottery result will be a jackpot are displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and in the second group, the lottery result is displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface. When characters or figures indicating a high expectation of a jackpot are displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, the expectation of a jackpot is displayed through the displacement means, regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. You can check the height. In this case, even after the displacement means retreats from the front side of the display area of the display device, the display indicating the expectation of a jackpot can be maintained by the displacement means, so that the player who has taken his/her line of sight away from the liquid crystal display device can Also, it is possible to continue displaying a display regarding the expectation of a jackpot.

Note that there are no limitations to the manner in which it is configured to be difficult to visually recognize. For example, it may be arranged on a side different from the player's side (rear side, left and right outer side, etc.), or it may be configured to reduce visibility by shielding with a shielding means.

In the gaming machine E4, the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface to be visually recognized is such that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to be recognized during the operation. A gaming machine E5 characterized by being configured.

According to the gaming machine E5, in the gaming machine E4, during the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface (before confirmation), the first visible surface displayed to the player side. and the set of second visible surfaces can be easily avoided from being predicted. Thereby, attention to the displacement means can be improved.

The manner in which the first visible surface and the second visible surface are configured to be difficult to recognize during the above-mentioned switching operation is not limited in any way. For example, the displacement means may be rotated at high speed to make them difficult to recognize, or a part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) may be configured to be separable from the other parts and operated in a separated state to make them difficult to recognize, or a light-emitting means may be used to set the brightness to create a relatively dark part to make it difficult to recognize.

In this case, the manner in which the separation occurs is not limited in any way. For example, during the above-mentioned switching operation, the device may be configured to operate facing backward so that only one of the part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and the other part is visible, and the other part is not visible, or the device may be configured to operate in a state in which the part and the other part are simultaneously visible but out of alignment.

The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that it includes an open part that is opened so that the displacement means can be visually recognized, and that the switching operation is performed with the displacement means disposed at the center of the opening part. Game machine E6.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E5, gaming machine E6 makes it easier for players to see the switching action, improving attention to the switching action.

Gaming machine E7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E5 or E6, during the switching operation, one of the part of the first visible surface and the other part faces the front side, and the other faces a side different from the front side.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E5 or E6, a part of the first visible surface is made visible during operation, and the entire first visible surface is made invisible, so that the first visible surface is made visible during operation. Possible aspects can be made difficult to recognize.

Gaming machine E8 is any one of gaming machines E1 to E7, and is provided with a second displacement means configured to be capable of blocking at least a portion of the line of sight to the second visible surface, and the displacement means is configured to be switchable to a third state for making the first visible surface visible together with the second displacement means.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines E1 to E7, gaming machine E8 can improve the design freedom of the presentation position of the displacement means by making at least a portion of the second visible surface difficult to see using the second displacement means.

Gaming machine E9 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines E1 to E8, the displacement means is configured to change the surface visible when viewed in a specified direction between a first visible surface and a second visible surface as the displacement occurs.

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines E1 to E8, gaming machine E9 changes the surface that is visible when viewed in a specified direction between the first visible surface and the second visible surface, so the surface that is easily visible can be changed at will, regardless of the amount of change in the player's line of sight.

A gaming machine E10, which is a gaming machine E9, characterized in that the attitude of the displacement means changes between the first state and the second state.

According to the game machine E10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine E9, the difference between the appearance of the displacement means in the first state and the appearance of the displacement means in the second state can be increased by changing the posture of the displacement means. can.

Gaming machine E11 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E9 or E10, it has an auxiliary means configured to be arranged close to the displacement means, and in the first state, the displacement means is arranged close to the auxiliary means, and in the second state, the displacement means is arranged away from the auxiliary means.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines E9 and E10, gaming machine E11 can arrange the auxiliary means close to the displacement means so that they can be viewed as one unit, and can also arrange the auxiliary means and the displacement means so that they can be viewed separately, allowing the displacement means to give multiple different impressions to the player.

Note that the form of the auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, the arrangement may be fixed or movable.

In the gaming machine E11, the auxiliary means is configured to be able to switch between a state where the auxiliary means is visible integrally with the displacement means and a state where it is visible separately from the displacement means. .

In addition to the effects of gaming machine E11, gaming machine E12 can switch between viewing the displacement means and the auxiliary means as a single unit or separately, thereby increasing the variety of visible patterns relative to the number of components.

<Points at which the ratio of the displacement amount of the displacement means to the displacement amount of the installation means at the same time differs between sections>
A gaming machine F1 comprising a displacement means configured to be displaceable, an arrangement means for arranging a first part on the displacement means, and a support means for supporting a second part of the arrangement means, wherein the support means is configured to be capable of controlling the arrangement of the second part relative to the first part during the displacement of the displacement means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that is equipped with a tiltable base arm 220, a rotating part 211 rotatably attached to the tilt tip side of the base arm 220, and a drive motor 222 that generates a driving force for rotating the rotating part 211, and is configured to rotate the rotating part 211 independently of the displacement of the base arm 220 (see, for example, JP 2016-116782 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the rotating part 211 is prone to wobbling at the tip of the base arm 220, and rotating the rotating part 211 while the base arm 220 is tilting and displacing may cause a malfunction in the mechanism. As a result, the rotational displacement of the rotating part 211 is assumed to be performed while the base arm 220 is stopped, and the degree of freedom of displacement is low.

In other words, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement in terms of increasing the design freedom for the displacement of the displaceable parts.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the arrangement means is supported at at least two points by the displacement means and the support means, and the two support points are configured to be relatively displaced during the displacement of the displacement means. Since the support means can control the arrangement of the second part with respect to the first part, the arrangement means can be displaced while the displacement means is being displaced while stably supporting the arrangement means. Can be done. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the arrangement means (displaceable portion) can be increased.

Note that the form of the support means is not limited at all. For example, it may be supported in a manner in which displacement is limited by a guide groove formed in a fixed base means, or it may be connected and supported by a second movable displacement means. Further, the control by the support means is not limited to electronic control, but also includes mechanical control such as regulating (guiding) the displacement of the second portion by a wall portion.

In the gaming machine F1, the displacement means is configured to be able to displace the first section and the second section, and the support means is configured to displace the second section when the displacement means displaces the first section. and a second range that supports the second section when the displacement means displaces the second section, wherein the second section is displaced in the first range. A gaming machine F2 characterized in that the direction and the direction in which the second portion is displaced in the second range are different from each other.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F1, gaming machine F2 allows the displacement speed of the arrangement means to be varied even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, and the support means is configured to allow changes in the displacement direction of the second portion, so that the displacement of the arrangement means can be made smooth even if the displacement direction of the second portion changes irregularly.

Gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the support means in gaming machine F1 or F2 is equipped with a limiting portion that limits the displacement of the second portion.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines F1 and F2, gaming machine F3 can limit the displacement of the second part at the boundary position (limiting part) between the first and second ranges, so that when the second part is displaced from the side with larger displacement to the side with smaller displacement, it is easier to stop the second part at the boundary position (limiting part) between the first and second ranges.

The type of load required to displace the second part relative to the first part is not limited in any way. For example, the second part may be pulled, or the second part may be pushed.

Note that the form of the restricting portion is not limited at all. For example, it may be possible to set an increase or decrease in the displacement resistance of the second portion, or it may be a mode in which the direction of displacement of the second portion is switched.

A gaming machine F4, in which the first section is arranged closer to the end of the displacement range of the displacement means than the second section, and the relative displacement amount of the arrangement means in the second section with respect to the displacement means as a reference is smaller than the relative displacement amount of the arrangement means in the first section with respect to the displacement means as a reference.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines F2 and F3, gaming machine F4 can create a section where the relative amount of displacement of the arrangement means based on the displacement means becomes smaller at a mid-displacement position of the displacement means, so that in addition to the end position of the displacement of the displacement means, positions can be provided where the displacement means and the arrangement means can be easily viewed as one unit. As a result, the number of positions where the displacement means and the arrangement means can be easily viewed as one unit can be increased.

A gaming machine F5 is one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, characterized in that the displacement speed (ratio) of the second part based on the displacement speed of the first part is configured to be variable.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines F1 to F4, even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the second portion of the arrangement means on the supporting means side Since it is possible to change the displacement speed of the disposing means, it is possible to create an action performance in which the displacement speed of the arrangement means is made variable by simple drive control (uniform speed drive) of the driving means.

Gaming machine F6 is any one of gaming machines F1 to F5, characterized in that the support means is configured to reduce the displacement speed at the displacement end of the second portion.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects provided by the game machines F1 to F5, it is possible to prevent the second portion from bouncing back, and it is possible to make it easier to stop the arrangement means at an early stage at the end of the displacement.

Note that the method for preventing the second portion from bouncing back is not limited at all. For example, a method may be used in which the displacement speed of the second portion at the end of displacement (for example, the amount of displacement of the second portion when the first portion is displaced by a predetermined unit length) is reduced; A method may also be used in which the displacement of the second portion is restricted by a geometrical device such as erecting a wall in the direction of displacement of the second portion when the first portion is stopped.

Furthermore, the method is not limited to reducing the amount of displacement of the second portion, but may also include increasing the displacement resistance of the second portion. For example, the displacement resistance of the second portion may be improved by applying a load using magnetic force or the like at the end of the displacement of the second portion, or the displacement resistance may be improved using a biasing force such as a coil spring. good.

In the gaming machine F6, the support means is configured to track a displacement trajectory of the second portion due to the displacement of the first portion, and a displacement trajectory of the second portion when the first portion stops at the end of displacement. A gaming machine F7 characterized in that the displacement locus of the displacement is configured to intersect.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine F6, gaming machine F7 has a support means that has the function of guiding the displacement of the second part accompanying the displacement of the first part, thereby reducing the return displacement (bound) of the second part when the first part stops.

A gaming machine F8 is any one of the gaming machines F1 to F7, and is characterized in that it is provided with a supported means that is displaceably supported by the arrangement means, and the supported means is configured to displace by an amount of displacement that corresponds to the relative displacement amount of the arrangement means with respect to the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F7, a complex effect can be performed by the supported means that is displaced together with the arrangement means.

The manner in which the supported means is displaced is not limited in any way. For example, the supported means may be displaced so as to move parallel to the disposition means on a predetermined plane along which the disposition means is displaced, or the supported means may be displaced in a manner different from the manner in which the disposition means is displaced (for example, a sliding displacement on a predetermined plane) (for example, a rotational displacement about a predetermined axis) at a position away from the predetermined plane along which the disposition means is displaced.

Note that the mode of displacement of the arranging means related to the amount of displacement of the arranging means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a change in posture, or it may be a displacement while maintaining the posture.

The gaming machine F8 is characterized in that, while the first part is displaced in a predetermined direction, the second part has a section in which it can be reciprocated in a direction intersecting the displacement locus of the first part. Game machine F9.

Gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of gaming machine F8, can achieve a displacement mode in which the amount of relative displacement of the second part with respect to the first part returns and changes (for example, increases and then decreases) while the first part is displaced, thereby realizing a displacement mode in which the amount of displacement of the supported means is increased while the position of the second part is maintained.

A gaming machine F8 or F9, characterized in that the (relative) rotational displacement speed of the supported means with respect to the arrangement means is configured to be equal to the displacement speed of the displacement means. F10.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F8 or F9, the displacement mode of the supported means can be made the same as that of the displacing means with the arrangement means in between. This can give the player the illusion that the supported means is being displaced by its own driving means.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the arrangement means includes a posture changing means that changes its posture so that the surface facing the player side is switched between a first surface and a second surface as the placement means is displaced; A game characterized in that the posture changing means is configured such that the first surface or the second surface is in a posture facing the player when the second portion is placed at the end of displacement. Machine F11.

According to gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect achieved by any of gaming machines F1 to F10, the first or second surface of the posture change means is directed toward the player, allowing the player to understand that the second part has reached the end of the displacement, so that the end of the presentation action by the displacement means can be configured in an easy-to-understand manner.
<Concept of the invention using sorting members C170 to C3170 as examples>
A gaming machine CA1 equipped with a displacement member, at least a portion of which is arranged in a ball passage path and formed so as to be displaceable by the weight of the ball, characterized in that when a first ball passing through the passage path reaches the displacement member, the weight of the first ball displaces the displacement member from a predetermined position, and the first ball is guided to a first passage, and when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, a second ball following the first ball is guided to a second passage, and when the weight of the ball is not acting on the displacement member, the displacement member is positioned at the predetermined position.

Here, a gaming machine equipped with a distribution member that operates based on the weight of the gaming balls and distributes the gaming balls to a first passage and a second passage is known (JP Patent Publication No. 2017-148189). However, in the conventional technology described above, the gaming balls are simply distributed alternately to the first passage and the second passage in the order in which they arrive, regardless of the state of the game balls that arrive, so the player cannot focus on this distribution operation, resulting in a problem of insufficient interest in the game.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine CA1, when the first ball passing through the passage path reaches the displacement member, the weight of the first ball displaces the displacement member from the predetermined position, and the first ball The second ball, which follows the first ball, is guided to the second path, and the displacement member is displaced by the weight of the first ball. When the ball is not being acted on, the ball is placed at a predetermined position, so if the second ball is connected to the first ball with an interval of less than a predetermined distance, the first ball is guided to the first path. and the second ball can be guided to the second passage by the displacement member that is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, while the second ball is moved by a predetermined amount to the first ball. In the case of consecutive balls separated by a distance exceeding A ball can also be guided into the first path. In this way, the guided path can be changed depending on the state of the series of balls (the distance between the leading ball and the following ball), so the player can focus on the state of the balls and improve the interest of the game. can do.

The second ball following the first ball means a ball following the first ball at a distance smaller than a predetermined amount. Therefore, the second ball may roll or flow down while in contact with the first ball.

A gaming machine CA2 is characterized in that in the gaming machine CA1, the displacement of the displacement member to the predetermined position is performed by the weight of the displacement member.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine CA1, gaming machine CA2 has the advantage that the displacement member is displaced to the predetermined position by the weight of the displacement member, making it possible to simplify the structure compared to when a biasing spring is used. Also, compared to when a biasing spring is used, the displacement of the displacement member can be slowed down, making it possible to prevent the displacement member from being placed in the predetermined position before the second ball is guided to the second passage. Furthermore, it is possible to provide the possibility of guiding the third ball, which follows the second ball, to the second passage.

In the gaming machine CA2, the displacement member includes a main body portion that guides the ball to the first passage or the second passage, and a weight portion that is connected to the main body portion and functions as a weight that displaces the main body portion to the predetermined position, and at least a portion of the weight portion is visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine CA3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CA2, there is also a main body that guides the ball to the first passage or the second passage, and a weight that is connected to the main body and displaces the main body to a predetermined position. Since at least a part of the weight part is visible to the player, it is possible to make the player recognize the direction in which the ball is guided based on the position (state) of the weight part. can. Furthermore, the weight can serve both of the roles of a weight for displacing the main body and a part for recognizing the guiding direction of the ball, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

Among the gaming machines CA1 to CA3, gaming machine CA4 is characterized in that the displacement member has a first surface along which the first ball guided to the first passage rolls.

According to gaming machine CA4, in any of gaming machines CA1 to CA3, the displacement member includes the first surface on which the first ball guided to the first passage rolls, so that the first ball While rolling on one surface, the weight of the ball can be applied to the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first ball (that is, a state in which the second ball can be guided to the second passage).

The gaming machine CA4 includes a base member and a shaft rotatably supporting the displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member is arranged so that the second ball guided to the second passage rolls. A gaming machine CA5, characterized in that the second surface is arranged at a position overlapping the axis in the vertical direction.

According to gaming machine CA5, in addition to the effects of gaming machine CA4, the displacement member has a second surface along which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the second surface is disposed at a position that overlaps with the axis in the vertical direction, so that the displacement member can be prevented from being displaced toward a predetermined position by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. This allows the second ball to roll stably. It also ensures the possibility of guiding the third ball following the second ball to the second passage.

In the gaming machine CA4 or CA5, the displacement member has a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the gaming machine CA6 is characterized in that the first surface is longer than the second surface.

According to gaming machine CA6, in addition to the effects of gaming machine CA4 or CA5, the displacement member has a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the first surface is longer than the second surface, so that while the second ball rolls on the second surface, it is easy to create a state in which the first ball rolls on the first surface at the same time. In other words, by having the weight of the first ball act on the displacement member while the second ball rolls on the second surface, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced toward a predetermined position by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. Therefore, the second ball can be rolled stably. It is also possible to ensure the possibility that the third ball following the second ball can be guided to the second passage.

Any one of gaming machines CA4 to CA6 includes a base member and a shaft rotatably supporting the displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member is guided to the second passageway. A gaming machine CA7 comprising a second surface on which a ball rolls, the first surface extending in a direction away from the axis.

According to gaming machine CA7, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines CA4 to CA6, the displacement member includes a second surface on which a second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and extends in the direction away from the axis, so as the first ball rolls toward the first path, the weight of the first ball can be effectively applied to the displacement member. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced toward a predetermined position due to the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. Therefore, the second ball can be rolled stably. Further, it is possible to ensure the possibility that the third ball following the second ball can also be guided to the second path.

A gaming machine CA8 is any one of gaming machines CA4 to CA7, and is characterized in that it comprises a base member and a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, the displacement member has a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the first surface and the second surface are at least partially disposed on either side of the shaft.

Gaming machine CA8 has the same effects as any of gaming machines CA4 to CA7, but also includes a base member and an axis that rotatably supports a displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member has a second surface on which a second ball that is guided to a second passageway rolls, and the first surface and the second surface are at least partially positioned with the axis in between, which increases the degree of freedom in positioning the displacement member.

Any one of gaming machines CA4 to CA7 includes a base member and a shaft rotatably supporting the displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member is guided to the second passageway. A game machine CA9 comprising a second surface on which a ball rolls, and at least a portion of the first surface and the second surface are arranged on the same side with respect to the shaft.

Gaming machine CA9 has the same effects as any of gaming machines CA4 to CA7, but also includes a base member and an axis that rotatably supports a displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member has a second surface on which a second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and at least a portion of the first surface and the second surface are arranged on the same side of the axis, so that even if the first ball is discharged from the first surface, the weight of the second ball can be used to set the displacement member to a position for guiding the second ball to the second passage. As a result, the length of the first surface can be shortened, thereby increasing the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the displacement member.

A gaming machine CA10 is any one of gaming machines CA4 to CA9, and is characterized in that it has an upstream surface along which a ball rolls toward the first surface, and the first surface reverses the rolling direction of the first ball that has been rolled from the upstream surface.

According to the gaming machine CA10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines CA4 to CA9, the gaming machine CA10 is provided with an upstream surface on which the first ball rolls toward the first surface, and the first surface reverses the rolling direction of the first ball rolled from the upstream surface, so that the time required for the first ball to stay on the first surface can be secured for the time required for the reversal. Therefore, by making the weight of the first ball act on the displacement member while the second ball rolls on the second surface, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from being displaced toward a predetermined position by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. Therefore, the second ball can be stably rolled. In addition, it is possible to ensure that the third ball following the second ball can also be guided to the second passage. Furthermore, the length of the first surface can be shortened, which increases the degree of freedom in arranging the displacement member.

A gaming machine CA11 is any one of gaming machines CA1 to CA10, and is characterized in that it comprises a base member, a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, and an upstream surface disposed on the base member along which the ball rolls toward the first surface, and the shaft is disposed in a position perpendicular to the direction in which the ball rolls on the upstream surface and the vertical direction.

According to the gaming machine CA11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA10, the shaft is disposed in a posture perpendicular to the vertical direction and the direction in which the ball rolls on the upstream surface, so that the base member It is possible to downsize the unit in which the displacement member is disposed. In particular, by arranging the base member so that the direction in which the ball rolls on the upstream surface is along the width direction of the gaming machine, the width direction of the gaming machine can be effectively utilized and space for disposing the displacement member can be secured. It's easy to do.

A gaming machine CA12 is any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA10, characterized in that it has a base member and the displacement member is arranged on the base member so that it can be slidably displaced.

According to the game machine CA12, in addition to the effects provided by any of the game machines CA1 to CA10, the displacement member is disposed on the base member so as to be slidable, so for example, the displacement member is rotatably supported on the base member. The displacement member can be made smaller than that in the case where the displacement member is used, and the space for arranging other members in the base member can be secured accordingly.

A gaming machine CA13, which is any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA12, includes a base member, a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, and an upstream surface disposed on the base member and along which a ball rolls toward the first surface, the displacement member includes a second surface along which the second ball rolls, the second ball being guided to the second passage in a state in which the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, and in a state in which the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the upstream end of the second surface is positioned vertically lower than the downstream end of the upstream surface.

When the weight of the first ball displaces the displacement member from a predetermined position, the impact of the displacement may cause the displacement member to bounce up, and if the upstream end of the second surface is positioned higher than the downstream end of the upstream surface due to the displacement member bouncing up, there is a risk that the second ball will not be able to roll from the upstream surface to the second surface. In particular, when the second ball collides with the upstream end of the bouncing up displacement member (the upstream end of the second surface), the impact will cause the displacement member to bounce up further (the second ball will push up the displacement member), and there is a risk that the second ball will flow into the passage (first surface) in which the first ball should roll.

In contrast, with gaming machine CA13, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines CA1 to CA12, when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the upstream end of the second surface is positioned vertically lower than the downstream end of the upstream surface. Therefore, when the displacement member rebounds due to the impact of being displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the upstream end of the second surface is prevented from being positioned higher than the downstream end of the upstream surface. Therefore, the second ball can be smoothly rolled from the upstream surface to the second surface.

In the gaming machine CA13, the upstream end of the second surface is sloped downward toward the upstream surface.

According to the gaming machine CA14, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine CA13, the upstream end of the second surface is tilted downward toward the upstream surface, so that when the first ball is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, When the displacement member rebounds (jumps up) due to the impact and the second ball collides with the upstream end of the displaced member (upstream end of the second surface), the force acting from the second ball on the displacement member is It can act as a force in the direction of pushing down the displacement member. As a result, the second ball can be smoothly rolled from the upstream surface to the second surface.

Any one of gaming machines CA1 to CA14 includes an upstream surface on which a ball rolls toward the first surface, and the displacement member rolls on the first ball guided to the first passage. a first surface, the first surface reverses the rolling direction of the first ball rolled from the upstream surface, and the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball. when the displacement locus on the upstream surface side of the displacement member is farther away from the upstream surface than the displacement locus on the upstream surface side of the first sphere at the position where the first surface is reversed. A gaming machine CA15 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine CA15, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA14, when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, the displacement trajectory on the upstream surface of the displacement member is set to a position that is further away from the upstream surface than the displacement trajectory on the upstream surface of the first ball at the inverted position of the first surface, so that it is possible to prevent the second ball from erroneously flowing into (being accepted by) the first surface. In other words, the second ball is abutted against the first ball to keep it away from the first surface, and the end of the upstream surface of the displacement member that is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball can push the second ball away in a direction away from the first surface.

In the gaming machine CA15, the displacement member moves the first ball to a position where the rolling direction of the first surface is reversed until the first ball is displaced from the predetermined position by a predetermined amount or more due to the weight of the first ball. A gaming machine CA16 characterized by fastening.

According to gaming machine CA16, in addition to the effects of gaming machine CA15, the displacement member holds the first ball in a position that reverses the rolling direction of the first surface until the weight of the first ball displaces it from the predetermined position by a predetermined amount or more, so that it is possible to more reliably prevent the second ball from erroneously flowing into (being accepted by) the first surface. In other words, the second ball is abutted against the first ball to keep it away from the first surface, and the upstream end of the displacement member, which is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, can more reliably push the second ball away in a direction away from the first surface.

Any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA16 includes an inflow section, a reciprocating surface on which a ball flowing from the inflow section rolls so as to be reciprocally displaceable, and an outflow section that causes the ball to flow out from the reciprocating surface, and the outflow section The gaming machine CA17 is characterized in that a part is located upstream of the displacement member in the passage route.

According to the gaming machine CA17, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA16, there is an inflow part, a reciprocating surface on which the ball flowing in from the inflow part rolls so as to be reciprocally displaceable, and a ball from the reciprocating surface. Since the outflow part is located on the upstream side of the displacement member in the passage path, the first ball and the second ball are connected at an interval of a predetermined amount or less, and the first ball The second ball can be easily made to reach the displacement member in a state in which the ball and the second ball are connected with an interval of a predetermined distance or less. In other words, even if the distance between the first ball and the second ball when flowing from the inflow part is larger than the predetermined distance, by being reciprocated on the reciprocating surface, the first ball and the second ball The distance from the second ball can be narrowed (the distance can be set to a predetermined amount or less).

A gaming machine CA18 is characterized in that the width dimension of the reciprocating surface in the gaming machine CA17 is set to a width dimension that allows one ball to pass through.

According to gaming machine CA18, in addition to the effects of gaming machine CA17, the width dimension of the reciprocating surface is set to a width dimension that allows one ball to pass through, so that the first ball and the second ball that flow into the reciprocating surface from the inflow section and are displaced back and forth on the reciprocating surface can be prevented from passing each other. Therefore, when the first ball and the second ball are displaced back and forth on the reciprocating surface, it is easier to close the gap between the first ball and the second ball (to make the gap smaller than a predetermined amount).

In the gaming machine CA18, the reciprocating surface is inclined upward toward one side and the other side, and the outflow portion is disposed at the lowermost part of the reciprocating surface.

According to gaming machine CA19, in addition to the effects of gaming machine CA18, the reciprocating surface is inclined upward as it moves toward one side and the other, and the outflow section is located at the bottom of the reciprocating surface, so that the first ball and the second ball can be made to flow out from the outflow section in a state where the inertia of the reciprocating displacement on the reciprocating surface is weakened. In other words, the first ball and the second ball can be made to flow out easily while maintaining a state in which they are connected together with a gap of less than a predetermined amount.

A gaming machine CA20 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine CA19, the reciprocating surface is formed in a straight line when viewed from above.

According to the gaming machine CA20, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine CA19, since the reciprocating surface is formed in a linear shape when viewed from above, when the first ball and the second ball are reciprocated on the reciprocating surface, , the distance between the first ball and the second ball can be easily narrowed (the distance can be easily reduced to a predetermined amount or less).

A gaming machine CA21 is one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA20, characterized by having an attraction member that is formed so that the attraction force of a magnet can act on a ball and is arranged with at least its lower surface inclined downward.

According to the gaming machine CA21, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA20, the machine is provided with an attraction member that is formed so that the attraction force of a magnet can act on the ball and is arranged with at least its lower surface tilted downward, so that such an attraction member can form a passageway for the ball, improving the interest of the game. That is, when a ball is attracted to the downwardly tilted lower surface of the attraction member, the ball can slide by its own weight and be displaced along the lower surface of the attraction member. In this case, depending on the state of the ball (the relationship between the inertial force acting on the ball and the attraction force), an unstable state can be created in which there is a possibility that the ball will fall from the lower surface of the attraction member (i.e., the ball may not reach the end of the passageway (the lower surface of the attraction member)). As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine CA21, the attraction member is characterized by having a bottom surface forming member formed in a plate shape from a magnetic material, and a magnet that applies a magnetic force to the bottom surface forming member.

According to the gaming machine CA22, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CA21, the attraction member includes a lower surface forming member formed in a plate shape from a magnetic material and a magnet that applies magnetic force to the lower surface forming member, so that the attraction member is spherical. By having a structure in which the surface on which the ball slides is formed by the lower surface of the lower surface forming member, it is easy to adjust the attraction force and optimize the frictional force, and the passage path of the ball can be reliably formed with a simple structure.

Gaming machine CA23 is characterized in that, in gaming machine CA21 or CA22, the suction member forms at least a part of the second passage.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine CA21 or CA22, gaming machine CA23 enhances the excitement of the game because the suction member forms at least a part of the second passage. That is, the second ball can be guided by the displacement member to reach the second passage only if the second ball reaches the displacement member while connected to the first ball with a gap of less than a predetermined amount, and this possibility is relatively low. By displacing the second ball, which has arrived through such a low possibility, in an unstable state where there is a possibility that it may fall (it may not reach the end of the bottom surface of the suction member), the player is made to hope that it will pass through safely, enhancing the excitement of the game.

A gaming machine CA24 is characterized in that it comprises a base member and a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member in a gaming machine CA23, the displacement member comprises a first surface along which the first ball guided to the first passage rolls, and a second surface along which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the first surface and the second surface are at least partially disposed on either side of the shaft.

According to the gaming machine CA24, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine CA23, the gaming machine CA24 includes a base member and a shaft rotatably supporting a displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member is guided to the first passage. A first surface on which a first ball rolls, and a second surface on which a second ball guided to a second passage rolls, the first surface and the second surface being at least partially Since the displacement member is placed across the axis, the weight of the first ball causes the displacement member to be displaced from a predetermined position (the position of the first surface is displaced downward), thereby displacing the position of the second surface upward. can be done. Therefore, the second ball rolling on the second surface can be easily attracted to the lower surface of the adsorption member.

In gaming machine CA24, gaming machine CA25 is characterized in that the second surface is arranged at a position overlapping the axis in the vertical direction.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine CA24, gaming machine CA25 has the advantage that the second surface is arranged at a position that overlaps the axis in the vertical direction, which makes it possible to prevent the displacement member from being displaced toward a predetermined position (the position of the second surface being displaced downward) due to the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. This makes it easier for the second ball rolling on the second surface to be attracted to the underside of the attraction member.

A gaming machine CA26 characterized in that the first surface is longer than the second surface in the gaming machine CA24 or CA25.

According to the gaming machine CA26, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines CA24 and CA25, the first surface is longer than the second surface, so that while the second ball rolls on the second surface, the first ball can easily roll on the first surface at the same time. That is, while the second ball rolls on the second surface, the weight of the first ball is made to act on the displacement member, so that the displacement member is prevented from being displaced toward a predetermined position (the position of the second surface is displaced downward) by the weight of the second ball rolling on the second surface. Therefore, the second ball rolling on the second surface can be easily attracted to the lower surface of the attraction member.
<Concept of the invention using plate members C120, C2120, and C4120 as examples>
A gaming machine CB1 is characterized in that the gaming machine has a ball passage, the passage comprising a first passage that allows the ball to move back and forth in the forward and backward directions, and a second passage that is connected to the first passage and allows the ball to pass along the left and right directions.

Here, a gaming machine equipped with a passage member (stage) that allows the ball to move back and forth is known (JP Patent Publication 2016-198607). However, the above gaming machine has a problem in that the game is not sufficiently interesting.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine CB1, the passage includes a first passage that allows the ball to reciprocate in the front-rear direction, and a second passage that communicates with the first passage and allows the ball to pass along the left-right direction. Since the game is equipped with a passageway, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine CB1, when a first ball and a second ball following the first ball pass through the second path, the distance between the first ball and the second ball is The gaming machine CB2 is characterized in that a passage through which the first ball and the second ball are guided is changed accordingly.

According to the gaming machine CB2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CB1, when a first ball and a second ball that follows the first ball pass through the second path, the first ball The paths through which the first and second balls are guided are changed depending on the distance between the balls and the second ball, so that the balls are guided to a predetermined path (i.e., the first and second balls are guided to a predetermined path). It is possible to make the player expect that the distance between the ball and the second ball will be a predetermined distance, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In this case, the distance between the first ball and the second ball is determined by the reciprocating motion in the first path, and the first ball and the second ball cause the ball to pass along the left-right direction. Since the ball flows down from the first path to the second path, the distance between the first ball and the second ball can be easily seen by the player. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

In the gaming machine CB2, if the distance between the first ball and the second ball when passing through the second passage is less than or equal to a predetermined amount, the distance between the first ball and the second ball is less than the predetermined amount, and the distance between the first ball and the second ball is less than the predetermined amount. at least a second ball is guided to a path that is also advantageous;
The first passage is characterized by being formed so that the distance between the first ball and the second ball can be reduced by the reciprocating movement of the first ball and the second ball. Game machine CB3.

According to gaming machine CB3, in addition to the effects of gaming machine CB2, when the distance between the first ball and the second ball when passing through the second passage is equal to or less than a predetermined amount, at least the second ball is guided to a passage that is more advantageous than the passage that is guided when the distance exceeds the predetermined amount, and since the first passage is formed so that the distance between the first ball and the second ball can be reduced by the reciprocating movement of the first ball and the second ball, it is easy to make the distance between the first ball and the second ball when passing through the second passage equal to or less than the predetermined amount. As a result, the player can expect to be guided to an advantageous passage, and the interest of the game can be increased.

A game machine CB4, which is any one of the game machines CB1 to CB3, and includes a game board with an opening in the center, and the second passage is disposed at the opening of the game board.

According to the gaming machine CB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines described in any of the gaming machines CB1 to CB3, the gaming machine CB4 includes a gaming board with an opening in the center, and the second passage is arranged in the opening of the gaming board. Therefore, the space in the front and rear directions can be used effectively. Therefore, it is possible to easily ensure the full length of the second passage.
<About the concept of the invention using magnetic parts C2400, c5400, c6400 (passage part CRt2004) as an example>
In a gaming machine equipped with a displacement member, at least a portion of which is disposed in a ball passage path and is formed to be displaceable by the weight of the ball, when a first ball passing through the passage path reaches the displacement member, the The displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, and when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, a second ball following the first ball A gaming machine CC1 characterized in that the ball passes through an upwardly lifted portion of the displacement member and is guided to a path different from that of the first ball.

Here, a game machine is known that is equipped with a distribution member that operates based on the weight of the game balls and distributes the game balls into a first passage and a second passage (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148189). . However, in the above-mentioned conventional technology, the ball only flows downward in the weight direction, so there is a problem that the game is not sufficiently interesting.

In contrast, with gaming machine CC1, when a first ball passing through the passageway reaches the displacement member, the weight of the first ball displaces the displacement member from a predetermined position, and when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball, a second ball following the first ball passes through the part of the displacement member that is lifted upward and is guided to a different path from the first ball, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine CC1, the path through which the second ball is guided through the upwardly lifted portion of the displacement member is formed by a magnetic part that can attract the ball by magnetic force. CC2.

According to the gaming machine CC2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine CC1, the path through which the second ball is guided through the upwardly lifted portion of the displacement member is formed by a magnetic part that can attract the ball by magnetic force. Therefore, it is possible to form a mode in which the ball is dropped in the middle of such a path. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine CC2, the gaming machine CC3 is characterized in that the magnetic part is located above a portion of the displacement member that is lifted upward.

According to the gaming machine CC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CC2, since the magnetic part is located above the portion lifted upward of the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first ball. If this is not the case, even if the second ball passes through a portion that should be lifted upward, it is possible to reliably create a mode in which the second ball is not attracted to the magnetic part.

In the gaming machine CC2 or CC3, the displacement member is rotatably supported, and a portion to which the weight of the first ball is applied and a portion to be lifted upward are located across the rotation axis. The gaming machine CC4 is characterized by the following.

According to gaming machine CC4, in addition to the effects of gaming machines CC2 or CC3, the displacement member is rotatably supported, and the part on which the weight of the first ball acts and the part that is lifted upward are located on either side of the rotation axis, so that when the second ball passes through the part that is lifted upward, the weight of the first ball can be used to make it easier to maintain the part through which the second ball passes in an upwardly lifted state.
<Concept of the invention using lower frames D86b to D8086b as an example>
The gaming machine DA1 is provided with a passageway through which a ball can enter, and a displacement member that is formed to be displaceable and changes the ease with which the ball can enter the passageway, the displacement member being displaced when a ball enters the passageway, thereby changing the ease with which the ball can enter the passageway.

A gaming machine is known that includes a passage into which a ball can enter, and a displacement member that is formed to be displaceable and changes the ease with which a ball can enter the passage (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-124169). This prior document discloses a technique for opening and closing an electric tulip (opening/closing claw 15a). However, the conventional gaming machines described above have a problem in that the games are not sufficiently interesting.

In contrast, with the gaming machine DA1, the displacement member is displaced when a ball enters the passage, changing the ease with which the ball can enter the passage. Therefore, when a first ball enters the passage and it is expected that a second ball will also enter the passage, or conversely, when it is expected that the second ball will not enter the passage when the first ball has entered the passage, it is possible to focus on whether or not the second ball will enter the passage. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

A gaming machine DA2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DA1, the displacement member is displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage when the ball enters the passage.

According to the game machine DA2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine DA1, when a ball enters the passage, the displacement member is displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage. It is possible to make it easier for balls that follow the pitched ball (other balls that have not entered the path, subsequent balls) to enter the path. In other words, if one ball enters the passage, a situation can be created in which the following balls are likely to enter the passage in succession, and if the following ball enters the passage, the following balls Due to the ball entering the path, a state can be created in which the next following ball is likely to enter the path. Therefore, the player can expect that a chain of balls entering the aisle will occur due to the ball entering the aisle. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In gaming machine DA1, gaming machine DA3 is characterized in that, when a ball enters the passageway, the displacement member is displaced to a side that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the passageway.

According to the game machine DA3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine DA1, the displacement member is displaced to the side where it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the passage when a ball enters the passage, so that the first effect is achieved. In a state where the ball has entered the passage, if it is expected that the second ball will not enter the passage, it is possible to make it difficult for the second ball to enter the passage. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine DA4, which is one of the gaming machines DA1 to DA3, is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced to a side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage or to a side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage by utilizing the weight of the ball that has entered the passage.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines DA1 to DA3, the gaming machine DA4 uses the weight of the ball that has entered the passage to displace the displacement member to the side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passage or to the side that makes it harder for the ball to enter the passage, making it unnecessary to use an actuator for driving the displacement member or a sensor for controlling that actuator, thereby reducing product costs.

A gaming machine DA5, which is a gaming machine DA2 or DA3, is provided with a rolling member that allows a ball that has entered the passage to roll and is displaced by the weight of the rolling ball, and a transmission means that transmits the displacement of the rolling member to the displacement member, and the displacement member is displaced to a side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passage or a side that makes it harder for the ball to enter the passage by displacing the rolling member by the weight of the rolling ball and transmitting the displacement of the rolling member by the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine DA5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine DA2 or DA3, the ball that enters the passage can roll, and a rolling member that is displaced by the weight of the rolled ball, and and a transmission means for transmitting the displacement of the rolling member to the displacement member, wherein the displacement member is displaced by the weight of the rolling ball, and the displacement of the rolling member is transmitted by the transmission means. As a result, the ball is displaced to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passageway or to the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passageway, so that while the ball is rolling on the rolling member, the ball is not allowed to enter the passageway. The displacement member can be displaced to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage or to the side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage. That is, it is possible to easily maintain (for a longer period of time) a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the path or a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the path.

A gaming machine DA6 is characterized in that it is equipped with a plurality of the rolling members in the gaming machine DA5.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DA5, gaming machine DA6 is equipped with multiple rolling members, which ensures a section in which the ball can roll (rolling distance), and lengthens the period during which the displacement member is displaced to the side that makes it easier or harder for the ball to enter the passage. In other words, it becomes easier (longer) to maintain a state in which it is easier or harder for the ball to enter the passage.

In the gaming machine DA5 or DA6, the ball that enters the passage is rolled on the rolling member by a downward slope of the rolling member, and the rolling member is rotatably supported, and the ball is rolled. A gaming machine DA7 characterized in that a downward slope of the rolling member in a state in which the ball is moving is smaller than a downward slope of the rolling member in a state in which the ball is not rolling.

According to the gaming machine DA7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines DA5 and DA6, a ball that has entered the passage is caused to roll on the rolling member by the downward inclination of the rolling member, the rolling member is rotatably supported, and the downward inclination of the rolling member when the ball is rolling is made smaller than the downward inclination of the rolling member when the ball is not rolling, so that it is possible to suppress the imparting of momentum to the ball rolling on the rolling member. This makes it possible to lengthen the time it takes for the ball to pass through the rolling member. As a result, it becomes easier (longer) to maintain a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the passage or a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage.

A gaming machine DA8 is one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA7, characterized in that the rolling member returns by its own weight to the state before it was displaced by the weight of the ball.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines DA5 to DA7, the gaming machine DA8 allows the rolling members to return by their own weight to the state they were in before they were displaced by the weight of the ball, eliminating the need for an actuator to drive the rolling members or a sensor to control that actuator, thereby reducing product costs.

A gaming machine DA9 is any one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA8, characterized in that it is provided with an action means that acts on the ball rolling on the rolling member.

According to the game machine DA9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines DA5 to DA8, it is provided with an effect means that acts on the ball rolling on the rolling member, so that it can influence the rolling of the ball. That is, by the action of the action means, resistance can be applied to the rolling of the ball and the rolling speed can be lowered. This increases the time required for the ball to pass through the rolling member. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain (lengthen) a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the path or a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the path.

In the gaming machine DA9, the acting means is formed as a protrusion that protrudes from the inner surface of the passage and extends along the vertical direction, and extends along the rolling direction of the ball rolling on the rolling surface. A gaming machine DA10 is characterized in that a plurality of gaming machines are arranged at predetermined intervals.

According to the game machine DA10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine DA9, the operating means is formed as a protrusion that protrudes from the inner surface of the passage and extends along the vertical direction, and rolls on the rolling surface. A plurality of balls are arranged at predetermined intervals along the rolling direction of the ball, so when the ball rolls on the rolling surface, the protrusions (acting means) come into contact with the ball, causing the ball to By adding resistance to rolling, the rolling speed can be lowered. This increases the time required for the ball to pass through the rolling member. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain (lengthen) a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the path or a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the path.

On the other hand, since the protrusion (acting means) extends in the vertical direction, it is difficult for resistance to be applied to the ball moving in the vertical direction. Therefore, when the ball bounces upward from the rolling surface of the rolling member, the ball can be made to fall quickly downward (to the rolling surface). Therefore, even if the rolling member is displaced upward as the ball bounces upward, the rolling member can be made to quickly return to the state displaced by the weight of the ball. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a malfunction in which the displaced member that has been displaced by the weight of the ball to a side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage is returned to its initial position (the position before the ball entered the passage) by the ball bouncing off the rolling surface.

In the gaming machine DA10, the rolling member is characterized in that the rolling surface on which the ball rolls is formed as a smooth surface that continues smoothly along the rolling direction of the ball.

According to the gaming machine DA11, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine DA10, the rolling member has a rolling surface on which the ball rolls, which is formed as a smooth surface that smoothly continues along the rolling direction of the ball, so that the rolling member has no rolling effect. It is possible to suppress the ball rolling on the moving surface from jumping upward (in the vertical direction). Therefore, the displacement member, which had been displaced by the weight of the ball to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage, returns to its initial position (the position before the ball enters the passage) as the ball bounces off the rolling surface. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects that may be reverted.

Note that the rolling surface does not need to be a flat surface, and may be a surface having undulations (a surface whose cross-sectional shape is formed by smoothly connecting arcs). That is, it is sufficient that the rolling surface does not have a height difference that is at least 1/10 of the diameter of the ball.

A gaming machine DA12, which is a gaming machine DA10 or DA11, is characterized in that the protrusions are formed on the inner surface of the passage on both sides of the rolling surface, and the protrusions on one inner surface and the protrusions on the other inner surface are arranged in a staggered pattern along the rolling surface of the rolling member.

According to gaming machine DA12, in addition to the effects of gaming machine DA10 or DA11, protrusions are formed on both sides of the rolling surface on the inner side of the passage, and the protrusions on one inner side and the protrusions on the other inner side are arranged in a staggered pattern along the rolling surface of the rolling member, making it easier for the ball to come into contact with the protrusions as it rolls on the rolling surface. This makes it possible to lengthen the time it takes for the ball to pass through the rolling member. As a result, it becomes easier (longer) to maintain (for longer) a state in which it is easy for the ball to enter the passage or a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage.

In any of gaming machines DA5 to DA12, the rolling member is rotatably supported, and the ball that enters the passage rolls on the rolling member toward the pivotally supported part. The gaming machine DA13 is characterized by the following.

According to the gaming machine DA13, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA12, the rolling member is rotatably supported, and the ball that enters the passage rolls on the rolling member toward the supported part, so that the displacement of the rolling member can be maximized in the initial stage when the ball rolls on the rolling member. In other words, the displacement of the displacement member to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage can be performed quickly when the ball enters the passage and reaches the rolling member. Therefore, when the distance between the ball that entered the passage and the ball following it (other balls that have not entered the passage, subsequent balls) is relatively small (for example, when both balls flow down in a row), it is possible to make it easier or more difficult for the subsequent ball to enter the passage.

In addition, as the ball continues to roll, the amount of displacement of the rolling member can be gradually reduced. In other words, as the ball continues to roll, the displacement member that was on the side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passage can be gradually displaced toward its initial position (the side that makes it harder for the ball to enter the passage). This changes expectations that the ball will enter the passage, making the game more interesting.

Furthermore, when the ball that enters the passage falls onto a rolling member, the ball must be caught at a position where the amount of displacement of the rolling member is large (a position away from the pivoted part). Can be done. Therefore, the kinetic energy of the dropped ball can be absorbed (consumed) by the displacement of the rolling member, and the ball can be prevented from jumping upward. As a result, the weight of the ball is stably applied to the rolling member, and the state of the displacement member is stabilized (for example, the ball is displaced to the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage or to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage). This can prevent the member from being temporarily displaced.

A gaming machine DA14 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DA13, a ball that enters the passage falls onto the rolling member.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine DA13, the gaming machine DA14 allows the ball that has entered the passage to fall onto the rolling member, and the rolling member can be displaced quickly by utilizing the kinetic energy of the fallen ball. As a result, the displacement member can be quickly displaced to the side where the ball is easier to enter the passage or to the side where the ball is harder to enter the passage. Therefore, even when the distance between the ball that has entered the passage and the ball following it (other balls that have not entered the passage, subsequent balls) is relatively small (for example, when both balls flow down in a row), the following ball can be made easier or harder to enter the passage.

In addition, if a ball that enters a passageway member is dropped onto a member other than the rolling member (a fixed, non-displaceable member), this can easily cause damage to the other member. However, according to the present invention, the kinetic energy of the dropped ball is absorbed (consumed) by displacing the rolling member, preventing damage. Therefore, the freedom of passageway design can be increased to the extent that the ball can be allowed to fall.

A gaming machine DA14 in the gaming machine DA13, wherein the ball rolling on the rolling member is rolled at least to the pivotally supported portion of the rolling member.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DA13, gaming machine DA14 allows the ball rolling on the rolling member to roll at least to the part (rotation axis) where the rolling member is supported, so compared to when the ball is thrown before it reaches the part (rotation axis) where the rolling member is supported, the effect of the inertial force associated with the ball being thrown (the effect of the weight of the ball no longer being acted on) is suppressed, and the rolling member is prevented from flapping in the direction of rotation. This makes it possible to stabilize the state of the displacement member (for example, to suppress the displacement member from being temporarily displaced to a side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passage or to a side that makes it harder for the ball to enter the passage).

In any of the gaming machines DA5 to DA12, the rolling member is rotatably supported, and the ball that enters the passage is rolled in a direction away from the pivotally supported part. A gaming machine DA16 characterized by rolling members.

According to the gaming machine DA16, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines DA5 to DA12, the rolling member is rotatably supported, and the ball that enters the passage is separated from the pivotally supported part. Therefore, when the ball rolls on the rolling member, the displacement of the rolling member is maximized in the latter stage (the stage where the ball has rolled beyond a predetermined amount). It can be done. That is, it is possible to delay the timing at which the displacement member is displaced to the side where it becomes easier for the ball to enter the passageway or to the side where it becomes more difficult for the ball to enter the passageway. Therefore, if the distance between a ball that has entered the path and the ball that follows it (other balls that have not entered the path, or subsequent balls) is relatively large, the following ball It is possible to make it easier for a ball to enter the passageway or to make it harder for the ball to enter the passageway.

Further, as the rolling of the ball progresses, the amount of displacement of the rolling member can be gradually increased. That is, as the rolling of the ball progresses, the displacement member can be gradually displaced toward the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage or the side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage. This changes the expectation that the ball will enter the passageway, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In any of gaming machines DA5 to DA16, when the rolling member is not displaced by the weight of the ball, the displacement member is positioned on the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway or on the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway. A gaming machine DA17 characterized in that displacement to the side where it is difficult to be hit by a ball is regulated.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines DA5 to DA16, gaming machine DA17 restricts the displacement of the displacement member to the side that makes it easier or harder for the ball to enter the passage when the rolling member is not displaced by the weight of the ball, thereby preventing fraudulent acts of forcibly displacing the displacement member to the side that makes it easier or harder for the ball to enter the passage.

In the gaming machine DA17, when the rolling member is not displaced by the weight of the ball, the displacement of the transmission means is regulated by the rolling member, so that the ball is more likely to enter the passage, or A game machine DA18 characterized in that displacement of the displacement member to a side where it becomes difficult for a ball to enter the passageway is restricted.

According to the game machine DA18, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine DA17, when the rolling member is not displaced by the weight of the ball, the displacement of the transmission means is regulated by the rolling member, so that the ball does not flow into the path. Since the displacement of the displacement member to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway or the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passageway is regulated, there is no need to separately provide a component for regulating the forced displacement of the displacement member, and the transmission means can be appropriated. That is, it is possible to simplify the structure for suppressing fraud in which the displacement member is forcibly displaced.

In any of gaming machines DA5 to DA18, a predetermined gap is formed between the rolling member and the transmission means, and the rolling member displaced by the weight of the ball fills the gap. A gaming machine DA19 that is brought into contact with the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine DA19, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines DA5 to DA18, a predetermined gap is formed between the rolling member and the transmission means, and the rolling member displaced by the weight of the ball abuts against the transmission means after filling the gap, so that when the displacement of the rolling member is relatively small, the displacement of the rolling member cannot be transmitted to the displacement member via the transmission means. In other words, in order to displace the displacement member to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage or to the side where it is harder for the ball to enter the passage, it is necessary to form a displacement in the rolling member that exceeds the gap, and therefore it is difficult to succeed in fraudulent acts such as hitting the gaming machine to displace the rolling member or displacing the rolling member with a foreign object such as a wire.
<Concept of the invention using lower frames D86b to D8086b as an example>
A gaming machine having a passageway through which a ball can enter, and a displaceable member that is displaceable and changes the ease with which the ball can enter the passageway,
The gaming machine DB1 is characterized in that the displacement speed of the displacement member is made variable.

A gaming machine is known that has a passageway through which a ball can enter, and a displaceable member that changes the ease with which the ball can enter the passageway (JP Patent Publication 2017-124169). This prior document discloses technology for opening and closing an electric tulip (opening/closing claw 15a). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that the entertainment value of the game is insufficient.

In contrast, with the DB1 gaming machine, the displacement speed of the displacement member is made variable, so the rate at which the ball's likelihood of entering the passage changes can be changed. As a result, the entertainment value of the game can be improved.

Gaming machine DB2 is characterized in that the displacement member in DB1 is displaced faster toward the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage than toward the side where it is harder for the ball to enter the passage.

According to gaming machine DB2, in addition to the effects of gaming machine DB1, the displacement member is faster in displacement to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage than in displacement to the side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage, so that a state where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage is quickly created, and a well-paced presentation can be provided for players hoping for the ball to enter the passage. Also, by relatively slowing down the displacement speed to the side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passage, a period of time where it is easier for the ball to enter the passage is secured, and players hoping for the ball to enter the passage can focus on whether or not the ball will enter the passage in time. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

The gaming machine DB1 is characterized in that the displacement speed of the displacement member toward a side where it is easier for a ball to enter the passageway is slower than the displacement speed toward a side where it is more difficult for a ball to enter the passageway. A gaming machine DB3.

According to the gaming machine DB3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine DB1, the displacement member has a displacement speed in the direction where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway and a displacement velocity in the direction where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passageway. Since the ball enters the passageway more easily, the players who expect the ball to enter the passageway can gradually increase their expectations for the ball to enter the passageway. Furthermore, it is possible to quickly create a state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the passageway, and to provide a fast-paced performance for players who expect the ball to enter the passageway. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

In any of gaming machines DB1 to DB3, the displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball entered into the passageway to move the ball to a side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway or a side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway. Game machine DB4 is characterized in that it is displaced to the side where it becomes difficult.

According to the game machine DB4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines DB1 to DB3, the displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball that enters the passage to move the ball to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage. Since the ball is displaced to the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage, an actuator for driving the displacement member and a sensor for controlling the actuator are not required, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.
<About the concept of the invention using lower frames D86b to D8086b as an example>
A gaming machine comprising a passage into which a ball can enter, and a displacement member that is displaceably formed and changes the ease with which a ball enters the passage,
comprising a plurality of the displacement members;
The gaming machine DC1 is characterized in that one of the plurality of displacement members has a different displacement mode from the other displacement members.

A gaming machine is known that includes a passage into which a ball can enter, and a displacement member that is formed to be displaceable and changes the ease with which a ball can enter the passage (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-124169). This prior document discloses a technique for opening and closing an electric tulip (opening/closing claw 15a). However, the conventional gaming machines described above have a problem in that the games are not sufficiently interesting.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine DC1, it includes a plurality of displacement members, and one of the plurality of displacement members has a different displacement manner from other displacement members in the passage, so that the displacement manner of the plurality of displacement members is different from that of the other displacement members in the passage. By combining these, it is possible to greatly change the ease with which the ball enters the path. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

Examples of the displacement mode include the timing at which the displacement begins, the displacement direction, the displacement speed, and combinations of these.

In the gaming machine DC1, the gaming machine DC2 is characterized in that the displacement of the one displacement member is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the displacement of the other displacement member was started.

In addition to the effects of the game machine DC1, the game machine DC2 has the advantage that the start of the displacement of one displacement member occurs after the start of the displacement of the other displacement member and a predetermined time has elapsed, so that the position at which the ease of the ball entering the passage is changed can be varied, as well as the timing. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

A gaming machine DC3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DC1 or DC2, it has an upstream passage that allows the balls to flow down the passage, and the displacement direction of the displacement member is approximately parallel to the rolling direction of the balls in the upstream passage.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine DC1 or DC2, gaming machine DC3 is equipped with an upstream passage that allows the ball to flow down the passage, and the displacement direction of the displacement member is approximately parallel to the rolling direction of the ball in the upstream passage, so that the rolling direction and rolling position of the ball rolling in the upstream passage and the displacement direction and displacement position of the displacement member can be related to the ease of the ball entering the passage. As a result, the interest of the game can be increased.

In any of gaming machines DC1 to DC3, the displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball entered into the passageway to move the ball to a side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway or a side where the ball is more likely to enter the passageway. Gaming machine DC4 is characterized in that it is displaced to the side where it becomes difficult.

According to the game machine DC4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines DC1 to DC3, the displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball that enters the passage to move the ball to the side or side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage. Since the ball is displaced to the side where it is difficult for the ball to enter the passage, an actuator for driving the displacement member and a sensor for controlling the actuator are not required, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.
<About the concept of the invention using lower frames D86b to D8086b as an example>
A gaming machine comprising a passage into which a ball can enter, and a displacement member that is displaceably formed and changes the ease with which a ball enters the passage,
comprising a rolling member configured to allow a ball entered into the passage to roll;
The displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member to be displaced to a side where it becomes easier for the ball to enter the passageway or a side where it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the passageway,
The gaming machine DD1 is characterized in that the rolling member is formed such that the ball can fall in the middle of the ball's rolling path.

A gaming machine is known that has a passageway through which a ball can enter, and a displaceable member that changes the ease with which the ball can enter the passageway (JP Patent Publication 2017-124169). This prior document discloses technology for opening and closing an electric tulip (opening and closing claw 15a). However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem in that the entertainment value of the game is insufficient.

In contrast, gaming machine DD1 is equipped with a rolling member that is formed so that a ball that has entered the passage can roll, and the displacement member is displaced to a side that makes it easier for the ball to enter the passage or a side that makes it harder for the ball to enter the passage by utilizing the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member, and since the rolling member is formed so that the ball can fall midway along its rolling path, the period during which the weight of the ball can be utilized can be changed depending on the distance the ball rolls along its rolling path. In other words, the ease with which the ball can enter the passage can be changed depending on the state of the ball rolling on the rolling member. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be increased.

In the game machine DD1, the game machine DA2 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced to a side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage by utilizing the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member.

According to the game machine DD2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine DD1, the displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member to be displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage. While the ball that has entered the passage rolls on the rolling member, it is possible to make it easier for the balls following the ball (other balls that have not entered the passage, subsequent balls) to enter the passage.

That is, when one ball enters the passage and while that ball is rolling on the rolling member, a state can be created in which the trailing ball easily enters the passage, and the trailing ball enters the passage. If the ball enters and rolls on the rolling member, a state can be created in which the next trailing ball is likely to enter the passage. Therefore, the player can expect that a chain of balls entering the aisle will occur due to the ball entering the aisle. On the other hand, if a ball that has entered the passage is dropped midway through the rolling path of the rolling member, the weight of the ball cannot be utilized, making it impossible to create a condition that makes it easier for the following ball to enter the passage. . This allows the player to pay attention to the rolling state of the ball (whether or not it can reach the end of the rolling path). As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

A gaming machine DD3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DD1, it is provided with a dropping means that makes it easier for the rolling balls to drop from the rolling member when a predetermined number or more of balls roll on the rolling member.

According to the game machine DD3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine DD1, when a predetermined number or more of balls roll on the rolling member, it is equipped with a falling means that makes it easier for the rolling balls to fall from the rolling member. In a state where the ball is rolling on the rolling member, the player can pay attention to whether or not another ball will further flow down into the passage. As a result, the interest in the game can be improved.

The displacement member in gaming machine DD3 may be displaced to the side where it is easier for the ball to enter the passageway, using the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member, or may be displaced to the side where it is more difficult for the ball to enter the passageway. In the former case, when a ball is rolling on the rolling member, there is a high possibility that another ball will flow further down the passageway, making it easier for the player to pay attention to the direction of the other ball whether it will flow down the passageway or not. In the latter case, when a ball is rolling on the rolling member, there is a low possibility that another ball will flow further down the passageway, giving the player a sense of security.

Gaming machine DD4 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine DD2 or DD3, a drop passage through which balls that fall midway along the rolling path of the rolling member pass, and balls that pass through the drop passage are given more favorable game conditions than balls that pass through the passage.

Gaming machine DD4 has the same effects as gaming machines DD2 and DD3, but also has a drop passage through which balls that fall along the rolling path of the rolling members pass, and balls that pass through the drop passage are given more favorable game conditions than balls that pass through the passage, so that players can pay more attention to whether or not the ball will fall along the rolling path of the rolling members. As a result, the interest in the game can be increased.

Gaming machine Z1 is a slot machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, F1 to F11, CA1 to CA26, CB1 to CB4, CC1 to CC4, and DA1 to DD4. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then displaying the identification information in a definite manner, and equipped with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to a player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (a stop button) or by the passage of a predetermined time, and the necessary condition being that the determined identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins and medals.

Gaming machine Z2 is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, F1 to F11, CA1 to CA26, CB1 to CB4, CC1 to CC4, and DA1 to DD4. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined play area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the play area. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) located at a specific position within the game area opens in a specific manner, allowing balls to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) is awarded according to the number of winning balls.

Gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that in any of gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B12, C1 to C13, XA1, XB1, D1 to D10, E1 to E12, F1 to F11, CA1 to CA26, CB1 to CB4, CC1 to CC4 and DA1 to DD4, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the combined gaming machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, a gaming machine equipped with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped by the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever) and stopped by the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, the definitive identification information at the time of stopping being a specific identification information as a necessary condition, the gaming machine using balls as gaming media, requiring a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the identification information, and configured to pay out a large number of balls when the special gaming state is generated."

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
13 Game board (part of area configuration means)
65b Opening/closing plate (introduction means, acceptance state changing means, part of avoidance means)
86 Center frame (open part)
141 Previous design member (part of partition means, avoidance means)
163b Ball passage hole (first receiving means, second receiving means)
312 Opening (second predetermined part, ball receiving part)
317 Front-rear long protrusion (part of the first flow path, part of the protrusion, second protrusion, part of the state switching means)
318 Left and right inner protrusions (part of branching means, part of protrusions, first protrusions, part of state switching means)
319 Left and right external protrusions (part of the second flow path, part of the state switching means)
310 Upper member (part of path configuration means)
330 Medium member (part of delay means, part of route construction means)
334 First flow path configuration section (part of path configuration means, front and rear flow path sections)
335 Second flow path configuration part (predetermined part, part of path configuration means, left/right direction path)
336 Third flow path configuration section (part of path configuration means, front-back direction path, front-back flow path section)
351 Light emitting means 370 Slide displacement member (part of branching means, switching means, part of state switching means)
380 Lower member (part of route configuration means)
600 First operation unit (displacement means)
616 Guide slot (support means)
616a Straight part (part of support means, first range, restriction part)
616b Curved part (part of support means, second range, restriction part)
620 Rotating member (displacement means)
640 Supported member (part of arrangement means)
642 Cylindrical part (first part)
652 Front rotating member (supported means)
652b Overhang decoration part (part of auxiliary means)
660 Second decorative rotating member (attitude changing means)
661a 1st production surface (1st visible surface, 1st surface)
661b Second production surface (second visible surface, second surface)
670 Decorative fixing member (part of auxiliary means)
700 Second operation unit (displacement means)
787a1 First main decorative surface (part of the first visible surface)
787a2 First secondary decorative surface (part of second visible surface)
787b1 Second main decorative surface (part of the first visible surface)
787b2 Second secondary decorative surface (part of second visible surface)
800 Third operation unit (displacement means, second displacement means)
813 Detection sensor (detection means)
823b Outside light emitting section (light emitting means)
840 Outer rotating member (part of gathering part)
866 Torque limiter (release means)
870 First decorative member (first displacement member, second displacement member)
875 First covered part (part of visible surface)
880 Second decorative member (first displacement member, second displacement member)
885 Second covered part (part of visible surface)
C1 Color (part of arrangement means, second part)
C2 Dish-shaped lid part (part of the arrangement means, second part)
P1 Ball (part of displaceable means)
SE11 Definite change detection sensor (part of passing means)
SE12 Normal detection sensor (part of the passing means)
C13 Game board C60 Base board (game board)
C60a Opening C122, C2122, C4122 Lower bottom part (reciprocating surface, first passage)
C122a Outflow surface (outflow part)
C123a, C4123a Notch part (inflow part)
C130, C2130 Back member (base member)
C140, C2140 First intermediate member (base member)
C142, C2142 Bottom part (upstream surface, second passage)
C144, C2144 Passage section (first passage)
C170, C2170, C3170 Distribution member (displacement member, main body)
C172, C2172 Receiving part (first side)
C172b, C2172b Bottom part (first side)
C173, C2173 Rolling part (second surface)
C2174 Axis C190 Decorative member (weight part)
C192 Axis C2300 Magnet (adsorption member)
C2400, C5400 Magnetic part (adsorption member, bottom surface forming member)
COPin, COP2000in Inlet (inflow part)
CRt2 2nd passage (first passage)
CRt3 3rd passage (second passage)
CRt4 4th aisle (1st aisle)
CRt5 5th aisle (second aisle)
CRt2001 1st aisle (1st aisle)
CRt2002 2nd passage (2nd passage)
CRt2003 3rd aisle (1st aisle)
CRt2004 4th aisle (2nd aisle)
CRt2005 5th aisle (2nd aisle)
CB1 ball (first ball)
CB2 ball (second ball)
D13 Game board (gaming machine)
D131f Projection (acting means, projection)
D131fa 2nd protrusion (dropping means)
D141g Projection (acting means, projection)
D170, D3170, D8170 Rolling member D180 Displacement member D190, D2190, D3190, D5190, D7190 Transmission member (transmission means)
D4220 Second rolling member (rolling member)
DRt3 3rd passage (upstream passage)
DRt6 6th aisle (aisle)
DRt9 9th passage (fall passage)

Claims (3)

A gaming machine comprising a passage into which a ball can enter, and a displacement member that is displaceably formed and changes the ease with which a ball enters the passage,
comprising a rolling member configured to allow a ball entered into the passage to roll;
The displacement member utilizes the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member to be displaced to a side where it becomes easier for the ball to enter the passageway or a side where it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the passageway,
A game machine characterized in that the rolling member is formed so that the ball can fall in the middle of the ball's rolling path. The gaming machine according to claim 1, characterized in that the displacement member is displaced to the side where the ball is more likely to enter the passage by utilizing the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling member. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that it is provided with a drop means for making it easier for the rolling balls to drop from the rolling member when a predetermined number or more of balls roll on the rolling member.

Images